IBM TS3100 TS3200 3573 L2U Manual User Guide

IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200
Tape Library
Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Machine Type 3573
GA32-0545-13
IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200

Tape Library
Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Machine Type 3573
GA32-0545-13
Note!
Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read the general information under "Notices" in the
IBM System Storage TS3100 and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide.
To ensure that you have the latest publications, visit the web at http://www.ibm.com/storage/.
This edition applies to the IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and
Service Guide, GA32-0545-13, and to the subsequent releases and modifications until otherwise indicated in new
editions.
Copyright IBM Corporation 2007, 2013.
US Government Users Restricted Rights Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract
with IBM Corp.
Read this first

This product might not be certified in your country for connection by any means
whatsoever to interfaces of public telecommunications networks. Further
certification might be required by law before making any such connection.
Contact IBM for information.
Minimum firmware levels for common library features

Table 1. Minimum firmware levels for common library features
Feature
Minimum Firmware Level(s) Required
Internet Protocol Security (IPsec)
Library firmware must be greater than A.40
Feature Codes 8049, 8148, and 8149 (LTO

HH Tape Drives)
Library firmware level must be at A.40, or

greater, to support Feature Codes 8049, 8148,
and 8149 (LTO HH Tape Drives).
LTO 6 Tape Drive
Library firmware must be at B.50 or greater

to support the Ultrium 6 drives. Ensure the
minimum version required to support
Ultrium 6 tape drives are installed on the
host. Ensure that any host applications and
software using their own device drivers are
at the minimum level required to support
Ultrium 6 tape drives.
LTO 5 Tape Drive
Library firmware must be at 9.00, or greater,

to support the Ultrium 5 drives. If using the
IBM Tape Device Driver or ITDT (IBM Tape
Diagnostic Tool), ensure the minimum
version required to support Ultrium 5 tape
drives are installed on the host. Ensure that
any host applications and software using
their own device drivers are at the minimum
level required to support Ultrium 5 tape
drives.
Library BCR (Bar Code Reader)
Libraries manufactured after May 2010 may

have a BCR that requires a minimum level
of library firmware. The minimum level of
firmware for these libraries is 9.00. Attempts
to downlevel these libraries below 9.00 will
be blocked by the library.
Dedicated Cleaning Slot removal
Library firmware level must be greater than

1.95.
Encryption
Library firmware level must be 4.0 or

greater.
Drive firmware level must be 74H4 or
greater.
Key Path Diagnostics
Copyright IBM Corp. 2007, 2013
Library firmware level must be greater than

6.3.
iii
Table 1. Minimum firmware levels for common library features (continued)

Feature
Minimum Firmware Level(s) Required
Path Failover (for one activation key for

both Control Path Failover and Data Path
Failover)
LTO 4 Tape Drives: No minimum level of

firmware is required.
LTO 3 Tape Drives: Drive firmware must be
greater than 73P5.
Library firmware levels greater than 1.95,
but not greater than 8.xx support Path
Failover on the TS3200 (3573-L4U) and Full
High drives. Library firmware levels greater
than 8.xx support Path Failover on the
TS3100 and TS3200 (3573-L2U and
3573-L4U) for both Full High and Half High
drives.
Secure Socket Layer (SSL) over Encryption

Key Manager (EKM)
Library firmware must be 6.3 or higher
Accessing online technical support

For online Technical Support for your library, visithttp://www.ibm.com/support/
Registering for My Notification

My Notification registration provides email notification when new firmware levels
are updated and available for download and installation. To register for My
Notification:
1. Visit the web at: http://www-01.ibm.com/software/support/einfo.html.
2. Click My Notifications.
Note: Library firmware and tape drive firmware are verified and released together.
When you are updating to the latest firmware, verify that all installed
components such as tape drives and library firmware are at the latest levels
noted on the Support website. Mixing different levels of library and tape
drive firmware is not supported and might cause unpredictable results.
Sending us your comments

Your feedback is important in helping IBM provide accurate and useful
information. If you have comments or suggestions for improving this publication,
send your comments by:
v Emailing IBM:
Internet or IBMLink from US: starpubs@us.ibm.com
IBMLink from Canada: STARPUBS at TORIBM
Include the following information in your email:
Exact publication title
Form number (for example, GA32123402) or part number (on the back
cover of the publication)
Page, table, or illustration numbers that you are commenting on
A detailed description of any information that should be changed
iv
TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Contacting IBM technical support

In the US: Call 1-800-IBM_SERV (1-800-426-7378).
Note: Before calling, complete all the steps in "Contacting IBM Technical Support"
in chapter 9.
All other Countries/Regions: Visit http://www.ibm.com.
To open a Service Request online: Under Support & downloads, click Open a
service request.
Read this first
vi
Summary of changes
Table 2. Information added to the GA32-0545-13 edition
v Added a note in the Verifying Shipments section to refer new users to the "Install
Drives" section if they need to install drives into their driveless chassis.
v Updated the Configure Library: Network graphic to show Primary and Secondary IP
addresses for IPv4 and IPv6.
v Support for LTO 6
Specifications for Ultrium 6 drives
v Support for IPsec protocol
IPsec configuration menu added to Web User interface
Menu includes IPsec settings, IPsec policy, IKE settings, and ICMPv6 selectors
New Ultrium Half High drives:
v Feature Code 8148 - Ultrium 4 HH Fibre Drive V2
8Gb/s Fibre Channel, singe port
v Feature Code 8149 - Ultrium 4 HH SS Drive V2
6Gb/s SAS, dual port
v Feature Code 8049 - Ultrium 3 HH SAS Drive V2
6Gb/s SAS, dual port
vii

v Ultrium 5 Full High drives:
8 Gb/s Fibre Channel - single port
6 Gb/s Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) - dual port
v Ultrium 5 Half High drives:
8 Gb/s Fibre Channel - single port
6 Gb/s SAS - dual port
v Ultrium 5 media:
1500 GB data capacity
3000 GB data capacity with 2:1 compression
v Path Failover feature enhancements:
Support for Half High drives
Support for TS3100 (3573-L2U)
v Audit Logging
The Configure Library SNMP web page includes the option to enable Audit Logging.
When SNMP and Audit Logging are enabled, the library will send a trap for library
and drive Configuration Change events.
v Updated SNMP MIB information
Configuration Change events
Library Login events
Library Logout events
viii
Contents
Read this first . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Minimum firmware levels for common
features . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessing online technical support . .
Registering for My Notification . . .
Sending us your comments . . . .
Contacting IBM technical support . .
library
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
iii
iv
iv
iv
. v
Summary of changes . . . . . . . . vii

Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Safety and environmental notices . . . xix
Safety notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Possible safety hazards . . . . . . . . . . xx
Class I laser product . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Performing the safety inspection procedure . . . xxi
Rack safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii
Power Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv
Cautions and regulatory compliance statements for
NEBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii
Chapter 1. Product description . . . . 1-1
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bar code reader . . . . . . . . . . .
Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supported Internet Protocols . . . . . .
SNMP messaging . . . . . . . . . .
SNMP traps . . . . . . . . . . .
Maximum library storage capacity and data
transfer rate . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ultrium tape drives . . . . . . . . .
Speed matching. . . . . . . . . .
Channel calibration . . . . . . . .
Power management . . . . . . . .
Media . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Library specifications . . . . . . . .
Product environment . . . . . . . .
Supported servers, operating systems, and
software . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supported device drivers . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1-1
1-3
1-5
1-5
1-6
1-6
1-6
.
.
.
.
. 1-6
. 1-8
. 1-9
. 1-9
. 1-10
. 1-10
. 1-11
. 1-13
.
.
. 1-13
. 1-14
Chapter 2. User interfaces . . . . . . 2-1

Operator Control Panel . . . . .
Operator Control Panel philosophy
Power-ON display . . . . . .
Note about the front panel LEDs .
Input modes . . . . . . . .
Power ON/OFF . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-1
2-1
2-2
2-2
2-4
2-4
Web User Interface. . . . . . . .

Login . . . . . . . . . . .
System status . . . . . . . .
Web User Interface Help pages . .
Logging out of the Web User Interface
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
Chapter 3. Installation planning . . . . 3-1

Determining the number of logical libraries
(partitions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Basic guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Library sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Multiple logical libraries for library sharing . . 3-2
Multiple control paths . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Multiple control paths for System i, iSeries, and
AS/400 attachment . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Multiple control paths for path failover . . . . 3-2
Library partitioning and element addressing . . . 3-3
Persistent binding to ensure SCSI ID assignment 3-7
Logical unit number (LUN) scanning . . . . . 3-7
Host interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
SCSI interface . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
SAS interface . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Fibre Channel interface . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Chapter 4. Installation and

configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
The Library Configuration Form . . . . . .
Installing your library . . . . . . . . .
Choosing a location . . . . . . . . .
Unpacking the library . . . . . . . .
Verifying the shipment . . . . . . . .
Installing the library foot pads (desktop
installation) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing and storing the shipping lock . .
Rackmounting the library (rack installation) .
Connecting the host interface cable . . . .
Connecting a power cord . . . . . . .
Configuring your library . . . . . . . .
Choosing your configuration method . . .
Choosing factory defaults for your library
configuration . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring your library with the Web User
Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring your library with the Operator
Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing the host . . . . . . . . . .
Verifying the connection . . . . . . . .
Cartridge magazines . . . . . . . . . .
Populating the library with data cartridges .
Inserting the cleaning cartridge . . . . .
Registering for My Notification . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
4-1
4-1
4-2
4-2
4-3
. 4-3
. 4-4
. 4-5
. 4-14
. 4-17
. 4-17
. 4-18
. 4-18
. 4-18
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-35
4-36
4-36
4-37
4-41
4-42
4-43
Chapter 5. Operations . . . . . . . . 5-1

Operator Control Panel navigation .
Operator Control Panel menu tree .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 5-7
. 5-9
ix
Monitor menu . . . . . . . . . . .
Control menu . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure menu . . . . . . . . . .
Service menu . . . . . . . . . . .
Web User Interface menus . . . . . . . .
Monitor Library menu . . . . . . . .
Manage Library menu . . . . . . . .
Configure Library menu . . . . . . .
Service Library menu . . . . . . . .
Import and export media during normal library
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring I/O stations and reserving slots .
Chapter 6. Ultrium media
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 5-78
. 5-79
. . . . . . 6-1
Data cartridges . . . . . . . . . . .
Cartridge compatibility . . . . . . .
Capacity scaling . . . . . . . . .
WORM (Write Once, Read Many) cartridges .
WORM media . . . . . . . . . .
Data security on WORM media . . . .
WORM media errors . . . . . . . .
WORM requirements . . . . . . . .
Cleaning cartridge . . . . . . . . . .
Cartridge memory chip (LTO-CM) . . . .
Bar code label . . . . . . . . . . .
Guidelines for bar code labels . . . . .
Write-Protect switch . . . . . . . . .
Handling the cartridges . . . . . . . .
Providing training . . . . . . . . .
Ensuring proper packaging . . . . . .
Proper acclimation and environmental
conditions . . . . . . . . . . .
Completing a thorough inspection . . .
Handling the cartridge carefully . . . .
Examples of cartridge problems . . . .
Repositioning or reattaching a leader pin . .
Repositioning a leader pin . . . . . .
Reattaching a Leader Pin . . . . . .
Environmental and shipping specifications for
tape cartridges. . . . . . . . . . .
Disposing of tape cartridges . . . . . .
Ordering media supplies . . . . . . .
Ordering bar code labels . . . . . .
Chapter 7. Troubleshooting
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6-1
6-3
6-3
6-3
6-3
6-4
6-4
6-4
6-4
6-5
6-5
6-7
6-7
6-8
6-8
6-9
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6-10
6-10
6-11
6-11
6-12
6-12
6-14
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6-18
6-19
6-20
6-22
. . . . . 7-1
Installation problems . . . . . . . . . .
Library recovery problem determination . . .
Procedures for isolating CRU problems . . . .
Isolating a power supply problem . . . .
Isolating drive sled problems . . . . . .
Isolating a library controller card versus
accessor enclosure problem . . . . . .
Isolating Web User Interface problems . . .
Isolating accessor scanner problems. . . .
Isolating host attachment interface problems
Identifying a suspect cartridge . . . . . .
5-10
5-16
5-18
5-29
5-32
5-33
5-42
5-44
5-69
. 7-7
. 7-7
. 7-8
. 7-8
. 7-10
. 7-11
. 7-12
. 7-13
7-13
. 7-14
Chapter 8. Error codes
. . . . . . . 8-1
Chapter 9. Service procedures . . . . 9-1

Removing cartridges from magazine slots . .
Releasing the magazines manually . . . .
IBM TotalStorage Tape Diagnostic tool (ITDT)
Contacting IBM technical support. . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
9-1
9-1
9-3
9-4
Chapter 10. Check, adjust, remove,

and replace . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Electrostatic discharge . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Relocating your library . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Removing/installing/adding a tape drive sled
10-3
Removing a tape drive sled . . . . . . . 10-4
Installing a tape drive sled. . . . . . . . 10-5
Adding a tape drive sled . . . . . . . . 10-8
Removing the slot blocker - 2U library. . . . . 10-9
Replacing a power supply . . . . . . . . 10-10
Replacing a library controller card . . . . . . 10-11
Replacing cartridge magazines . . . . . . . 10-13
Replacing magazine fiducials . . . . . . . 10-13
Replacing the library enclosure . . . . . . . 10-14
Preparing the defective library for replacement 10-14
Unpacking and preparing the replacement
library enclosure. . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Installing your drive in the replacement
Swapping power supplies . . . . . . . 10-19
Swapping library controller cards . . . . . 10-21
Swapping cartridge magazines . . . . . . 10-23
Installing the replacement library enclosure
10-25
Completing the installation of the replacement
Returning the defective library enclosure
10-27
Chapter 11. Optional features,

replacement parts and power cords . 11-1
Appendix A. Information for trained
service personnel . . . . . . . . . A-1
Internal view of library . . . . . . . . .
Manual cartridge removal procedure . . . .
Recommended tools . . . . . . . . . .
Before you begin . . . . . . . . . . .
Beginning procedure . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the drive brick from the sled . .
Removing the drive cover . . . . . . .
Full-high drive: Tape spooled off supply reel . .
Half-high drive: Tape spooled off supply reel
Full-high drive: Tape pulled from or broken near
leader pin . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Half-high drive: Tape pulled from or broken
near leader pin . . . . . . . . . .
Full-high drive: Tape broken in mid-tape. . .
Half-high drive: Tape broken in mid-tape .
Full-high drive: Tape tangled along tape path
Half-high drive: Tape tangled along tape path
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
A-1
A-2
A-2
A-2
A-3
A-3
A-6
A-7
A-8
. A-9
. A-11
. A-13
. A-14
A-15
A-18
Full-high drive: No apparent failure or damage to

tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Half-high drive: No apparent failure or
damage to tape . . . . . . . . . . .
Ending procedure . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessing the library with Telnet . . . . . .
A-19
Appendix F. SNMP status MIB

variables and traps . . . . . . . . . F-1
A-22
A-25
A-25
Appendix G. Library Configuration

Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
Appendix B. SCSI element types, SCSI

addresses, and physical
configurations . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
2U library I/O slot, storage slots, drive slot
element addresses, and physical locations . .
4U library I/O slots, storage slots, drive slots
element addresses, and physical locations . .
Library partitioning and element addressing .
. B-1
.
.
. B-2
. B-3
Appendix C. TapeAlert flags . . . . . C-1

TapeAlert flags supported by the library .
TapeAlert flags supported by the drive . .
.
.
.
.
. C-1
. C-3
Appendix D. Sense data . . . . . . . D-1

Library sense data.
Drive sense data .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. D-1
. D-7
Appendix E. Message retrieval at the

host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
Retrieving from an IBM System p or IBM Power
system with AIX . . . . . . . . . . .
SCSI sense data definition . . . . . . .
SCSI sense data - library error . . . . . .
SCSI sense data - drive error . . . . . .
Retrieving from a Sun system . . . . . . .
Retrieving from an HP-UX system . . . . .
Retrieving from an IBM System i or IBM Power
system with IBM i OS . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
E-1
E-2
E-2
E-3
E-4
E-5
. E-5
Appendix H. Accessibility . . . . . . H-1

Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Emission Notices . . . . . . . . .
Federal Communications Commission statement
Industry Canada compliance statement . . . .
European Union Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
People's Republic of China Class A Electronic
Emission statement. . . . . . . . . . .
Taiwan Class A compliance statement . . . .
Taiwan contact information . . . . . . . .
Japan VCCI Council Class A statement . . . .
Japan Electronics and Information Technology
Industries Association (JEITA) Statement (less
than or equal to 20 A per phase) . . . . . .
Japan Electronics and Information Technology
Industries Association (JEITA) Statement (greater
than 20 A per phase) . . . . . . . . . .
Korean Communications Commission (KCC)
Class A Statement . . . . . . . . . . .
Russia Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Class
A Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glossary
I-3
I-4
I-4
I-4
I-4
I-6
I-6
I-6
I-7
I-7
I-7
I-7
I-8
. . . . . . . . . . . . . J-1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-1
Contents
xi
xii
Figures
1-1.
1-2.
1-3.
1-4.
1-5.
1-6.
1-7.
2-1.
2-2.
2-3.
2-4.
2-5.
2-6.
3-1.
3-2.
3-3.
3-4.
3-5.
4-1.
4-2.
4-3.
4-4.
4-5.
4-6.
4-7.
4-8.
4-9.
4-10.
4-11.
4-12.
4-13.
4-14.
4-15.
4-16.
4-17.
4-18.
Front panel of a 2U library . . . . . . 1-1

Front panel of a 4U library . . . . . . 1-1
Rear panel (drive sled only) of a half high
Fibre Channel drive . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Rear panel of a 4U library with full high
Fibre Channel drive and half high SAS
drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Rear panel of a 2U library with a full high
dual port SAS drive . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Library drive sled without ESD springs
(SCSI sled shown) . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Library drive sled with ESD springs [1]
(SAS sled shown) . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Power-ON screens . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Web User Interface login page . . . . . 2-6
2U library System status screen . . . . . 2-6
4U library System status screen . . . . . 2-6
4U library System status screen that is
showing media attention status . . . . . 2-7
4U library System status screen that is
showing a power supply failure . . . . . 2-7
Configuration of a one - partition system
3-4
Configuration of a two - partition system
3-5
Configuration of a three - partition system
3-5
Configuration of a four - partition system
3-6
Examples of SCSI element addressing
3-6
Installing foot pads on the bottom of the
library enclosure . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Shipping lock and label . . . . . . . 4-5
Library shipping lock and label storage
location . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Rack Kit A mounting hardware . . . . . 4-6
Rack Kit B mounting hardware . . . . . 4-7
Examples of EIA units for round hole and
square hole installations . . . . . . . 4-8
Rear view of Rack Kit A, which shows the
narrow part of the rail at the rear of the
rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Rear view of Rack Kit B shows a different
mounting method . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Kit A (top picture with circles) showing
rails installed. Rack Kit B is below showing
the front view of this kit installed. . . . 4-10
2U library rack anchors and mounting
brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Close-up view of mounting of the anchors
on both sides of the library . . . . . . 4-11
2U library side screws to remove
4-12
Sliding the 2U library into the rack
4-12
Sliding the 4U library into the rack
4-13
Securing the 2U library to the rack
4-13
Securing the 4U library to the rack
4-14
Attaching a SCSI host interface cable to the
2U library . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Attaching host interface cables to the 4U
library . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4-19.
4-20.
4-21.
4-22.
4-23.
4-24.
4-25.
4-26.
4-27.
4-28.
4-29.
4-30.
4-31.
4-32.
4-33.
4-34.
4-35.
4-36.
4-37.
4-38.
4-39.
4-40.
4-41.
4-42.
4-43.
4-44.
5-1.
5-2.
5-3.
5-4.
5-5.
5-6.
5-7.
5-8.
5-9.
5-10.
5-11.
5-12.
5-13.
5-14.
5-15.
5-16.
Attaching a SAS interface cable to the 2U

library . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Interposer installation . . . . . . . . 4-16
Removing the protective label from the
power receptacle . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Log in screen on the Web User Interface
4-21
The 2U library Configure Library: General
screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Example: The 4U library Configure
Library: General screen . . . . . . . 4-24
The 4U library Configure Library: Logical
Libraries page . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
The Configure Library: Path failover
feature activation screen . . . . . . . 4-25
Feature key verification screen . . . . . 4-25
Feature activation key screen . . . . . 4-27
Configure Library: Encryption Activation
screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
The Configure Library: Drives screen
4-29
Configure Library: Network page
4-29
Warning screen . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
The Configure Library: User Access screen 4-31
The Configure Library: Date and Time
screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
The Configure Library: Logs and Traces
screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
The Configure Library: Email notification
screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Configure Library: SNMP page
4-34
2U library left magazine . . . . . . . 4-37
2U library right magazine . . . . . . 4-38
2U library I/O station in the left magazine 4-39
4U library left magazines. . . . . . . 4-39
4U library right magazines . . . . . . 4-40
4U library I/O station in the lower left
magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Finger Holes on back side of 4U Library
I/O station . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
2U library control keys . . . . . . . . 5-8
4U library control keys . . . . . . . . 5-8
Operator Control Panel menu tree
5-10
Monitor: Library menu . . . . . . . 5-11
Monitor: Drive menu . . . . . . . . 5-13
Example of a 4U Monitor: Inventory menu 5-15
Overview of inventoried cartridges: Left
magazines of a 4U Library . . . . . . 5-15
Detailed information on cartridges residing
in a magazine . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Control: I/O station menu . . . . . . 5-16
Control: Move Cartridges menu
5-17
Control: Magazine menu . . . . . . . 5-17
Control: Re-Inventory menu. . . . . . 5-18
Configure: Logical Libraries menu
5-19
Configure: Library menu . . . . . . . 5-20
Configure: Drive menu . . . . . . . 5-23
Configure: Network menu . . . . . . 5-24
xiii
5-17.
5-18.
5-19.
5-20.
5-21.
5-22.
5-23.
5-24.
5-25.
5-26.
5-27.
5-28.
5-29.
5-30.
5-31.
5-32.
5-33.
5-34.
5-35.
5-36.
5-37.
5-38.
5-39.
5-40.
5-41.
5-42.
5-43.
5-44.
5-45.
5-46.
5-47.
5-48.
5-49.
5-50.
5-51.
5-52.
5-53.
xiv
Configure: Set Access PIN menu

Pound sign (#) shows accessible menus
when access PIN is enabled but before it is
entered. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure: Save/Restore menu . . . . .
Configure: Set Date and Time menu
Configure: Path failover . . . . . . .
Service: Library Verify menu . . . . .
Service: Run Tests menu . . . . . . .
Service: Service menu . . . . . . . .
Service: Display Contrast menu
The 4U library Monitor Library: Library
Identity page . . . . . . . . . . .
The 4U library Monitor Library: Drive
Identity page, showing one V2 HH
(Half-High) SAS (#1), one HH (Half-High)
SCSI drive (#2), and one TD (Full-High)
Fibre Channel drive (#3) . . . . . . .
Identity page, showing one Ultrium 3 HH
SAS drive (#1) and one Ultrium 4 HH SAS
drive (#2). Version 2 information displayed
for drive #1 identifies the drive as a V2
drive (Feature Code 8049 - Ultrium 3 HH
SAS Drive V2). . . . . . . . . . .
The 4U library Monitor Library: Library
Status page . . . . . . . . . . .
Status page . . . . . . . . . . .
The 2U library Monitor Library: Inventory
page . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The 4U library Monitor Library: Inventory
page (Right Magazines) . . . . . . .
Manage Library: move media page
Manage Library: Perform inventory page
Manage Library: Release Magazine page
The 4U library Configure Library: General
and Extended page. . . . . . . . .
The 4U library Configure Library: Logical
Libraries page . . . . . . . . . .
The 4U library Configure Library: Path
Failover page . . . . . . . . . .
Path Failover license verification page
Feature Activation Key screen . . . . .
Configure Library: Encryption feature
configuration screen . . . . . . . .
The Configure Library: Drives page for a
2U library . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Configure Library: Drives page for a
4U library . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure Library: Network page
Warning screen . . . . . . . . . .
Configure Library: IPSec: The Policy
setting page . . . . . . . . . . .
Generic IPSec settings . . . . . . . .
IPSec Policy editing . . . . . . . .
Policy editing . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of the policy configuration page
General Policy settings . . . . . . .
IKE settings . . . . . . . . . . .
Certificate Upload . . . . . . . . .
5-25
5-26
5-26
5-28
5-29
5-29
5-30
5-31
5-32
5-34
5-36
5-54.
5-55.
5-56.
5-57.
5-58.
5-59.
5-60.
5-61.
5-62.
5-63.
5-64.
5-65.
5-66.
5-67.
5-68.
5-69.
5-70.
5-71.
5-72.
5-37
5-38
5-40
5-41
5-42
5-43
5-43
5-43
5-45
5-73.
6-1.
6-2.
6-3.
6-4.
6-5.
6-6.
6-7.
5-46
6-8.
5-46
5-46
5-48
6-9.
5-49
6-10.
6-11.
6-12.
5-51
5-51
5-52
5-53
5-54
5-55
5-55
5-56
5-56
5-57
5-59
5-61
6-13.
6-14.
6-15.
7-1.
7-2.
9-1.
9-2.
9-3.
9-4.
10-1.
10-2.
10-3.
Security Association settings . . . . . 5-61

Policy slot setup after one policy is saved 5-63
Configure Library: User Access page
5-64
The Configure Library: Date & Time page 5-65
Configure Library: Logs & Traces page
5-66
Configure Library: Event Notification page 5-66
Configure Library: SNMP page
5-67
Configure Library: Save/Restore page
5-69
No Cleaning Required . . . . . . . 5-70
No cleaning cartridge in library
5-70
Service Library: Clean Drive page
5-70
Service Library: View Logs page
5-71
Service Library: View Drive Logs screen
5-72
Service: Save Drive Dump . . . . . . 5-72
Service Library: Perform Diagnostics page 5-73
Service Library: Perform Key Path
Diagnostics page . . . . . . . . . 5-74
The 2U library Service Library: Upgrade
Firmware page, showing one Ultrium 3
SAS Half High V2 drive and one Ultrium 4
SAS Half High drive. . . . . . . . . 5-76
The 4U library Service Library: Upgrade
Firmware page . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
Identity page, showing one Ultrium 3 HH
SAS drive (#1) and one Ultrium 4 HH SAS
drive (#2). Version 2 information displayed
for drive #1 identifies the drive as a V2
drive (Feature Code 8049 - Ultrium 3 HH
SAS Drive V2). . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
Service Library: Reboot page . . . . . 5-77
The IBM LTO Ultrium data cartridge
6-1
Ultrium Data and WORM Tape Cartridges 6-4
Sample bar code label on the LTO Ultrium 6
Tape Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Setting the write-protect switch . . . . . 6-8
Tape cartridges in a Turtlecase . . . . . 6-9
Double-boxing tape cartridges for shipping 6-10
Checking for gaps in the seams of a
cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Leader pin in the incorrect and correct
positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Placing the dislodged leader pin into the
correct position . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Rewinding the tape into the cartridge
6-14
Leader Pin Reattachment Kit . . . . . 6-15
Attaching the leader pin attach tool to the
cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Winding the tape out of the cartridge
6-17
Removing the C-clip from the leader pin
6-17
Attaching the leader pin to the tape
6-18
A 250w power supply with LEDs
7-8
A 80w power supply without LEDs
7-9
Access holes for the left magazine
9-1
Access holes for the right magazine
9-2
Left magazine pulled out of the 2U library 9-3
Left Magazines pulled out of the 4U Library 9-3
ESD label . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Shipping lock and label storage location
10-2
Shipping lock and label . . . . . . . 10-2
10-4.
10-5.
10-6.
10-7.
10-8.
10-9.
10-10.
10-11.
10-12.
10-13.
10-14.
10-15.
10-16.
10-17.
10-18.
10-19.
10-20.
10-21.
10-22.
10-23.
10-24.
10-25.
10-26.
10-27.
Library drive sled without ElectroStatic

Discharge (ESD) springs (SCSI sled shown) 10-3
Library drive sled with ESD springs [1]
(SAS sled shown) . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Drive sled components (full high fibre
drive in top position, half high SCSI drive
in middle position, half high SAS drive in
bottom position) on back panel of a 4U
library . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Pulling the drive sled out of the library
(drive sled without ESD springs shown) . 10-5
Pushing the drive sled into the library
Diagrams for applying conductive tape for
ESD protection to the back of a drive sled
installed in a 2U or 4U library . . . . . 10-7
2U magazine with slot blocker . . . . . 10-9
Popping the slot blocker out of the cell
10-10
A power supply removed from a 2U
library . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
A library controller card that is removed
from the library . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Magazine fiducial . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Removing the two mounting bracket
screws anchoring the library to the rack
(one screw on each side of the library) . . 10-15
Foot pads that are installed on the bottom
of the library enclosure . . . . . . . 10-16
Removing the shipping label and lock
from the top of the library and storing on
the rear panel . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Library shipping lock and label storage
location on the real panel of the library . 10-17
Removing a drive sled from the library
Drive sled taping diagrams . . . . . 10-19
A power supply that is removed from a
library . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Removing a library controller card from
the library . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Library front panel LEDs . . . . . . 10-23
Access hole for the left magazine (facing
rear of library) . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Access hole for the right magazine (facing
rear of library) . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Left magazines pulled out of a 4U library
(facing front of library) . . . . . . . 10-24
Mounting brackets and anchors for
securing the library in a rack (one bracket
and anchor on each side of the library). . 10-25
10-28. Front view of a rack, showing the rails

installed . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
10-29. Proper placement of the Repair
Identification (RID) Tag . . . . . . . 10-27
11-1. Types of receptacles . . . . . . . . 11-8
A-1. Internal view of the library . . . . . . A-1
A-2. Drive connection card, showing screws and
plastic cover . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
A-3. Half high drive with the connection card
moved to the side, showing the screws . . A-5
A-4. The drive brick, showing the cables to be
unplugged. . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
A-5. Removing the bezel and the cover from the
4U internal drive . . . . . . . . . A-6
A-6. Removing the bezel and the cover from the
half high internal drive . . . . . . . A-7
A-7. The hex wrench rewinds tape into cartridge A-8
A-8. Rewinding tape into cartridge . . . . . A-9
A-9. Drive with cover removed to reveal gear
train. . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
A-10. Leader Block Assembly (LBA) . . . . . A-11
train. . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
A-12. Leader Block Assembly (LBA)
A-12
A-13. The hex wrench rewinds tape into
cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
A-14. Rewinding tape into cartridge
A-15
cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
train. . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
A-18
A-19
cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20
train. . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
A-22
A-23
train. . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24
A-24
B-1.
Configuration of a one - partition system
B-4
B-2.
Configuration of a two - partition system
B-5
B-3.
Configuration of a three - partition system B-5
B-4.
Configuration of a four - partition system
B-6
B-5.
Examples of SCSI element addressing
B-6
E-1.
AIX ERRPT Library Error Log Example
E-3
E-2.
AIX ERRPT Library Error Log Example
E-4
Figures
xv
xvi
Tables
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1-1.
1-2.
1-3.
1-4.
1-5.
1-6.
1-7.
1-8.
1-9.
1-10.
1-11.
3-1.
3-2.
3-3.
4-1.
5-1.
5-2.
5-3.
5-4.
5-5.
5-6.
5-7.
5-8.
5-9.
5-10.
5-11.
5-12.
5-13.
Minimum firmware levels for common

library features . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Information added to the GA32-0545-13
edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
NEBS Compliance Statements . . . . . xxv
2U library and 4U library front panel
descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
2U library and 4U library rear panel
descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Tape drive model and host interface type
1-6
Library storage capacity and data transfer
rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Physical specifications . . . . . . . . 1-11
Power specifications . . . . . . . . 1-11
Operation specifications: Ultrium 6
1-11
1-11
1-12
1-12
Environmental specifications . . . . . 1-13
Host drive interface support . . . . . . 3-7
Maximum bus length between terminators 3-9
Recommended maximum quantity of drives
per SCSI bus . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Location criteria . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Menu navigation shortcuts . . . . . . 5-1
Library control keys . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Detailed information on cartridges residing
in a magazine . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Factory default settings . . . . . . . 5-27
Web User Interface Menus . . . . . . 5-32
Library Identity page elements . . . . . 5-33
Drive Identity page elements . . . . . 5-34
Library Status page elements . . . . . 5-37
Drive Status page elements . . . . . . 5-38
Configure Library: General page elements 5-44
Configure Library: Specific page elements 5-44
Drive Identity page elements . . . . . 5-50
Generic IPSec settings . . . . . . . . 5-55
5-14.
5-15.
5-16.
6-1.
6-2.
6-3.
6-4.
6-5.
6-6.
6-7.
6-8.
6-9.
6-10.
7-1.
7-2.
8-1.
8-2.
8-3.
10-1.
11-1.
11-2.
11-3.
A-1.
B-1.
B-2.
B-3.
B-4.
C-1.
D-1.
D-2.
E-1.
E-2.
F-1.
General Policy settings . . . . . . . 5-57

IKE settings . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
Security Association settings . . . . . 5-61
Cartridge types and colors . . . . . . 6-1
Cartridge data capacity and recording
formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Nominal cartridge life: Load/unload cycles 6-3
Ultrium data cartridge compatibility with
Ultrium tape drive . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Bar code label requirements for Ultrium
tape drives and libraries . . . . . . . 6-5
Cartridges and VOLSERs compatible with
the Ultrium Tape Drives . . . . . . . 6-6
Location of the write-protect switch
6-8
Environment for operating, storing, and
shipping the LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge . 6-19
Media supplies . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Authorized suppliers of custom bar code
labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Troubleshooting table . . . . . . . . 7-1
Power supply LED meanings. . . . . . 7-9
Main Error Codes . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Sub error codes . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Warning events . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Shipping lock/Shipping label . . . . . 10-2
Optional features . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Replacement parts . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Power cords . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Internal view description . . . . . . . A-1
2U library SCSI element types and element
addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
4U library SCSI element types and element
addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
2U library SCSI element addresses for
storage slots and drive slot (one logical
partition with one drive) . . . . . . . B-2
4U library SCSI element addresses for
storage slots and drive slot (one logical
partition with drives in slot 1 and slot 2). . B-3
TapeAlert flags supported by the Ultrium
tape drive . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Library Sense Keys, ASC and ASCQ
D-1
LTO Tape Drive Sense Data . . . . . . D-7
AIX ERRPT library sense data . . . . . E-3
AIX ERRPT drive sense data . . . . . . E-4
SNMP status events . . . . . . . . . F-1
xvii
xviii
Safety and environmental notices

When this product is used, observe the danger, caution, and attention notices that
are contained in this guide. The notices are accompanied by symbols that represent
the severity of the safety condition.
Most danger or caution notices contain a reference number (Dxxxx or Cxxxx). Use
the reference number to check the translation in the IBM Systems Safety Information
(G229-9054) publication included in your ship group.
The sections that follow define each type of safety notice and give examples.
Safety notices
Danger notice
A danger notice calls attention to a situation that is potentially lethal or extremely
hazardous to people. A lightning bolt symbol always accompanies a danger notice
to represent a dangerous electrical condition. A sample danger notice follows:
An electrical outlet that is not correctly wired could place
hazardous voltage on metal parts of the system or the
devices that attach to the system. It is the responsibility of
the customer to ensure that the outlet is correctly wired and
grounded to prevent an electrical shock. A lightning bolt
symbol always accompanies a danger notice to represent a
dangerous electrical condition.(D004)
Caution notice
A caution notice calls attention to a situation that is potentially hazardous to
people because of some existing condition, or to a potentially dangerous situation
that might develop because of some unsafe practice. A caution notice can be
accompanied by one of several symbols:
If the symbol is...
It means...
A generally hazardous condition not represented by other
safety symbols.
A hazardous condition due to the use of a laser in the

product. Laser symbols are always accompanied by the
classification of the laser as defined by the U. S.
Department of Health and Human Services (for example,
Class I, Class II, and so forth).
A hazardous condition due to mechanical movement in or
around the product.
xix
If the symbol is...
It means...
32-55 kg (70.5-121.2 lbs)
svc00168
A hazardous condition due to the weight of the unit.

Weight symbols are accompanied by an approximation of
the product's weight.
A hazardous condition due to the unit's susceptibility to

electrostatic discharge.
Sample caution notices follow:

Caution
The battery is a lithium ion battery. To avoid possible explosion, do not
burn. Exchange only with the IBM-approved part. Recycle or discard the
battery as instructed by local regulations. In the United States, IBM has a
process for the collection of this battery. For information, call
1-800-426-4333. Have the IBM part number for the battery unit available
when you call. (C007)
Caution
The system contains circuit cards, assemblies, or both that contain lead
solder. To avoid the release of lead (Pb) into the environment, do not burn.
Discard the circuit card as instructed by local regulations. (C014)
Caution
When removing the Modular Refrigeration Unit (MRU), immediately
remove any oil residue from the MRU support shelf, floor, and any other
area to prevent injuries because of slips or falls. Do not use refrigerant
lines or connectors to lift, move, or remove the MRU. Use handholds as
instructed by service procedures. (C016)
Caution
Do not connect an IBM control unit directly to a public optical network.
The customer must use an additional connectivity device between an IBM
control unit optical adapter (that is, fibre, ESCON, FICON) and an
external public network . Use a device such as a patch panel, a router, or a
switch. You do not need an additional connectivity device for optical fibre
connectivity that does not pass through a public network.
Possible safety hazards

Possible safety hazards to the operation of this product are:
Electrical
An electrically charged frame can cause serious electrical shock.
Mechanical
Hazards (for example, a safety cover missing) are potentially harmful to
people.
Chemical
Do not use solvents, cleaners, or other chemicals that are not approved for
use on this product.
Before the library is used, repair any of the preceding problems.
xx
Class I laser product

Before the library is used, review the following laser safety information.
The product might contain a laser assembly that complies with the performance
standards set by the US Food and Drug Administration for a Class I laser product.
Class I laser products do not emit hazardous laser radiation. The product has the
necessary protective housing and scanning safeguards to ensure that laser radiation
is inaccessible during operation or is within Class I limits. External safety agencies
reviewed the product and obtained approvals to the latest standards as they apply.
Performing the safety inspection procedure

Before you service the unit, complete the following safety inspection procedure.
1. Stop all activities between the host and the librarys tape drives.
2. Turn off the power to the library by pushing in the Power button on the rear
of the tape library for 4 seconds.
3. If the drives are SCSI attached, disconnect the SCSI cable and check the SCSI
bus terminator for damage.
4. Unplug the librarys power cord from the electrical outlet and the librarys
power supply unit.
5. Check the librarys power cords for damage, such as a pinched, cut, or frayed
cord.
6. If drives are SCSI attached, check the tape drive's SCSI bus (signal) cable for
damage.
7. If drives are FC/SAS attached, check the tape drive's FC/SAS cable for
damage.
8. Check the cover of the library for sharp edges, damage, or alterations that
expose its internal parts.
9. Check the cover of the library for proper fit. It should be in place and secure.
10. Check the product label at the rear of the library to make sure that it matches
the voltage at your outlet.
xxi
Rack safety
The following general safety information must be used for all rack mounted
devices.
DANGER
v Always lower the leveling pads on the rack cabinet.

v Always install stabilizer brackets on the rack cabinet.
v To avoid hazardous conditions because of uneven mechanical loading,
always install the heaviest devices in the bottom of the rack cabinet.
Always install servers and optional devices, starting from the bottom of the
rack cabinet.
v Rack mounted devices are not to be used as a shelf or workspace. Do not
place any object on top of rack mounted devices.
v Each rack cabinet might have more than one power cord. Be sure to
disconnect all power cords in the rack cabinet before you service any
device in the rack cabinet.
v Connect all devices that are installed in a rack cabinet to power devices
installed in the same rack cabinet. Do not plug a power cord from a device
that is installed in one rack cabinet into a power device that is installed in
a different rack cabinet.
v An electrical outlet that is not correctly wired might place hazardous
voltage on the metal parts of the system or the devices that attach to the
system. It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure that the outlet is
correctly wired and grounded to prevent an electrical shock.
xxii
CAUTION:
v Do not install a unit in a rack where the internal rack ambient temperatures
might exceed the manufacturer's recommended ambient temperature for all
your rack mounted devices.
v Do not install a unit in a rack where the air flow is compromised. Ensure that
air flow is not blocked or reduced on any side, front, or back of a unit that is
used for air flow through the unit.
v Consideration must be given to the connection of the equipment to the supply
circuit so that overloading of the circuits does not compromise the supply
wiring or overcurrent protection. To provide the correct power connection to a
rack, refer to the rating labels on the equipment in the rack to determine the
total power requirement of the supply circuit.
v (For sliding drawers) Do not pull out or install any drawer or feature if the
rack stabilizer brackets are not attached to the rack. Do not pull out more than
one drawer at a time. The rack might become unstable if you pull out more
than one drawer at a time.
v (For fixed drawers) This drawer is a fixed drawer and must not be moved for
servicing unless specified by the manufacturer. Attempting to move the
drawer partially or out of the rack might cause the rack to become unstable or
cause the drawer to fall out of the rack.
(R001)
xxiii
CAUTION:
Removing components from the upper positions in the rack cabinet improves
rack stability during relocation. Follow these general guidelines whenever you
relocate a populated rack cabinet within a room or building:
v Reduce the weight of the rack cabinet by removing equipment, starting at the
top of the rack cabinet. When possible, restore the rack cabinet to the
configuration of the rack cabinet as you received it. If this configuration is not
known, you must do the following:
Remove all devices in the 32U position and above.
Ensure that the heaviest devices are installed in the bottom of the rack
cabinet.
Ensure that there are no empty U-levels between devices that are installed
in the rack cabinet below the 32U level.
v If the rack cabinet you are relocating is part of a suite of rack cabinets, detach
the rack cabinet from the suite.
v Inspect the route that you plan to take to eliminate potential hazards.
v Verify that the route that you choose can support the weight of the loaded
rack cabinet. Refer to the documentation that comes with your rack cabinet for
the weight of a loaded rack cabinet.
v Verify that all door openings are at least 760 x 2032 mm (30 x 80 in.).
v Ensure that all devices, shelves, drawers, doors, and cables are secure.
v Ensure that the four leveling pads are raised to their highest position.
v Ensure that there is no stabilizer bracket that is installed on the rack cabinet
during movement.
v Do not use a ramp that is inclined at more than 10 degrees.
v When the rack cabinet is in the new location:
Lower the four leveling pads.
Install stabilizer brackets on the rack cabinet.
If you removed any devices from the rack cabinet, repopulate the rack
cabinet from the lowest position to the highest position.
v If a long-distance relocation is required, restore the rack cabinet to the
configuration of the rack cabinet as you received it. Pack the rack cabinet in
the original packaging material, or equivalent. Also, lower the leveling pads
to raise the casters off the pallet and bolt the rack cabinet to the pallet.
(R002)
Power Cords
For your safety, IBM provides a power cord with a grounded attachment plug to
use with this IBM product. To avoid electrical shock, always use the power cord
and plug with a properly grounded outlet.
IBM power cords used in the United States and Canada are listed by
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and certified by the Canadian Standards
Association (CSA).
xxiv
For units intended to be operated at 115 volts: Use a UL-listed and CSA-certified
cord set consisting of a minimum 18 AWG, Type SVT or SJT, three-conductor cord,
a maximum of 15 feet in length and a parallel blade, grounding-type attachment
plug rated 15 amperes, 125 volts.
For units intended to be operated at 230 volts (U.S. use): Use a UL-listed and
CSA-certified cord set consisting of a minimum 18 AWG, Type SVT or SJT,
three-conductor cord, a maximum of 15 feet in length and a tandem blade,
grounding-type attachment plug rated 15 amperes, 250 volts.
For units intended to be operated at 230 volts (outside the U.S.): Use a cord set
with a grounding-type attachment plug. The cord set should have the appropriate
safety approvals for the country in which the equipment will be installed.
IBM power cords for a specific country or region are usually available only in that
country or region.
Cautions and regulatory compliance statements for NEBS

This library is NEBS certified. This section includes the cautions and regulatory
compliance statements for the Network Equipment-Building System (NEBS)
certification from the Telcordia Electromagnetic Compatibility and Electrical Safety
- Generic Criteria for Network Telecommunications Equipment (A Module of
LSSGR, FR-64; TSGR, FR-440; and NEBSFR, FR-2063) Telcordia Technologies
Generic Requirements, GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4, June 2006.
Table 7. NEBS Compliance Statements
CAUTION:
To comply with the Telcordia GR-1089-CORE standard for electromagnetic compatibility
and safety, for Ethernet RJ-45 ports, use only shielded Ethernet cables that are grounded
on both ends. In a NEBS installation, all Ethernet ports are limited to intra-building
wiring.
CAUTION:
The intra-building ports of the equipment or subassembly are only suitable for
connection to intra-building or unexposed wiring or cabling. The intra-building ports of
the equipment or subassembly must NOT be metallically connected to interfaces that
connect to the OSP or its wiring. These interfaces are designed for use only as
intra-building interfaces (Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in GR-1089-CORE, Issue
4), and require isolation from the exposed OSP cabling. The addition of primary
protectors is not sufficient protection in order to connect these interfaces metallically to
OSP wiring.
An external Surge Protective Device (SPD) is not required for operating this library.
This product can be installed in a network telecommunication facility or location where the
NEC applies.
xxv
xxvi
Preface
This manual contains information and instructions necessary for the installation,
operation, and service of the IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library and
TS3200 Tape Library.
Note: The IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library is a
customer installed unit. The customer is responsible for the setup and
maintenance of the tape library. The customer will be charged for service if a
service contract is not in place.
Related Publications
Refer to the following publications for additional information.To ensure that you
have the latest publications, visit the web at http://www.ibm.com/storage/.
v IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Getting Started
Guide (GA32-0546) provides installation information.
v IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library SCSI Reference
(GA32-0547) provides supported SCSI commands and protocol governing the
behavior of SCSI interface.
v IBM TotalStorage LTO Ultrium Tape Drive SCSI Reference (GA32-0450) provides
supported SCSI commands and protocol governing the behavior of SCSI
interface for the tape drive.
v IBM Tape Device Driver Installation and User's Guide (GC27-2130) provides
instructions for attaching IBM-supported hardware to open-systems operating
systems. It indicates what devices and levels of operating systems are supported.
It also gives requirements for adapter cards, and tells how to configure hosts to
use the device driver. All of the above are with the Ultrium family of devices.
v IBM Tape Device Driver Programming Reference (GA32-0566) supplies information
to application owners who want to integrate their open-systems applications
with IBM-supported Ultrium hardware. The reference contains information
about the application programming interfaces (APIs) for each of the various
supported operating-system environments.
v IBM Encryption Key Manager component for the Java platform Quick Start Guide
(GA76-0420) gets you started with a basic configuration for encryption on LTO 4
tape drives.
v IBM Encryption Key Manager component for the Java platform Introduction, Planning,
and User's Guide (GA76-0418) contains information to help you install, configure,
and use the IBM Encryption Key Manager component for the Java platform.
v IBM Tivoli Key Lifecycle Manager V1.0 (English) publications may be
downloaded from the following web site: http://www.ibm.com/software/
tivoli/library.
IBM Tivoli Key Lifecycle Manager Quick Start Guide (GI11-8738)
IBM Tivoli Key Lifecycle Manager Installation and Configuration Guide
(SC23-9977)
v The IBM Publications Center: http://www.ibm.com/shop/publications/order.
The Publications Center is a worldwide central repository for IBM product
publications and marketing material with a catalog of 70,000 items. Extensive
search facilities are provided. Payment options for orders are via credit card (in
xxvii
the U.S.) or customer number for 20 countries. A large number of publications

are available online in various file formats, and they can all be downloaded by
all countries, free of charge.
xxviii
Chapter 1. Product description

The IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library (2U library) and the IBM System
Storage TS3200 Tape Library (4U library) provide compact, high-capacity, low-cost
solutions for simple, unattended data backup. The 4U library houses up to 48 tape
cartridges (or 45 and an elective 3-slot I/O station) in a compact 4U form factor
with easy access to cartridges by way of four removable magazines. The 2U library
houses up to 24 tape cartridges (or 23 and an elective 1-slot I/O station) in a
compact 2U form factor with easy access to cartridges by way of two removable
magazines.
The sixth generation of the Ultrium series of products is available with interfaces
to suit your needs: a Fibre Channel interface (FC), or Serial Attached SCSI interface
(SAS).
Front panel
3
a77ug006
Figure 1-1. Front panel of a 2U library
a77ug115
Figure 1-2. Front panel of a 4U library
Table 1-1 on page 1-2 contains front panel descriptions for both the 2U library in
Figure 1-1 and the 4U library in Figure 1-2.
1-1
Table 1-1. 2U library and 4U library front panel descriptions

Number
Item
Description
1
Power button
Pressing this button powers ON the library. Pressing and holding this button for 4
seconds powers OFF the unit (soft power down). No power switch or button is found
on the back panel of the library.
2
Front panel
LEDs (left to
right)
v Ready/Activity (Green LED) - It is illuminated any time that the unit is powered ON
and able to function. It flashes whenever there is library or drive activity, or when
the library is powering up.
v Clean Drive (Amber LED) - It is illuminated when the drive must be cleaned. The
LED is turned OFF after the drive is cleaned successfully.
v Attention (Amber LED) - It is illuminated when there is a failure that indicates a
piece of media is bad, marginal, or invalid. It is cleared when all invalid cartridges
are exported from the library. The amber LED might also be lit because a power
supply or a power supply fan is failing, or a drive sled is defective, missing, or
replaced by a different drive type.
v Error (Amber LED) - It is illuminated when there is an unrecoverable library or
drive failure. A message is displayed at the same time on the Operator Control Panel
display.
3
Cartridge
magazines
v The 2U library contains two cartridge magazines.

The left magazine can hold up to 12 cartridges (or 11 data cartridges and the
elective 1-slot I/O station.)
The right magazine can hold up to 12 cartridges.
v The 4U library contains four cartridge magazines.
The upper left magazine can hold up to 12 cartridges.
The lower left magazine can hold up to 12 cartridges (or 9 data cartridges and the
elective 3-slot I/O station.)
The upper right magazine can hold up to 12 cartridges.
The lower right magazine can hold up to 12 cartridges.
4
Air vents
5
Control keys
These vents draw cooler air into the library enclosure and allow warm air to escape,
which helps keep the library at a normal operating temperature.
v UP (+) - The upper left button is used to scroll upward through menu items.
v DOWN (-) - The lower left button is used to scroll downward through menu items.
v CANCEL (X) - The upper right button is used to cancel a user action and return to
the previous menu screen.
v SELECT - The lower right button is used to display a submenu or force an accessor
action.
6
Machine type,
Model number,
and Serial
Number label
7
Operator
Control Panel
display
8
I/O station
The machine type, model number, and serial number of the library are on this label.
This serial number is the number that links the library to your warranty.
This component is a 128 X 64 monochrome graphic display.
The input/output (I/O) station is used to import and export cartridges into and out of
the library.
v The 2U library has an elective 1-slot I/O station.
v The 4U library has an elective 3-slot I/O station.
1-2
Rear panel
1
a77ug300
Figure 1-3. Rear panel (drive sled only) of a half high Fibre Channel drive
11
10
a77ug233
12
Figure 1-4. Rear panel of a 4U library with full high Fibre Channel drive and half high SAS drives.
11
10
a77ug234
12
Figure 1-5. Rear panel of a 2U library with a full high dual port SAS drive
1-3
Table 1-2. 2U library and 4U library rear panel descriptions

Number
Item
1
Power connector
Description
Both libraries require a 110/220 volt AC power connection.
v The 2U library has one power supply.
v The 4U library has a minimum of one power supply, but is capable of adding a
redundant power supply.
2
Host interface
connectors
The library has one or more of the following host interface connectors on the drive
sled:
v Fibre Channel connector
v SFF-8088 mini-SAS connector
3
Tape drive sled
This library supports the Ultrium 3, 4, 5, and 6 tape drive. The tape drive in the
library is packaged in a container that is called a drive sled. Drive sleds come in
full high or half high configurations. The drive sled is a customer replaceable unit
(CRU), and is hot-pluggable, which is designed for easy removal and replacement.
4
Shipping lock and

label storage
location
The shipping lock, which secures the accessor during shipping, and associated
label are stored on the rear panel of the library for future use. See Removing and
storing the shipping lock on page 4-4.
Note: The shipping lock must be removed before the library is powered ON to
allow the accessor to function properly.
5
USB port
6
Library Control
Board (LCC) LED
7
Serial port
8
Ethernet port
Used to save/restore library configuration information about a USB device.

An LED showing the status of the Library Control Board
LED flashing (1 flash per second) - normal operation
This port is used to communicate serially with the library with an RJ-11 connector.
For use by IBM Service Personnel.
This port is used to connect the library to a network.
LED
v 10/100 Link
Description: Green: Link Integrity
Flashing: Network synchronization/negotiation
Steady (On): Good connection
Off: No connection between NIC and hub
v Activity
Description: Amber: Port traffic indicator
Flashing: Network traffic present
Steady (On): Heavy network traffic
Off: No traffic
9
10
Tape drive LED
This LED indicates the status of the drive. When the LED is green, it indicates
normal drive activity.
The machine type, model number, and serial number of the library are on this
Machine type,
Model number, and pull-out label. This serial number is the number that links the library to your
warranty.
Serial Number
pull-out label
11
Fan vents
These vents allow air to escape from the power supply and tape drive sled.
12
ESD label
The Electrostatic Discharge label is a reminder that some of the components of this
library are susceptible to electrostatic discharge. See Electrostatic discharge on
page 10-1.
1-4
Bar code reader

The bar code reader is a part of the library accessor. The bar code reader provides
inventory feedback to the host application, Operator Control Panel display, and
Web User Interface by reading cartridge bar code labels. The library stores the
customized inventory data in memory.
Library firmware supports a 6 or 8 character volume serial number (VOLSER) on
the bar code label on the tape cartridge.
Encryption
The LTO Ultrium 4, 5, and 6 Tape Drive supports host Application Managed
Encryption (AME), Library Managed Encryption (LME), and System Managed
Encryption (SME), with T10 encryption methods, for SAS and Fibre Channel drives
only. Data encryption is supported by LTO Ultrium 4, Ultrium 5, and Ultrium 6
Data Cartridges only. Encryption is also supported by library firmware version 4.0
or higher.
The encryption enabled drive contains the necessary hardware and firmware to
encrypt and decrypt host tape application data. Encryption policy and encryption
keys are provided by the host application or host server. A drive digital certificate
is installed at manufacturing time. Each drive receives a unique serial number and
certificate. The T10 application might validate each drive instance by checking the
drive's digital certificate.
The LTO Ultrium 6 encryption environment is complex and requires knowledge
beyond that of product trained Service Support Representatives (SSRs). The
Encryption function on tape drives (desktop, stand-alone and within libraries) is
configured and managed by the customer. In some instances, SSRs are required to
enable encryption at a hardware level when service access or service password
controlled access is required. Customer setup support is by Field Technical Sales
Support (FTSS), customer documentation, and software support for encryption
software problems. Customer 'how to' support is also provided by way of support
line contract.
The library firmware always allows the user to select "None" or "Application
Managed Encryption" from the Web User Interface, as long as there is at least one
encryption capable drive in the logical library. If a valid Transparent Encryption
license key is entered, "System Managed Encryption" or "Library Managed
Encryption" can be selected. The factory default is "None."
Note: The optional Transparent Encryption Key feature that enables System
Managed Encryption and Library Managed Encryption is not available on
TS3200 and TS3100 models that are purchased through High Volume
(HVEC) channels.
Note: All encryption settings are configured or reverified in the drive after any
library or drive reset. This action is because a new drive was added or an
existing drive was swapped with another drive.
For more information, see the IBM Tape Device Drivers documentation, and the
IBM LTO Ultrium Tape Drive SCSI Reference documentation. See "Related
Publications" in the Preface.
1-5
Supported Internet Protocols

The library supports the following Internet Protocols:
v IPv4
v IPv6
To learn more about Internet Protocols, visit http://www.iana.org/.
SNMP messaging
Occasionally, the library might encounter a situation that you want to know about,
such as an open magazine or a fault that causes the library to stop. The library
provides a standard TCP/IP protocol called Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMP) to send alerts about conditions (such as need for operator intervention)
over a TCP/IP LAN network to an SNMP monitoring station. These alerts are
called SNMP traps. Using the information that is supplied in each SNMP trap, the
monitoring station (together with customer-supplied software) alerts operations
personnel of possible problems or operator interventions that occur.
SNMP traps
SNMP traps are alerts or status messages that are collected, monitored, and used to
proactively manage attached libraries with SNMP protocol with the host servers. In
summary, each trap provides the following information:
v Product Identification such as product name, description, manufacturer, model
number, firmware level, and the URL that the trap is designated for.
v Product Status such as the severity of the trap, status (current and previous) and
the time the trap occurred.
v Library State (physical device status) such as identification and status of devices
that is monitored. It would include enclosure, power supply, controller,
magazine status, drive count, cartridge slot count, and I/O station count. Also
included are certain library statistics, and where appropriate, the fault FSC (fault
symptom code) including the severity and description of that fault.
v Drive Status such as the identification of each drive in the library, firmware
level, serial number, and other address and status information.
v Trap Definitions such as library status change, open magazine, I/O accessed,
hard fault information, drive cleaning requests, excessive retries, and library that
is returning to normal operations. For more information, refer to Appendix G.
"SNMP Status MIB Variables and Traps" on page G-1.
v SNMP MIBs: The library's Management Information Base (MIB) contains units
of information that specifically describe an aspect of the system, such as the
system name, hardware number, or communications configuration. Status and
error data is also gathered by MIBs and sent to one or more IP addresses that
are defined during the SNMP configuration operation. Download the SNMP
MIB file for this library from http://www.ibm.com/storage/support.
Maximum library storage capacity and data transfer rate

Table 1-3. Tape drive model and host interface type
Tape Drive Model
Host Interface
Ultrium 6 Full High and Half

High drives
v 8 Gb/s Fibre Channel - single port
1-6
v 6 Gb/s Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) - dual port
Table 1-3. Tape drive model and host interface type (continued)
Tape Drive Model
Host Interface
Ultrium 5 Full High and Half

High drives
Ultrium 4 Full High drives

Ultrium 4 Half High V2 drives
8Gb/s Fibre Channel - single port
6GB/s Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) - dual port
Ultrium 4 Half High drives
v 3 Gb/s SAS - single port
Ultrium 3 Full High drives
v Ultra160 SCSI LVD (depending on drive; single-ended (SE) is not

recommended as it will severely degrade performance)
Ultrium 3 Half High V2 drives
Ultrium 3 Half High drives
v Ultra 160 SCSI LVD (depending on drive; single-ended (SE) is not

recommended as it will severely degrade performance)
6GB/s Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) - dual port
v 3 Gb/s SAS - single port

Table 1-4. Library storage capacity and data transfer rate
Characteristic
2U Library Specification
4U Library Specification
Maximum storage capacity Ultrium 6 Data Cartridges
v 24 data cartridges
v Native: 60 TB
v Native: 120 TB
v Compressed: 150 TB (2.5:1

compression)
v Compressed: 300 TB (2.5:1

compression)
v Native: 36 TB
v Native: 72 TB
v Compressed: 72 TB (2:1 compression) v Compressed: 144 TB (2:1

compression)
Sustained native data transfer

rate
v Native: 19.2 TB
v Native: 38.4 TB
v Compressed: 38.4 TB (2:1

compression)

compression)
v Native: 9.6 TB
v Native: 19.2 TB

compression)

compression)
LTO 3 HH: 60 MBs,
LTO 3 HH V2: 80 MBs
LTO 3 FH: 80 MBs
LTO 4 HH and FH: 120 MBs

LTO 5 HH and FH: 140 MBs
LTO 6: 160 MBs
1-7
Ultrium tape drives

This library supports the Ultrium 3, 4, 5, and 6 Tape Drives. Each tape drive in the
library is packaged in a container that is called a drive sled. The drive sled is a
customer replaceable unit (CRU), and is designed for quick removal and
replacement in the library.
The Ultrium 6 Full High Tape Drives support Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) or Fibre
Channel interfaces. It features two SFF-8088 SAS connectors, or one LC Fibre
Channel connector. The Ultrium 6 Half High Tape Drive supports two SAS
SFF-8088 connectors, or one LC Fibre Channel connector. The SFF-8088 SAS
connectors on the Ultrium 6 tape drives are compatible with SAS-1 or SAS-2
cables.
The Ultrium 5 Full High Tape Drives support Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) or Fibre
Channel interfaces. It features two SFF-8088 SAS connectors, or one LC Fibre
Channel connector. The Ultrium 5 Half High Tape Drive supports two SAS
SFF-8088 connectors, or one LC Fibre Channel connector. The SFF-8088 SAS
connectors on the Ultrium 5 tape drives are compatible with SAS-1 or SAS-2
cables.
The Ultrium 4 Full High Tape Drives support LVD Ultra160, Serial Attached SCSI
(SAS) , or Fibre Channel interfaces. It features two SFF-8088 SAS connectors, or one
LC Fibre Channel connector. The Ultrium 4 Half High Tape Drive (Feature Code
8147) supports one SAS SFF-8088 connector. The Ultrium 4 Half High V2 Tape
Drives (Feature Codes 8148 and 8149) support two SFF-8088 SAS connectors, or
one LC Fibre Channel connector. The SFF-8088 SAS connectors on the Ultrium 4
tape drives are compatible with SAS-1 cables.
The Ultrium 3 Full High Tape Drive supports LVD Ultra160, or Fibre Channel
interfaces. It features two HD68 connectors or one LC Fibre Channel connector. The
Ultrium 3 Half High Drive (Feature Codes 8046 and 8047) supports one SAS
SFF-8088 connector or two HD68 SCSI connectors. The Ultrium 3 Half High V2
Tape Drive (Feature Code 8049) supports two SFF-8088 SAS connectors. The
SFF-8088 SAS connectors on the Ultrium 3 tape drives are compatible with SAS-1
cables.
1-8
a77ug008
Figure 1-6. Library drive sled without ESD springs (SCSI sled shown)
a77ug202
Figure 1-7. Library drive sled with ESD springs [1] (SAS sled shown)
Note: Ultrium 3 and 4 SCSI, SAS, and Fibre Channel drives are allowed in the
same physical and logical library.
Speed matching
To improve system performance, the Ultrium 3, Ultrium 4, Ultrium 5, and Ultrium
6 Tape Drives use a technique called speed matching to dynamically adjust its native
(uncompressed) data rate to the slower data rate of the attached server.
Channel calibration
The channel calibration feature of the Ultrium 3, Ultrium 4, Ultrium 5, and Ultrium
6 Tape Drives customizes each read/write data channel for optimum performance.
The customization enables compensation for variations in the recording channel
transfer function, media characteristics, and read/write head characteristics.
1-9
Power management
The Ultrium 3, Ultrium 4, Ultrium 5, and Ultrium 6 Tape Drive's power
management function controls the drive's electronics so that part of the electronics
completely turn OFF when circuit functions are not needed for the drive's
operation.
Media
The library uses Ultrium Tape Cartridges that provide up to 2500 GB native
capacity (up to 6250 GB with 2.5:1 hardware data compression) for LTO 6 Tape
Drives, up to 1500 GB native capacity (up to 3000 GB with 2:1 hardware data
compression) for LTO 5 tape drives, up to 800 GB native capacity (up to 1600 GB
with 2:1 hardware data compression) for LTO 4 tape drives, and up to 400 GB
native capacity (up to 800 GB with 2:1 hardware data compression) for LTO 3 tape
drives.
IBM Ultrium 6 Tape Drives can read and write LTO Ultrium 6 Data Cartridges.
Ultrium 6 tape drives can read and write LTO Ultrium 5 Data Cartridges at
original Ultrium 5 capacities, and can also read LTO Ultrium 4 Data Cartridges
with improved data rates. IBM Ultrium 5 tape drives can read and write LTO
Ultrium 5 Data Cartridges. IBM Ultrium 5 tape drives can read and write LTO
Ultrium 4 Data Cartridges at original Ultrium 4 capacities, and can also read LTO
Ultrium 3 Data Cartridges with improved data rates. IBM Ultrium 4 tape drives
can read and write LTO Ultrium 4 Data Cartridges. IBM Ultrium 4 tape drives can
read and write LTO Ultrium 3 Data Cartridges at original Ultrium 3 capacities, and
can also read LTO Ultrium 2 Data Cartridges with improved data rates. IBM
Ultrium 3 Tape Drives can read and write LTO Ultrium 3 Data Cartridges. IBM
Ultrium 3 Tape Drives can read and write LTO Ultrium 2 Data Cartridges at
original Ultrium 2 capacities, and can also read LTO Ultrium 1 Data Cartridges
with improved data rates of up to 20 MB/second native data transfer rate (40
MB/second with 2:1 compression).
Note: Ultrium 4 tape drives cannot read or write to Ultrium 1 tapes. Ultrium 5
tape drives cannot read or write to Ultrium 1 or Ultrium 2 tapes. Ultrium 6
tape drives cannot read or write to Ultrium 3, Ultrium 2 and Ultrium 1
tapes.
Supported cartridges include:
v IBM LTO Ultrium 2500 GB Data Cartridge (Ultrium 6)
v IBM Write-Once-Read-Many WORM Data Cartridge (Ultrium 3, Ultrium 4,
Ultrium 5, Ultrium 6)
v IBM 100 GB Data Cartridge (Ultrium 1; read only)
v IBM LTO Ultrium Cleaning Cartridge
Important: Cartridges placed in the library must be labeled with the correct bar
code labels. For additional information, see Chapter 6, Ultrium
media, on page 6-1.
1-10
Library specifications
Physical specifications
Table 1-5. Physical specifications
Specification
2U library
4U library
Height
Rack mount 87.6 mm (3.44 in),

stand-alone 97.6 mm (3.84 in)
Rack mount 175.2 mm (6.9 in),

stand-alone 185.2 mm (7.3 in)
Width
447.5 mm (17.6 in.)
447.5 mm (17.6 in.)
Depth
Rack mount 740 mm (29.13 in),

stand-alone 810 mm (31.9 in)
Rack mount 740 mm (29.13 in),

stand-alone 810 mm (31.9 in)
Weight with 1 drive and without

media
15.59 kg (34.37 lbs.)
21.32 kg (47 lbs.)
Weight with media
20.67 kg (45.57 lbs.)
31.71 kg (69.9 lbs.)
Power specifications
Table 1-6. Power specifications
AC power voltage
100-127 VAC; 200-240 VAC (4 - 2 A)
Line frequency
50-60 Hz
Operation specifications
Table 1-7. Operation specifications: Ultrium 6
Library with
Ultrium 6 drive(s)
2U Library
4U Library
Maximum storage
capacity
Maximum number of data cartridges: 24

Native: 60 TB
Compressed: 150 TB (2.5:1 compression)

Native: 120 TB
Compressed: 300 TB (2.5:1 compression)
Number of slots
24 (including I/O station)
48 (Including 3 I/O station slots)
Sustained native
data transfer rate
Ultrium 6 Drive: 160 MB/s
Drive types
Ultrium 6 Full High Drive:

Fibre Channel, SAS
Ultrium 6 Half High Drive:
Fibre Channel, SAS
8 Gb/s Fibre Channel
6 Gb/s SAS
Interfaces
*Host Interface Drive Transfer Rates may vary depending on host usage and interface utilization.
Library with
Ultrium 5 drive(s)
2U Library
4U Library
Maximum storage
capacity

Native: 36 TB
Compressed: 72 TB (2:1 compression)

Native: 72 TB
Compressed: 144 TB (2:1 compression)
Number of slots
Sustained native
data transfer rate
Ultrium 5 Full High Drive: 140 MB/s

Ultrium 5 Half High Drive: 140 MB/s
1-11
Table 1-8. Operation specifications: Ultrium 5 (continued)

Library with
Ultrium 5 drive(s)
2U Library
4U Library
Fibre Channel, SAS
Ultrium 5 Half High Drive:
Fibre Channel, SAS
Drive types

6 Gb/s SAS
Interfaces
Library with
Ultrium 4 drive(s)
2U Library
4U Library
Maximum storage
capacity

Native: 19.2 TB
Compressed: 38.4 TB (2:1 compression)

Native: 38.4 TB
Number of slots
Sustained native
data transfer rate

SCSI, Fibre Channel, SAS
Ultrium 4 Half High Drive: SAS, Fibre Channel
Drive types
Ultrium 4 HH Fibre Drive V2 (8Gb/s)

Ultrium 4 HH SAS Drive V2 (6Gb/s)
Ultra160 SCSI LVD
3 Gb/s SAS
Interfaces
Library with
Ultrium 3 drive(s)
2U library
4U library
Maximum storage
capacity

Native: 9.6 TB

Native: 19.2 TB
Number of slots
48 (Including 3 I/O station slots.)
Sustained native
data transfer rate
Drive types
Interfaces
1-12

Ultrium 3 Half High V2 Drive: 80 MB/s
Ultrium 3 Full High
Drive: SCSI, Fibre Channel
Ultrium 3 Half High Drive: SCSI, Serial Attached SCSI (SAS)
Ultra160 SCSI LVD
Ultrium 3 HH SAS Drive V2 (6Gb/s)
3 Gb/s SAS
Environmental specifications
Table 1-11. Environmental specifications
Temperature
Operating
10 to 35 C (50 to 95 F)
Storage, without cartridges
-30 to 60 C (-22 to 140 F)
Wet bulb, operating
26 C (79.0 F) maximum
Temperature shock immunity - maximum rate of change
10 C (18 F) per hour
Miscellaneous
Dust concentration
less than 200 microgram/cubic meter
Altitude (operating)
2500 meters (8200 ft.) at 25C ambient
Maximum acoustical noise sound power levels LwAd in bels
6.6/6.8
Humidity
Operating
15% to 80% RH non-condensing
Storage, without cartridges
10% to 90% RH non-condensing
Product environment
The library is designed to operate in a general business environment.
The library meets the acoustical requirements for general business area category
2D. Category 2D states that the library should be installed a minimum of 4 m (13
ft.) from a permanent work station.
To allow for service access, install the library a minimum of 0.9 m (3 ft.) from all
obstacles.
The library is a precision computer peripheral device. To ensure maximum
longevity of your library, locate the library away from dust, dirt, and airborne
particulates:
v Keep the library away from high-traffic areas, especially if the floor is carpeted.
Carpeting harbors dust and walking on the carpet can cause the carpet fibers
and the dust to become airborne.
v Keep the library out of printer/copier rooms because of toner and paper dust.
Additionally, do not store paper supplies next to the library.
v Keep the library away from moving air caused by doorways, open windows,
fans, and air conditioners.
Ensure that the machine covers are always kept closed to minimize any
contamination from airborne particles.
Supported servers, operating systems, and software

The library is supported by a wide variety of servers (hosts), operating systems,
and adapters. These attachments can change throughout the life cycle of the
product.
To determine the latest supported attachments:
1. Visit the web at http://www.ibm.com/.
1-13
2. Point cursor at Support & downloads, Support by product, then point and
click System storage.
3. Select the appropriate Interoperability link.
Supported device drivers

IBM maintains the latest levels of device drivers and driver documentation for the
library on the Internet. You can use one of the following procedures to access this
material.
Note: If you do not have Internet access and you need information about device
drivers, contact your sales representative.
v Using a browser, type one of the following links:
http://www.ibm.com/storage/lto
ftp://ftp.software.ibm.com/storage/devdrvr
v Using File Transfer Protocol (FTP), enter the following specifications:
FTP site: ftp.software.ibm.com
IP Addr: 207.25.253.26
User ID: anonymous
Password: (use your current email address)
Directory: /storage/devdrvr
IBM provides Portable Document Format (.pdf) and PostScript (.ps) versions of its
device driver documentation in the /storage/devdrvr/Doc directory:
v IBM_tape_IUG.pdf and IBM_tape_IUG.ps contain the current version of the IBM
Tape Device Drivers Installation and User's Guide.
v IBM_tape_PROGREF.pdf and IBM_tape_PROGREF.ps contain the current version of
the IBM Tape Device Drivers Programming Reference.
A list of device drivers for each supported server appears at /storage/devdrvr/.
Note: The device driver for System i servers is included in the OS/400 operating
system.
1-14
Chapter 2. User interfaces

This library has two user interfaces.
v Operator Control Panel - on the front panel of the library
v Web User Interface on page 2-4 - accessed by way of a web browser
Operator Control Panel

The Operator Control Panel operates in two basic modes.
v User Interaction mode - This mode is employed when a user is pushing buttons
on the Operator Control Panel.
v System Driven mode - The normal mode of operation. In this mode, the
Operator Control Panel displays status that is associated with the actions that
were caused from commands that are issued by way of the drive's internal
(drive to library) serial interface.
When an Operator Control Panel button is pressed and released, the Operator
Control Panel automatically changes to User Interaction mode. User Interaction
mode continues until 3 minutes after a user stops pushing buttons, or the
requested accessor action stops - whichever is longer. At which time, the Operator
Control Panel returns to System Driven mode.
If necessary, the Operator Control Panel automatically changes to the System
Driven mode. When this operation occurs, the library must remember the previous
function before the display mode changed. Therefore, the next button that is
pressed changes the Operator Control Panel to the User Interaction mode from the
System Driven mode.
In case of the activated user security feature, the User Interaction mode is
restricted to Login and Monitor menu items, until a user logs in with a correct
password.
Operator Control Panel philosophy

Operator Control Panel operation must obey some basic rules. These rules of
operation constitute a philosophy.
v Any operational conflict between commands that are received over the host
interface or the Web User Interface and commands that are entered by way of
the Operator Control Panel are avoided with a reservation mechanism on a
first-come, first-served basis. Any reservation by the Operator Control Panel is
canceled by an Operator Control Panel logout or a timeout, which cancels the
User Interaction Mode.
v Library firmware does not allow a user to select an impossible request. Those
situations include, but are not limited to:
Moving a cartridge from any source to a full slot
Moving a cartridge from an empty slot
Loading a cartridge from any source to a full drive
Unloading a cartridge from an empty drive
v Any error that is detected by the library or drive controller and not recoverable
through predetermined firmware algorithms is considered unrecoverable (fatal).
2-1
An error code is displayed on the Operator Control Panel display and the error
LED illuminates. The error code remains on the Operator Control Panel until a
push button is pressed, which causes the Operator Control Panel to return to the
Home Screen.
v Numeric error codes are only used for unrecoverable errors, otherwise text
status messages are displayed.
Power-ON display
When the library powers ON or resets, it goes through several internally controlled
processes that allow it to get initialized and running. These processes are called
Power-On-Self-Test (POST). During the POST the Operator Control Panel displays
information that might be meaningless until POST is complete. When the POST is
finished, the library displays the Startup screen, then the Home screen.
The Startup screen is the first screen that displays after the library is powered ON.
It contains the following information:
v Firmware Rev: the current level of library firmware
v Drives: the total number of drives that the library can support
v Magazines: the total number of magazines in the library
v I/O station: the status of the I/O station
The Home screen example shows that the Accessor and Drives 1 through 3 are OK
as shown by the check marks in the Home screen. Drive 4 either has a problem, or
is missing. The exclamation mark (!), which shows that there is something wrong
with drive 4 does not go away until the drive is either fixed, or is replaced. Then,
the explanation mark becomes a check mark.
Figure 2-1. Power-ON screens
Note about the front panel LEDs

All LEDs are updated during power ON and reset sequences. Upon power ON or
software reset, the library illuminates all LEDs as soon as POST allows. When
initialization starts, all LEDs are extinguished and the Ready/Activity LED flashes
at a rate of approximately one second per cycle. When the mechanical initialization
is complete, the Ready/Activity LED stops flashing and be constantly illuminated.
2-2
If a library failure occurs, the Ready/Activity LED turns OFF and the Error LED
illuminates. The Operator Control Panel also displays an error code to help
identify the failure.
More operational details of LEDs:
v The Ready/Activity LED is illuminated any time that the unit is powered ON
and functional. The Ready/Activity LED flashes whenever there is library or
drive activity. This LED also flashes when the unit is offline.
v The Clean LED is illuminated when either a cleaning that is requested or a
cleaning required flag is issued by the drive. The LED is turned off after a
successful drive cleaning operation.
v The Attention LED indicates one of the following conditions.
Problem
Action Required
Bad media
1. Go to Monitor > Inventory to locate the defective

cartridge.
2. Move the defective cartridge to the I/O Station.
(Operator Control Panel: Control > Move
Cartridges).
3. Open the I/O Station to remove the defective
cartridge. (Operator Control Panel: Control > Open
I/O).
Drive sled issues
Do one of the following procedures:

- Install a drive sled (see Removing/installing/adding a
tape drive sled on page 10-3).
- Modify or resubmit Logical Library setting (Operator
Control Panel: Configure > Logical Libraries or Web
User Interface: Configure Library > Logical Libraries).
- Restore defaults (Operator Control Panel: Configure >
Restore Defaults or Web User Interface: Configure
Library > Restore Defaults).
Redundant power supply failed
Complete the following steps:

1. Replace the failed power supply (see Replacing a
power supply on page 10-10).
2. Cycle library power.
Power supply fan failure
Replace the power supply.
v The Error LED is illuminated when there is an unrecoverable (that is, hard)
drive or library failure. This error happens at the same time the hard error
message is displayed on the screen and the LED remains lit until the error state
is resolved.
Note: From the Operator Control Panel, run Service > Library Verify. If Library
Verify runs without error, the Error LED turns off. If the error persists,
recycle power.
s
2-3
Input modes
There are several ways to enter values in the different menu items. These values
are selectable predefined values, toggle values (for example, ON/OFF), and
numerical values like network addresses.
Selecting predefined values

1. To set the predefined values, press the SELECT button to select the menu item.
2. Using the UP and DOWN buttons, select one of the various predefined values
for that item.
3. As soon as the Operator Control Panel display shows the correct value, press
the SELECT button to apply the value.
Toggling values
Toggle values are used to switch between two different states like ON and OFF.
1. After navigating to the menu item, press the SELECT button to select the menu
item.
2. With the UP and DOWN buttons, select one of the various predefined states
for that item.
3. Press the SELECT button to apply the new state.
Entering numerical values

Numerical values are needed for network addresses, password entries, and other
configuration entries.
1. After navigating to the menu item, the current value is displayed and the
cursor highlights the first digit of the value that can be changed.
2. For each digit to be changed in the value:
a. Use the UP and DOWN buttons to increment / decrement the digit.
b. Press the SELECT button to highlight the next editable digit.
3. Press the SELECT button at the last digit to apply the complete entry, or press
the CANCEL button to cancel the edit process and maintain the original value.
Power ON/OFF
Part of the Operator Control Panel is the Power ON/OFF button. If the library is
powered ON, pressing this button for 4 seconds initiates a controlled power down
of the library (soft landing). The following operations take place before the library
shuts down completely:
v The display indicates with an appropriate message that the shutdown is in
progress.
v The library controller finishes all ongoing library and drive activities.
v The accessor is moved to its home position.
v The library controller switches OFF the power supply's secondary side.
Note: The shutdown process is stopped by releasing the button before 4 seconds
passes.
Web User Interface

Many of the same operations that are completed from the Operator Control Panel
are also completed remotely with the Web User Interface.
Choose the Web User Interface to monitor and control your library from any
terminal that is connected to your network or through the World Wide Web
2-4
(WWW). The Web User Interface hosts a dedicated, protected Internet site that
displays a graphical representation of your library.
For static IP addresses only: After a connection to the library is established, open
any HTML browser and enter the IP address of the library. To configure the Web
User Interface, you must first set the IP address with the Operator Control Panel.
Refer to "Configure: Network" on page 5-23 or "Configure Library: Network" on
page 5-45.
Login
Important: Some options of the Web User Interface take the library offline. This
inactive mode interferes with host-based application software, causing
data loss. Make sure that the library is idle before you attempt to
complete any remote operations that take the library offline.
To log in, select the Role type and enter the correct password. There are four levels
of access:
v User - Normal user level. The User has access only to Monitor Library menus.
v Superuser - The Superuser has access to the Monitor Library and Manage
Library sections.
v Admin - Admin user level The Admin user has access to all menus except those
menus that are restricted to Service only.
v Service - Service personnel user level - Access to this level is for Service
personnel only. Service personnel have access to all menus.
Note: Passwords are case-sensitive.
Use the following password for logging in as an Admin user: secure
Each level affects which areas you have access to and what actions you can initiate
from those areas.
For DHCP, use the Operator Control Panel to determine the IP address that is
assigned to your library. Navigate to Monitor > Library > Identity. Scroll down to
IP address and make note of the address. Enter the IP address in your internet
browser address field to access your library with the Web User Interface.
For IPv4 or Dual Stack IPv4 + IPv6, enter your library's static IP address with the
0.0.0.0 format (four octets).
For IPv6, enter your library's static IP address or Router Assigned IP address with
the following format: http://[0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0]. To determine your Router
Assigned IP address, navigate to Monitor > Library > Network on the Operator
Control Panel. For the IPv6 Router Assigned addresses to be displayed on the
Operator Control Panel, the Network must be configured to IPv6 Only and the
Stateless Autoconfig must be set to ON.
2-5
a77ug070
Figure 2-2. Web User Interface login page
System status
a77ug080
The System status screen is always present after login, giving the status of the
library.
a77ug089
Figure 2-3. 2U library System status screen
Figure 2-4. 4U library System status screen
Status icons indicate the following conditions.

v The green check mark indicates that the library is fully operational and that no
user intervention is required.
v The yellow exclamation point indicates that user intervention is necessary, but
that the library is still capable of completing operations. This condition is caused
by a media, library, redundant power supply, power supply fan, or a drive sled
problem. To determine which, view the System status screen.
v The red X indicates that user intervention is required and that the library is not
capable of completing operations.
v If Auto Clean is enabled and a cleaning cartridge is not present, or if a cleaning
cartridge is present, but not in a reserved slot, Auto Clean status shows Chk
Media/Rsvd Slot?. Status shows a green check mark and the words Media
2-6
Attention.
Figure 2-5. 4U library System status screen that is showing media attention status
v The Power Supply status will display if redundant power is being used with a
4U library, and the library was manufactured after March 14, 2008. If a
redundant power supply fails, the System status screen displays as shown in
Figure 2-6.
Figure 2-6. 4U library System status screen that is showing a power supply failure
Note: If your library has -04 level redundant power supplies (see label on top of
power supply), it is normal for the one in Standby mode to turn its
Green LED off. You can test this power supply by pulling the power
connector from the other Active power supply. The power supply that
was in Standby mode now becomes Active, and its Green LED
lights. If it does not, replace it (refer to Replacing a power supply on
page 10-10).
If your library has -05 level redundant power supplies, the "Green" LED is
ON for both power supplies. If both "Green" LEDs are not ON, replace
the failed power supply (refer to Replacing a power supply on page
10-10).
Web User Interface Help pages

Each screen on the Web User Interface has an associated Help page. To access a
Help page, click Help in the upper right corner of the screen. A new web page
opens. With the left navigation pane, select the Help page that you want. To close
the Help page, click the red X in the upper right corner of the screen.
2-7

To log out of the Web User Interface, click Logout in the upper right corner of the
screen.
Important: If you click the X in the upper right corner of your internet browser
window, you do not log out of the Web User Interface.
2-8
Chapter 3. Installation planning

Before installing your library, take time to review the following information.
Determining the number of logical libraries (partitions)

You can partition the library into as many logical libraries as there are drives in the
library.
Basic guidelines
v Each logical library must contain at least one drive.
v A library configuration of exactly one logical library equals the entire physical
library.
v The library issues a warning to the user if media is moved across logical
libraries.
Library sharing
The library's default configuration allows a single application to operate the library
through a single control path. Often, it is advantageous to share a single library
between heterogeneous (dissimilar) or homogeneous (similar) applications. Some
applications (and some servers) do not allow for sharing a library between
systems. Configurations are created that enable the library to process commands
from multiple heterogeneous applications (such as an IBM System p application
and a Windows NT application) and multiple homogeneous applications (, the
same application that is run by several System p servers).
From the library's Web User Interface or Operator Control Panel, the following
actions are completed:
v Configure the library so that it is partitioned into separate logical libraries that
independently communicate with separate applications through separate control
paths. This configuration requires no special capabilities from the server or
application. (For more information, see Multiple logical libraries for library
sharing on page 3-2.)
v Configure any single logical library (including the entire physical library) so that
it is shared by two or more servers that are running the same application.
Depending on the capabilities of the server and application, there are several
ways to set up this type of configuration. Three typical ways include:
Configuring one server (host) to communicate with the library through a
single control path; all other servers send requests to that server through a
network. This configuration is used by Tivoli Storage Manager (TSM).
Configuring all of the servers to communicate with the library through a
single, common control path. This configuration is used in high-availability
environments such as IBM's High Availability Clustered Microprocessing
(HACMP) and Microsoft's Systems Management Server (SMS) and Clustered
Server Environments. Multi-initiator configurations are supported only by
certain adapters and independent software vendors (ISVs). Check with your
ISV.
3-1
Configuring a single logical library to communicate with multiple servers

through multiple control paths. This configuration requires that control paths
be added (see Multiple control paths). It is used by Backup Recovery and
Media Services (BRMS).
Library configuration is not limited to these examples. Many configurations are

possible, and can be designed according to your business needs. For more
information, refer to your host application documentation.
Multiple logical libraries for library sharing

Multiple logical libraries are an effective way for the library to simultaneously back
up and restore data from heterogeneous applications. For example, the library is
partitioned so that it processes:
v Commands from Application A (about Department X) in Logical Library 1
v Commands from Application B (about Department Y) in Logical Library 2
In this configuration, the storage slots and drives in each logical library are
dedicated to that library and are not shared among other libraries. Commands that
are issued by the applications travel to the library through two unique control
paths. Thus, the data processing for:
v Department X is confined to the storage slots and drives in Logical Library 1
v Department Y is confined to the storage slots and drives in Logical Library 2
Multiple control paths

In addition to creating multiple logical libraries, any logical library can be
configured to have more than one control path. When more control paths are
configured, more library sharing configurations and availability options are made
possible. Access to the logical library is on a first-come, first-served basis. Each
control path for a logical library can accept commands while the library is in use
by another control path. By default, only the first drive in a logical library is
LUN-1 enabled.
Note: Microsoft Windows 2000 and Microsoft Windows 2003 Removable Storage
Manager (RSM) does not support multiple control paths within a logical
library. It is recommended that RSM is disabled to use this feature.
For a particular logical library, you can enable as many control paths as there are
drives in that logical library.
Multiple control paths for System i, iSeries, and AS/400

attachment
The use of control paths for the System i, iSeries, and AS/400 servers is unique.
In general, every iSeries adapter must recognize the control path that is associated
with the drives to which it is connected. For the iSeries and AS/400 servers, one to
six drives are supported by LVD and Fibre Channel adapters and the OS/400 5.1,
OS/400 5.2, or i5/OS 5.3 operating system.
Multiple control paths for path failover

Command failures and timeouts are costly. You want your library to run smoothly
and efficiently. To ensure continued processing, the library offers an optional path
failover feature that enables the host device driver to resend the command to an
alternate control path for the same logical library. With control path failover
3-2
installed, the alternate control path includes another HBA, SAN, or library control
path drive. The device driver initiates error recovery and continues the operation
on the alternate control path without interrupting the application. AIX, HP-UX,
Solaris, Linux, and Windows 2003 hosts are currently supported for this feature.
For library firmware of 8.xx or lower the 2U library does not support control path
failover and data path failover. As a result, there is no license key entry for "path
failover" on the 2U library.Library firmware levels higher than 8.xx support path
failover on both the 2U library and the 4U library. Path failover is a combination of
two previous features: control path failover (key that is entered at the library user
interface) and data path failover (key that is entered at the device driver interface).
A single activation key that is entered at the library user interface now activates
both features unless the LTO-3 drive firmware level is equal to or lower than 73P5
or the library firmware is equal to or lower than 1.95. For either or both of these
two cases, the device driver interface data path failover key activation is still
required. For library firmware of 8.xx or lower the path failover feature is available
for select LTO 4 tape drives, and is not supported for Half High drives.Library
firmware levels higher than 8.xx support path failover on LTO 5 Full High and
Half High drives, and also LTO 4 Full Highand Half High drives. Library firmware
levels higher than B.50 support path failover on LTO 6 Tape Drives, and also LTO
5 and LTO 4 Full High drives.
The path failover feature can be installed by the customer. For ordering
information, see Chapter 11, Optional features, replacement parts and power
cords, on page 11-1.
For more information about using the path failover feature, see the IBM Ultrium
Device Drivers Installation and User's Guide.
Library partitioning and element addressing

Library 4U systems with firmware versions of 1.70 and higher, and containing at
least 2 drives, have the ability to configure two logical libraries (create two
partitions). This partitioning is expanded with the new library firmware and
half-high drive integration. It is possible to configure 1, 2, 3, or 4 partitions in the
4U library. Additionally, the 2U library is configured into one or two partitions.
Each library must contain at least one drive per logical library (partition).
Partitioning of 2U libraries
When two half high drives are installed in a 2U library, the library firmware
supports partitioning in the same way that the 4U supports partitioning with two
full high drives today. The first partition contains the first magazine and the first
drive. The second partition contains the second magazine and the second drive.
The I/O station (if configured as I/O) is shared, as is done with the partitioned 4U
library.
One full high drive is "Drive 1". With half high drives, the first half high drive
position is called "Drive 1", The second half high drive position is called "Drive 2."
When one or more half high drives are added to a 4U library, the drive naming
changes. Currently, the first full high drive is "Drive 1" and the second full high
drive is "Drive 2". When you consider that each full high drive slot might contain
one or two half high drives, there are four potential drives in the space that used
3-3
to occupy two. As a result, the first half high drive position, or the first full-high
drive position, is called "Drive 1". The second half high drive position is called
"Drive 2". The third half high drive position, or the second full high drive position,
is called "Drive 3". The fourth half high drive position is called "Drive 4".
Important: In a 4U library, a full high drive sled might be installed in drive slot 1
(drive occupies slot 1 and slot 2) or drive slot 3 (drive occupies slot 3
and slot 4). A full high drive sled must never be installed in drive slot
2 (drive occupies slot 2 and slot 3).
Mixing of drives
The library supports a mix of full high and half high drives in the same physical
library and the same logical library. They support a mix of drives in the same
physical library and the same logical library. They also support a mix of SCSI, SAS,
and Fibre Channel in the same physical library and the same logical library;
however, mixing drive interface types in the same logical library is not
recommended.
Important: Drives that do not share a common media type cannot be mixed in the
same logical library. For instance, Gen 3 and Gen 6 drives cannot use
the same media and so they cannot be mixed. LTO 3 media cannot be
read on LTO 6 drives.
Configuration of a 1 - partition system

A one partition system configured for a 4U library contains any and all drives
present in any drive positions, and it contains all four magazines.
When configured with one logical partition, the Element Address assignments is as
follows: DTE assignments are shown in Figure 3-1.
STE assignments:
Drive 2
Element Address
257
Drive 1
Element Address
256
Drive 4
Element Address
259
Drive 3
Element Address
258
Drive 3
Element Address
258
Drive 1
Element Address
256
Drive 2
Element Address
257
Drive 1
Element Address
256
Drive 4
Element Address
259
Drive 3
Element Address
258
Drive 2
Element Address
257
Drive 1
Element Address
256
Magazine
2
Magazine
4
Magazine
1
Magazine
3
Front side
a77ug161
v Logical Library 1: Slot1 through 23 4096 (0x1000) through 4118 (0x1016) as

shown in Figure 3-4 on page 3-6
Figure 3-1. Configuration of a one - partition system

A two partition system must have at least two drives installed. One drive must be
installed in either drive position 1 or drive position 2, and another drive must be
installed in either drive position 3 or drive position 4. Partition 1 contains any
drives in drive position 1 and drive position 2. Partition 1 also contains magazine 1
and magazine 2. Partition 2 contains any drives in drive position 3 and drive
position 4. Partition 2 also contains magazine 3 and magazine 4.
3-4
When configured with two logical partitions, the Element Address assignments are
as follows: DTE assignments are shown in Figure 3-2.
Drive 2
Element Address
256
Drive 4
Element Address
257
Drive 3
Element Address
256
Drive 3
Element Address
256
Drive 1
Element Address
256
Drive 1
Element Address
256
Drive 2
Element Address
257
Drive 1
Element Address
256
Drive 4
Element Address
257
Drive 3
Element Address
256
Drive 2
Element Address
257
Drive 1
Element Address
256
Magazine
2
Magazine
4
Magazine
1
Magazine
3
Front side
a77ug162
STE assignments
v Logical Library 1: Slot 1 through slot 21 4096 (x1000) through 4116 (0x1014)
Figure 3-2. Configuration of a two - partition system

A three partition system must have at least three drives installed. A drive must be
installed in drive position 1, another drive must be installed in drive position 2,
and another drive must be installed in either drive position 3 or drive position 4.
Partition 1 will contain the first drive and the first magazine. Partition 2 contains
the second drive and the second magazine. Partition 3 contains any drives in drive
position 3 and drive position 4. Partition 3 also contains magazine 3 and magazine
4.
STE assignments
Drive 3
Element Address
256
Drive 4
Element Address
257
Drive 3
Element Address
256
Drive 2
Element Address
256
Drive 2
Element Address
256
Drive 1
Element Address
256
Drive 1
Element Address
256
Magazine
2
Magazine
4
Magazine
1
Magazine
3
Front side
a77ug163
v Logical Library 2: Slot 10 through slot 21 4096 (x1000) through 4107 (0x100B)
Figure 3-3. Configuration of a three - partition system

A four partition system must have four drives. Each partition contains one drive
and one magazine.
When configured with four logical partitions, the Element Address assignments are
as follows: DTE assignments are shown in Figure 3-4 on page 3-6.
STE assignments
3-5
Drive 4
Element Address
256
Drive 3
Element Address
256
Drive 2
Element Address
256
Drive 1
Element Address
256
Magazine
2
Magazine
4
Magazine
1
Magazine
3
Front side
a77ug164
Figure 3-4. Configuration of a four - partition system
SCSI element addressing

Every logical library starts at the first drive slot with the current assigned element
start address (default value 256). It is incremented from the bottom to the top slots
for every drive slot. There is one exception to this addressing scheme to
accommodate libraries currently in the field. A 4U library containing only full high
drives continues to have the addresses assignments 256 and 257, thus causing no
interruptions to their operation. Drive slots are still incremented by 1 for each
drive slot position.
Note: Exchanging drives with different form factors results in the need for library
reconfiguration.
4U Unit with only FH drives
(1 logical library)
SCSI Element
257
256
Slot
4
3
2
1
4U Unit with FH and HH drives

(1 logical library)
258
Slot
4
3
257
256
a77ug165
SCSI Element
Figure 3-5. Examples of SCSI element addressing
The SCSI specification does not allow gaps in the SCSI element addressing. Special
handling is needed for empty drive slots to fulfill the specification. Also
temporarily removed drives need to have their addresses that are preserved to not
confuse the attached host and host application. Generally only drives that are
currently physically available or temporarily removed are reported. Empty
(unused) slots that are located at the bottom or the top must not be reported, with
an exception in a removed condition. A drive slot that does not contain a drive,
and has a position between used slots, must be reported as a SCSI element. To
signal the host application that this slot is not usable, its ACCESS bit is disabled.
3-6
Note: When the number of drives in your library are reduced, update the Logical
Library configuration. This action removes the Attention LED on the front
panel and the exclamation mark on the Home screen that indicates that a
drive is missing.
Updating the Logical Library configuration also updates the drive element
addressing and drive numbering. Replacing LTO half high drives with full high
drives might require you to execute Restore Factory Defaults to correctly update
the drive element addressing and drive numbering. See Configure Library:
Save/Restore on page 5-68.
Persistent binding to ensure SCSI ID assignment

When a server is booted, devices are discovered and assigned SCSI target and
LUN IDs. It is possible for these SCSI assignments to change between boots. Some
operating systems do not guarantee that devices are always allocated the same
SCSI target ID after rebooting. Also, some software depends on this association, so
you do not want it to change. The issue of SCSI ID assignment is addressed by
persistent binding.
Persistent binding is an HBA function that allows a subset of discovered targets to
be bound between a server and device. Implemented by a worldwide node name
(WWNN) or worldwide port name (WWPN), persistent binding causes a tape
drive's WWNN to be bound to a specific SCSI target ID. After a configuration is
set, it survives reboots and any hardware configuration changes because the
information is preserved. If a drive must be replaced, the new drive assumes the
WWNN of the old drive because the WWNN for the drive is location-dependent
within the library. Because the WWNN does not change, persistent binding does
not need changing, thus preventing a potential outage.
Logical unit number (LUN) scanning

The library uses a single SCSI or Loop ID per drive and dual LUNs to control the
tape drive (LUN 0) and library accessor (LUN 1). The library requires a host bus
adapter (HBA) that supports LUN scanning. If it is not enabled, your host system
does not scan beyond LUN 0 and fails to discover the library. It sees only the tape
drive.
Important: Some HBAs, such as RAID controllers, do not support LUN scanning.
Host interfaces
The 2U library and the 4U library are attached to servers with the following
interfaces:
v SCSI (LVD Ultrium 160)
v Serial Attached SCSI (SAS)
v Fibre Channel
Table 3-1. Host drive interface support
Drive
SCSI (LVD Ultra 160)
Ultrium 3 FH
Ultrium 3 HH
Ultrium 3 HH v2
Ultrium 4 FH
SAS
FC
X
X*
X*
X*
3-7
Table 3-1. Host drive interface support (continued)

Drive
SCSI (LVD Ultra 160)
SAS
FC
Ultrium 4 HH
X*
Ultrium 4 HH v2
X*
Ultrium 5 FH
X*
Ultrium 5 HH
X*
Ultrium 6 FH
Ultrium 6 HH
X
X*
Note: * = Dual Port SAS
SCSI interface
Note: Although the LVD hardware in the library can operate in single-ended (SE)
mode, SE operation is not recommended.
The library supports SCSI LVD attachments with SCSI cables with 68-pin,
HD-connectors. SCSI adapters must be properly terminated.
Before the SCSI cables are installed, inspect all cables for damage. Do not install a
cable if it is damaged. Report the damage immediately by contacting your place of
purchase.
The maximum allowable length of your bus cabling depends on the type of SCSI
bus that you use (LVD).
v For a server with an LVD SCSI bus:
Use a maximum system-to-device cable length of 10 m (33 ft) to attach to the
host interface board (SCSI) and one or two daisy-chained drives.
Use a maximum system-to-device cable length of 5 m (17 ft) to attach to the
host interface board (SCSI) and three to six daisy-chained drives.
Note: For maximum performance, it is recommended to have a maximum of
one drive per SCSI bus.
Only use the maximum system-to-device cable length of 25 m (82 ft) to attach
directly to one device (a point to point interconnection).
Note: Daisy-chaining is NOT recommended because of potential issues with
SCSI bus performance, SCSI cables/connectors, and host bus adapters.
Physical characteristics of the SCSI interface

The library operates as a set of SCSI-3 devices. The Ultrium tape drives attach to
servers with an LVD Ultra160 SCSI interface. Each SCSI drive sled uses shielded,
HD68-pin connectors, and attaches directly to a 2-byte-wide SCSI cable.
Any combination of up to two initiators (servers) and up to four targets (devices)
is allowed on a single SCSI bus if the following conditions are met:
v The SCSI bus is terminated properly at each end
v Cable restrictions are followed according to the SCSI-3 specification
Under the SCSI-3 protocol, this type of attachment allows cable lengths of up to 25
m (81 ft) with the appropriate cable and terminator. The table gives the maximum
3-8
bus length between terminators for the LVD interface. For information about cable
connectors, see SCSI connectors and adapters on page 3-10.
Table 3-2. Maximum bus length between terminators
Type of Interconnection
Maximum Bus Length Between Terminators (in

meters)
Point-to-point (1 server and 1 drive)
25
Multi-drop/daisy-chain (1 server and

multiple drives)
12 (LVD)
Note: The maximum bus lengths that are stated in this table include the internal length of
the bus.
For maximum performance, multiple SCSI buses might be required (see Multiple
SCSI buses), and IBM Ultrium Tape Drives must be the only target devices that
are active on the bus.
Note: Daisy-chaining is NOT recommended because of potential issues with SCSI
bus performance, SCSI cables/connectors, and host bus adapters.
Note: For maximum performance, the quantity of tape drives that you can attach
to one SCSI bus is limited, and is based on the type of bus that you have
and the amount of data compression achieved. Ultra160 SCSI buses have a
bandwidth of 160 MB per second. The table lists the types of SCSI buses and
gives the recommended maximum quantity of drives that you can attach.
Table 3-3. Recommended maximum quantity of drives per SCSI bus
Type of Drive
LVD Ultrium 3
Ultra 160 SCSI Bus

1 drive at 2:1 compression
Multiple SCSI buses

The library has two SCSI connectors for each tape drive in the library. Each drive
can be daisy-chained with a SCSI bus jumper.
Note: Daisy-chaining is NOT recommended because of potential issues with SCSI
bus performance, SCSI cables/connectors, and host bus adapters.
Removal of any jumpers creates a SCSI bus for each drive that is installed in your
library for attachment to multiple servers or to multiple SCSI adapter cards on one
server. Each SCSI bus must be terminated. Multiple SCSI buses might be required
for maximum performance, depending on the application and data compression
ratio. Note, however, that library (Medium Changer) control is required on at least
one SCSI bus.
The Medium Changer device is required to be addressed via LUN 1 of the
lowest-numbered drive position of each logical library. The Medium Changer
device might be addressed via LUN 1 of other drives in any logical library.
Any bus that contains a Medium Changer device by way of LUN 1 of a drive is
referred to as a control and data path. Any other bus is referred to as a data path.
For information about control paths, see Multiple control paths on page 3-2.
3-9
Terminating the bus

The SCSI bus and all of the wires in the SCSI cable must be properly terminated
according to the SCSI standard.
You can plug an external terminator into one of the SCSI connectors. A terminator
must be installed on the last device on each end of a string of multiple devices. A
terminator is included with each SCSI Ultrium Tape Drive.
SCSI connectors and adapters

The library is supported by a wide variety of servers (hosts), operating systems,
and adapters. These attachments can change throughout the product's lifecycle. To
determine the latest supported attachments, visit the web at http://www.ibm.com/
storage/. Or, contact your IBM sales representative.
SCSI differential - LVD

IBM LVD tape devices support a bus length of 25 meters (82 ft.) point-to-point, and
12 meters (39 ft.) with multi-drop interconnection (daisy-chaining). For each
daisy-chained device, the maximum cable length must be reduced by 0.5 meters
(1.6 ft).
Important: A faster bus does not imply that an attached device supports that data
rate, but that multiple devices can operate on the bus at that maximum
speed. For a detailed table of SCSI terms and related specifications,
refer to the SCSI Trade Association website at http://www.scsita.org/
terms/scsiterms.html. To ensure best performance, avoid
daisy-chaining, if possible.
SAS interface
A drive sled with a SAS (Serial Attached SCSI) interface is linked directly to
controllers. SAS is a performance improvement over traditional SCSI because SAS
enables multiple devices (up to 128) of different sizes and types to be connected
simultaneously with thinner and longer cables; its full-duplex signal transmission
supports up to 6.0 Gb/s. The SFF-8088 SAS connectors on the Ultrium 5 and
Ultrium 6 tape drives are compatible with SAS-1 or SAS-2 cables. The SFF-8088
SAS connectors on the Ultrium 3 and Ultrium 4 tape drives are compatible with
SAS-1 cables. In addition, SAS drives can be hot-plugged.
SAS drives auto-negotiate speed. There are no configurable topologies thus no
feature switches associated with SAS. The SAS Ultrium 3 and Ultrium 4 half high
drive sleds are single ported and are attached only to one host. The Ultrium 4 full
high, Ultrium 5, and Ultrium 6 full high and half high drives are dual ported, and
are attached to a maximum of two hosts. The intention of the second port is for
redundancy; for failover rather than sharing. Sharing between these two hosts is
limited to active/passive cluster failover. LAN-free drive sharing is not supported.
Ultrium 3 and Ultrium 4 SAS drive sleds use the SFF-8088 connection at the drive
sled end and SFF-8088 or SFF-8470 at the host adapter end.
Fibre Channel interface

Fibre Channel allows for an active intelligent interconnection scheme, called a
Fabric, to connect devices. Everything between the ports on Fibre Channel is called
the Fabric. The Fabric is most often a switch or series of switches that takes the
responsibility for routing.
The library allows the selection of the following Fibre channel port behaviors:
3-10
v LN Port: (default setting) - an automatic configuration that tries arbitrated loop

first, then switched fabric
v L Port - arbitrated loop
v N Port - point to point protocol in a switched fabric topology
Cables and speeds

Ultrium 3, Ultrium 4, Ultrium 5, and Ultrium 6 Fibre Channel tape drives use LC
duplex fiber optics cables.
The maximum distances that the library supports on a Fibre Channel link is
determined by the link speed, the type of fiber (50-micron or 62.5-micron), and the
device to which the library is attached.
If the library attaches to an HBA (Host Bus adapter), refer to the distances that are
supported by the HBA. If the library attaches to a switch, the supported distances
are:
v For a multi-mode 50-micron cable:
1-Gbit link speed = up to 500 m (1640 ft)
v For a multi-mode 62.5-micron cable:
Note: Minimum distance for both 50 micron and 62.5 micron is 2 m (6 ft).
Zoning to isolate devices and enhance security

For security reasons, it is important to limit the devices that a server or servers can
recognize or access. Also, some performance configurations and SAN
configurations result in a device seen multiple times from the same server. For
example, if you have two HBAs from the same server that is connected to an
Ultrium Tape Drive in the library, the drive is detected and displays as two logical
devices. There are two special files for one physical device. Zoning addresses these
issues.
You can partition your SAN into logical groupings of devices so that each group is
isolated from the other and can access only the devices in its own group with
zoning. Two types of zoning exist: hardware zoning and software zoning.
Hardware zoning is based on physical fabric port number. Software zoning is
defined with a worldwide node name (WWNN) or worldwide port name
(WWPN). While zoning can be reconfigured without causing an outage, some
zoning configurations can become complicated. The advantage of the library's
WWNN implementation is that you can avoid the exposure of introducing zoning
errors because you do not have to change the zoning configuration if a drive needs
service or replacement.
Attention: It is recommended that tape storage devices are connected on a
separate HBA from disk storage devices to avoid potential configuration
incompatibilities.
3-11
Fibre Channel host environment

The library is supported by various servers (hosts), operating systems, and
adapters. These attachments can change throughout the product's lifecycle. To
determine the latest supported attachments, visit the web at http://www.ibm.com/
storage/.
Sharing on a storage area network (SAN)

With storage area network (SAN) components, the possibilities for connecting
multiple systems and multiple drives increased. Not all software and systems are
designed to share drives. Before you install a drive that would allow two systems
to share it, check that the systems and their software support sharing. If your
software does not support sharing, note that Fibre Channel switches have a zoning
capability to form a SAN partition. For systems that do not cooperate, use zoning
to prevent the systems from sharing the drive. You can remove zoned partitions as
you upgrade software and system levels.
3-12
Chapter 4. Installation and configuration

Note: Review the information in "Installation planning" before your library is
installed.
The IBM TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library is a customer installed
unit. The customer is responsible for the setup and maintenance of the tape library.
Customers are charged for service if a service contract is not in place.
To install a desktop or rack mounted 2U library or 4U library, complete the
procedures in the order that they are presented.
For a Driveless Library (Feature Code 9001), follow the procedures in the
Installation Instructions that are provided with the library. The installation
instructions are one of the following documents:
v Installation Instructions for Installing Feature Code 9001- Driveless Library Unit,
Part Number 46X0557
v Installation Instructions for Installing the Driveless Library, Part Number
46X0558
The Library Configuration Form

Before beginning the installation and configuration of your library, make a copy of
the Appendix G, Library Configuration Form, on page G-1. Enter library
information (such as serial numbers, types of drives, etc.) and configuration
settings on the Library Configuration Form and store in a safe location for future
reference. Be sure to update this form any time changes are made to your library
hardware or configuration.
Installing your library

Complete these procedures to install your library hardware.
1. Choosing a location on page 4-2.
2. Unpacking the library on page 4-2.
3. Verifying the shipment on page 4-3.
4. Installing the library foot pads (desktop installation) on page 4-3.
5. Removing and storing the shipping lock on page 4-4.
6. Rackmounting the library (rack installation) on page 4-5.
7. Connecting the host interface cable on page 4-14.
8. Connecting a power cord on page 4-17.
4-1
Choosing a location
Choose a location that meets the following criteria:
Table 4-1. Location criteria
Criteria
Definition
Room temperature
10 - 35 C (50 - 95 F )
Note: If the temperature in the room where the library will be installed varies by 15 C (30
F) from the room where the library was stored, allow the library to acclimate to the
surrounding environment for at least 12 hours before unpacking it from the shipping
container.
Power source
v AC power voltage: 100-127 VAC; 200-240 VAC (4 - 2 A)

Note: The 4U library requires two separate power sources to implement redundant
power.
v Line frequency: 50-60 Hz
Place the library near an AC outlet. The AC power cord is the product's main AC
disconnect device and must be easily accessible at all times. Two separate power sources
must be available for redundant power.
Air quality
The library should be placed in an area with minimal sources of particulate contamination.
Avoid areas near frequently used doors and walkways, stacks of supplies that collect dust,
printers, and smoke-filled rooms. Excessive dust and debris can damage tapes and tape
drives.
Humidity
15-80 % RH non-condensing
Clearance
v Back: Minimum of 15.4 cm (6 inches)

v Front: Minimum of 30.8 cm (12 inches)
v Sides: Minimum of 5.08 cm (2 inches)
Rack requirements
Standard 19-inch rack with:

v 2U (88.90 mm/3.5 in.) of clearance for a 2U library
v 4U (177.8 mm/7 in.) of clearance for a 4U library
Rackmounting the library is optional.
Unpacking the library

Note: If the temperature in the room where the library is installed varies by 15 C
(30 F) from the room where the library was stored, allow the library to
acclimate to the surrounding environment for at least 12 hours before it is
unpacked from the shipping container.
1. Before you begin, clear a work surface to unpack the library.
2. Before the library is removed from the shipping container, inspect the container
for shipping damage. If you notice any damage, report it to the shipping
company immediately.
3. Open the shipping container and carefully remove the shipping materials from
the top of the library. Remove the accessory package and set it aside.
Important: When the drive is unpacked, save and store the packaging
materials for future moves or shipping.
4. Lift the library out of the carton and remove the bag from the library. Remove
the foam cushion from the back of the library. Save the packaging materials for
future use.
4-2
Important: Do not place the library on the front panel or the rear panel as this
action might damage the library.
Verifying the shipment

Verify that the following items are included in your library shipment:
v With every library:
Power cord
Foot pads (for desktop installation)
Documentation CD:
- Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
- Translated Safety Notices
- Statement of Limited Warranty (in 29 languages)
IBM License Agreement for Machine Code
Installation Quick Reference
Warranty information (in 9 languages)
Quality Hotline card
v With every library that contains a SCSI drive:
SCSI terminator (one per SCSI drive)
SCSI library-to-host cable (if ordered by customer)
SCSI Wrap tool (one for each library)
v With every library that contains a Fibre Channel drive:
Fibre wrap tool (one per library)
Fibre Channel library-to-host/switch cable (if ordered by customer)
v With every library that contains a SAS drive:
SAS library-to-host cable (if ordered by customer)
SAS Wrap tool (one for each library)
v Optional item that is included in your shipment, if ordered:
Rack Mount Kit
Important: If any of the contents of your shipment are damaged or missing, call
the appropriate number that is listed on the Quality Hotline card.
|
|
|
Important: If your library did not contain preinstalled drives, then install them
now. Refer to Removing/installing/adding a tape drive sled on page
10-3 for instructions on installing your tape drives.
Installing the library foot pads (desktop installation)

If you intend to install your library in a rack, skip this step and proceed to
Removing and storing the shipping lock on page 4-4.
Important: Operating your library on a flat surface without foot pads might
damage your library or cause it not to function properly.
Six foot pads must be installed on the bottom of the library before the library is
used as a desktop unit.
To install the library foot pads:
1. Carefully lay the library on its side.
2. Peel the adhesive from the back of each foot pad.
4-3
3. Install the foot pads on the bottom of the library enclosure by pressing each
foot into one of the six areas (1) as shown in the figure.
a77ug085
Figure 4-1. Installing foot pads on the bottom of the library enclosure
4. Carefully return the library to an upright position.

Important: Do not place any objects on top of the library.
Removing and storing the shipping lock

Important: The shipping lock, which prevents the library accessor from moving
during shipment, must be removed before the library is powered ON.
The shipping lock is held in place with a label and is in the top center of the
library. After the shipping lock is removed, it must be stored on the right side of
the back panel of the library for future use.
To remove and store the shipping lock:
1. Remove the blue label ( 2 ) that is securing the lock ( 1 ) to the top of the
library, then remove the lock (see Figure 4-2 on page 4-5).
4-4
a77ug018
Figure 4-2. Shipping lock and label
2. Store the lock ( 1 ) and label ( 2 ) on the rear panel of the library as shown in
Figure 4-3.
a77ug019
Figure 4-3. Library shipping lock and label storage location
Rackmounting the library (rack installation)

The 2U library and the 4U library are easily installed into a standard 19-inch rack
system. The 2U library requires 2U (3.5 in.) of space. The 4U library requires 4U (7
in.) of space.
If you are not rackmounting your library, skip this procedure and go to Attaching
the library to a server on page 4-14.
4-5
Important: A 2U library weighs 15.59 kg (34.37 lbs.) with one drive and without
media. A 4U library weighs 21.32 kg (47 lbs.) with one drive and
without media.
To reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to the library:
1. Observe local health and safety requirements and guidelines for
manual material handling,
2. Obtain adequate assistance to lift and stabilize the library during
installation or removal, and
3. Always remove all cartridges to reduce the overall weight of the
library.
To install your library in a rack, complete the following steps.
1. Verify which rack kit was included in your shipment. Although there are two
different rack kits, the steps to install them are the same. After verifying the
Rack Kit you received, see Figure 4-4 for the installation steps.
8
a77ug275
Figure 4-4. Rack Kit A mounting hardware
a. The following parts make up Rack Kit A.

v Packaged in cardboard material:
2 rails (not shown) See Figure 4-7 on page 4-9 for a graphic of the rails.
2 mounting brackets (1 in Figure 4-4)
v Packaged in the small bag with no label:
1 Torx wrench (5 in Figure 4-4)
2 anchors (4)
2 countersunk screws for securing the anchors (6)
2 small countersunk screws for securing the tops of the mounting
brackets (7)
4-6
2 large screws to secure the mounting brackets to the rack (8)

v Packaged in the small bag with "Round Hole" on the label: 9 screws used on racks with round holes. (2)
v Packaged in the small bag with "Square Hole" on the label: 9 screws used on racks with square holes. (3)
Note: 8 screws are needed for the installation. One extra screw is provided
for security.
8
2
7
4
Figure 4-5. Rack Kit B mounting hardware
a77ug292
b. The following parts make up Rack Kit B.

v Packaged in plastic material:
2 rails (not shown) See Figure 4-8 on page 4-9 for a graphic of the rails.
2 mounting brackets with captive thumb screws (1 in Figure 4-5)
v Packaged in small bags and labeled with part numbers:
1 Torx wrench (5 in Figure 4-5)
2 anchors (4)
2 countersunk screws for securing the anchors (6)
2 small countersunk screws for securing the tops of the mounting
brackets (7)
v Packaged in the small bag 4 rail-mounting screws - used on racks with
round or square holes (8).
v 12 black plastic square plugs for covering rack holes for the 4U library
application (2)
v 12 black plastic round plugs for covering rack holes for the 4U library
application (3)
4-7
2. Determine the location in your rack for your library to be installed. With a
pencil, mark the location on each vertical rail in your rack.
Note: A 2U library requires 2U (3.5 in.) of rack space. A 4U library requires 4U
(7 in.) of rack space.
2
a77ug133
Figure 4-6. Examples of EIA units for round hole and square hole installations
1 Two EIA units for round hole and
2 square hole installation
3 Wide Gaps within the EIA unit

4 Narrow Gaps between EIA units
3. With the screws for your rack type (round holes or square holes), a #2 Phillips
screwdriver, and ensuring that the flange on each rail points toward the other
to form a shelf, secure one rail to each side of the rack in your chosen rack
location. Secure both the front and back of each rail to the rack. The narrow
end of each rail goes to the rear of the rack. The rails extend to fit various rack
depths. Each rail requires 2U of rack space (1 in Figure 4-7 on page 4-9).
4-8
a77ug009
a77ug274
Figure 4-7. Rear view of Rack Kit A, which shows the narrow part of the rail at the rear of the rack.
Figure 4-8. Rear view of Rack Kit B shows a different mounting method
4-9
a77ug271
a77ug196
Figure 4-9. Kit A (top picture with circles) showing rails installed. Rack Kit B is below showing the front view of this kit
installed.
Note: The rail must be fastened with the bottom of the rail parallel to floor and
at the same level.
4. With the Torx wrench included in your shipment, remove the screws (1) as
shown in Figure 4-10 on page 4-11. Screw locations on the 4U library are
similar.
4-10
a77ug269
Figure 4-10. 2U library rack anchors and mounting brackets
a77ug270
5. Install the library rack anchors (2) as shown in Figure 4-10 on each side of
your library with the longest counter-sunk screws included in the rack kit.
Figure 4-11. Close-up view of mounting of the anchors on both sides of the library
4-11
a77ug263
Figure 4-12. 2U library side screws to remove
6. Install the library-mounting brackets (1) as shown on the 2U library on each

side of the library with the screw that was removed from your library and an
extra short, counter-sunk screw included in the rack kit. (The 4U rack anchors
and mounting brackets are similar.)
a77ug111
7. With library rack anchors and mounting brackets that are installed, slide the
library onto the rails (as shown in Figure 4-13 and Figure 4-14 on page 4-13).
Gently push the library into the rack to lock the REAR anchors installed on
each side of the library. When the library stops, the front mounting brackets are
flush with the vertical rack rails.
Figure 4-13. Sliding the 2U library into the rack
4-12
a77ug109
Figure 4-14. Sliding the 4U library into the rack
a77ug112
8. With a #2 Phillips screwdriver, secure the library to the rack (see Figure 4-15 or
Figure 4-16 on page 4-14) by placing a screw in the center hole of each
mounting bracket and tightening them (1).
Figure 4-15. Securing the 2U library to the rack
4-13
a77ug110
1
Figure 4-16. Securing the 4U library to the rack
9. Install either the round or the square rack hole covers for the 4U library as
shown in Figure 4-16. There are 6 covers for each side for a total of 12.
Attaching the library to a server

The 2U library and the 4U library are attached to servers with these interfaces:
v SCSI (LVD Ultra 160)
v Fibre Channel
v Serial Attached SCSI (SAS)
Connecting the host interface cable

To connect the host interface cables to the library:
1. It is recommended that you shut down and turn OFF the associated server.
Turn OFF all attached devices. Remove the power cables from the server and
all attached accessories.
Important: Failure to remove the power cords from these devices before the
host interface cable is connected might result in damage to the
library.
2. For a SCSI library, attach one end of the host interface cable to one of the
connectors on the back panel of the library (see 1 in Figure 4-17 on page
4-15). For a Fibre Channel library, attach one end of the host interface cable to
the connector on the back panel of the library (see 4 in Figure 4-18 on page
4-15). For a Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) connected library, attach the host end of
the SAS cable to the SAS HBA (see 2 in Figure 4-19 on page 4-15). Full high
drives have dual SAS connectors. Half high drives have one SAS connector.
4-14
Unused SAS connectors do not need to be terminated.
a77ug017
Figure 4-17. Attaching a SCSI host interface cable to the 2U library
a77ug101
Figure 4-18. Attaching host interface cables to the 4U library.
a77ug134
Figure 4-19. Attaching a SAS interface cable to the 2U library
3. Attach the other end of the host interface cable.

v For a SCSI library, connect the host interface cable to the connector on the
SCSI host bus adapter or to the connector on the previous device on the SCSI
bus. Attach the terminator ( 3 in Figure 4-17) to the remaining SCSI
connector on the back panel of the library, if the library is the last or only
4-15
device on the SCSI bus. Otherwise, attach one end of a SCSI cable to the
remaining port and the other end to the next device on the SCSI bus. Make
sure that the last device on the SCSI bus is properly terminated.
Note: Only cables and terminators that are specified for Ultra160 or Ultra320
use or labeled as Multi-Mode are used.
Note: The host bus adapter must be LVD SCSI. A single-ended (SE) SCSI
host bus adapter works, but severely degrades performance, and limit
cable length. If there are any SE devices on the same SCSI bus, the
entire SCSI bus negotiates down to SE speed and severely degrade
performance.
v For a Fibre Channel library, connect the host interface cable to the host or to
a switch. If an SC-to-LC interposer is required, refer to Installing a Fibre
Channel interposer (feature code 5096).
v For a SAS library, connect the Host Interface Cable to the host HBA, with a
direct SFF-8088 connection, or an interposer as required. Unused SAS
connectors do not need termination.
4. Plug the network ethernet cable (2 in Figure 4-17 on page 4-15, 5 in
Figure 4-18 on page 4-15, or 3 in Figure 4-19 on page 4-15) into the ethernet
port on the back panel of the library. If the ethernet connection is directly
attached to a server or laptop, a crossover ethernet cable might be required.
Note: It is the customer's responsibility to supply the crossover cable if one is
required.
Installing a Fibre Channel interposer (feature code 5096)

For a list of supported adapters and required interposers, go to the Technical
Support section on the web at http://www.ibm.com/storage/.
To install the interposer, refer to the procedure.
Host
Fibre
Channel
Network
Library
Fibre
Channel
Drive
Connector
a67m0276
11P1373
Figure 4-20. Interposer installation
1. Connect the host SC fibre cable to the matching side of the interposer.
2. Connect the drive LC fibre side of the interposer to the drive/library.
4-16
Connecting a power cord

Attention: This product can be used only with an approved power cord for your
specific geographic region. Use of an unapproved power cord might result in:
v Not meeting individual country-specific safety requirements;
v Overheating with potential personal injury or property damage; and
v A fracture that results in exposed internal contacts, which potentially subjects the
user to a shock hazard.
a77ug197
For every power supply in the library, complete the following steps.
1. Remove the protective label from the power receptacle on your library.
Figure 4-21. Removing the protective label from the power receptacle
2. Plug one end of the power cord (6 in Connecting the host interface cable
on page 4-14) into each power supply connector on the back panel of the
library.
3. Plug the other end of each power cord into the nearest properly grounded
power outlet. Use separate power sources for each power supply for redundant
power.
Attention: To disconnect all power from the library, remove the power cord
from each outlet. The power button removes power from portions of the library
and the drives, but the power supplies still have AC power at their inputs.
4. Remove the protective plastic on the exterior surfaces of the library.
5. Turn ON the library with the power button. Check the Operator Control Panel
display to make sure that the library is receiving power. If it is not, check the
power connections and your power source. During the Power-On Self Test
(POST), all four LEDs are illuminated briefly, followed by a flashing Ready
LED. When the initialization sequence is complete, the Home screen (see
Power-ON display on page 2-2) displays.
Configuring your library

Note: Review the information in "Installation Planning" before your library is
configured.
The library is configured with the Operator Control Panel or the Web User
Interface. The recommended method for configuring your library is with the Web
User Interface.
4-17
For complete detailed configuration information about all of the functions available
on your library with both the Operator Control Panel and the Web User Interface,
see Chapter 5, Operations, on page 5-1. For default library settings, see
Configure: Save/Restore on page 5-26
Choosing your configuration method

If you choose to use the factory defaults for your library configuration, go to
Choosing factory defaults for your library configuration.
If you choose to use the Web User Interface for configuring your library, go to
Configuring your library with the Web User Interface.
If you choose to use the Operator Control Panel for configuring your library, go to
Configuring your library with the Operator Control Panel on page 4-35.
Write down all library configuration settings on the Appendix G, Library
Configuration Form, on page G-1 for future reference.
Choosing factory defaults for your library configuration

The table below shows the main default library settings. If you wish to use the
defaults, no other changes need to be made before using your library
Item
Default Setting
Logical Libraries
Active Slots
Maximum
I/O Slots
Enabled
DHCP
Enabled
Internet Protocol
IPv4 Only
Bar Code Label Length
Library Mode
Random
AutoClean
Disabled
Encryption
None
IPv6 Stateless Autoconfig
Enabled
For a full list of factory defaults, see Configure: Save/Restore on page 5-26.
Configuring your library with the Web User Interface

To configure your library with the Web User Interface, complete the following
procedures:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Establishing remote access to your library on page 4-19

Logging on to the Web User Interface on page 4-21
Verifying/updating firmware on page 4-21
Choosing general library settings on page 4-22
Choosing the number of logical libraries for your library on page 4-24
Entering Path failover feature activation key on page 4-25
Setting up encryption on page 4-25
8. Choosing drive interface identification/settings on page 4-28

9. Entering library network settings on page 4-29
4-18
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Configure Library: IPSec on page 5-53

Entering user access information with the Web User Interface on page 4-31
Entering date and time on page 4-32
Configuring logs and traces on page 4-32
Entering email notification on page 4-33
15. Configuring SNMP settings on page 4-34

16. Testing encryption configuration for Library Managed encryption on page
4-35
17. Restoring factory default settings on page 4-35
18. Logging out of the Web User Interface on page 2-8
19. Setting the Operator Control Panel Access PIN on page 5-25
Establishing remote access to your library

Static library network settings must be entered with the Operator Control Panel
before the library is accessed remotely with the Web User Interface. If your system
is serviced by DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server, the network
parameters are automatically set. Once remote access is established, you can
complete the configuration of your library with the Web User Interface.
1. Access the Configure menu with the Operator Control Panel.
a. From the screen that shows the library logo (Home screen), press either the
UP or DOWN button to get to the Main menu.
b. Press the DOWN button to select Configure.
c. Press the SELECT button to display the Configure menu.
2. Press the DOWN button to highlight the Network menu.
3. Press the SELECT button to display the Network screen.
4. Select IP STACK, and press the SELECT button to highlight the Internet
Protocol field.
a. Press the DOWN or UP button to scroll through the Internet Protocol
options.
b. Press the SELECT button on the wanted Internet Protocol.
If you select IPv6 protocol, the Configure Network menu includes options for
Stateless Autoconfig and Prefix length.
v Stateless Autoconfig:
Press the DOWN button to highlight Stateless Autoconfig.
Press the SELECT button to highlight the Stateless Autoconfig option
field.
Press the DOWN button to scroll through the Stateless Autoconfig
options.
Press the SELECT button to apply the option.
v Prefix Length:
Press the DOWN button to highlight Prefix Length.
Press the SELECT button to highlight the Prefix Length option field.
Press the UP or DOWN buttons to scroll through the Prefix Length
digits.
Press the SELECT button to apply the Prefix Length digits.
5. If you do not want to select DHCP as your library network setting, skip this
step and proceed to the next step. If you want to select DHCP as your library
network setting, complete the following steps:
4-19
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Press the DOWN button to highlight DHCP.

Press the SELECT button to highlight the DHCP field.
Press the DOWN button to select ON.
Press the SELECT button to apply your selection.
Skip to Step 7.
6. Press the DOWN button to select IP Address. For IPv4 only, enter an IPv4
address. For IPv6 only, enter an IPv6 address. For IPv4 & IPv6, enter an IPv4
address and an IPv6 address.
a. Press the SELECT button to highlight the IP address field.
b. Press the UP or DOWN button to select the digitsin the first octet of your
library's IP address.
c. Press the SELECT button to highlight the digitsin the next octet of your IP
address.
d. After the digits for the last octet are entered, press the SELECT button to
apply your entries.
7. Press the DOWN button to select Netmask. For IPv4, enter an IPv4 Netmask
address. For IPv6, enter an IPv6 Netmask address. For IPv4 & IPv6, enter both
IPv4 and IPv6 Netmask addresses.
a. Press the SELECT button to highlight the Netmask field.
b. Press the UP or DOWN button to select the digits in the first octet of your
library's Netmask address.
c. Press the SELECT button to highlight the digits in the next octet of your
library's Netmask address.
d. After the digits for the last octet of your Netmask address are entered,
press the SELECT button to apply your entries.
8. Press the DOWN button to select Gateway. For IPv4, enter an IPv4 Gateway
address. For IPv6, enter an IPv6 Gateway address. For IPv4 & IPv6, enter a
Gateway address for both IPv4 and IPv6.
a. Press the SELECT button to highlight the Gateway field.
b. Press the UP or DOWN button to select the digits in the first octet of your
library's Gateway address.
c. Press the SELECT button to highlight the digits in the next octet of your
library's Gateway address.
d. After the digits are entered for the last octet in your Gateway address,
press the SELECT button to apply your entries.
9. Press the DOWN button to select Ethernet.
a. Press the DOWN button to highlight the Ethernet field.
b. Press the SELECT button to highlight the Ethernet setting.
c. Press the DOWN button to select a new setting.
d. Press the SELECT button to apply the new setting.
10. Press the DOWN button to highlight SAVE. Press DOWN again to highlight
CANCEL. Continue to press the DOWN button to switch between SAVE and
CANCEL.
v If SAVE is highlighted, press the SELECT button to apply your new
configuration. If changes were made to the Network settings, a menu
displays the option to reboot the library or cancel the reboot. If you select
CANCEL in the menu, you must power cycle the library for the network
changes to be applied.
4-20
If CANCEL is highlighted, press the SELECT button to cancel all of your

entries and return to the Configure menu.
Logging on to the Web User Interface

To complete the configuration of your library with the Web User Interface, follow
the steps.
1. On your host computer, open an Internet browser.
2. In the browser address field, enter your library's IP address.
a. For DHCP or Stateless Autoconfig, use the Operator Control Panel to
determine the IP address that is assigned to your library. Navigate to
Monitor > Library > Network. Scroll down to the library address
information and make note of the address. Enter the IP address in your
internet browser address field to access your library with the Web User
Interface. The library address information might include one or more of the
following address types:
v IP address (IPv4 static or DHCP)
v Static IPv6 address
v Link Local IPv6 address
v Assigned IPv6 address (DHCP or Stateless Autoconfig)
b. For IPv4, enter your library's IP address with the 0.0.0.0 format (four octets).
c. For IPv6, enter your library's IP address with the format:
http://[0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0].
d. For Dual Stack IPv4 + IPv6, enter your library's IP address for either IPv4
or IPv6.
3. When the login screen displays,
a. Select admin for a user ID.
a77ug070
b. Enter secure for a Password.
Figure 4-22. Log in screen on the Web User Interface
Verifying/updating firmware
It is important to run the latest level of firmware. To ensure that you are running
the latest levels of library firmware, drive firmware, and SNMP MIB (Management
Information Base) file, complete this procedure.
1. Verify the SNMP MIB file that is installed on your SNMP server. Verify the
levels of library and drive firmware that is installed on your library by
completing the following steps:
a. Expand Monitor Library in the left navigation pane of the Web User
Interface.
b. Click Library Identity and make note of the Firmware revision.
c. Click Drive Identity and make note of the Firmware revision.
d. Log out of the Web User Interface.
4-21
2. Download the latest library firmware, drive firmware, and SNMP MIB
(Management Information Base) file from the IBM website.
a. Enter http://www.ibm.com/storage/support/ in your internet browser
address field and press Enter on your keyboard.
b. Select Tape Systems from the Product Family list, then select TS3100 Tape
Library or TS3200 Tape Library from the Product list.
c. Click the Download tab, then click Firmware.
d. Click TS3100 Tape Library Firmware or TS3200 Tape Library Firmware.
e. Compare the firmware level available on the web to the levels that you
made note of in step 1. If you are running the latest levels of library and
drive firmware, proceed to the next step. If you are not running the latest
levels of library and drive firmware, download the firmware that must be
updated to your library host.
3. Update library and drive firmware on your library, if necessary.
a. Enter the IP address of your library in your internet browser address field
and press Enter on your keyboard.
b. Log in to your library's Web User Interface.
c. Expand Service Library in the left navigation pane of the Web User
Interface.
d. Click Upgrade Firmware.
e. Browse to the new firmware level on your host, then click Update. Do this
updating for both library and drive firmware, if necessary.
4. Install the MIB file on your SNMP server. Refer to your server application
documentation for instructions.
Choosing general library settings

If your library contains one drive or logical library, both general and specific
settings are combined into one table (see Figure 4-23 on page 4-23).
1. Expand Configure Library in the left navigation pane of the Web User
Interface.
2. Click General and enter:
v Library Name - Enter a name for your library.
v Library Mode (select one of the following per logical library):
Random: In random mode, the library allows the server's (host's)
application software to select any data cartridge in any order.
Sequential: In sequential mode, the library's firmware predefines the
selection of the cartridges. After initialization, the firmware causes the
library to select the first available cartridge found (counting from the I/O
station through the last slot in your library) for loading into the drive.
Important: If a Logical Library in Sequential Mode contains more than
one drive, only the first drive in the Logical Library is used.
- Autoload: Sequential mode with autoload mode ON loads the first
available cartridge (slot with the lowest numerical value that contains a
cartridge) automatically if the library powers ON with an empty drive.
- Loop: Sequential mode with loop mode ON loads the cartridge in the
lowest numerical slot after the cartridge in the highest numerical slot is
filled and sent back to its home slot. This mode allows endless backup
operations without user interaction.
4-22
v Active Slots - Select the number of active slots you want to assign in your
library. This item affects the number of Res. (Reserved) Slots in your library.
For more information, refer to Configuring I/O stations and reserving slots
on page 5-79.
Note: Slots can be reserved so that they are invisible to the host. It might be
necessary to reserve slots to match the number of available slots to the
ISV software licensing. Slots are reserved starting with the highest
element address. If your library does not have a dedicated cleaning
cartridge slot, and you want to enable Auto Clean, you must designate
a reserved slot, which can be used to hold the cleaning cartridge.
v I/O Station Enabled - If checked, the I/O station is enabled. If not, the first 3
slots (in a 4U library or the first slot in a 2U library) are configured as
storage. See Configure Library: General on page 5-44.
v Auto Clean Enabled - Automatically cleans drive when drive requests
cleaning and cleaning cartridge is present in a reserved slot or a dedicated
cleaning slot. All cleaning cartridges must have CLN as part of the bar code.
The Universal Cleaning Cartridge has the bar code label CLNUxxLx.
v Bar Code Label Length Reported to Host - Choose 6 - 8. With 6, the first 6
characters of the cartridge VOLSER (Volume Serial Numbers) are reported to
the host. With 8, all characters in the VOLSER (first six characters plus the
two character media type identifier) are reported to the host. For more
information about bar code labels, see Bar code label on page 6-5.
v Click one:
Refresh - Click this button to update the current screen.
Apply Selections - Click this button to submit the changes that are made
to the screen.
Figure 4-23. The 2U library Configure Library: General screen
4-23
Figure 4-24. Example: The 4U library Configure Library: General screen
3. If your library has more than one drive, proceed to Choosing the number of
logical libraries for your library. If your library has one drive, proceed to
Entering Path failover feature activation key on page 4-25.
Choosing the number of logical libraries for your library

Note: Review the information in Determining the number of logical libraries
(partitions) on page 3-1 before you complete this procedure.
If you have a 2U or 4U library with only one drive, or do not want to partition
your library, proceed to the next section, Entering Path failover feature activation
key on page 4-25.
One cartridge magazine cannot be assigned to two logical libraries. If you partition
a multi-drive library, each of the magazines must be assigned to a logical library
on a magazine boundary. The entire magazine must be part of one logical library
only.
Note: If you have a 2U library with two drives, you can have two logical libraries.
In a fully populated 4U library with four half high drives and four logical libraries,
resource assignments are:
v Logical Library 1 contains Drive 1 and the lower left cartridge magazine.
v Logical Library 2 contains Drive 2 and the upper left cartridge magazine.
v Logical Library 3 contains Drive 3 and the lower right cartridge magazine.
v Logical Library 4 contains Drive 4 and the upper right cartridge magazine.
Note: For more information about various configurations, see Library
partitioning and element addressing on page 3-3.
The I/O station and slots that are reserved for cleaning cartridges, if any, are
shared among all logical libraries.
4-24
a77ug098
1. Click Configure Library > Logical Libraries in the left navigation pane.
Figure 4-25. The 4U library Configure Library: Logical Libraries page
2. Select the number of logical libraries you would like to create in your library.
3. Click Submit to create the logical libraries.
Entering Path failover feature activation key

Path failover is a combination of two previous features: Control Path failover (key
that is entered at the library user interface) and Data Path failover (key that is
entered at the device driver interface).
a77ug117
1. Click Configure Library > Path Failover in the left navigation pane.
Figure 4-26. The Configure Library: Path failover feature activation screen
2. Enter the Control Path failover 12-digit feature key in the spaces provided.
Note: A single activation key (available by purchasing Feature Code 1682)
entered at the library user interface now activates both features unless
the LTO-3 drive firmware level is equal to or lower than 73P5 /or the
library firmware is equal to or lower than 1.95. For either or both of
these two cases, the device driver interface Data Path failover key
activation is still required.
3. Click Activate to save the feature key. The following screen displays if you
correctly entered the feature key.
Figure 4-27. Feature key verification screen
Setting up encryption
Note: Application Managed Encryption (AME) does not require a key. Library
Managed Encryption (LME) and System Managed Encryption (SME) require
a license key that is available by purchasing Feature Code 5900.
Minimum Prerequisites for Application Managed Encryption (AME) - LTO 6:
v SAS and Fibre Channel LTO Ultrium 6 Tape Drive (Full High or Half High)
4-25
v Ultrium 6 Tape Cartridge

v Library firmware level B.50 or higher
v Drive firmware level C800 or higher, for reference go to http://www.ibm.com/
fixcentral.
v Encryption Key Manager application
Minimum Prerequisites for Application Managed Encryption (AME) -LTO 5:
SAS and Fibre Channel LTO Ultrium 5 Tape Drive (Full High or Half High)
Ultrium 5 Tape Cartridge
Library firmware level 9.00 or higher
Drive firmware level BBNE/BBNF or higher, for reference go to
http://www.ibm.com/fixcentral.
v
v
v
v
Minimum Prerequisites for Application Managed Encryption (AME) - LTO 4:

v Library firmware level 4.0 or higher
v Drive firmware level 74H4 or higher
Minimum Prerequisites for Library Managed Encryption (LME) and System
Managed Encryption (SME) - LTO 6:
v Drive firmware level C800 or higher, for reference go to http://www.ibm.com/
fixcentral.
v Drive firmware level BBNE/BBNF or higher, for reference go to
http://www.ibm.com/fixcentral.
v Feature Code 5900 (Transparent LTO Encryption)
Setting a drive's method of encryption
4-26
a77ug199
1. Click Configure Library > Encryption in the left navigation panel.
Figure 4-28. Feature activation key screen
2. On the Encryption screen, enter the Feature Activation Key to make available
the library managed and the system managed encryption options.
3. Click Activate to save the key and expand the screen for more encryption
settings.
Figure 4-29. Configure Library: Encryption Activation screen
4. Select Enable SSL for EKM to enable Secure Sockets Layer for the Encryption
Key Manager application.
5. Select an Encryption method for each logical library.
v Without an encryption license key, select None or Application Managed
Encryption.
v With an encryption license key, select Library Managed Encryption or
System Managed Encryption.
6. Select an Encryption policy for each logical library.
v Encrypt All: This is the default policy. It encrypts all cartridges with the
default data keys that are specified in the EKM. This setting applies to all
drives in a 3573 logical library.
v Internal Label - Selective Encryption: This policy is based on the internal
volume label information. Currently, the only application that supports this
4-27
option is Symantec NetBackup. It encrypts only cartridges with pool

identifiers 1500 - 9999 (inclusive), with keys specific to each pool. Labels for
these keys are generated by the tape drive that is based on the pool
identifier; for instance, key label IL_NBU_1505 is generated for a cartridge
in pool 1505.
v Internal Label - Encrypt All: This policy is based on the internal volume
label information. Currently, the only application that supports this option
is Symantec NetBackup. It encrypts all cartridges. Cartridges with pool
identifiers 2000 - 65535 (inclusive) are encrypted with keys specific to each
pool. Labels for these keys are generated by the tape drive that is based on
the pool identifier; for instance, key label IL_NBU_2505 is generated for a
cartridge in pool 2505.
7. A primary and secondary EKM server is set for each logical library. Each
partition has its own Encryption and EKM settings. Maintaining primary and
secondary EKM servers is wanted for maximum availability of encrypted
backup and recovery. These settings are required for Library Managed
Encryption only. Enter the EKM Server Setting information.
v Primary IP address (IPv4 or IPv6): Enter the IP address of the primary
EKM server.
v Primary TCP port: After the Primary IP address is entered, the library
automatically sets the value of the Primary TCP port.
v Secondary IP address (IPv4 or IPv6): Enter the IP address of the secondary
EKM server.
v Secondary TCP port: After the Secondary IP address is entered, the library
automatically sets the value of the Secondary TCP port.
Note: The Default Port for TCP (SSL disabled) is 3801. The Default Port for
SSL is 443. These values are the default values set by the library.
They are changed depending on the user configuration but the user
must make sure that they match the EKM properties file.
Important: The Advanced Encryption Settings are for Engineering
Support only. Ensure that the Advanced Encryption Settings
fields are set to their default value of "No Advanced Setting".
8. Click Activate to apply the changes.
9. Record the Feature Activation Key (or apply one of the labels) on the
Appendix G, Library Configuration Form, on page G-1 for future reference.
It is important to save your extra Feature Activation Key labels in a secure
location for future reference.
10. Install the Encryption Key Manager (EKM) application on your host. Refer to
the EKM documentation for detailed instructions (refer to the EKM documents
listed in "Related Publications").
Choosing drive interface identification/settings

1. Click Configure Library > Drives in the left navigation pane.
4-28
Topology
a77ug095
FC-AL Loop ID
Figure 4-30. The Configure Library: Drives screen
2. Select the wanted settings for each drive listed (either SCSI, SAS, or Fibre
Channel). See Figure 4-30.
3. Click one:
v Refresh - to update the current screen
v Submit - to apply the changes that are made to the screen
Note: If you have a Fibre Channel drive connected to an AS/400 Host, direct
attached to the fibre HBA, set the Port Type to L-Port.
Entering library network settings
a77ug074
This page shows the current network configuration of the library and allows
modification to the configuration. When a change is requested, a pop-up box
confirms the request.
1. Click Configure Library > Network in the left navigation pane, to display the
Network page.
Figure 4-31. Configure Library: Network page
Important: Do not click the Submit button until all changes are made to the
Network page. Once the Submit button is clicked, no other
changes are made until after the library applied the current
changes.
4-29
After the Submit button is clicked, depending on the changes that

are made, you are either disconnected and need to log in again or
reboot the library.
Clicking the Refresh button refreshes the page and any changes
that are made are not retained.
2. Select a Protocol Stack - Choose IPv4 only, IPv6 only, or Dual Stack IPv4 &
IPv6.
If you choose Dual Stack IPv4 & IPv6, you must be prepared to enter both
IPv4 and IPv6 IP addresses. The sections gray out depending on the choices
that are made here.
3. Enter the Host Name.
Note: The underscore (_) is not allowed as part of a host name.
4. Enter the Domain Name.
5. DNS Primary - Enter the IP address of your primary DNS server.
6. DNS Secondary - Enter the IP address of your secondary DNS server.
7. Enable SSL for Web - If you want to have SSL (Secure Sockets Layer)
enabled, place a check mark in this box.
Note: If you get a security certificate alert when you log in to the Web User
Interface, you can install the certificate or allow an exception
(depending on the internet browser you are using). SSL is enabled
when the URL begins with https:// and some browsers show a lock.
8. Ethernet Settings - Ethernet Settings choices are Auto (the default), 10
Mbit/Half, 10 Mbit/Full, 100 Mbit/Half, 100 Mbit/Full.
9. Enter IPv4 settings (if applicable).
a. Enable DHCP - Click this item ON to have the IP address of your library
automatically set by the DHCP server.
b. Static Address - Enter the assigned IPv4 address. The format of an IPv4 IP
address is a 32-bit numeric address that is written as four numbers
separated by periods.
c. Network Mask - Enter the assigned IPv4 Network Mask.
d. Gateway address - Enter the assigned IPv4 Gateway address. This address
allows access outside the local network.
automatically set by the DHCP server.
b. Enable Stateless Auto Config - Click this item ON to have the IP address
of your library that is automatically set by the network router.
c. Static address - Enter the assigned IPv6 address. The format of an IPv6 IP
address is a 128-bit numeric address written as 8 groups of four numbers
that are separated by colons.
d. Prefix length - The default prefix length is set to 64, but can be set to any
length, depending upon the address used.
e. Gateway address - Enter the assigned IPv6 Gateway address. This address
11. Click one:
v Refresh - to cancel the changes that are made to the screen.
v Submit - to apply the changes that are made to the screen.
4-30
Note: Depending on the changes that are made, you are either disconnected
and must log in again, or reboot the library. If a reboot is required, the
Warning message displays after the Submit button is clicked.
Figure 4-32. Warning screen
The library must be rebooted or the changes do not take place.
Entering user access information with the Web User Interface

The Configure Library > User Access page is only accessible to the Admin and
Service login. Access is denied to User and Superuser logins.
The Admin login has access to all library functions except Service Library >
Advance Diagnostics.
a77ug082
The Service login has access to all library functions including Service Library >
1. Click Configure Library > User Access in the left navigation pane.
Figure 4-33. The Configure Library: User Access screen
2. Check the Disable Superuser check box to disable the Superuser role for this
library. Check the Disable User check box to disable the User role for this
library. Clear these boxes to allow these roles access to your library.
3. Choose a Role.
Note: Admin can select User, Superuser, and Admin roles. Service can select
User, Superuser, Admin, and Service roles.
v User (if enabled)
v Superuser (if enabled)
v Admin
v Service
4-31
Note: Only one password is set for each Role.

4. Enter the New Password (up to 10 alphanumeric characters).
5. In Repeat Password, enter the new password again.
6. In Support Name, enter the name of the person that is able to offer the user
help with the library.
Note: Only one support person is configured for the entire tape library. The
support person might or might not be one of the user, superuser, or
admin account holders.
7. In Support Phone, enter the phone number of the person that is able to offer
the user help with the library.
8. In Support Email, enter the email address of the person that is able to offer the
user help with the library.
9. Click one:
v Refresh - to update the current screen.
Entering date and time
a77ug061
1. Click Configure Library > Date & Time in the left navigation pane.
Figure 4-34. The Configure Library: Date and Time screen
2. Enter the Time with the HH:MM:SS 24-hour format.

3. Enter the Date with the MMDDYYYY format.
4. Click one:
v Refresh - to cancel all of your entries and leave the settings as they were.
Configuring logs and traces

This function is not available on the Operator Control Panel.
1. Click Configure Library > Logs & Traces in the left navigation pane.
4-32
Figure 4-35. The Configure Library: Logs and Traces screen
2. For Error Log Mode, select Continuous so all information for logs and traces
are captured.
3. Trace Level and Trace Filter options are changed by Service personnel only.
4. Click one:
Entering email notification

This function is not available on the Operator Control Panel.
a77ug065
Use this menu item to set up email notification of library errors and warnings.
1. Click Configure Library > Email Notification in the left navigation pane.
Figure 4-36. The Configure Library: Email notification screen
If you want to be notified when an error occurs, select Notify Errors.

If you want to be notified when a warning occurs, select Notify Warnings.
In To Email Address, enter the email address to which the information is sent.
In SMTP Server Address (IPv4 or IPv6), enter the IP address of the SMTP
server that is associated with the email address.
6. Enter the Domain Name for your library. This field cannot be blank when
event notification is used.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Note: If you attempt to enter a blank value for the Domain name, a warning
message displays. It says If you are using Event Notification then a
value is required for the Domain Name.
7. Click one:
4-33
Configuring SNMP settings

This page shows the current SNMP configuration of the library and allows
modification to the configuration. When a change is requested, a box checks to
confirm the changes.
a77ug278
Click SNMP in the left navigation pane to display the SNMP page.
Figure 4-37. Configure Library: SNMP page
Note: For information about SNMP, see SNMP messaging on page 1-6 and
Appendix F, SNMP status MIB variables and traps, on page F-1.
Note: If SNMP is not enabled (cleared), all SNMP fields are disabled.
SNMP
v Enabled - Check this box to have SNMP traps sent to an SNMP Management
console.
v Community Name - An SNMP community name is a text string that acts as a
password to authenticate messages that are sent between the SNMP remote
management application and the library. Enter your preferred name, or leave as
"public".
SNMP DESTINATIONS
v Target 1 - IP Address - If SNMP traps are enabled, enter an IP address where

SNMP traps are sent.
v Target 2 - IP Address - Enter an optional second IP address where SNMP traps
are sent, or leave as 0.0.0.0.
v Target 3 - IP Address - Enter an optional third IP address where SNMP traps are
sent, or leave as 0.0.0.0.
v Version - The library offers three versions of the SNMP protocol; v1, v2, and v3.
Select a version for each Target IP address.
4-34
v Audit Logging - If SNMP is enabled and Audit Logging is enabled, the library
sends SNMP traps to an SNMP Management console when the library or tape
drive configuration changes.
Note: This option is available only if the library firmware is 9.00 or higher, and
the latest library MIB file is added to the SNMP Management console.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
SNMP V3 SECURITY
v User Name - Enter your preferred name, or leave as "initial".
v Authentication - The options for Authentication are none, MD5, or SHA.
v Authentication Password - The Authentication Password must be at least 8
characters in length. If Authentication is set to none, this field and the Privacy
and Privacy Password fields are disabled.
v Privacy - The options for Privacy are none, or DES. If Privacy is set to none,
then the Privacy Password field is disabled.
v Privacy Password - The Privacy Password must be at least 8 characters in
length.
|
|
|
|
Note: The factory default settings for SNMP V3 Security are
Testing encryption configuration for Library Managed encryption
v User Name - initial

v Authentication - none
v Privacy - none
If you purchased an encryption activation key (Feature Code 5900: Transparent
LTO Encryption) and any LTO 4 Fibre Channel or SAS drives in your library are
configured for library managed encryption, run the Key Path Diagnostic to ensure
that your encryption configuration is correct.
Important: Ensure that library firmware and drive firmware are up to date before
the Key Path Diagnostic procedure is run. Library firmware level must
be greater than 6.xx. See Verifying/updating firmware on page 4-21.
For information about running the diagnostic procedure, refer to Service Library:
Key Path Diagnostics on page 5-73.
Restoring factory default settings

If you want to erase your current configuration and restore factory default settings,
do so by selecting Restore Factory Defaults in the Configure Library >
Save/Restore menu. See Configure Library: Save/Restore on page 5-68.
The factory default settings are listed in Table 5-4 on page 5-27.

To log out of the Web User Interface, click Logout in the upper right corner of the
screen.
Important: If you click the X in the upper right corner of your internet browser
window, you do not log out of the Web User Interface.
Configuring your library with the Operator Control Panel

If you choose to use the Operator Control Panel for configuring your library, go to
Configure menu on page 5-18 for information about configuring the following
items:
4-35
v
v
v
v
v
Logical libraries
Library settings
Drives
Network
Set access PIN
v Set date and time

v Path failover
Note: IPSec configuration is limited to the Web User Interface.
To complete the configuration of your library, the following items must be accessed
from the Web User Interface:
v Encryption (see Configure Library: Encryption on page 5-47)
v User access information (see Configure Library: User Access on page 5-63)
v Logs and traces (see Configure Library: Logs & Traces on page 5-66)
v Event notification information (see Configure Library: Event Notification on
page 5-66)
v Key Path diagnostic (see Service Library: Key Path Diagnostics on page 5-73)
v Updating firmware (see Service Library: Upgrade Firmware on page 5-74)
Preparing the host

Follow these general guidelines:
1. Ensure that your backup application supports the SCSI, SAS, or Fibre Channel
host bus adapter (HBA).
2. If the host server is connected to a network, check with the system
administrator before host power is turned OFF.
3. Install a suitably rated HBA. Remember if there are any single-ended (SE)
devices on the same SCSI bus, the entire SCSI bus negotiates down to SE speed.
This action severely degrades performance and limits cable length.
4. Ensure that LUN scanning is enabled on the SCSI host adapter.
5. Ensure that Fibre Channel Tape Support is enabled on the Fibre Channel HBA
if a library with a Fibre Channel drive is installed.
6. Ensure that SAS support is enabled on the SAS HBA if a library with a SAS
drive is installed.
Verifying the connection

1. Depending on the server configuration, you might need to change the SCSI ID,
SAS, or Fibre Channel Loop ID of the library, if the current ID is the same as
another device on the bus.
2. When the host server is powered ON, install the software or drivers that are
compatible with the library. Backup software packages might require more
software or licensing to communicate with the library accessor.
3. If the library has a SCSI attachment, ensure that the library is properly
terminated. If the library is the only SCSI device, other than the SCSI host
adapter on the selected SCSI bus, it must be terminated. Likewise, if the library
is physically the last SCSI device on the SCSI bus, it must be terminated. Only
the devices physically at the beginning and end of the SCSI bus are terminated.
4. Confirm that the host server operating system recognized the library. In
Microsoft Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, or in Windows 2000 you can
4-36
verify this recognition by going to Settings > Control Panel > System >
Hardware > Device Manager > Tape Drive and/or Medium Changer.
For more information about verifying the connection of SCSI devices, consult the
operating system documentation.
Cartridge magazines
The library has removable magazines. Magazine access is password protected. For
safety reasons, the accessor motion is stopped when a magazine is removed.
The magazines are released with the Operator Control Panel or the Web User
Interface. In case the Operator Control Panel or Web User Interface initiated
process failed or the library no longer has power, a manual emergency release is
available.
Important: To manually release a magazine, see Releasing the magazines
manually on page 9-1. This manual process is used only if the
magazine cannot be released with the Operator Control Panel or the
Web User Interface.
2U library cartridge magazines

The 2U library has two cartridge magazines. The left cartridge magazine (see
Figure 4-38) has 11 storage slots and houses the elective 1-slot I/O station. The
right magazine (see Figure 4-39 on page 4-38) has 12 storage slots. For information
about Element Addressing, see 2U library I/O slot, storage slots, drive slot
element addresses, and physical locations on page B-1.
a77ug020
Note: On some 2U Libraries before library microcode level 1.9, slot 11 might be
labeled a "Not used" slot that contained a "Slot blocker". With library
microcode level 1.9 or higher, there is an option to remove the "Slot blocker"
and place that slot into use. See Removing the slot blocker - 2U library on
page 10-9.
Figure 4-38. 2U library left magazine
4-37
a77ug021
Figure 4-39. 2U library right magazine
2U Library I/O station
|
|
|
|
The I/O (input/output) station (see Figure 4-40 on page 4-39) in a 2U library is
part of the left magazine. To open the I/O station, select Control > Open I/O
Station. The I/O station slot opens, and the "Unlocking I/O station" message
displays. Wait for the "Insert/remove cartridge and close I/O station" message to
insert or remove the cartridge, then close the I/O station by gently pushing the
slot back into the left magazine.
|
|
Note: It is recommended to wait for the messages before you insert or remove
cartridges to ensure that the library is ready to handle the cartridges.
4-38
a77ug022
Figure 4-40. 2U library I/O station in the left magazine
4U library cartridge magazines
a77ug105
The 4U library has four cartridge magazines, two on each side (see Figure 4-41 and
Figure 4-42 on page 4-40). The upper left magazine has 12 storage slots. The lower
left magazine has 9 storage slots and houses the elective 3-slot I/O station (1 in
Figure 4-41). The upper right magazine has 12 storage slots. The lower right
magazine has 12 storage slots. For information about Element Addressing, see 4U
library I/O slots, storage slots, drive slots element addresses, and physical
locations on page B-2.
Figure 4-41. 4U library left magazines
4-39
a77ug106
Figure 4-42. 4U library right magazines
4U library I/O station

The I/O station in a 4U library (see Figure 4-43) is part of the lower left magazine.
To open the I/O station, select Control > Open I/O Station. The I/O station slot
opens, and the "Unlocking I/O station" message displays. Wait for the
"Insert/remove cartridge and close I/O station" message to insert or remove the
cartridge, then close the I/O station by gently pushing the slot back into the left
magazine.
|
|
Note: It is recommended to wait for the messages before you insert or remove
cartridges to ensure that the library is ready to handle the cartridges.
a77ug103
|
|
|
|
|
Figure 4-43. 4U library I/O station in the lower left magazine
There are finger holes on the back side of the I/O station (see 1 in Figure 4-44 on
page 4-41) that allow the user to push the cartridges out of the I/O station.
4-40
a77ug104
Figure 4-44. Finger Holes on back side of 4U Library I/O station
Populating the library with data cartridges

Important: Cartridges that are placed in the library must be labeled with the
correct bar code labels. For more information, see Chapter 6, Ultrium
media, on page 6-1.
For information about working with the cartridge magazines, see Cartridge
magazines on page 4-37.
1. Properly label the data cartridges. Refer to Chapter 6, Ultrium media, on
page 6-1.
2. Unlock the cartridge magazines.
v With the Operator Control Panel: Control > Magazines select Left or Right.
v With the Web User Interface: Manage Library > Release Magazine select
Left or Right.
Note: The magazines will relock after 15 seconds if they are not removed.
3. Remove the selected magazines from the library.
4. Insert cartridges in the magazines. Do not store cartridges in the I/O station or
in the dedicated cleaning cartridge slot. See 2U library I/O slot, storage slots,
drive slot element addresses, and physical locations on page B-1 or 4U
library I/O slots, storage slots, drive slots element addresses, and physical
locations on page B-2 for determining slot location.
5. Put magazines back into the library. The library automatically starts and
completes an inventory check.
4-41
Inserting the cleaning cartridge

Important: Cleaning cartridges that are placed in the library must be labeled with
the correct bar code labels. For more information, see Chapter 6,
Ultrium media, on page 6-1.
Note: Earlier versions of the 4U library contained a Dedicated Cleaning Slot
(DCS). This DCS can be retained and is supported by future library
firmware updates. However, library firmware later than 1.95 allows removal
of the DCS, thus enabling this slot to be used as a storage slot. Once the
DCS is removed, the Auto Clean cleaning cartridge slot must be configured
as described. If the DCS is removed, it can be reinstated only by restoring
factory default settings. To remove the DCS, complete the following
procedure with the Operator Control Panel (OCP): Configure > Library
Settings > General > Remove DCS > No/Yes > Save.
The following criteria must be followed for Auto Clean to function:
1. A storage slot must be reserved (Res or RSVD).
v Reserving a slot is accomplished by reducing the Active Slot count in any
particular logical library. A reserved slot (or slots) is always the last slot in
the last magazine of any particular logical library. A cleaning cartridge that is
in a reserved slot is available to any logical library drive even if the reserved
slot is not in that particular logical library. If the library contains multiple
logical libraries, typically, the last logical library is chosen to be the reserved
slot that contains the cleaning cartridge. As with a library with a single
logical library, this slot is the last physical slot in the library (upper right
magazine, uppermost rear slot).
2. The Auto Clean function must be Enabled.
v Operator Control Panel: Configure > Library Settings > Auto Clean:
Enabled
v Web User Interface: Configure Library > General > Auto Clean Enabled >
check box
Note: Enabling Auto Clean without first reserving a slot for the cleaning
cartridge results in the library System Status screen (Web User Interface)
reporting the attention conditions:
v Media Attention
v Chk Media/Rsvd Slot
3. To install a cleaning cartridge in the 2U or 4U library:
a. Properly label the cleaning cartridge (CLNxxxLx). Refer to Chapter 6,
b. Place the cleaning cartridge in the library with the same procedure that is
described in Populating the library with data cartridges on page 4-41.
Ensure that the cleaning cartridge is placed in a reserved slot or the DCS (if
one exists, 4U only).
c. If the cleaning cartridge is not in a reserved slot, use the Operator Control
Panel: Control > Move Cartridge or the Web User Interface: Manage
Library > Move Media to move the cleaning cartridge into the reserved slot
or the DCS (if one exists, 4U only).
4. Replace the cleaning cartridge, if needed.
v A cleaning cartridge must be replaced after 50 uses. To determine the
number of cleaning uses remaining, click the Web User Interface, Monitor
Library > Inventory.
4-42
v Click the (+) located under that magazine presentation to expand the detail
of resident cartridges.
v Cleaning cartridges are labeled as CLNxxxLx. Observe the information that is
displayed for the slots that contain a cleaning cartridge. The number of
Media Loads represent how many times the cleaning cartridge was used. The
number 50, minus that Media Load number represents the number of uses
remaining.
Registering for My Notification

My Notification registration provides email notification when firmware levels are
updated and available for download and installation.
To register for My Notification:
1. Visit the web at http://www.ibm.com/us/.
2. Click Get Support.
3. Click My support.
Note: Library firmware and tape drive firmware are verified and released
together. When you update to the latest firmware, verify that all installed
components such as tape drives, and library are at the latest levels noted
on the Support website. Mixing different levels of library and tape drive
firmware is not supported and might cause unpredictable results.
4-43
4-44
Chapter 5. Operations
The table lists menu navigation shortcuts to activities that are performed by way of
the Operator Control Panel or the Web User Interface.
Before using the Operator Control Panel or the Web user Interface, review the
information in Chapter 3: User Interfaces.
Table 5-1. Menu navigation shortcuts
Information/
Activity
Menu Navigation Shortcuts

Accessor, number Monitor > Library > Status >

of cartridge
Cycles
moves
For More Info

Monitor:
Library on
page 5-10
Web User Interface
For More Info
Monitor Library > Library Monitor Library:

Status
Library Status on
page 5-37
Auto Clean,
enable
Configure > Library Settings > Configure:

Auto Clean
Library on
page 5-20
Configure Library >

General
Cartridge,
currently
active/moving
Monitor > Library > Status >

Act. Cart

Status
Library Status on
page 5-37
Cartridge,
determine
encryption
Not available with this interface
Cartridge,
Inventory
Monitor > Inventory >

Magazines
Monitor:
Inventory on
page 5-14
Cartridge, Move
Control > Move Cartridges
Manage Library > Move

Control:
Media
Move
Cartridges on
page 5-17
Manage Library:
Move media on
page 5-42
Monitor:
Inventory on
page 5-14
Monitor Library > Drive

Status
Monitor Library:
Drive Status on
page 5-38

Status
Monitor Library:
Drive Status on
page 5-38
Monitor > Inventory > Drive

Cartridge
currently in drive (n)
(n), Cartridge
label and slot
source
Monitor:
Library on
page 5-10
Configure
Library: General
on page 5-44
Monitor Library >

Inventory
Monitor Library:
Inventory on
page 5-40
Manage Library >

Perform Inventory
Manage Library:
Perform
inventory on
page 5-43
Cartridge in
drive (n),
cartridge slot
source
Monitor > Drive > Status >

Drive (n)
Monitor:
Drive on
page 5-12
Configuration,
save and restore*
Configure > Save/Restore
Configure:
Configure Library >
Save/Restore Save/Restore
on page 5-26
Configure
Library:
Save/Restore on
page 5-68
* Note: From this location, you can not only save and restore your library configuration, but you
can also restore factory defaults.
Control path,
enable
Configure > Drive > Control

Path
Configure:
Drive on
page 5-23
Configure Library >

Drives
Configure
Library: Drives
on page 5-50
5-1
Table 5-1. Menu navigation shortcuts (continued)

Information/
Activity

For More Info
Web User Interface
For More Info
Date and time,

current setting
Monitor > Library > Status >

Date/Time
Monitor:
Library on
page 5-10
Date and time,

set
Configure > Set Date and

Time
Configure:
Configure Library > Date
Set Date and
& Time
Time on page
5-28
Dedicated
Cleaning slot,
removing,
reinstating
Configure > Library Settings
Configure:
Library on
page 5-20
DHCP, current
status
Monitor > Library > Network

> DHCP
Configure:
Network on
page 5-24
Configure Library >

Network
Configure
Library: Network
on page 5-52
DHCP, modify
Configure > Network > DHCP Configure:

Network on
page 5-24
Configure Library >

Network
Configure
Library: Network
on page 5-52
Diagnostics, run
drive Head test
Service > Service > Drive Tests Service: Run Not available with this
Tests on page interface
5-30
Diagnostics, run
drive Media test
5-30
Diagnostics, run
drive Normal
Read/Write test
5-30
Diagnostics, run
drive POST
5-30
Diagnostics, run
drive wrap test
5-30
Diagnostics, run
Key Path
diagnostics
Diagnostics, run
Library Verify
test
Service > Library Verify
Service:
Library
Verify on
page 5-29
Diagnostics, run
Slot to Slot test
Service > Run Tests
Service: Run Service Library > Perform Service Library:

Tests on page Diagnostics
Perform
5-30
Diagnostics on
page 5-72
Diagnostics, run
System Test
Service > Run Tests
Service: Run Service Library > Perform Service Library:

Tests on page Diagnostics
Perform
5-30
Diagnostics on
page 5-72
5-2
Current date and time

System status
displayed in System Status on page 2-6
screen.
Configure
Library: Date &
Time on page
5-65
Not available with this

interface
Note: Dedicated Cleaning Slot (DCS) available only on earlier versions of the 4U library. Refer to
Inserting the cleaning cartridge on page 4-42.
Service Library > Key

Path Diagnostics
Service Library:
Key Path
Diagnostics on
page 5-73

interface.

Information/
Activity

Display Contrast
Service > Display Contrast
DNS, modify
settings

interface.
Drive, change
interface
configuration
Configure > Drive > Drive

Interface
Drive, change
SCSI/Loop ID
For More Info

Service:
Display
Contrast on
page 5-31
Web User Interface
For More Info

interface.
Configure Library >

Network
Configure
Library: Network
on page 5-52
Configure:
Drive on
page 5-23
Configure Library >

Drives
Configure
Library: Drives
on page 5-50

Interface
Configure:
Drive on
page 5-23
Configure Library >

Drives
Configure
Library: Drives
on page 5-50
Drive, clean
Service > Service > Clean

Drive
Service:
Service
(Drives) on
page 5-30
Service Library > Clean

Drive
Service Library:
Clean Drive on
page 5-69
Drive, current
SCSI/Loop ID
Monitor > Drive > Identity
Monitor:
Drive on
page 5-12

Identity
Monitor Library:
Drive Identity on
page 5-34
Drive, current
status
Monitor > Drive > Status
Monitor:
Drive on
page 5-12

Status
Monitor Library:
Drive Status on
page 5-38
Drive, data
compression
status

interface.

Identity > Data
Compression
Monitor Library:
Drive Identity on
page 5-34

Identity
Monitor Library:
Drive Status on
page 5-38

Status
Monitor Library:
Drive Status on
page 5-38
Drive, Fibre,
Monitor > Drive > Identity >
Worldwide Node Drive (n)/WWNN
Name
Monitor:
Drive on
page 5-12
Drive, Hashed
SAS Address

interface.
Drive, Interface
type

Interface
Configure:
Drive on
page 5-23

Identity
Monitor Library:
Drive Identity on
page 5-34
Drive, SCSI
Inquiry string
Monitor:
Drive on
page 5-12

Identity
Monitor Library:
Drive Identity on
page 5-34
Drive, turn
power ON/OFF
Service > Service > Drive

Power
Service:
Service
(Drives) on
page 5-30
Configure Library > Drive Configure

Library: Drives
on page 5-50
Drive activity,
current

Drive (n)/Activity
Monitor:
Drive on
page 5-12

Status
Monitor Library:
Drive Status on
page 5-38
Drive fan, status

Status
Monitor Library:
Drive Status on
page 5-38
5-3

Information/
Activity

For More Info
Web User Interface
For More Info
Drive Dump,
save

interface.
Service Library > Save

Drive Dump
Service Library:
Save Drive
Dump on page
5-72
Encryption,
activate

interface.
Configure Library >

Encryption
Configure
Library:
Encryption on
page 5-47
Encryption,
configure

interface.
Configure Library >

Encryption
Configure
Library:
Encryption on
page 5-47
Encryption,
testing
configuration

interface.
Service Library > Key

Path Diagnostics
Service Library:
Key Path
Diagnostics on
page 5-73
Encryption,
determine
method, current
method

interface.

Status
Monitor Library:
Drive Status on
page 5-38
Ethernet settings
Configure Library >

Network
Configure
Library: Network
on page 5-52
Monitor:
Library on
page 5-10

Email
notifications: add, interface.
modify, and
delete
Configure Library > Email Configure

Notification
Library: Event
Notification on
page 5-66
Service Library:
View Logs on
page 5-70
Configure Library > Logs

& Traces
Configure
Library: Logs &
Traces on page
5-66
Monitor > Library > Error log
Error logs and

traces, set mode
Factory Default
settings, restore
Configure > Save/Restore
Configure:
Configure Library >
Save/Restore Save/Restore
on page 5-26
Configure
Library:
Save/Restore on
page 5-68
Fibre Channel,
speed

Drive (n)
Monitor:
Drive on
page 5-12

Status
Monitor Library:
Drive Status on
page 5-38
Fibre Channel
speed, change
Configure > Drives > Drive

Interface
Configure:
Drive on
page 5-23
Configure Library >

Drives
Configure
Library: Drives
on page 5-50
Fibre Channel,
topology

Drive (n)
Monitor:
Drive on
page 5-12

Status
Monitor Library:
Drive Status on
page 5-38
Fibre Channel
topology, change
Configure > Drives > Drive

Interface
Configure:
Drive on
page 5-23
Configure Library >

Drives
Configure
Library: Drives
on page 5-50
5-4
Monitor:
Library on
page 5-10
Service Library > View

logs
Error log, view

Information/
Activity

For More Info
Web User Interface
For More Info
Fibre Channel
link, status

Drive (n)/Link
Monitor:
Drive on
page 5-12

Status
Monitor Library:
Drive Status on
page 5-38
Firmware, drive,
current level
Monitor:
Drive on
page 5-12

Identity
Monitor Library:
Drive Identity on
page 5-34
Monitor:
Library on
page 5-10

Identity
Library Identity
on page 5-33
Firmware, library, Monitor > Library > Identity

identify current
level
Firmware, library Not available with this
or drive update
interface.
Service Library > Upgrade Service Library:

Firmware
Upgrade
Firmware on
page 5-74
Gateway, current
address

> Gateway
Monitor:
Library on
page 5-10
Configure Library >

Network
Configure
Library: Network
on page 5-52
Gateway
Address, modify
Configure > Network >

Gateway
Configure:
Network on
page 5-24
Configure Library >

Network
Configure
Library: Network
on page 5-52
Inventory,
perform
Control > Re-Inventory
Control:
Re-Inventory
on page 5-18
Manage Library >

Perform Inventory
Manage Library:
Perform
inventory on
page 5-43
I/O Station,
configuring

I/O Station
Library on
page 5-20
Configure Library >

General
Configure
Library: General
on page 5-44
I/O Station,
current status
Monitor > Library > Status
Monitor:
Library on
page 5-10
System Status screen
I/O Station, open Control > Open I/O Station
Control:
Open I/O
Station on
page 5-16

interface
IP Address,
current
Monitor:
Library on
page 5-10

Identity
Library Identity
on page 5-33
IP Address,
modify
Configure > Network > IP

Address
Configure:
Network on
page 5-24
Configure Library >

Network
IPsec
Configure
Library: Network
on page 5-52
Configure Library > IPsec Configure

Library: IPSec on
page 5-53
Library, current
status
Monitor:
Library on
page 5-10

Status
Library Status on
page 5-37
Logical libraries,
configure
Configure > Logical Libraries
Configure:
Logical
Libraries on
page 5-18
Configure Library >

Logical Libraries
Configure
Library: Logical
Libraries on page
5-45
5-5

Information/
Activity

For More Info
Web User Interface
For More Info
Logs, library,
view
Monitor > Library > Error Log
Monitor:
Library on
page 5-10
Service Library > View

Logs
Service Library:
View Logs on
page 5-70
Magazines,
graphical
representation
Monitor > Inventory >

Magazines
Monitor:
Inventory on
page 5-14
Monitor Library >

Inventory
Monitor Library:
Inventory on
page 5-40
Magazines,
Unlock
Control > Magazines
Control:
Magazine on
page 5-17
Manage Library > Release Manage Library:

Magazine
Release
Magazine on
page 5-43
Mode, library,
change

Mode
Library on
page 5-20
Configure Library >

General
Mode, library,
current
Monitor > Library > Identity
Monitor:
Library on
page 5-10

Identity
Library Identity
on page 5-33
Netmask, current Monitor > Library > Network

address
Monitor:
Library on
page 5-10
Configure Library >

Network
Configure
Library: Network
on page 5-52
Netmask
Address, modify
Configure > Network >

Netmask
Configure:
Network on
page 5-24
Configure Library >

Network
Configure
Library: Network
on page 5-52
Network
configuration,
change
Configure > Network
Configure:
Network on
page 5-24
Configure Library >

Network
Configure
Library: Network
on page 5-52
Network
configuration,
view
Monitor:
Library on
page 5-10
Configure Library >

Network
Configure
Library: Network
on page 5-52
Path Failover,
enter activation
key
Configure > Control Path

Failover
Configure:
Configure Library > Path
Path Failover Failover
on page 5-28
Restart, library,

interface.
SCSI Inquiry
string, drive
Serial Number,
drive
Configure
Library: General
on page 5-44
Configure
Library: Path
Failover on page
5-46
Service Library > Reboot
Service Library:
Reboot on page
5-77
Monitor:
Drive on
page 5-12

Identity
Monitor Library:
Drive Identity on
page 5-34
Monitor:
Drive on
page 5-12

Identity
Monitor Library:
Drive Identity on
page 5-34
Serial Number,
library
Monitor:
Library on
page 5-10

Identity
Library Identity
on page 5-33
Slots, number
active
Monitor:
Library on
page 5-10
5-6

Information/
Activity
Slots, number
empty

Slots, reassign
Note: Varies according to the
number of active, number logical libraries.
reserving
Single partition: Configure >
Logical Library Settings
For More Info
Web User Interface
For More Info
Monitor:
Library on
page 5-10
Configure:
Library on
page 5-20
Configure Library >

General
Configure
Library: General
on page 5-44
Configure Library >

SNMP
Configure
Library: SNMP
on page 5-67
Multiple partitions: Configure

> Logical Library Settings >
Logical Library (n)
SNMP, modify
settings

interface.
Telnet Service
Port, activate
Service > Telnet Service Port
Service:
Telnet service
port on page
5-32

interface.
Time elapsed
since power ON
Monitor:
Library on
page 5-10

Status
Library Status on
page 5-37
Operator Control
Panel, access
PIN,
enable/disable
Configure > Set Access PIN
Configure:
Set Access
PIN on page
5-25

interface.
Web User
Interface, user
access, create or
modify

interface.
Configure Library > User

Access
Configure
Library: User
Access on page
5-63
Operator Control Panel navigation

The four control keys on the front of a 2U or 4U library enable the user to navigate
through the library settings and make changes as needed to configure the library.
5-7
a77ug159
Figure 5-1. 2U library control keys
4
Figure 5-2. 4U library control keys
a77ug160
Table 5-2. Library control keys

Control
Keys
Description
1
UP (+) - Upper-left button

Used to scroll upward through menu items.
2
CANCEL - Upper-right button

Used to cancel a user action and return to the previous menu screen.
3
SELECT - Lower-right button

Used to display a submenu or force an accessor action.
4
DOWN (-) - Lower-left button

Used to scroll downward through menu items.
5-8
1. Press the UP (1) or DOWN (4) keys to enter Interaction Mode. The Main
Selection Menu will appear. The Main Selection screen shows Monitor, Control,
Configure, and Service.
2. Scroll to your selection, then press the SELECT (3) key. The submenu for the
selected menu item will appear.
3. Use the UP (1) or DOWN (4) and SELECT (3) keys to scroll until you
get to the area or screen you want to configure.
4. Use the CANCEL (2) key if you want to move backwards through the menu
selections.
Operator Control Panel menu tree

The Operator Control Panel main menu is made up of the following items:
v Monitor
v Control
v Configure
v Service
The table below shows each main menu item and the associated submenu items.
5-9
Monitor
Control
Configure
Service
Library
Open I/O Station
Logical
Libraries
Library Verify
Drive
Move Cartridges
Library
Settings
Run Tests
Inventory
Magazines
Re-Inventory
Drive
Service (Drives)
Network
Display Contrast
Set Access PIN
Telnet Service
Port
Save/Restore
Control
Path Failover
a77ug050
Set Date and

Time
Figure 5-3. Operator Control Panel menu tree
Note: Depending on the version of library firmware, there might be differences

between the menu tree description and the OCP menu tree on your library.
Monitor menu
The Monitor menu contains information about the following submenu items:
v Library
v Drive
v Inventory
Monitor: Library
This menu item displays current library information and settings.
5-10
Monitor
Library
Status
Identity
Status
Serial Number
Act. Cart.
Version
Error Log
Network
IPv4
IPv6
IP Stack
On Time
Vendor ID
Slots Empty
Product ID
Moves
Active Slots
I/O Station
DHCP
ON-OFF
Stateless
autoconfig
Netmask
Prefix Length
Static IPv6
Address
WWNN
Lib. x Mode
Note: x = number of logical libraries

(1-4 partitions) An example with a
library with 4 partitions:
Lib.1 Mode
Lib.2 Mode
Lib.3 Mode
Lib.4 Mode
DHCP
ON-OFF
IP Address
Gateway
Date/Time
IP Stack
Ethernet
Link Local IPv6

Address
Assigned IPv6
Address
Note: This will display
when Stateless Auto
Config is enabled
Ethernet
a77ug051
IPv6 Gateway
Figure 5-4. Monitor: Library menu
Under Monitor > Library are the following items:

v Status
5-11
v Identity
v Error Log
v Network
Under Monitor > Library > Status are the following items:
v Status - Status of the library
v Act. Cart - The serial number of the cartridge currently active in the library
v On Time - The amount of time the library is powered ON
v Slots Empty - The number of empty slots in the library/total number of active
slots in the library
v Moves - The total number of cartridge moves that are carried out by the library
accessor
v I/O Station - Indicates whether the I/O station is open or closed
v Date/Time - Gives the current date and time that is set in the library
|
|
Under Monitor > Library > Identity are the following items.
v Serial Number - the serial number of the library
v Version - the current level of library firmware installed
v Vendor ID - IBM
v Product ID - Library inquiry string
v Active Slots - Number of active slots in each logical library
v WWNN - Worldwide Node Name of the library
v Lib.x Mode - Current library mode (Random or Sequential)
Note: X = the number of logical libraries (1 - 4 partitions).
Under Monitor > Library > Error Log, a list of errors is logged by the library. The
errors are displayed beginning with the most recent error.
Under Monitor > Library > Network are the following items:
v IP Stack - Internet Protocol used by the library
v DHCP - (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) - records whether DHCP is ON
or OFF
v IP Addresses - IP (Internet Protocol) addresses of the library
v Stateless auto configuration - Indicates whether stateless auto configuration is
enabled
v Prefix Length - The length of the IP address prefix
v Netmask - The Network Mask address of the library
v Static IPv6 Address - The static IPv6 address of the library
v Link Local IPv6 Address - Local link-only IPv6 address of the library
v Assigned IPv6 Address - IPv6 address or addresses that are discovered by the
network router. The addresses display only when DHCP is OFF and Stateless
auto configuration is ON.
v Gateway - The Gateway address of the library
v Ethernet - The speed of the ethernet interface
Monitor: Drive
This menu item displays drive information and settings.
5-12
Monitor
Drive
Status
Identity
Drive (n)
Drive (n)
Status
Firmware Rev
Activity
Vendor ID
Source
Product ID
Encryption
Serial Number
Topology
(A)
Port A
Status
Speed
(A)
Speed
(A)
Loop ID
(A)
Hashed
Address (A)
Speed
(A)
Port B
Status
Loop ID
(A)
WWNN
PID
(A)
SCSI ID
SCSI Drive
Topology
(A)
PID
(B)
Version*
SAS Drive
Fibre Channel Drive
Version*
Hashed
Address (B)
Fibre Channel Drive
*Ultrium 3 and 4 half high SAS drive sleds and Ultrium 4

Fibre Channel drive sled may be listed as Version 2.
a77ug035
Speed (B)
SAS Drive
Figure 5-5. Monitor: Drive menu
Important: Encryption is not supported on Gen3 drives or SCSI drives. With Gen3
or SCSI drives, encryption does not appear in the OCP menu.
5-13
Under Status and Drive (n) are the following items.

v Status - The status of the drive
v Activity - The current action that is completed by the drive
v Source - The serial number of the cartridge in the drive
v Encryption - Indicates the type of data encryption that is set for the selected
drive (does not appear on Gen3 or SCSI drives)
v Topology - The topology that is chosen for a fibre library (see Fibre Channel
interface on page 3-10)
v Speed - Indicates the speed of the Fibre Channel (fibre library)
v Link - Indicates the status of the Fibre Channel (fibre library)
v Hashed Address - An address that is calculated from the WWID
Under Identity and Drive (n) are the following items:
v Firmware Rev - The version level of drive firmware
v Vendor ID - IBM
v Product ID - Drive inquiry string
v Serial Number - The drive serial number
v SCSI ID - The unique identifier that is assigned to a SCSI drive
v WWNN - The Fibre Channel drive's Worldwide Node Name
v Topology - The topology that is chosen for the Fibre Channel drive
v Speed - Indicates the speed of the Fibre Channel tape drive
v Loop ID - Unique identifier that is assigned to a Fibre Channel tape drive
v PID - Port identification (SAS only)
v Version - Ultrium 3 and 4 half high SAS drives and Ultrium 4 Fibre Channel
drives might be listed as Version 2.
Monitor: Inventory
This menu item displays the current library inventory of a 4U library.
5-14
Monitor
Inventory
Magazines
Drive (n)
Upper Left
Upper Right
Lower Left
Lower Right
(Graphic of left
magazine)
(Graphic of right
magazine)
a77ug036
(Drive
status)
Figure 5-6. Example of a 4U Monitor: Inventory menu
Note: 2U has a single right-side magazine.

Under Magazine choose one of the following to see a graphical representation of
the cartridge magazine(s). Slots containing cartridges are highlighted.
Magazines > Lower Left

I/O 3
I/O 2
I/O 1
Idle Rand
Magazines > Upper Left
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
Idle Rand
a77ug166
18
Figure 5-7. Overview of inventoried cartridges: Left magazines of a 4U Library
Note: Left magazine of a 2U Library has a 1-slot I/O station.

5-15
The black boxes are inventoried cartridges. Press the Up and Down keys to scroll.
Note that this magazine has a 3-slot I/O station. These slots might be changed to
storage slots if needed. See Configuring I/O stations and reserving slots on page
5-79.
Press SELECT to display all empty slots and cartridge serial numbers in the
associated magazine.
Figure 5-8. Detailed information on cartridges residing in a magazine

Table 5-3. Detailed information on cartridges residing in a magazine
1
Magazine slot number
3
Media type (generation of cartridge)
2
Cartridge volume serial number

or Empty (meaning no
cartridge currently residing in
slot)
4
Encryption abbreviation for LTO4 cartridges:

v EC - encryption capable (The LTO 4 cartridge does not
contain encrypted data).
v ED- encrypted data (The LTO 4 cartridge does contain
encrypted data).
Control menu
The Control Menu contains the following items:
v Open I/O Station
v Move Cartridges
v Magazine
v Re-Inventory
Control: Open I/O Station

Use this menu item to open the I/O station.
Open I/O Station
a77ug052
Control
Figure 5-9. Control: I/O station menu
Important: Wait for the messages before you insert or remove cartridges to ensure
that the library is ready to handle the cartridges. After the I/O station
is closed, you must wait for the library to complete its inventory before
normal library operations commence.
|
|
|
|
5-16
Control: Move Cartridges

Use this menu item to move cartridges in the library.
Control
Source
Type
Destination
Type
Volume
Serial
Source
Destination
a77ug053
Move Cartridges
Figure 5-10. Control: Move Cartridges menu
To move a cartridge from point A to point B, you must make the following choices:
v Source Type - Drive, I/O station, magazine. Only the source types that contain
cartridges are listed.
v Source - the choices start with the choice made in the preceding item and then
advances through all available choices.
Note: If the Attention LED is ON due to a suspect cartridge, that cartridge is
identified by an exclamation point (!) when you scroll through the source
cartridges.
v Volume Serial - the serial number of the cartridge
v Destination Type - the destination drive, I/O station, magazine
v Destination - the choices start with the choice made in the preceding item and
then advances through all available choices.
Control: Magazine
Use this menu item to unlock the cartridge magazines.
Control
Left
Right
"Left magazine
unlocking"
"Right magazine
unlocking"
a77ug054
Magazine
Figure 5-11. Control: Magazine menu
5-17
Choose Left or Right to unlock the corresponding cartridge magazines. The

magazines are removed from the library by gently pulling each magazine out of
the library. To replace a magazine, insert the back of the magazine into the front of
the library and gently push the magazine into the library. The magazine locks
when inserted into the library.
Attention: After inserting the magazines into the library, you must wait for the
library to complete its inventory before proceeding with normal library operations.
If the magazines are not pulled out of the library within 15 seconds after they are
unlocked, the command cancels and you must repeat the process to unlock the
magazines.
Control: Re-Inventory
Use this menu item to initiate a scan of the cartridges in the library.
Re-Inventory
a77ug055
Control
Figure 5-12. Control: Re-Inventory menu
Note: It might take up to five minutes to complete the library inventory.
Configure menu
The Configure menu is used during the initial setup of your library and when
changes need to be made to your library's configuration. This menu contains the
following items:
v Logical Libraries
v Library Settings
v
v
v
v
v
Drive
Network
Set Access PIN
Save/Restore
Set Date and Time
Configure: Logical Libraries

Use this menu item to select the number of logical libraries. The Currently
Configured - x section shows the number of logical libraries that are configured.
5-18
Figure 5-13. Configure: Logical Libraries menu
Note: The maximum number of Logical Libraries in a 2U is two.

Note: This menu is available only on libraries with multiple drives.
Note: Whenever there is a hardware configuration change such as drives being
swapped with different form factors (that is, HH to FH or FH to HH), a
library configuration change is needed. Reconfiguring the library by
reassigning the amount of logical libraries clears this issue.
5-19
Configure: Library
Configure
Logical Library Settings
Logical Lib Settings

General
1
Auto Clean
Mode
I/O Station(s)
enabled
Host Label
Length
Random
Sequential
Autoload
Active Slots
a77ug056
Loop
Figure 5-14. Configure: Library menu
Note: The Remove DCS No is available only on libraries with the DCS feature.
The library configuration items are in this menu:
v Mode:
Random: In random mode, the library allows the server 's (host 's)
application software to select any data cartridge in any order.
Sequential: In sequential mode, the library 's firmware predefines the
selection of the cartridges. After initialization, the firmware causes the library
to select the first available cartridge found (counting from the I/O station
through slot 23) for loading into the drive.
Important: If a Logical Library in Sequential mode contains more than one
drive, only the first drive in the Logical Library is utilized.
5-20
- Autoload: Sequential mode with autoload mode ON loads the first

available cartridge (slot with the lowest numerical value that contains a
cartridge) automatically if the library powers ON with an empty drive.
- Loop: Sequential mode with loop mode ON loads the cartridge in the
lowest numerical slot after the cartridge in the highest numerical slot is
filled and sent back to its home slot. This allows endless backup operations
without user interaction.
- Starting Sequential Mode
v Autoload Option:
If the Autoload option is set to ON (Configure > Library Settings >
Autoload), the accessor loads the first cartridge (cartridge that is
located in the slot with the lowest numeric value) found in the storage
inventory area into the drive upon power ON of the library. If the
library powers on with a cartridge already in the drive, sequential
mode starts with that cartridge unless the host issues a rewind and
unload command to the drive. In that case, the next cartridge in
sequence is loaded into the drive.
If the Autoload Option if OFF, sequential mode must be started by
selecting the Move Cartridges option (Control > Move Cartridges) to
load the first cartridge (or any cartridge) into the drive. Whatever
cartridge is loaded into the drive, that is where the sequence starts
from. For example, if a cartridge from the fifth lowest numeric storage
slot containing a cartridge is loaded with the Move Cartridges option,
after the host issues a rewind/unload command, the next cartridge
loaded is the cartridge from the next higher numeric slot. Cartridges
need not be in contiguous slots.
v Loop Option:
If the Loop option is set to ON (Configure > Library Settings > > Loop),
when the last cartridge (cartridge in the highest numeric slot) is
unloaded and placed back into storage, the accessor immediately starts
over again loading the first cartridge into the drive.
- Stopping Sequential Mode: To stop sequential mode, use the Move
Cartridges option from the Control menu (Control > Move Cartridges) to
unload the drive. The next sequential cartridge is NOT loaded. To restart
sequential mode, use the same Control menu command to load a cartridge.
The loading sequence resumes from that numeric slot in the cartridge
inventory.
v Active Slots - the number of active slots in each logical library.
Note: Slots might be reserved so that they are invisible to the host. It might be
necessary to set the number of Active Slots to match the number of slots
that are available to the ISV software. Reserved slots are created by
reducing the number of active slots.
v Auto Clean - Use this menu item to enable the Auto Clean function. All cleaning
cartridges must have "CLNxxxLx" as part of the bar code.
With Auto Clean disabled, the cleaning tape might be stored in any data slot if
you wish to manually clean the drives. This is not recommended.
With Auto Clean disabled, the cleaning tape might be stored in any data slot if it
was put there under Backup Application control. In other words, the Backup
Application is controlling the cleaning of the tape drives and the cleaning tape is
imported into this library under its control.
5-21
Note: The universal cleaning cartridge has a bar code CLNUxxLx. This cleaning
cartridge is used to clean all LTO generation tape drives.
For Auto Clean to function, the following criteria must be met:
On 4U libraries with library firmware of 1.95 or lower that still contain a
Dedicated Cleaning Slot (DCS), or 4U libraries with library firmware higher
than 1.95 that chose to retain the DCS in their library, a CLN cartridge must
be present in that slot.
On libraries that don't have a DCS, a storage slot must be reserved (RSVD) by
reducing the active slot count by one.
A cleaning cartridge (CLNxxxLx) must be placed or moved to the reserved
slot.
Auto Clean must be enabled.
Note: Cleaning cartridges must be replaced after 50 cleanings. The Web User
Interface inventory screen shows the number of times the media was
loaded, not the number of cleaning sessions remaining. Subtract this
number from 50 to determine the number of cleanings remaining.
v I/O Station(s) enabled - The I/O stations are enabled (the default), or disabled
so the stations are used as storage slots.
v Remove DCS - If the DCS is removed, it cannot be reinstated. This option
longer appears in the Operator Control Panel.
v Host Label Length - The Host Label Length is related to the bar code labels
appearing on the used media. The default value is 8, but 6 might also be chosen.
5-22
Configure: Drive
Configure
Drive
Control Path
Drive Interface
SAS drives
do not
require user
configuration
SCSI ID
A Speed
A Type
Fibre Channel Drive
a77ug299
A Loop ID
Figure 5-15. Configure: Drive menu
The following items are in this menu:

v Drive Interface - use this to assign a SCSI ID to a SCSI drive or to assign a Port
Speed, Port Type, and Loop ID to a Fibre Channel drive. SAS drives do not
require user configuration. For more information on drive interfaces, refer to
Host interfaces on page 3-7.
v Control Paths - use this to enable the drive as a control path drive. Each logical
library must have a control path drive; however, all drives in a logical library
can be designated as control path drives.
5-23
Configure: Network
Configure
Network
IP Stack
DHCP-ON
DHCP-OFF
(IPv4 & IPv4+IPv6)
DHCP-OFF
(IPv6)
IP Address
Stateless
autoconfig
Netmask
Prefix Length
Static IPv6
Address
Ethernet
Gateway
Ethernet
a77ug043
Gateway
Figure 5-16. Configure: Network menu
Use these menu items to change the current network settings, which access the
library remotely by way of a web browser.
v IP Stack - Choose IPv4 only, IPv6 only, or IPv4 & IPv6.
v IPv6 Only and Dual Stack IPv4 & IPv6 - Choose Enable Stateless Auto Config
Address (Web User Interface) or Stateless Autoconfig (Operator Control Panel) if
assigned IPv6 IP addresses are wanted. To view the assigned IPv6 addresses
after Stateless Auto Config Address is enabled:
Operator Control Panel (IPv6 Only): Monitor > Library > Network
If you choose Dual Stack IPv4 & IPv6, you must be prepared to enter both IPv4
and IPv6 IP addresses.
v DHCP - (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) If DHCP is enabled, your
library host negotiates the connection with the library. If DHCP is disabled, the
following information is necessary to establish the remote access.
v IP Address - the IP address of the library
5-24
v Netmask - the Network Mask address of the library

v IP Stack - the IP Stack manages static IP addresses
v Stateless autoconfig - IPv6 hosts are configured automatically when connected
to a routed IPv6 network
v Prefix length - the length of the IP address prefix
v Static IPv6 address - a static IPv6 address that is assigned to the library
v Gateway - the Gateway address of the library
v Ethernet - the speed setting of the ethernet interface
v DNS Server 1 - the first DNS server address
v DNS Server 2 - the second DNS server address
Note: If a host and domain name are entered instead of an address, the IPv4 or
IPv6 address is resolved from the DNS with that name. That address is
stored in the library rather than the name. Therefore, if the address changes,
the name or a new address must be entered.
Configure: Set Access PIN

Use this menu item to enable/disable, set, or change the Access PIN (personal
identification number) which is used to restrict access to the Control, Configure,
and Service menus.
Note: Record the Access PIN and store the PIN in a secure location for future
reference. Library configuration files, which are saved with the Save Library
Config menu, do not include the Access PIN.
Figure 5-17. Configure: Set Access PIN menu
Setting the Operator Control Panel Access PIN:

1. Navigate to Configure > Set Access PIN.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press SELECT to highlight the first digit of the 4-digit Access PIN.
Use UP and DOWN to select each digit.
Press SELECT to move to the next digit.
Repeat these steps for repeating the Access PIN.
When the final digit is entered, press DOWN and select:
v Save - to apply your settings.
v Cancel - to delete your settings.
Note: In Figure 5-18 on page 5-26, menus with the pound sign (#) are the only
menus accessible when the Access PIN is enabled, but entered incorrectly
or before it is entered. To gain access to all menus, disable the Access
5-25
PIN or enter the correct PIN number when requested.
Figure 5-18. Pound sign (#) shows accessible menus when access PIN is enabled but before it is entered
Configure: Save/Restore
Use this menu item to restore the factory default settings.
Configure
Restore Passwords
Restore All
Restore Library Config.
Figure 5-19. Configure: Save/Restore menu
5-26
Save Library Config.
a77ug045
Save/Restore
v Restore Passwords - This menu item restores the factory default for both the
RMU Admin user access password and the service password.
v Restore all - This menu item restores all factory default settings (refer to
Table 5-4).
v Restore Library Config - This menu item restores your saved library
configuration from a USB device. If you have more than one saved configuration
file (.dbb) on your USB device, press Select, then use the up and down keys to
move between the files. When the correct configuration file is displayed, press
Select again.
v Save Library Config - This menu item saves your library configuration to a USB
device.
Note: Ensure that the USB device is formatted for FAT12, FAT16, or FAT32 and
does not use autorun files.
Note: Configuration files that are saved with one version of library firmware
might not be compatible with other versions of firmware. It is recommended
to save a configuration file each time the library firmware is upgraded.
Restore the library with a configuration file that was saved with the same
version of firmware that is installed in the library.
Important: Restoring factory defaults wipes out all the previous configuration
data.
Table 5-4. Factory default settings
Restored Item
Default Setting*
Autoclean
Disabled
Logical Libraries
Active Slots
Maximum number of slots in library

minus I/O station
I/O station
Enabled
2U library has 1-slot I/O station.4U

library has 3-slot I/O station.
Encryption
None
License Key is protected, if

previously entered.
Ethernet Setting
Auto
DHCP
Enabled
Network IP Mode
IPv4 Only
Bar Code Label Length Reported to

Host
SNMP
Disabled
Email Notifications
Disabled
Note: DNS server addresses, if

available, are automatically assigned.
If the DHCP server does not find any
DNS server, the DNS fields are set to
"0.0.0.0".
Restore from Operator Control Panel

or Web User Interface
User Access
Admin
Comments
secure
Library Mode
Random
Library Name
(Blank)
(default)
5-27
Table 5-4. Factory default settings (continued)

Restored Item
Default Setting*
Comments
Host name
(Depends on MAC Address)
Logs & Traces Error Log Mode
Continuous
Path Failover Key
No change
License Key is protected, if

previously entered.
OCP Access PIN
Disabled
Note: The initial Factory Default
setting is disabled. If the OCP Access
PIN setting is changed, running
"Restore Defaults" does not change
the setting.
If OCP Access PIN is enabled, the

default PIN is "1234".
SSL for Web
Disabled
Drives
Power
Power On
(All drives)
Drive 1 SCSI-ID
SCSI Drives
Drive 2 SCSI-ID
SCSI Drives
Drive 3 SCSI-ID
SCSI Drives
Drive 4 SCSI-ID
SCSI Drives
Drive 1 Loop-ID
FC Drives Arbitrated Loop
Drive 2 Loop-ID
FC Drives Arbitrated Loop
Control Path Drive
Drive 1 only
Speed
Auto
FC Drives (all)
Topology
LN-Port
FC Drives (all)
IPv6 Stateless Autoconfig
Enabled
Note: * = all settings at library firmware level 4.xx and greater
In some cases (such as Library Mode), the entry of one option precludes any other
options from being selected. In such cases, the details of the non-applicable options
are not shown.
Configure: Set Date and Time

Use this menu item to set the date and time in your library.
Set Date
and Time
a77ug046
Configure
Figure 5-20. Configure: Set Date and Time menu
Configure: Path Failover

Use this menu item to enter the Path Failover Feature Activation key (Supported
on 4U library only for library firmware levels at or below 8.xx. Supported on both
the 2U and 4U libraries with library firmware levels above 8.xx).
5-28
Path Failover
a77ug119
Configure
Figure 5-21. Configure: Path failover
Path failover is a combination of two previous features: Control Path failover (key
that is entered at the library user interface) and Data Path failover (key that is
entered at the device driver interface). A single activation key that is entered at the
library user interface now activates both features unless the LTO 3 drive firmware
level is equal to or lower than 73P5 or the library firmware is equal to or lower
than 1.95. For either or both of the two cases, the device driver interface Data Path
failover key activation is still required. For library firmware levels below 8.xx the
Path failover feature is available for select LTO 4 tape drives, and Path failover is
not supported for Half High drives. Library firmware levels higher than 8.xx
support Path failover on LTO 5 and LTO 4 drives. For LTO Ultrium 6 Tape Drives
use Library firmware B.50 or greater if you want to support Path failover.
Service menu
The 2U/4U library is always online, except for when the user enters the Service
Library area. A warning message displays stating that the library must be taken
offline from the host before any Service functions are completed. It is up to the
operator to ensure that it is taken offline by phoning the host operator or other
means of communication. Before any service functions are completed, ensure that
the host is not processing any data writing or retrieval.
The Service menu contains the following items:
v Library Verify - an overall library diagnostic procedure
v
v
v
v
Run Tests - other library diagnostic tests

Service - diagnostics and procedures for servicing the drive
Display Contrast - setting the display from light to dark
Telnet Service Port
Service: Library Verify

Library Verify is an overall diagnostic test that exercises all library components. To
run the Library Verify test, complete the following procedure.
Library Verify
a77ug047
Service
Figure 5-22. Service: Library Verify menu
1. On the Operator Control Panel, navigate to Service > Library Verify and start
the diagnostic test.
v Push Select to highlight the drive field. Use the Up/Down keys to select the
drive. Push the Select key to complete the selection.
5-29
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
v Push Down to highlight <Run>.

v Push Select to run Library Verify.
When prompted by the Operator Control Panel display and the I/O station
opens, insert a blank or scratch data cartridge.
Close the I/O station by pushing it back into the library.
While the test is running, the Operator Control Panel displays library status.
v If the test PASSES, resume normal library operations.
v If the test FAILS, an error code is displayed. Make note of the error, then see
Chapter 7, Troubleshooting, on page 7-1.
When prompted by the Operator Control Panel display and the I/O station
opens, remove the cartridge that is used in the test.
Use Up/Down to highlight <Cancel>. Press Select to exit the Library Verify
screen.
Service: Run Tests
Run Tests
a77ug048
Service
Figure 5-23. Service: Run Tests menu
The following library diagnostic procedures are available in this menu:

v System Test - this test exercises library components by moving customer data
cartridges from slots to drives and back to slots. No data is written or read from
the customer tapes. To run this test successfully, the library must contain at least
one data cartridge for every drive present in the library.
v Slot to Slot Test - The Slot To Slot test moves each resident data cartridge from
one slot to another, for each test cycle requested. When the Slot To Slot test is
completed, you must Inventory your library before it is placed back online,
since this test scrambles the cartridge slot locations.
Note: After the System Test or the Slot to Slot Test is run, the library must be
reinventoried.
Service: Service (Drives)
5-30
Service
Clean Drive
Drive Tests
Drive Power
a77ug058
Service
Figure 5-24. Service: Service menu
The following drive diagnostics and service procedures are available in this menu:
v Clean Drive - The accessor takes the cleaning cartridge from the dedicated
cleaning cartridge slot (DCS), or previously reserved slot if no DCS is available,
and inserts it into the drive. After the drive cleaning is complete, the accessor
removes the cleaning cartridge from the drive and returns it to the dedicated
cleaning cartridge slot or reserved slot.
v Drive Tests - Power On Self Test (POST), Wrap Test, Normal Read/Write Test,
Head Test, Media Test
Note: The Operator Control Panel displays "Wrap Test" for libraries that contain
SCSI and Fibre Channel tape drives. "Wrap A Test" and "Wrap B Test" is
displayed for libraries that contain SAS tape drives. Run both wrap tests
(A and B) on SAS full high and half high tape drives to test both SAS
ports. Run Wrap A test on SAS half high (legacy drives) tape drives as
they have only one SAS port.
1. Navigate to the wanted test (Service > Service > Drive Tests).
a. Select the drive if more than one is installed.
b. Press Enter.
c. Press either + or - to toggle drive test options.
d. Move the cursor to the <Run> option.
e. Press Enter to apply the test.
2. Follow the instructions that are displayedon the Operator Control Panel, and,
if required, insert a blank or scratch cartridge into the I/O station when
requested. All wrap tests require a wrap tool to complete the diagnostic test.
3. The test runs.
If the test PASSES, resume normal library operations.
If the test FAILS, an error is displayed. Make note of the error, then see
Isolating drive sled problems on page 7-10.
4. Remove the cartridge from the I/O station, if needed, then close the I/O
station.
5. Press Cancel to exit the screen.
v Drive Power - use this item to turn drive power ON and OFF
Service: Display Contrast
5-31
Display Contrast
a77ug170
Service
Figure 5-25. Service: Display Contrast menu
The display contrast settings are available in this menu:

v The numbers 1 through 10 display, with 10 being the lightest shade and 1 being
the brightest.
Service: Telnet service port

The Telnet service port menu item is used under the direction of the IBM Support
Center. SeeAccessing the library with Telnet on page A-25.
Web User Interface menus

Note: Depending on the version of library firmware, there may be differences
between the Menu description in this document and the web user interface
menus on your library.
The following menus are available on the Web User Interface.
Table 5-5. Web User Interface Menus
-Monitor Library
Library Identity
Drive Identity
Library Status
Drive Status
Inventory
-Manage Library
Move Media
Perform Inventory
Release Magazine
-Configure Library
General
Logical Libraries
Path Failover
Encryption
Drives
Network
IPsec
User Access
Date & Time
Logs & Traces
5-32
Table 5-5. Web User Interface Menus (continued)

Email Notification
SNMP
Save/Restore
-Service Library
Clean Drive
Advance Diagnostic (for Service Personnel only)
View Logs
View Drive Logs
Save Drive Dump
Perform Diagnostics
Upgrade Firmware
Reboot
Monitor Library menu

The Monitor Library menu contains the submenu items.
v Monitor Library: Library Identity
v
v
v
v
Monitor
Monitor
Monitor
Monitor
Library:
Library:
Library:
Library:
Drive Identity on page 5-34

Library Status on page 5-37
Drive Status on page 5-38
Inventory on page 5-40
Monitor Library: Library Identity

This page provides access to the static information about the library. No changes
can be made from here. Table 5-6 lists all available elements on the Library Identity
page. An "X" indicates that the element displays for the specified library type.
Table 5-6. Library Identity page elements
Menu Item
Description
2U
4U
Serial Number
The unique identification number that is assigned by the manufacturer.
Product ID
Machine Type and Model (the SCSI inquiry string of the Library)
Currently
Installed Library
Firmware
The level of firmware that is installed on the library. To ensure that you
are running the latest version of firmware, visit http://www.ibm.com.
For information about updating your firmware, refer to Service Library:
Upgrade Firmware on page 5-74.
Bootcode
Firmware
Revision
The level of bootcode firmware that is installed on the library. Bootcode is X

the firmware that allows the library to begin initialization when it is
powered ON.
Barcode Reader
The version of barcode reader in the library.
IPv4 Address
The Internet Protocol v4 address that is assigned to your library.
Link local IPv6

address
The local IPv6 address assigned to your library.

Note: It is verified with library firmware of A.40 or higher.
IPv6 static
assigned address
Your library 's IPv6 static assigned address.
5-33
Table 5-6. Library Identity page elements (continued)

Menu Item
Description
2U
4U
Router discovery The IPv6 router discovery address that is assigned to your library.
IPv6 address
Note: There might be more than one IPv6 discovery address if there is
more than one IPv6 router available in your network environment.
MAC Address
The machine 's access code that is assigned to your library.
WWide Node
Name
The Worldwide Node Name that is assigned to your library.
a77ug090
Logical Library x The Extended Logical Libraries Information table displays information
Library Mode
about the logical libraries that are assigned in your library. For each
logical library in your library, either Random or Sequential Loop
Autoload is displayed.
Figure 5-26. The 4U library Monitor Library: Library Identity page
This view is correct for a library with multiple logical partitions. The Library
Identify screen is different for a library with a single logical partition.
Monitor Library: Drive Identity

This page provides the following detailed information about the drive. No changes
can be made from here. The displayed information varies depending on the library
model and drive type (SCSI, SAS, or Fibre Channel). Table 5-7 lists all available
elements on the Drive Identity page. An "X" indicates that the element displays for
the specified drive type.
Table 5-7. Drive Identity page elements
Menu Item
Description
2U Library
4U Library
SCSI Fibre
SAS
SCSI
Fibre
SAS
Vendor ID
Identifies the manufacturer of the tape drive.
Product ID
The Type and Model of the Library.

Note: HH means Half-High drive, and TD means
Full-High drive.
Serial
Number
The unique identification number of the tape drive that

was assigned by the manufacturer.
Version
Only Version 2 (V2) half-high drives have a separate

version line with the number 2.
5-34
Table 5-7. Drive Identity page elements (continued)

Menu Item
Description
2U Library
SCSI Fibre
X
4U Library
SAS
SCSI
Fibre
SAS
Firmware
Revision
The current level of firmware that is installed on the

X
drive. To ensure that you are running the latest version
of firmware, visit http://www.ibm.com. For information
about updating your firmware, see Service Library:
Upgrade Firmware on page 5-74.
SCSI ID
The unique identifier that is assigned to the SCSI drive

to enable it to receive communications from the host
computer.
Element
Address
The unique identifier that is assigned to the drive that

allows the host to recognize and communicate with the
drive.
Control Path If the drive communicates all messages from the host to
Drive
the library, then it is considered the control path drive.
If the drive is the control path drive, this element
displays "Yes." If not, this element displays "No." All
drives in a logical library might be a control path drive.
Data
If the drive is compressing data, this element displays
Compression "Yes." If not, this element displays "No."
Interface
Type
Identifies the drive host interface.
Node Name
The worldwide node name that is assigned to a Fibre

drive.
Worldwide
ID
The worldwide ID assigned to a SAS drive. (Ports A

and B)
Port A
Provides information about Port A.
Port Name
The name that is assigned to a Fibre Channel port that

is "enabled".
Topology
The type of connection to the host.
FC-AL Loop
ID
The Fibre Channel - Arbitrated Loop ID of the drive.

Options are LN, L, or N.
Speed
The current speed setting of the drive. Choices are Auto

(where the drive automatically negotiates the speed of
the drive to match that of the server), 1 Gb/s, 2 Gb/s, 4
Gb/s, or 8 Gb/s for Fibre Channel; 3 Gb/s or 6 Gb/s
for SAS..
Port B
Provides information about Port B. For Fibre Channel

drives, Port B is Disabled.
X
X
5-35
a77ug091
Figure 5-27. The 4U library Monitor Library: Drive Identity page, showing one V2 HH (Half-High) SAS (#1), one HH
(Half-High) SCSI drive (#2), and one TD (Full-High) Fibre Channel drive (#3)
5-36
a77ug291
Figure 5-28. The 2U library Monitor Library: Drive Identity page, showing one Ultrium 3 HH SAS drive (#1) and one
Ultrium 4 HH SAS drive (#2). Version 2 information displayed for drive #1 identifies the drive as a V2 drive (Feature
Code 8049 - Ultrium 3 HH SAS Drive V2).
Monitor Library: Library Status

This page displays the dynamic information about the library, such as the status of
the components. No changes can be made from here. Table 5-8 lists all available
elements on the Library Identity page. An "X" indicates that the element displays
for the specified library type.
Table 5-8. Library Status page elements
Menu Item
Description
2U
4U
Status
Library status is displayed with icons and text. A check mark with the
X
word "Ready" indicates that the library is functioning properly. An
exclamation point with the word "Caution" indicates that the library can
function, but is experiencing a problem. An X with the word "Error"
indicates that the library is not functioning because of a serious problem.
Cartridge in
Transport
Identifies a cartridge that is moving by the accessor. "None" is displayed X

if no cartridge is moved.
Number of Moves
The number of times the accessor moved a cartridge from Point A to

Point B (for example, from a storage slot to a drive).
Total Power On
Time
The total amount of time that the library was powered ON.
Accessor Status
The status of the accessor.
Left Magazine
Displays whether the left magazine is "Present" or "Not Present".
Right Magazine
Displays whether the right magazine is "Present" or "Not Present".
1. Left Magazine
Displays whether the lower left magazine is "Present" or "Not Present".
1. Right Magazine
Displays whether the lower right magazine is "Present" or "Not Present".
5-37
Table 5-8. Library Status page elements (continued)

Menu Item
Description
2U
4U
2. Left Magazine
Displays whether the upper left magazine is "Present" or "Not Present".
2. Right Magazine
Displays whether the upper right magazine is "Present" or "Not Present".
Figure 5-29. The 4U library Monitor Library: Library Status page
Monitor Library: Drive Status

This page provides the following detailed dynamic information about the drive in
the library. No changes can be made from here. The displayed information varies
depending on the library model and drive type (SCSI, SAS, or Fibre Channel).
Table 5-9 lists all available elements on the Drive Status page. An "X" indicates that
the element displays for the specified drive type.
Table 5-9. Drive Status page elements
Menu Item
Description
2U Library
4U Library
SCSI
Fibre
SAS
SCSI
Fibre
SAS
Cartridge in The serial number of the cartridge currently in

Drive
the drive. If the drive does not contain a
cartridge, "None" is displayed.
Drive Error
Code
If the drive generated an error code, it is

displayed here. If the drive did not generate an
error, "No Error" is displayed.
Cooling Fan Displays whether the drive 's cooling fan is ON

Active
(checked) or OFF.
Drive
Activity
Indicates whether the drive is operating.
Port A
Status
Indicates whether Port A is logged on or out.
Port B
Status
Indicates whether Port B is logged on or out.
Port Name
The name that is assigned to the Port on the

drive.
Status
5-38
The status of the drive. A check mark indicates

that the drive is operating properly. An
exclamation point indicates that the drive is
operating but has a problem. An X indicates that
the drive is not operational because of a serious
problem.
X
X
X
X
Table 5-9. Drive Status page elements (continued)

Menu Item
Description
2U Library
SCSI
Fibre
SAS
X
Speed
The speed setting of the drive. Choices are Auto

(where the drive automatically negotiates the
speed of the drive to match that of the server), 1
Gb/s, 2 Gb/s, 4 Gb/s, or 8 Gb/s for Fibre
Channel; 3 Gb/s or 6 Gb/s for SAS.
Topology
The type of connection to the host. The choices

are LN-port, N-port, and L port.
Hashed SAS The Hashed SAS address is a value that is

address
calculated from the WWID for use on the SAS
interface
|
|
|
4U Library
SCSI
Fibre
SAS
X
X
FC-AL Loop The loop position number; it shows the numeric

ID
ID.
Encryption
Status*
The following entries show the current encryption

status for this drive (method, key path, BOP,
density report).
Encryption
method*
The type of encryption that is enabled on the

drive.
Key path*
The path that is used for transferring an

encryption key. This setting is dependent upon
the encryption method selected.
BOP policy* Indicates whether the Beginning of Partition

(BOP) policy is enabled or disabled. If encryption
is enabled, the policy type might display
depending on the encryption method used. Policy
types include Internal label select, Internal label
always, Enabled, or Disabled. Other type
designations might display if Advanced
Encryption Settings are set (Engineering Support
use only).
Density
reporting*
LTO drives do not support settings changes to

report various densities, thus LTO drives always
report (Other).
*These features are not supported on Gen3 SAS drive types or any SCSI drive types.
5-39
a77ug093
Figure 5-30. The 4U library Monitor Library: Drive Status page
Monitor Library: Inventory

This page provides detailed information about the tape inventory in the library. A
summary of each magazine is shown. To get detailed information about the
cartridges that are contained in a magazine, click the + . This action expands the
display for the magazine. To determine whether a cartridge is encrypted, refer to
the Comments column in the Cartridge Details screen. See Figure 5-32 on page
5-42.
5-40
Inventory As Of 14:02:04 Library Time
Drive Inventory
Drive
1
Status
Empty
Label
Source
-------------
Magazine Inventory
9
10
11
IO-Station
23
19
22
21
20
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
Refresh
a77ug067
Figure 5-31. The 2U library Monitor Library: Inventory page
Note: On some 2U Libraries prior to Library Microcode Level 1.90, slot 11 might
be labeled a "Not Used" slot that contains a "slot blocker". With Library
Microcode level 1.9 or higher, there is an option to remove the "Slot Blocker"
and place that slot into use. See Removing the slot blocker - 2U library on
page 10-9.
5-41
a77ug099
*Res*
Figure 5-32. The 4U library Monitor Library: Inventory page (Right Magazines)
Note: The 4U graphic shows the Slot Inventory for the right magazines of this
library as an example. The left magazines are similar.
Manage Library menu

The Manage Library menu contains the submenu items.
v Manage Library: Move media
v Manage Library: Perform inventory on page 5-43
v Manage Library: Release Magazine on page 5-43
Manage Library: Move media

This page allows the user to move tape cartridges within the library. The source
and destination are selected and then MOVE> in the center of the screen is clicked
to activate the move.
5-42
a77ug072
Figure 5-33. Manage Library: move media page
The elements display in the Source and Destination screens.

Element
In the Source screen, this information identifies the library element that
contains a cartridge. In the Destination screen, this information identifies
the library element that is empty and can receive a cartridge.
Volume Serial
In the Source screen, this element displays the serial number of the
cartridge. In the Destination screen, this element contains no information.
Manage Library: Perform inventory
a77ug076
This page allows the library to be re-scanned to determine the current media
inventory.
Figure 5-34. Manage Library: Perform inventory page
Manage Library: Release Magazine
a77ug078
This page allows the user to release the right or left magazine from the library.
Figure 5-35. Manage Library: Release Magazine page
Note: To manually release a magazine, see Releasing the magazines manually on

page 9-1. However, this manual process must be used only if the magazine
cannot be released with the Operator Control Panel or the Web User
Interface.
5-43
Configure Library menu

The Configure Library menu contains the following submenu items:
v Configure Library: General
v Configure Library: Logical Libraries on page 5-45
v Configure Library: Path Failover on page 5-46
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
Configure
Configure
Configure
Configure
Configure
Configure
Configure
Library:
Library:
Library:
Library:
Library:
Library:
Library:
Encryption on page 5-47

Drives on page 5-50
Network on page 5-52
IPSec on page 5-53
User Access on page 5-63
Date & Time on page 5-65
Logs & Traces on page 5-66
v Configure Library: Event Notification on page 5-66

v Configure Library: SNMP on page 5-67
v Configure Library: Save/Restore on page 5-68
Configure Library: General

This page allows you to change general library configuration elements. As changes
are made, they are applied only after the Apply Selections or the Submit button is
selected. After the selection is made, a warning page will inform you of the impact
of the proposed change. In some cases a pop-up screen asks for confirmation.
Many changes also requires a library reboot.
Table 5-10. Configure Library: General page elements
Menu Item
Description
2U
4U
Library Name
Enter the name of the library.
I/O station
Enabled
The I/O station defaults to I/O station Enabled. Choosing Disabled (no
check mark) adds one more storage slot to the 2U library, and 3 more
storage slots to the 4U library. When the I/O station is disabled,
removing or adding media to the library must be completed by releasing
the left or right magazine.
Auto Clean
Enabled
Auto Clean defaults to Disabled. For Auto Clean to function, a cleaning X

cartridge (CLNxxxLx) must be resident in a reserved library slot and
Auto Clean must be enabled (turned on).
Note: If Auto Clean is enabled, and a cleaning cartridge is not resident in
a reserved slot, the Auto Clean Status field in the web System Status
screen posts a "Chk Media/Rsvd Slot" message.
Bar Code Label

Length Reported
To Host
The default bar code label length is 8, but can be set to 6. The bar code
label length is a "reported" length. This setting causes the host computer
to see only the first 6 characters of the label or all 8 characters. This
setting does not affect the bar code label that is shown on any of the
library user interfaces (always shows all 8 characters).
Table 5-11. Configure Library: Specific page elements

Menu Item
Description
2U
4U
Library Mode
Choices are Random and Sequential. If you choose Sequential, you might
also activate Autoload or Loop. If there is more than one logical library,
there is a Library Mode entry for each logical library.
Important: If a Logical Library in Sequential Mode contains more than
one drive, only the first drive in the Logical Library is used.
5-44
Table 5-11. Configure Library: Specific page elements (continued)

Menu Item
Description
2U
4U
Active Slots
It might be necessary to modify the number of active slots to agree with

the number of slots that are allowed by your host software. To modify
the number of active slots in your library, click the drop-down list and
select the number of slots you want active in your library. Also, the Auto
Clean function requires the cleaning cartridge to be in a DCS or reserved
slot. Reserved slots are created by reducing the number of active slots.
Figure 5-36. The 4U library Configure Library: General and Extended page
Configure Library: Logical Libraries

To partition your multi-drive library, select the number of logical libraries you
would like to create in your library, then click Submit.
One cartridge magazine cannot be assigned to two logical libraries. If you partition
a multi-drive library, each of the magazines must be assigned to a logical library
on a magazine boundary. The entire magazine must be part of one logical library
only. In a fully populated 4U library with four logical libraries, resource
assignments are as follows:
v Logical Library 1 contains Drive 1 and the lower left cartridge magazines.
v Logical Library 2 contains Drive 2 and the upper left cartridge magazines.
v Logical Library 3 contains Drive 3 and the lower right cartridge magazine.
v Logical Library 4 contains Drive 4 and the upper right cartridge magazine.
The I/O station and the reserved slot (or dedicated cleaning slot (DCS) if one is
assigned) are shared among all logical libraries.
5-45
Library configuration. This update removes the Attention LED on the front
panel and the exclamation mark on the Home screen that indicates that a
drive is missing.
a77ug098
drives might require you to run Restore Factory Defaults to correctly update the
drive element addressing and drive numbering. See Configure Library:
Figure 5-37. The 4U library Configure Library: Logical Libraries page
Configure Library: Path Failover
a77ug117
This page allows the user to enter the Path Failover feature activation key
(Supported on 4U library only for library firmware levels at or below 8.xx.
Supported on both the 2U and 4U libraries with library firmware levels above 8.xx)
Path Failover is a combination of two previous features: Control Path Failover (key
that is entered at the library user interface) and Data Path Failover (key that is
entered at the device driver interface). A single activation key that is entered at the
library user interface now activates both features unless the LTO-3 drive firmware
level is equal to or lower than 73P5 and/or the library firmware is equal to or
lower than 1.95. For either or both of the two cases, the device driver interface
Data Path Failover key activation is still required. For library firmware levels
below 8.xx the Path Failover feature is available for select LTO 4 tape drives, and
Path Failover is not supported for Half High drives. Library firmware levels higher
than B.50 support Path Failover on LTO 6 Full High and Half High drives. Library
firmware levels higher than 8.xx support Path Failover on LTO 5 Full High and
Half High drives, and LTO 4 Full High and Half High drives.
Figure 5-38. The 4U library Configure Library: Path Failover page
Enter the Feature Activation key and click Activate. The license verification page
displays if you entered the feature key correctly.
Figure 5-39. Path Failover license verification page
5-46
Configure Library: Encryption

Note: Application Managed Encryption (AME) does not require a license key.
Library Managed Encryption (LME) and System Managed Encryption (SME)
require a license key that is available by purchasing Feature Code 5900.In
addition to the feature license key, SME and LME require the
implementation of an external Encryption Key Manager (EKM), to provide
and manage encryption keys. With AME, encryption key management is
handled by the application.
Important: The Advanced Encryption Settings are for Engineering Support use
only. These fields must always be set to "No Advanced Setting".
Minimum prerequisites for Application Managed Encryption (AME) - LTO 6:
v Drive firmware level C800 or higher, see http://www.ibm.com/fixcentral.
Minimum prerequisites for Application Managed Encryption (AME) -LTO 5:
v Drive firmware level BBNE/BBNF or higher, see http://www.ibm.com/
fixcentral.
Minimum prerequisites for Application Managed Encryption (AME) - LTO 4:
Minimum prerequisites for Library Managed Encryption (LME) and System
v Drive firmware level C800 or higher, see http://www.ibm.com/fixcentral.
5-47
v Drive firmware level BBNE/BBNF or higher, see http://www.ibm.com/

fixcentral.
v Feature Code 5900 (Transparent LTO Encryption)
a77ug199
Setting or Changing a Drive's Method of Encryption

1. Enter your library 's IP address in an internet browser address field and press
ENTER.
2. Log in to the Web User Interface. See Login on page 2-5.
3. Expand Configure Library in the left navigation panel.
4. Click Encryption.
Figure 5-40. Feature Activation Key screen
5. On the Encryption screen, enter the Feature Activation Key to enable the
library managed and the system managed encryption options.
6. Click Activate to save the key and expand the screen for more encryption
settings.
5-48
Figure 5-41. Configure Library: Encryption feature configuration screen
7. Select Enable SSL for EKM to enable Secure Sockets Layer for the Encryption
Key Manager application.
8. Select an Encryption method, from the pull-down menu, for each logical
library.
v Without an encryption license key, select None or Application Managed
Encryption.
v With an encryption license key, select Library Managed Encryption or
9. Select an Encryption policy, from the pull-down menu, for each logical
library.
v Encrypt All: The default policy. It encrypts all cartridges with the default
data keys that are specified in the EKM. This setting applies to all drives in
the 3573 logical library.
v Internal Label - Selective Encryption: This policy is based on the internal
volume label information. Currently, the only application that supports this
option is Symantec NetBackup. Encrypts cartridges only with pool
identifiers 1500 - 9999 (inclusive), with keys specific to each pool. Labels for
these keys are generated by the tape drive that is based on the pool
identifier; for instance, key label IL_NBU_1505 is generated for a cartridge
in pool 1505.
v Internal Label - Encrypt All: This policy is based on the internal volume
label information. Currently, the only application that supports this option
is Symantec NetBackup. Encrypts all cartridges. Cartridges with pool
identifiers 2000 - 65535 (inclusive) are encrypted with keys specific to each
pool. Labels for these keys are generated by the tape drive that is based on
the pool identifier; for instance, key label IL_NBU_2505 is generated for a
cartridge in pool 2505.
10. A primary and secondary EKM server is set for each logical library. Each
partition has its own Encryption and EKM settings. Maintaining primary and
5-49
secondary EKM servers is wanted for maximum availability of encrypted

backup and recovery. These settings are required for Library Managed
Encryption only. Enter the EKM Server Setting information.
v Primary IP address (IPv4 or IPv6): Enter the IP address of the primary
EKM server.
v Primary TCP port: After the Primary IP address is entered, the library will
automatically set the value of the Primary TCP port.
v Secondary IP address (IPv4 or IPv6): Enter the IP address of the secondary
EKM server.
v Secondary TCP port: After the Secondary IP addressis entered, the library
automatically sets the value of the Secondary TCP port.
Note: The Default Port for TCP (SSL disabled) is 3801. The Default Port for
SSL is 443. These values are the default values set by the library.
They can be changed depending on the user configuration but the
user must make sure that they match the EKM properties file.
Note: The Advanced Encryption Settings are for Engineering Support only.
11. Click Submit to apply the changes.
12. Record the Feature Activation Key (or apply one of the labels) on the
Appendix G, Library Configuration Form, on page G-1 for future reference.
It is important to save your extra Feature Activation Key labels in a secure
location for future reference.
13. Install the Encryption Key Manager (EKM) application on your host. See the
EKM documentation for detailed instructions (refer to the EKM documents
listed in "Related Publications").
Configure Library: Drives

This page allows you to modify the current ID assigned to a SCSI or Fibre Channel
drive. Any drive in the library is powered off by clearing the check mark in the
Power On box. The displayed information varies depending on the library model
and drive type (SCSI, SAS, or Fibre Channel). Table 5-12 lists all available elements
on this page. An "X" indicates that the element displays for the specified drive
type.
Table 5-12. Drive Identity page elements
Menu Item
Description
2U Library
SCSI
Fibre
SAS
4U Library
SCSI
Fibre
SAS
SCSI ID
For each SCSI drive, click the drop-down list and X

select the number of the slot in which the drive is
located.
Power On
For each drive, click in the box to power ON the

selected drive.
Control Path
The control path drive communicates messages

from the host to the library. Select this option for
each drive that you want to be a control path
drive. At least one drive in each logical library
must be designated as a control path drive.
Port A Configuration:
5-50
Table 5-12. Drive Identity page elements (continued)

Menu Item
Description
2U Library
SCSI
Fibre
SAS
4U Library
SCSI
Fibre
Speed
The current speed setting of the drive. For each

Fibre Channel drive, click the drop-down list and
select Automatic, 1 Gb/s, 2 Gb/s, 4 Gb/s, or 8
Gb/s. For each SAS drive, select Automatic, 3
Gb/s, or 6 Gb/s. Selecting Automatic allows
library speed to automatically negotiate to the
current server speed.
Topology
For each Fibre Channel drive, click LN-Port,

L-Port, or N-Port.
FC-AL Loop
ID
The loop position number. The options are

"Manual" or "Automatic".
SAS
Port B Configuration:
X
a77ug064
Port B is supported for SAS full high drives only.
Figure 5-42. The Configure Library: Drives page for a 2U library
Topology
a77ug095
FC-AL Loop ID
Figure 5-43. The Configure Library: Drives page for a 4U library
Click one:
5-51
Configure Library: Network

This page shows the current network configuration of the library and allows
modification to the configuration. When a change is requested, a box confirms the
request.
a77ug074
1. Click Network in the left navigation pane, to display the Network page.
Figure 5-44. Configure Library: Network page
Important: Do not click Submit until all changes are made to the Network
page. When Submit is clicked, no other changes can be made
until after the library applies the current changes.
After Submit is clicked, depending on the changes that are made,
you might be disconnected and must log in again or reboot the
library.
Clicking Refresh refreshes the page and any changes that are
made are not retained.
2. Select a Protocol Stack - Choose IPv4 only, IPv6 only, or Dual Stack IPv4 &
IPv6.
If you choose Dual Stack IPv4 & IPv6, you must be prepared to enter both
IPv4 and IPv6 IP addresses. The sections gray out depending on the choices
that are made here.
3. Enter the Host Name.
Note: The underscore (_) is not allowed as part of a host name.
4. Enter the Domain Name.
5. DNS Primary - Enter the IP address of your primary DNS server.
6. DNS Secondary - Enter the IP address of your secondary DNS server.
7. Enable SSL for Web - If you want to have SSL (Secure Sockets Layer)
enabled, place a check mark in this box.
Note: If you get a security certificate alert when you log in to the Web User
Interface, you can install the certificate or allow an exception
(depending on the internet browser you are using). SSL is enabled
when the URL begins with https:// and some browsers show a lock.
5-52
8. Ethernet Settings - Ethernet Settings choices are Auto (the default), 10

Mbit/Half, 10 Mbit/Full, 100 Mbit/Half, 100 Mbit/Full.
that is automatically set by the DHCP server.
b. Static Address - Enter the assigned IPv4 address. The format of an IPv4 IP
address is a 32-bit numeric address that is written as four numbers that are
separated by periods.
c. Network Mask - Enter the assigned IPv4 Network Mask.
d. Gateway address - Enter the assigned IPv4 Gateway address. This address
that is automatically set by the DHCP server.
b. Enable Stateless Auto Config - Click this item ON to have the IP address
of your library that is automatically set by the network router.
c. Static Address - Enter the assigned IPv6 address. The format of an IPv6 IP
address is a 128-bit numeric address that is written as 8 groups of four
numbers that are separated by colons.
d. Prefix length - The default prefix length is set to 64, but can be set to any
length, depending upon the address used.
e. Gateway address - Enter the assigned IPv6 Gateway address. This address
11. Click one:
Note: Depending on the changes that are made, you might be disconnected
and must log in again, or reboot the library. If a reboot is required, the
following Warning message displays after Submit is clicked.
Figure 5-45. Warning screen
The library must be rebooted or the changes do not take place.
Configure Library: IPSec

This page shows the current IPSec configuration of the library and allows
modification to the settings. Internet Protocol Security (IPSec) is a protocol suite for
securing Internet Protocol (IP) communications by authenticating and encrypting
each IP packet of a communication session. IPSec also includes protocols for
establishing mutual authentication between agents at the beginning of the session
and negotiation of cryptographic keys that are used during the session.
The following requirements are mandatory to use the USGv6 IPSec/IKE features:
v
v
v
v
IBM TS3100/TS3200 tape library

Firmware Level that supports IPSec
IPv6 network environment
Peer implementations of IPSec/IKEv2 for testing
5-53
Linux
- IPSecTools
- StrongSwan/Racoon2
VPN router or similar devices
Important: Configuring IPSec can be complex. Therefore, do not enable IPSec or
change the IPSec settings unless you are directed to do so by an IPSec
knowledgeable person who is familiar with the devices attached to
your network.
IPv6 must be enabled to use IPSec on TS3100/TS3200 libraries. If the protocol stack
does not include IPv6, you cannot edit any related IPSec pages. To use IPSec, on
the Network page set the Protocol Stack to Dual stack IPv4 + IPv6 or IPv6 only.
a77ug283
The IPSec Settings page controls the generic behavior of the IPSec system and
contains the policy management.
1. Click IPsec in the left navigation pane to display the IPSec menu page.
Figure 5-46. Configure Library: IPSec: The Policy setting page
2. Select Enable to enable or disable IPSec. A check mark displays when IPSec is
enabled. When the check box is clear (as in the following graphic), IPSec is
disabled.
Important: To configure IPSec with the appropriate layers of security services,
ensure that policies on the host AND device sides are enabled. If unsure how
IPSec security works, contact your Network personnel.
5-54
a77ug284
Figure 5-47. Generic IPSec settings

Table 5-13. Generic IPSec settings
Setting
Available values
Comments
Enable
v Enable
The IPSec system might be enabled

or disabled. If disabled, no IPSec
processing takes place. All data is
processed natively.
v Disable
Default Policy
v Bypass
v Discard
Neighborhood Solicitation/
Neighborhood Advertisment bypass
policies enabled
v Enable
v Disable
The Default Policy is used for all

data packets not matching any user
policy traffic selector. With Bypass,
the packet is forwarded and normally
processed. With Discard, the packet is
not processed and is discarded.
Enables predefined policies for the
NS/NA messages to be bypassed.
Allows initial IKE phases in case of
all protocol-securing policies, which
would normally discard this message
type if no SA is established.
a77ug285
3. Figure 5-48 shows the IPSec maintenance main controls.
Figure 5-48. IPSec Policy editing
a. New creates a new policy. Up to four policies can be created.

b. Delete deletes the selected policy.
c. Disable disables the selected policy. If it is already enabled, a click disables
it.
d. View/Modify loads the selected policy to view or modify.
e. Up/Down allows reordering of the selected policy. Policies are processed in
the order as shown. Reordering of policies changes the processing priority.
4. Policies are processed in the order they display on the policy list. This order is
important in case multiple policies are in use. The first matching policy
processes the packet.
v One policy matches the packet, and is selected.
v Multiple policies might match. In this case, the first matching policy is
selected.
v No policies might match, then the default policy is used.
5. The Policy Editing section is divided into four parts:
5-55
v
v
v
v
General settings
Internet Key Exchange (IKE) settings
Security Association settings
Refresh/Submit/Cancel button
[]
[]
a77ug293
[]
a77ug287
Figure 5-49. Policy editing
Figure 5-50. Overview of the policy configuration page
6. General Policy settings

The general settings define the main behavior of the policy and define the
Traffic Selectors that select the packets that are processed by the policy.
5-56
a77ug294
Figure 5-51. General Policy settings

Table 5-14. General Policy settings
Name of setting
Available values
Comments
Policy Name
Name of the policy
User definable name to describe the

policy
Policy Type
v Protect
It defines the action that is taken by

the policy if the policy selector
matches the packet.
v Bypass
v Discard
v Protect
The normal use of a policy. The
packet is processed with the
parameters and algorithms that are
defined in the policy.
v Bypass
The packet is forwarded to the
target without any modification.
Often used to allow special
message types to be transferred
without protection to avoid the
chicken and egg problem during
initiating a secured connection.
v Discard
The packet is discarded and not
forwarded to any target.
Direction
v Inbound
v Outbound
v Asynchronous
It defines for which direction of

communication the policy is usable.
Different algorithms or security
parameters can be used for each
direction.
v Inbound
Only arriving packets are
processed (if the other parameters
are also fit)
v Outbound
Only packets to send are processed
(if the other parameters are also fit)
v Asynchronous
Packets in both directions are
processed
5-57
Table 5-14. General Policy settings (continued)

Name of setting
Available values
Traffic Selector
Protocol ID
Comments
The Traffic Selector is an important
part of a policy. The contents of the
Traffic Selector fields provide packet
detection to process according to the
chosen policy. Each part of the
selector must be fulfilled by the
packet to initiate the processing.
v All
v TCP
v UDP
v ICMPv6
The Protocol ID defines for which IP

protocol type the policy is used.
Possible values are
v Any
All protocol types are selected
v ICMPv6
With ICMPv6, you can choose the
message type. Mainly for test and
certification.
All/Echo Request (Ping
Send)/Echo Reply (Ping
Receive)/NS/NA
Note: NS = Neighborhood
Solicitation, NA =
Neighborhood Advertisement
Port Range
v All
v From
v Custom
v To
With TCP or UDP protocol, the

selector can be restricted to a range
of protocol ports.
Example: Only standard HTTP traffic
must be secured by IPSec.
v Protocol ID: TCP
v Port Range: 80 - 80
Address Range
v All
v From
v Single
v To
v Range
v Subnet
v Library Address
The Address Range defines for which

device addresses (mainly peer
addresses) the policy is selected.
v All
Any peer address trigger
v Single
Only the address that is defined in
the From: address fields trigger.
v Range
The Addresses between From: and
To: trigger.
v Subnet
All addresses in the subnet that is
defined by the From: field and the
Prefix length are used.
v Library Address
In case the device has multiple
local addresses (stateless/stateful),
an address can be selected by this
field. Only packets that are
dedicated for this local address are
selected.
5-58
Table 5-14. General Policy settings (continued)

Name of setting
Available values
Comments
Mode
v Transport Mode
v Transport Mode
v Start Point
v Tunnel Mode
v End Point
The Transport Mode is the default

operation mode and needs no
further configuration parameters.
A IPSec session is established
between 2 peers.
v Tunnel Mode
In the Tunnel Mode, a device is
reached through a tunnel between
2 security gateways (SGW). Only
the traffic between the gateways is
secured. The device itself can also
act as an SGW and is then reached
from a number of devices behind
the tunnel. If a packet matches the
selector of the policy, this packet is
sent to the SGW to be delivered to
the other side of the tunnel.
Tunnel Start Point
Defines the address of the start
point (SGW) of the tunnel.
Tunnel End Point
Defines the address of the end
point (SGW) of the tunnel.
a77ug295
7. IKE Settings
IKE Settings specify the IKE(v2) related policy settings.
Figure 5-52. IKE settings

Table 5-15. IKE settings
Name of setting
Available values
Comments
Enable IKE
checked/unchecked
Check if IKE is used to establish the

connection. If cleared the SA
parameters like SPI and encryption
keys must be defined manually and
static.
Authentication Algorithm
v SHA-1
Choose this value.
5-59
Table 5-15. IKE settings (continued)

Name of setting
Available values
Comments
Encryption Algorithm
v AES
Choose one of 2 values.
v 3DES
Pseudo Random Function
v SHA-1
v AES XCBC
DH Group
v 1 (768 Bit)
v 2 (1024 Bit)
v 5 (1536 Bit)
v 14 (2048 Bit)
Authentication Method
v PSK
v ASCII
v HEX
This mode uses a password with a

maximum length of 32 characters but
can be shorter.
v ASCII Mode
The PSK is inserted as a normal
string: TOPSECRETKEY.
v Hex Mode
The PSK is inserted in hexadecimal
string. Every character is represented
in 2 hex digits:
544F505345435245544B4559
T O P S E C R E T K E Y
With this mode, binary PSKs are
entered.
Library Authentication ID
RSA
The RSA authentication is based on

certificates that are uploaded to the
unit before this mode is used. Because
of memory limitations only one set of
certificates is used. To enable RSA, four
different certificate files are loaded.
Note: Refer to 8. Certificate Upload.
v All
ID value that is compared against the

peer ID.
v IPv6 Address
v FQDN
v E-Mail-Address
v All
Any peer ID is accepted.
v IPv6 Address
Peer IP address is compared.
v FQDN
Peers FQDN ID is compared.
v Email Address
Peers email address is compared.
5-60
Table 5-15. IKE settings (continued)

Name of setting
Available values
Comments
Host Authentication ID
v All
ID value that is compared against the

peer ID.
v IPv6 Address
v FQDN
v E-Mail-Address
v All
Any peer ID is accepted.
v IPv6 Address
Peer IP address is compared.
v FQDN
Peers FQDN ID is compared.
v Email Address
Peers email address is compared.
a77ug296
8. Certificate Upload
The file selection box displays under the IPSec page, and it is available even
before a new policy is created.
Figure 5-53. Certificate Upload
a77ug297
9. Security Association Settings

The Security Association settings define the parameter and algorithms for the
Security Association (SA) used in an IPSec session in case the associated
policy is used. In case IKE is not used, these settings must be the same as on
the peer side. If IKE is used, only the AH/ESP selection and the algorithms
are needed.
Figure 5-54. Security Association settings

Table 5-16. Security Association settings
Name of setting
Available Values
Comments
Enable AH
checked/unchecked
AH (Authentication Header) mode

activation
5-61
Table 5-16. Security Association settings (continued)

Name of setting
Available Values
Comments
Enable ESP
checked/unchecked
ESP (Encapsulation Security Payload)

mode activation
Security Association Lifetime (sec)
0 - 65535
Defines the lifetime of a Security

Association (SA) in seconds. After
this lifetime, the SA expires and a
new SA is negotiated with the peer.
Only applicable where IKE is used.
Without IKE, a SA never expires.
SPI
256 - 16000
This value is normally 0; it is

auto-generated by the system. Only
in a special case (such as test) is it set
to a defined value: the peer side
expects a dedicated value. If IKE is
used, its value is ignored.
Note: Values are not checked if they
are in valid range. Values<256 and
values>16000 are reserved for IKE
type connections.
Authentication Algorithm
See Table 5-15 on page 5-59
Hash Algorithm that is used by AH

and ESP to authentication.
Encryption Algorithm
See Table 5-15 on page 5-59
Encryption Algorithm that is used by

ESP to encrypt the message.
Authentication Key
Alphanumeric value
Static key for Authentication. Used

only in non-IKE mode. Length
depends on the algorithm used.
v SHA-1 Key Length: 20 char
Encryption Key
Alphanumeric value
Static key for Encryption. Used only

in non-IKE mode. Length depends on
the algorithm used.
v AES Key Length: 16 char
v 3DES Key Length: 24 char
v NULL (only for test) Key Length: 0
char
10. To save the policy setting, click Submit. Submit always stores current settings
in the actual policy slot and returns to the IPSec maintenance page.
Figure 5-55 on page 5-63 is showing one saved policy named
PolicyTCPTransport.
5-62
a77ug298
Figure 5-55. Policy slot setup after one policy is saved
Important:
v IKE-enabled configurations need a running Racoon2 or StrongSwan
system that is correctly configured to match your policy.
v SPI-enabled configurations need a correct setkey setup.
v When SPI and IKE-enabled configurations are mixed, be careful to
set up the right configuration.
Common preferences
v Default policy supports discard and bypass mode.
v It is not possible to save more than four policies.
Single policy configuration
v Multiple single addresses per policy are not provided.
v The SPI index must be 256 - 10000 for a pure SPI connection.
Configure Library: User Access

This page allows the user to add and modify user accounts. See Login on page
2-5 for information about user types.
The Configure Library > User Access page is accessible only to the Admin and
Service login. Access is denied to User and Superuser logins.
The Admin login has access to all library functions except Service Library >
The Service login has access to all library functions including Service Library >
5-63
a77ug082
Figure 5-56. Configure Library: User Access page
The following elements are displayed on the User Access page.

|
|
|
|
|
|
Roles
v Check the Disable Superuser check box if you do not want Superuser to be
listed on the Role listbox (that is, prohibits Superuser login).
Check the Disable User check box if you do not want User to be listed on the
Role listbox (that is, prohibits User login). Clear the check box to allow
Superuser or User login.
|
|
|
Passwords
v Role - The name that is associated with the chosen Access Level. Choose from
User, Superuser, Admin, or Service.
|
|
|
|
|
Note: Admin can select User, Superuser, and Admin roles. Service can select
User, Superuser, Admin, and Service roles.
v New Password (Enter Up To Twenty Characters) - Enter a new password to be
associated with the Access Level Name.
v Repeat Password - Reenter the new password for verification purposes.
|
|
|
Support Contact
v Support Name - The name of the individual within your company to contact for
Web User Interface or library support.
|
|
|
|
|
Note: Only one support person is configured for the entire tape library. The
support person might or might not be one of the user, superuser, or
admin account holders.
v Support Phone - The phone number of the individual within your company to
contact for Web User Interface or library support.
|
|
v Support Email - The email address of the individual within your company to
contact for Web User Interface or library support.
Password Rules
5-64
|
|
|
v Minimum Number Of Characters - Choose the minimum password length. The

factory default value is 8. Possible range for this configuration option is 8 - 20.
The maximum password length is 20.
|
|
|
|
|
|
v Minimum Number Of Upper Case Alphabetic Characters (A-Z) - Choose the

minimum number of uppercase alphabetic characters. The factory default value
is 1. Possible range for this configuration option is 0 - 3.
v Minimum Number Of Lower Case Alphabetic Characters (a-z) - Choose the
minimum number of lowercase alphabetic characters. The factory default value
is 1. Possible range for this configuration option is 0 - 3.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
v Minimum Number Of Numeric Characters (0-9) - Choose the minimum

number of numeric characters. The factory default value is 1. Possible range for
this configuration option is 0 - 3.
v Minimum Number Of Special Characters (!@#$%^&*()_+={}|[]\;':"<>?,./) Choose the minimum number of special characters. The factory default value is
0. Possible range for this configuration option is 0 - 3.
v Maximum Number Of Identical Consecutive Characters - Choose the
maximum number of identical consecutive characters. The factory default value
is 2. Possible range for this configuration option is 0 - 3. There is no limitation if
0 is selected.
|
|
|
|
v Maximum Number Of Failed Logins Before Password Is Locked - Choose the

maximum number of failed logins before the password is locked. The factory
default value is 5. Possible range for this configuration option is 0 - 10. There is
no limitation if 0 is selected.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note: When a password is locked, the login cannot continue. First, you must
complete a valid login with an admin account where the admin can
change a password, or a restore factory default password from the
operator panel (if the admin account is the one that is locked out).
v Maximum Number Of Days Before Password Must Be Changed - Choose the
maximum number of days before the password must be changed. The factory
default value is 90. Possible range for this configuration option is 0 - 365. There
is no limitation if 0 is selected.
Click one:
v Refresh - Cancels the changes that are made to the screen.
v Submit - Applies the changes that are made to the screen.
Configure Library: Date & Time
a77ug061
This page allows the user to set the time and date, and how it is displayed.
Figure 5-57. The Configure Library: Date & Time page
Time (24H)
With a 24-hour format, enter the hour, minutes, and seconds.
Date
Enter the month, day, and year.

5-65
Click one:
Configure Library: Logs & Traces

This page allows service personnel to set the error log mode to Continuous or to
Stop trace at first error.
Figure 5-58. Configure Library: Logs & Traces page
It is recommended that you select Continuous for the Error Log Mode so that all
information for logs and traces are captured.
Click one:
Note: The trace level and trace filter selection options are changeable only by
Service personnel.
Configure Library: Event Notification
a77ug065
This page allows the user to enter information for event notification. When set up
correctly, Event Notification allows the library to send an email to a designated
individual when the library is experiencing a problem.
Figure 5-59. Configure Library: Event Notification page
The following elements are displayed on the Event Notification page.
5-66
Notify Errors
Select this item to be notified of library errors by email.
Notify Warnings
Select this item to be notified of library warnings by email.
To Email Address
Enter the email address of the individual you want to receive the errors or
warnings.
SMTP Server Address (IPv4 or IPv6)
Enter the address of the email server of the individual you want to receive
the errors or warnings. This can be an IPv4 or IPv6 address, or a host
name and domain. If a host name and domain is listed, the IPv4 or IPv6
address is resolved from the DNS with that name. The address is also
stored rather than the name. If the address changes, a new name or a new
address must be entered.
Domain Name
Enter the Domain Name for your library. This field cannot be blank when
email notification is used.
Note: If you attempt to enter a blank value for the Domain Name, a
warning message displays. It says If you are using Email
Notification then a value is required for the Domain Name.
Click one:
Configure Library: SNMP

This page shows the current SNMP configuration of the library and allows
modification to the configuration. When a change is requested, a box checks to
confirm the changes.
a77ug278
Click SNMP in the left navigation pane to display the SNMP page.
Figure 5-60. Configure Library: SNMP page

5-67
Note: For information about SNMP, see SNMP messaging on page 1-6 and
Appendix F, SNMP status MIB variables and traps, on page F-1.
Note: If SNMP is not enabled (cleared), all SNMP fields are disabled.
SNMP
v Enabled - Check this box to have SNMP traps sent to an SNMP Management
console.
v Community Name - An SNMP community name is a text string that acts as a
password to authenticate messages that are sent between the SNMP remote
management application and the library. Enter your preferred name, or leave as
"public".
SNMP DESTINATIONS
v Target 1 - IP Address - If SNMP traps are enabled, enter an IP address where
SNMP traps are sent.
v Target 2 - IP Address - Enter an optional second IP address where SNMP traps
are sent, or leave as 0.0.0.0.
v Target 3 - IP Address - Enter an optional third IP address where SNMP traps are
sent, or leave as 0.0.0.0.
v Version - The library offers three versions of the SNMP protocol; v1, v2, and v3.
Select a version for each Target IP address.
v Audit Logging - If SNMP is enabled and Audit Logging is enabled, the library
sends SNMP traps to an SNMP Management console when the library or tape
drive configuration changes.
Note: This option is available only if the library firmware is 9.00 or higher, and
the latest library MIB file is added to the SNMP Management console.
SNMP V3 SECURITY
|
|
v User Name - Enter your preferred name, or leave as "initial".

v Authentication - The options for Authentication are none, MD5, or SHA.
v Authentication Password - The Authentication Password must be at least 8
characters in length. If Authentication is set to none, this field and the Privacy
and Privacy Password fields are disabled.
v Privacy - The options for Privacy are none, or DES. If Privacy is set to none,
then the Privacy Password field is disabled.
v Privacy Password - The Privacy Password must be at least 8 characters in
length.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note: The factory default settings for SNMP V3 Security are
Configure Library: Save/Restore
v User Name - initial

v Authentication - none
v Privacy - none
This page allows the library configuration to be reset to the factory defaults.
For information about factory default settings, see Configure: Save/Restore on
page 5-26. When you restore your library to factory defaults, all configuration data
in the library is lost and must be reestablished. Feature Activation Keys is retained.
5-68
Saving and restoring configuration data can be done with the Remote Management
Unit (RMU) or the Operator Control Panel (OCP). The feature is implemented on
the RMU and on the OCP, but with slightly different functionality.
Note: Configuration files saved with one version of library firmware might not be
compatible with other versions of firmware. It is recommended to save a
configuration file each time the library firmware is upgraded. Restore the
library with a configuration file that was saved with the same version of
firmware that is currently installed in the library.
a77ug079
Since the RMU can be accessed remotely, its implementation saves or restores the
configuration data to or from a file on the host site. When commands on the OCP
are entered, the unit is accessed directly. For this reason the OCP implementation
saves or restores the configuration data to or from a USB flash drive that is
inserted into the USB connector on the library controller.
Figure 5-61. Configure Library: Save/Restore page
Service Library menu

Some Service Library functions post a warning message that states that the library
must be taken offline from the host before any Service functions are completed. It
is up to the operator to ensure that it is taken offline at the host. Before any service
functions are done, ensure that the host is not processing any data writing or
retrieval.
Service Library: Clean Drive

If the library is not configured for Auto Clean, this page allows the user to
manually clean the tape drive.
A drive cleaning is initiated only after the library or drive posted a status message
that indicates Cleaning Required
To manually complete a drive cleaning, complete the following steps:
1. Select a cleaning cartridge that is listed in the Slot # field.
2. Select a drive that is listed in the Drive field.
3. Click Clean. See Figure 5-64 on page 5-70.
|
|
|
|
Note: Enabling the Auto Clean function is recommended on the library. With the
Auto Clean function enabled, drive cleaning occurs automatically. The only
time Auto Cleaning is disabled is when your Backup Application requires
that it has control.
Drives that do not require a cleaning are labeled with No Cleaning Required. See
Figure 5-62 on page 5-70.
5-69
a77ug259
Figure 5-62. No Cleaning Required
a77ug260
If there is no cleaning cartridge in the library, Clean cannot be selected and the
Slot # displays N.A.. See Figure 5-63
Figure 5-63. No cleaning cartridge in library
a77ug122
Note: If the library is configured for Auto Clean, and a cleaning cartridge is
resident in a reserved slot, the library automatically loads the drive with a
cleaning cartridge. The drive completes a cleaning and the library returns
the cleaning cartridge to the reserved slot. If Auto Clean is enabled and a
cleaning cartridge is not present in a reserved slot, Auto Clean status on the
Web User Interface Status screen shows Chk Media/Rsvd Slot.
Figure 5-64. Service Library: Clean Drive page
Service Library: Advanced Diagnostics (for Service Personnel

Only)
This menu is for use by IBM Authorized Service Personnel only. SeeBefore you
begin on page A-2.
Service Library: View Logs

This page allows the library logs to be viewed after entering the information:
v Log Type
Error Trace: Logs all the error messages
Informational Trace: Logs all the informational messages that are created as
the library operates
Warning Trace: Logs all warning messages that are created by the library.
Warning messages does not stop a library 's operation but does remind the
user of issues that might become a problem. Example: Invalid Media.
Configuration Change Trace: Logs any configuration changes made, such as
changing/adding partitions, changing SCSI addresses, removing a DCS.
Standard Trace: Logs all library operations
Note: Ensure that the pop-up facilities on the web browser are set to enable
pop-up boxes to display. For example, on Microsoft Internet Explorer,
under Tools, ensure that the pop-up blocker is turned OFF and Internet
5-70
v
v
v
v
v
v
Options > Security > Custom Level > Downloads > Automatic
Prompting for file downloads and File Downloads are both Enabled.
Total Number of Entries
Start Entry
Number of Entries per Page
View
Clear Log - Clears the log you are viewing
Dump Log - Dumps the log you are viewing
v Save Service Dump - Creates a DPA (Dump All) log output that can be viewed
or saved to a file
a77ug120
<Prev | Next> displays if the number of logs entries exceeds the number of entries
per page. Click <Prev | Next> to index through the log entries. Next is not
displayed if the log has more or fewer entries than the # of entries per page
setting. AfterNext is clicked, Prev is displayed. If the log entries fit on a single
page, <Prev | Next> do not display.
Figure 5-65. Service Library: View Logs page
Service Library: View Drive Logs

This page allows the drive logs to be viewed after selecting:
v Log Type
Error: Logs drive error code information.
SCSI: Logs ASC/ASCQ and FSC information.
v Additional Sense Code (ASC)
v Additional Sense Code Qualifier (ASCQ)
v Fault Symptom Code (FSC)
5-71
a77ug096
Figure 5-66. Service Library: View Drive Logs screen
Service Library: Save Drive Dump

This menu item allows a drive memory dump to be saved to the host computer.
1. Select the drive.
2. Choose the regular drive memory dump option (data that is stored in flash), or
the forced drive memory dump option (data that is stored in memory and
moved to flash).
|
|
|
|
3. Click Save Drive Dump.

When Save Drive Dump is clicked, the user has the option of saving the drive
memory dump to their hard disk drive. The progress status for the drive memory
dump is shown on the System Status screen to the right of the main Web User
Interface screen.
Note: It is recommended that both a regular and forced drive memory dumps be
created and saved.
|
|
Note: Ensure that all the pop-up facilities on the web browser are set to allow
pop-up boxes to display. With Microsoft Internet Explorer, under Tools,
ensure that the pop-up blocker is turned OFF and Internet Options >
Security > Custom Level > Downloads > Automatic Prompting for file
Downloads and File Downloads are both Enabled.
When the memory dumps are saved on the hard disk, they can be e-mailed to
Tech Support for analysis, if needed.
Note: The memory dump might take up to 20 minutes to complete. The System
Status portion of the screen shows "Drive Dump in Progress" with the
number of KBs transferred.
Figure 5-67. Service: Save Drive Dump
Service Library: Perform Diagnostics

Note: When the "System Test" is run, the library must contain at least the same
number of data cartridges as there are drives in that library. For example, if
5-72
your library has four drives that are installed, you must have 4 or more data
cartridges in the library before the start of the test. If there are fewer data
cartridges than drives in the library, an error message "Slot Empty" occurs,
and the test does not complete successfully. The media type must be
compatible with the drive type. Otherwise, an error message "Incompatible
Media" occurs and the test fails.
This page provides the system administrator with general tests to verify the
usability and reliability of the library. The "System Test" uses resident data
cartridges to test the load and unload capability of the drives, and ensure that the
library mechanics are working satisfactorily. No data is written to the cartridges
and the cartridges are returned to their normal slot location. The "Slot To Slot" test
moves each resident data cartridge from one slot to another, for each test cycle
requested. When the "Slot To Slot" test is completed, you must Inventory your
library before it is placed back online, since this test scrambles the cartridge slot
locations.
The user selects the number of test cycles before the test from EXECUTE is started.
To cancel the test before it completes the cycles, select STOP.
a77ug075
Note: The Web User Interface System Status screen indicates progress and
completion of the activity.
Figure 5-68. Service Library: Perform Diagnostics page
The first field can be modified to set the number of cycles. The second field
displays the completed cycles.
Service Library: Key Path Diagnostics

Important: Ensure that library firmware and drive firmware are up to date before
the Key Path Diagnostic test is run. Library firmware level must be
greater than 6.xx. See Verifying/updating firmware on page 4-21.
The key path diagnostics test completes diagnostic procedures on the encryption
key path. Only drives that are set up for library managed encryption are tested.
Only encryption capable drives in logical libraries that are configured for Library
Managed Encryption are tested. To configure the library for encryption, see
Configure Library: Encryption on page 5-47.
The test consists of four parts:
v Drive Test: The library completes a drive communication test to confirm
communication with the drive.
v Ethernet Test: For each EKM IP address, the library completes a ping test and
records the results.
v EKM Path Test: For each EKM IP address that passed the ping test, the library
completes an EKM communication test.
5-73
v EKM Config Test: This test confirms that a drive is correctly configured in the
EKM to service key requests.
run the Key Path Diagnostic test, complete this procedure.
Log on to the Web User Interface. See Login on page 2-5.
Quiesce all drives, then unload all drives.
Click Service Library, then Key Path Diagnostics.
a77ug193
To
1.
2.
3.
Figure 5-69. Service Library: Perform Key Path Diagnostics page
4. Click Start Tests.

Note: If you enabled encryption on your library, wait for all LME drives to be
displayed in the table and Start Tests to become active.
Each test shows a result of "Passed" or "Failed". If a test fails the remaining tests
are not run, and the test shows a result of "N/A". The IP address might show
"N/A" because
1. Drive is not encryption capable.
2. EKM Server Settings, on the Configure Library > Encryption page, are not
configured correctly.
Test results clear
v When the test is rerun
v When the library is rebooted
The time and date of the last test displays below the Key Path Diagnostics screen.
If any of the tests fail, see Chapter 7, Troubleshooting, on page 7-1 for more
information.
Service Library: Upgrade Firmware

Note: The IBM System Storage TS3100 tape library and TS3200 tape library is a
customer installed unit. The customer is responsible for the setup and
maintenance of the tape library. The customer is charged for service if a
service contract is not in place.
Consider these IBM recommendations to provide maximum performance and
reliability:
1. The latest version of microcode must be installed on your IBM tape libraries
and devices.
2. The library code must be updated first, unless noted otherwise. This action
supports any changes that are introduced in the library code for that drive, or
any changes that are made to the drive for that release.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
5-74
|
|
|
3. These firmware updates are intended to increase overall reliability, improve

tape handling, reduce the possibility of data errors, and enhance diagnostic
capabilities.
Note: Library firmware and tape drive firmware are verified and released together.
When you are updating to the latest firmware, verify that all installed
components such as tape drive, and library are at the latest levels noted on
the Support website. Mixing different levels of library and tape drive
firmware is not supported and might cause unpredictable results.
This page displays the current library and drive firmware versions. Firmware is
downloaded to the host, then uploaded to the drive or library.
Click Browse... to choose the firmware file you downloaded from the website (the
website is http://www.ibm.com/storage/support/) for the library or drive you
want to update. (You can update only one device at a time). Be sure that you
choose the correct firmware for the library or drive type. Click Update to initiate
the file transfer and firmware update.
Note: During the update, no host drive action is possible. The drive update takes
approximately 5 minutes. The system status panel (in the right of the
browser window) changes from "update" to "ready".
If incompatible firmware is transferred to the library or drive the Update function
terminates with a message that indicates incompatible firmware. If the library has
a BCR (barcode reader) that requires 9.00 or greater firmware, the Update function
terminates with a message that indicates the library requires firmware 9.00 or
higher.
To ensure that the drive is updated with the correct firmware, refer to the drive
identification information provided in the Upgrade Library Firmware banner.
Ensure that the drive firmware is for the correct drive type (Full Height, Half
Height), correct protocol (SCSI, SAS, Fibre Channel), and correct version (V2).
Drive code for V2 drives is not compatible with drives that are not V2.
V2 drive firmware compatibility
v ULT3580-HH3 drives
Firmware for the LTO3
drive
drive
drive
drive
HH drive is not compatible with the LTO3 HH V2

HH V2 drive is not compatible with the LTO3 HH
HH drive is not compatible with the LTO4 HH V2

HH V2 drive is not compatible with the LTO4 HH
The latest firmware for the LTO5 HH drive is compatible with all LTO5 HH
drives. Upgrade the drive with the latest firmware if the drive Update
function terminates with a message that indicates incompatible firmware.
5-75
a77ug290
a77ug097
Figure 5-70. The 2U library Service Library: Upgrade Firmware page, showing one Ultrium 3 SAS Half High V2 drive
and one Ultrium 4 SAS Half High drive.
Figure 5-71. The 4U library Service Library: Upgrade Firmware page
5-76
a77ug291
Figure 5-72. The 2U library Monitor Library: Drive Identity page, showing one Ultrium 3 HH SAS drive (#1) and one
Ultrium 4 HH SAS drive (#2). Version 2 information displayed for drive #1 identifies the drive as a V2 drive (Feature
Code 8049 - Ultrium 3 HH SAS Drive V2).
Service Library: Reboot

Important: Some options of the Web User Interface take the library offline. This
inactive mode interferes with host-based application software, causing
data loss. Ensure that the library is idle before you attempt to complete
any remote operation that takes the library offline.
This page is used to complete a library reboot. There is a default time delay when
the Web User Interface page refreshes itself. This time is sufficient to reload the
page. However, during a reboot, the connection to the library might be lost. If the
connection is lost, the user must reload the page manually.
a77ug077
Click Reboot to initiate the reboot.
Figure 5-73. Service Library: Reboot page
5-77
Import and export media during normal library operation

Import media
Data cartridges can be inserted and taken out of a magazine while the library is in
operation. If the library contains an I/O station, and you want to import media,
follow these steps:
1. From the OCP main menu, select Control > Open I/O Station. The I/O station
unlocks itself.
2. Pull out the I/O station and insert a data cartridge. On a 2U library, only 1
cartridge can be inserted at a time. On the 4U library, 3 cartridges can be
inserted at one time.
3. Close the I/O station. The library automatically starts an inventory. The
cartridges in the I/O station are counted but unassigned until they are moved
into storage slots.
4. From the OCP main menu, select Control > Move Cartridges and move the
data cartridges into the wanted data slots. See Control: Move Cartridges on
page 5-17 or Manage Library: Move media on page 5-42 for more
information.
If the library does not have an I/O station (all slots are assigned to storage), and
you want to import media, you must release a magazine and insert the cartridges
manually following these steps:
1. From the OCP main menu, select Control > Magazine. Choose the magazine to
unlock and remove.
2. Pull out the magazine and insert data cartridges into the empty slots.
3. Push the magazine back into the library. The library automatically starts an
inventory.
4. To move cartridges in the magazine once they are inserted, from the OCP main
menu, select Control > Move Cartridges and move the data cartridges into the
wanted slots. See Control: Move Cartridges on page 5-17 or Manage
Library: Move media on page 5-42 for more information.
Note: If you run a library configuration backup program on your host
computer, use the program to run an audit of the library after new
cartridges are added to update the backup program.
Export media
To remove cartridges from your library with your I/O station, follow these steps:
1. From the OCP main menu, select Control > Move Cartridges and move the
data cartridges into the I/O station. See Control: Move Cartridges on page
5-17 or Manage Library: Move media on page 5-42 for more information.
2. From the OCP main menu, select Control > Open I/O station. The I/O station
unlocks itself
3. Pull out the I/O station and take out the data cartridges.
4. Push the I/O station back into the library. The library automatically starts an
inventory of the I/O station.
If you do not have an I/O station (all slots are assigned to storage), and want to
export media, you must release a magazine and take out the cartridges manually
following these steps:
5-78
1. From the OCP main menu, select Control > Magazine. Choose the magazine
that you want to unlock/remove.
2. Pull out the magazine and remove the wanted data cartridges.
3. Push the magazine back into the library. The library automatically starts an
inventory.
Note: If you run a library configuration backup program on your host
computer, use the program to run an audit of the library after cartridges
are removed to update the backup program.
Configuring I/O stations and reserving slots

2U libraries usually have 1 slot for an I/O station, while 4U libraries have 3 slots
assigned as an I/O station. These slots might be configured as storage if needed.
To configure the I/O station using the Web User Interface, follow these steps.
v Go to Configure Library > General.
v To enable the I/O station, place a check mark in the I/O Station Enabled box. If
it is checked as enabled, the first 3 physical slots in the lower left magazine in a
4U or the first physical slot in the left magazine in a 2U is configured as an I/O
station. If the I/O Station Enabled box is not checked, the slots are configured as
storage.
Note: The number of I/O station slots and storage are automatically assigned
when the I/O Station Enabled box is checked or unchecked.
Dedicated Cleaning Slot

Earlier versions of the 4U library contained a Dedicated Cleaning Slot (DCS). This
DCS is retained and is supported by future library firmware updates. Library
firmware after 1.95 allows removal of the DCS, thus enabling this slot to be used
as a storage slot.
To remove the DCS, perform the following procedures using the Operator Control
Panel (OCP).
1. Navigate to the Library Settings (Logical Library Settings) screen Configure >
Library Settings (or Logical Library Settings).
2. Select General.
3. Scroll down to Remove DCS.
4. Select No or Yes.
5. Select Save then press the Enter button.
Attention: If your library originally contained a Dedicated Cleaning Slot and was
removed, it can only be reinstated by restoring factory default settings.
To enable automatic cleaning of the drives when needed, a slot must be reserved, a
cleaning cartridge must be present in the reserved slot, and Auto Clean must be
enabled.
Reserving slots
Reserving a slot is accomplished by reducing the Active Slot count in any
particular logical library. Slots are reserved beginning with the last available slot in
the last magazine of the library. A cleaning cartridge in a reserved slot is available
5-79
to any logical library drive even if the reserved slot is not in that logical library.
Typically, if the library contains multiple logical libraries, the last logical library is
chosen for the reserved slot containing the cleaning cartridge. As with a library
with a single logical library, this slot is the last physical slot in the library (top
right magazine, upper rear slot).
Note: Configure the required number of reserved slots prior to enabling Auto
Clean.
v To reserve slots in your library or to reserve a cleaning slot, go to the Web User
Interface at Choosing general library settings on page 4-22 or the Operator
Control Panel at Configure: Library on page 5-20 to get directions on reducing
the Active slot count.
5-80

To ensure that your IBM Ultrium tape drive conforms to IBM's specifications for
reliability, use only IBM LTO Ultrium tape cartridges. You might use other
LTO-certified data cartridges, but they might not meet the standards of reliability
that are established by IBM. The IBM LTO Ultrium data cartridge cannot be
interchanged with the media used in other IBM non-LTO Ultrium tape products.
Figure 6-1 shows the IBM LTO Ultrium data cartridge and its components.
1
2
3
LTO cartridge memory

Cartridge door
Leader pin
4
5
6
Write-protect Switch
Label area
Insertion guide
Figure 6-1. The IBM LTO Ultrium data cartridge
Note: The same components are on all the IBM LTO Ultrium data cartridges.
Data cartridges
The different generations of IBM Ultrium data cartridges are identified by color:
Table 6-1. Cartridge types and colors
Type
Color
Ultrium 6
Black
Ultrium 6 WORM
Black and Silvery gray
Ultrium 5
Burgundy
Ultrium 5 WORM
Burgundy and Silvery gray
Ultrium 4
Green
Ultrium 4 WORM
Green and Silvery gray
Ultrium 3
Slate Blue
Ultrium 3 WORM
Slate Blue and Silvery gray
6-1
Table 6-1. Cartridge types and colors (continued)

Type
Color
Ultrium 2
Purple
Ultrium 1
Black
All generations contain 1/2-inch, dual-coat, magnetic tape.

You can order tape cartridges with the bar code labels included, or you can order
custom labels. To obtain tape cartridges and bar code labels, see Ordering media
supplies on page 6-20.
When tape is processed in the cartridges, Ultrium Tape Drives use a linear,
serpentine recording format. The native data capacity and recording format of
Ultrium data cartridges is as follows:
Table 6-2. Cartridge data capacity and recording formats
Type
Native Data Capacity
Recording Format
Ultrium 6
2500 GB (6250 GB at 2.5:1

compression)
Reads and writes data on 2176

tracks, 16 tracks at a time
Ultrium 5
1500 GB (3000 GB at 2:1

compression)

Ultrium 4
800 GB (1600 GB at 2:1

compression)

tracks, 16 tracks at a time.
Ultrium 3
400 GB (800 GB at 2:1

compression)

Ultrium 2
200 GB (400 GB at 2:1

compression)

Ultrium 1
100 GB (200 GB at 2:1

compression)

The first set of tracks is written from near the beginning of the tape to near the
end of the tape. The head then repositions to the next set of tracks for the return
pass. This process continues until all tracks are written and the cartridge is full, or
until all data is written.
The cartridge door (2Figure 6-1 on page 6-1) protects the tape from
contamination when the cartridge is out of the drive. The tape is attached to a
leader pin (3 in in Figure 6-1 on page 6-1) behind the door. When the cartridge is
inserted into the drive, a threading mechanism pulls the pin (and tape) out of the
cartridge, across the drive head, and onto a non-removable take-up reel. The head
can then read or write data from or to the tape.
The write-protect switch (4 in Figure 6-1 on page 6-1) prevents data from being
written to the tape cartridge. For more information, see Write-Protect switch on
page 6-7.
The label area (5 in Figure 6-1 on page 6-1) provides a location to place a label.
For more information, see Bar code label on page 6-5.
The insertion guide (6 in Figure 6-1 on page 6-1) is a large, notched area that
prevents the cartridge from being inserted incorrectly.
6-2
Table 6-3. Nominal cartridge life: Load/unload cycles

Type
Load/Unload Cycles
Ultrium 6
20,000 (20k)
Ultrium 5
20,000 (20k)
Ultrium 4
20,000 (20k)
Ultrium 3
20,000 (20k)
Ultrium 2
10,000 (10k)
Ultrium 1
5000 (5k)
Cartridge compatibility
Table 6-4. Ultrium data cartridge compatibility with Ultrium tape drive
IBM
Ultrium
Tape
Drive
IBM LTO Ultrium Data Cartridges

2500 GB
Ultrium 6
1500 GB
Ultrium 5
Ultrium
6
Read/Write Read/Write
Ultrium
5
Read/Write
Ultrium
4
800 GB
Ultrium 4
400 GB
Ultrium 3
200 GB
Ultrium 2
100 GB
Ultrium 1
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Ultrium
3
Read only
Read only
Ultrium
2
Ultrium
1
Read/Write
Capacity scaling
To control the capacity of the cartridge (for example, to obtain a faster seek time)
issue the SCSI command SET CAPACITY. For information about this command,
see the IBM TotalStorage Ultrium Tape Drive SCSI Reference.
WORM (Write Once, Read Many) cartridges

Certain records retention and data security applications require a Write Once, Read
Many (WORM) method for storing data on tape. The LTO Ultrium 6, Ultrium 5,
and Ultrium 4 drives enable WORM support when a WORM tape cartridge is
loaded into the drive.
WORM media
Because standard read/write media are incompatible with the WORM feature, a
specially formatted WORM tape cartridge (see Figure 6-2 on page 6-4) is required.
Each WORM cartridge has a unique, worldwide cartridge identifier (WWCID),
which comprises the unique CM chip serial number and the unique tape media
serial number. Ultrium 6 WORM cartridges are two-tone black and silvery-gray.
See Ordering media supplies on page 6-20 for information about how to choose
6-3
a67b0024
and purchase the appropriate WORM tape cartridges for your tape drive.
Figure 6-2. Ultrium Data and WORM Tape Cartridges
Data security on WORM media

Certain built-in security measures help ensure that the data written on a WORM
cartridge does not become compromised. For example:
v The format of an Ultrium 6, Ultrium 5, or Ultrium 4 WORM Tape Cartridge is
unlike that of standard read/write media. This unique format prevents a drive
that lacks WORM-capable firmware from writing on a WORM tape cartridge.
For LTO 6, native data capacity is 2500 GB and compressed data capacity is 6250
GB.
v When the drive senses a WORM cartridge, the firmware prohibits the changing
or altering of user data that is already written on the tape. The firmware keeps
track of the last appendable point on the tape.
WORM media errors

The following conditions cause WORM media errors to occur:
v Information in the servo manufacturer 's word (SMW) on the tape must match
information from the cartridge memory (CM) module in the cartridge. If it does
not match, a media Error Code 7 posts on the drive 's single-character display
(SCD).
v Inserting a WORM tape cartridge into a drive that is not compatible with
WORM causes the cartridge to be treated as an unsupported medium. The drive
reports a media Error Code 7. Upgrading the drive firmware to the correct code
level resolves the problem.
WORM requirements
To add WORM capability to your IBM LTO Ultrium 6 drives, you must use either
IBM Ultrium 6 2500 GB WORM tape cartridges or IBM Ultrium 5 1500 GB WORM
tape cartridges.See Ordering media supplies on page 6-20.
Cleaning cartridge
With each library, a specially labeled IBM LTO Ultrium Cleaning Cartridge is
supplied to clean the drive head. The drive itself determines when a head must be
cleaned. It alerts you by lighting the "Clean Drive" (amber LED) above the library
Operator Control Panel. To clean the head manually, insert a cleaning cartridge
into the tape load compartment (see Inserting the cleaning cartridge on page
4-42). The drive completes the cleaning automatically. When the cleaning is
finished, the drive ejects the cartridge, and the library turns off the "Clean Drive"
LED. Some libraries have an Auto Clean function, which when enabled, prompts
6-4
the library to retrieve the cleaning cartridge that is contained in the library, inserts
it in the drive that needs cleaning, cleans the drive, then returns the cleaning
cartridge to its home slot.
Note: The drive automatically ejects an expired cleaning cartridge.
The IBM Cleaning Cartridges are valid for 50 uses. The cartridge 's LTO-CM chip
tracks the number of times that the cartridge is used.
Cartridge memory chip (LTO-CM)

All generations of the IBM LTO Ultrium Data Cartridges include a Linear
Tape-Open Cartridge Memory (LTO-CM) chip (1 in Figure 6-1 on page 6-1), that
contains information about the cartridge and the tape (such as the name of the
manufacturer that created the tape), and also statistical information about the
cartridge 's use. The LTO-CM enhances the efficiency of the cartridge. For example,
the LTO-CM stores the end-of-data location which, when the next time this
cartridge is inserted and the Write command is issued, enables the drive to quickly
locate the recording area and begin recording. The LTO-CM also aids in
determining the reliability of the cartridge by storing data about its age, how many
times it was loaded, and how many errors it accumulated. Whenever a tape
cartridge is unloaded, the tape drive writes any pertinent information to the
cartridge memory.
The storage capacity of the LTO Generation 4 and 5 LTO-CM is 8160 bytes. LTO
Generations 1, 2, and 3 have an LTO-CM capacity of 4096 bytes.
Bar code label

A bar code label contains:
v A volume serial number (VOLSER) that is human-readable
v A bar code that the library can read
Note: The LTO Ultrium 5 and 6 Tape Drives do not require bar code labels, but
you might choose to use labels for tape cartridge identification purposes.
Table 6-5. Bar code label requirements for Ultrium tape drives and libraries
Ultrium Tape Drive/Library
Bar Code Label Requirements
3573
Required
3576
Required
3580
Not required
3581
Required with optional Bar Code Reader
3582
Required
3583
Required
3584
Required
When read by a library 's bar code reader, the bar code identifies the cartridge 's
VOLSER to the library. The bar code also tells the library whether the cartridge is a
data cartridge or cleaning cartridge. In addition, the bar code includes the
two-character media-type identifier Lx, where x equals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6. L identifies
6-5
the cartridge as an LTO cartridge and the number represents the generation of
cartridge for that cartridge type. Figure 6-3 on page 6-7 shows a sample bar code
label for the LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge.
Tape cartridges are ordered with the labels included or with custom labels. To
order tape cartridges and bar code labels, see Ordering media supplies on page
6-20. The bar code for usage in IBM tape libraries must meet predefined
specifications. They include (but are not limited to):
v Eight uppercase alphanumeric characters, where the last 2 characters must be L6,
L5, L4, L3, L2, or L1 (LW, LV, LU, or LT for Ultrium WORM cartridges)
v Label and printing to be non-glossy
v Nominal narrow line or space width of 0.423 mm (0.017 in.)
v Wide to narrow ratio of 2.75:1
v Minimum bar length of 11.1 mm (0.44 in.)
Table 6-6. Cartridges and VOLSERs compatible with the Ultrium Tape Drives
Cartridges
VOLSER
Ultrium 6 Data Cartridge
xxxxxxL6
Ultrium 6 WORM Cartridge
xxxxxxLW
xxxxxxL5
xxxxxxLV
xxxxxxL4
xxxxxxLU
xxxxxxL3
xxxxxxLT
xxxxxxL2
Ultrium 1 Data Cartridge (READ ONLY)
xxxxxxL1
LTO Ultrium Cleaning Cartridge
CLNxxxLx
*An Ultrium 3 Tape Drive must have a minimum firmware level of 54xx for it to be
compatible with the WORM cartridge.
To determine the complete specifications of the bar code and the bar code label,
visit the web at http://www.ibm.com/ and enter "IBM LTO Ultrium Cartridge
Label Specification" in the search box. Orcontact your IBM sales representative.
When a bar code label is attached to a tape cartridge, place the label only in the
recessed label area (see 5 in Figure 6-1 on page 6-1). A label that extends outside
of the recessed area can cause loading problems in the drive.
Attention: Do not place any type of mark on the white space at either end of the
bar code. A mark in this area might prevent the library from reading the label.
6-6
L6
a69i0360
Figure 6-3. Sample bar code label on the LTO Ultrium 6 Tape Cartridge. The volume serial number (LTO123) and bar
code are printed on the label.
Guidelines for bar code labels

Apply the following guidelines whenever using bar code labels:
v Use only IBM-approved bar code labels on cartridges to be used in an IBM tape
library.
v Do not reuse a label or reapply a used label over an existing label.
v Before you apply a new label, remove the old label by slowly pulling it at a
right angle to the cartridge case.
v Use peel-clean labels that do not leave a residue after it is removed. If there is
glue residue on the cartridge, remove it by gently rubbing it with your finger.
Do not use a sharp object, water, or a chemical to clean the label area.
v Examine the label before it is applied to the cartridge. Do not use the label if it
has voids or smears in the printed characters or bar code. A library 's inventory
operation takes much longer if the bar code label is not readable.
v Remove the label from the label sheet carefully. Do not stretch the label or cause
the edges to curl.
v Position the label within the recessed label area (see 5 in Figure 6-1 on page
6-1).
v With light finger pressure, smooth the label so that no wrinkles or bubbles exist
on its surface.
v Verify that the label is smooth and parallel, and has no roll-up or roll-over. The
label must be flat to within 0.5 mm (0.02 in.) over the length of the label and
have no folds, missing pieces, or smudges.
v Do not place other machine-readable labels on other surfaces of the cartridge.
They might interfere with the ability of the drive to load the cartridge.
Write-Protect switch
The position of the write-protect switch on the tape cartridge (see 1) determines
whether you can write to the tape. If the switch is set to:
(solid red), data cannot be written to the tape.
v The locked position
v The unlocked position (black void), data can be written to the tape.
If possible, use your server 's application software to write-protect your cartridges
(rather than manually setting the write-protect switch). This setting allows the
6-7
server 's software to identify a cartridge that no longer contains current data and is
eligible to become a scratch (blank) data cartridge. Do not write-protect scratch
(blank) cartridges; the tape drive is not able to write new data to them.
A67E0026
If you must manually set the write-protect switch, slide it left or right to the
wanted position.
Figure 6-4. Setting the write-protect switch

Table 6-7. Location of the write-protect switch
1
Write-protect switch
Handling the cartridges

Attention: Do not insert a damaged tape cartridge into the drive. A damaged
cartridge can interfere with the reliability of a drive and might void the warranties
of the drive and the cartridge. Before a tape cartridge is inserted, inspect the
cartridge case, cartridge door, and write-protect switch for breaks.
Incorrect handling or an incorrect environment can damage cartridges or their
magnetic tape. To avoid damage to your tape cartridges and to ensure the
continued high reliability of your IBM LTO Ultrium Tape Drives, use the following
guidelines:
Providing training
v Post procedures that describe appropriate media handling in places where
people gather.
v Ensure that anyone who handles tape is properly trained in handling and
shipping procedures. This training includes operators, users, programmers,
archival services, and shipping personnel.
v Ensure that any service or contract personnel who complete archiving
procedures are properly trained in media-handling procedures.
v Include media-handling procedures as part of any services contract.
v Define and make personnel aware of data recovery procedures.
6-8
Ensuring proper packaging

v When a cartridge is shipped, use the original or better packaging.
v Always ship or store a cartridge in a jewel case.
v Use only a recommended shipping container that securely holds the cartridge in
its jewel case during transportation. Ultrium Turtlecases (by Perm-A-Store) are
tested and found to be satisfactory (see Figure 6-5). They are available at
http://www.turtlecase.com.
Figure 6-5. Tape cartridges in a Turtlecase
v Never ship a cartridge in a commercial shipping envelope. Always place it in a

box or package.
v If you ship the cartridge in a cardboard box or a box of a sturdy material, ensure
that you
Place the cartridge in polyethylene plastic wrap or bags to protect it from
dust, moisture, and other contaminants.
Pack the cartridge snugly; do not allow it to move around.
Double-box the cartridge (place it inside a box, then place that box inside the
shipping box) and add padding between the two boxes (see Figure 6-6 on
page 6-10).
6-9
Figure 6-6. Double-boxing tape cartridges for shipping
Proper acclimation and environmental conditions

v Before you use a tape cartridge, acclimate it to the operating environment for 24
hours or the time necessary to prevent condensation in the drive. The time
varies, depending on the environmental extremes to which the cartridge was
exposed.
v Ensure that all surfaces of a cartridge are dry before it is inserted.
v Do not expose the cartridge to moisture or direct sunlight.
v Do not expose recorded or blank cartridges to stray magnetic fields of greater
than 100 oersteds (for example, terminals, motors, video equipment, X-ray
equipment, or fields that exist near high-current cables or power supplies). Such
exposure causes the loss of recorded data or makes the blank cartridge unusable.
v Maintain the conditions that are described in Environmental and shipping
specifications for tape cartridges on page 6-18.
Completing a thorough inspection

After a cartridge is purchased and before it is used, complete the following steps:
v Inspect the cartridge 's packaging to determine potential rough handling.
v When a cartridge is inspected, open only the cartridge door. Do not open any
other part of the cartridge case. The upper and lower parts of the case are held
together with screws; separating them destroys the usefulness of the cartridge.
v Inspect the cartridge for damage before it is used or stored.
v Inspect the rear of the cartridge (the part that loads first into the tape load
compartment) and ensure that there are no gaps in the seam of the cartridge
case (see 1 in Figure 6-7 on page 6-11 and 4 in Figure 6-9 on page 6-13). If
there are gaps in the seam (see Figure 6-7 on page 6-11), the leader pin might be
dislodged. Go to Repositioning or reattaching a leader pin on page 6-12.
6-10
Figure 6-7. Checking for gaps in the seams of a cartridge
v Check that the leader pin is properly seated (see 2 in Figure 6-8 on page 6-13).
v If you suspect that the cartridge was mishandled but it appears usable, copy any
data onto a good cartridge immediately for possible data recovery. Discard the
mishandled cartridge.
v Review handling and shipping procedures.
Handling the cartridge carefully

v Do not drop the cartridge. If the cartridge drops, slide the cartridge door back
and ensure that the leader pin is properly seated in the pin-retaining spring
clips. See 2 in Figure 6-8 on page 6-13. If the leader pin becomes dislodged, go
to Repositioning or reattaching a leader pin on page 6-12.
v Do not handle tape that is outside the cartridge. Handling the tape can damage
the tape 's surface or edges, which might interfere with read or write reliability.
Pulling on tape that is outside the cartridge can damage the tape and the brake
mechanism in the cartridge.
v Do not stack more than six cartridges.
v Do not degauss a cartridge that you intend to reuse. Degaussing makes the tape
unusable.
Examples of cartridge problems

Split cartridge case. See Figure 6-7.
The cartridge 's case is damaged. There is a high possibility of media damage and
potential loss.
1. Look for cartridge mishandling.
2. Use the IBM Leader Pin Reattachment Kit (part number 08L9129) to correctly
seat the pin (see Repositioning or reattaching a leader pin on page 6-12).
Then, immediately use data recovery procedures to minimize chances of data
loss.
3. Review media-handling procedures.
6-11
Improper placement of leader pin. See Figure 6-8 on page 6-13.

The leader pin is misaligned.
1. Look for cartridge damage.
2. Use the IBM Leader Pin Reattachment Kit (part number 08L9129) to correctly
seat the pin (see Repositioning or reattaching a leader pin). Then,
immediately use data recovery procedures to minimize chances of data loss.
Repositioning or reattaching a leader pin

Attention: Use a repaired tape cartridge only to recover data and move it to
another cartridge. Continued use of a repaired cartridge might void the warranties
of the drive and the cartridge.
If the leader pin in your cartridge becomes dislodged from its pin-retaining spring
clips or detaches from the tape, you must use the IBM Leader Pin Reattachment
Kit (part number 08L9129) to reposition or reattach it. (Do not reattach the pin if
you must remove more than 7 meters (23 feet) of leader tape.) The sections that
follow describe each procedure.
Repositioning a leader pin

A leader pin that is improperly seated inside a cartridge interferes with the
operation of the drive. Figure 6-8 on page 6-13 shows a leader pin in the incorrect
1 and correct 2 positions.
To place the leader pin in its proper position, you need the following tools:
v Plastic or blunt-end tweezers
v Cartridge manual rewind tool (from Leader Pin Reattachment Kit, part number
08L9129)
6-12
Figure 6-8. Leader pin in the incorrect and correct positions. The cartridge door is open and the leader pin is visible
inside the cartridge.
To reposition the leader pin:

1. Slide open the cartridge door (1 in Figure 6-9) and locate the leader pin 2
(you might need to shake the cartridge gently to roll the pin toward the door).
2. With plastic or blunt-end tweezers, grasp the leader pin and position it in the
pin-retaining spring clips 3.
3. Press the leader pin gently into the clips until it snaps into place and is firmly
seated.
4. Close the cartridge door.
Figure 6-9. Placing the dislodged leader pin into the correct position. The cartridge door is open to show the leader
pin.
6-13
5. To rewind the tape, insert the cartridge manual rewind tool (1 in Figure 6-10)
into the cartridge 's hub 2 and turn it clockwise until the tape becomes taut.
Figure 6-10. Rewinding the tape into the cartridge
6. Remove the rewind tool by pulling it away from the cartridge.

7. If you suspect that the cartridge was mishandled but it appears usable, copy
any data onto a good cartridge immediately for possible data recovery. Discard
the mishandled cartridge.
Reattaching a Leader Pin

The first meter of tape in a cartridge is leader tape. Once the leader tape has been
removed there is a possibility of tape breakage. After reattaching the leader pin,
transfer data from the defective tape cartridge. Do not reuse the defective tape
cartridge.
The Leader Pin Reattachment Kit contains three parts:
v Leader pin attach tool (see 1 in Figure 6-11 on page 6-15). A plastic brace that
holds the cartridge door open.
v Cartridge manual rewind tool (see 2 in Figure 6-11 on page 6-15). A device
that fits into the cartridge's hub and lets you wind the tape into and out of the
cartridge.
v Pin supplies (see 3 in Figure 6-11 on page 6-15). Leader pins and C-clips.
6-14
Attention:
v Use only the IBM Leader Pin Reattachment Kit to reattach the leader pin to the
tape. Other methods of reattaching the pin will damage the tape, the drive, or
both.
v Use this procedure on your tape cartridge only when the leader pin detaches
from the magnetic tape and you must copy the cartridge's data onto another
cartridge. Destroy the damaged cartridge after you copy the data. This
procedure may affect the performance of the leader pin during threading and
unloading operations.
v Touch only the end of the tape. Touching the tape in an area other than the end
can damage the tape's surface or edges, which may interfere with read or write
reliability.
A67E0042
Figure 6-11. Leader Pin Reattachment Kit
The following procedure describes how to reattach a leader pin.

To reattach a leader pin by using the IBM Leader Pin Reattachment Kit:
1. Attach the leader pin attach tool (1 in Figure 6-12 on page 6-16) to the
cartridge 2 so that the tool's hook 3 latches into the cartridge's door 4.
Pull the tool back to hold the door open, then slide the tool onto the cartridge.
Open the tool's pivot arm 5.
6-15
Figure 6-12. Attaching the leader pin attach tool to the cartridge. To hold the cartridge door open, hook the tool into the
door and pull the tool back.
2. To find the end of the tape inside the cartridge, attach the cartridge manual
rewind tool (1 in Figure 6-13 on page 6-17) to the cartridge's hub 2 by
fitting the tool's teeth between the teeth of the hub. Turn the tool clockwise
until you see the end of the tape inside the cartridge. Then, slowly turn the
rewind tool counterclockwise to bring the tape edge toward the cartridge door
3.
3. Continue to turn the rewind tool counterclockwise until approximately 13 cm
(5 in.) of tape hangs from the cartridge door. If necessary, grasp the tape and
pull gently to unwind it from the cartridge.
4. Remove the rewind tool by pulling it away from the cartridge. Set the tool
and the cartridge aside.
6-16
Figure 6-13. Winding the tape out of the cartridge. Turn the cartridge manual rewind tool clockwise to see the end of
the tape, then turn it counterclockwise to bring the tape to the cartridge door.
5. On the leader pin (1 in Figure 6-14), locate the open side of the C-clip 2.
The C-clip is a small black part that secures the tape 3 to the pin.
6. Remove the C-clip from the leader pin by using your fingers to push the clip
away from the pin. Set the pin aside and discard the clip.
3
A67E0036
Figure 6-14. Removing the C-clip from the leader pin. Use your fingers to push the C-clip from the leader pin.
7. Position the tape in the alignment groove of the leader pin attach tool (see 1
in Figure 6-15 on page 6-18).
8. Place a new C-clip into the retention groove 2 (Figure 6-15 on page 6-18) on
the leader pin attachment tool and make sure that the clip's open side faces
up.
9. Place the leader pin (from step 6) into the cavity 3 (Figure 6-15 on page
6-18) of the leader pin attach tool.
Attention: To prevent the leader pin from rolling into the cartridge, in the
following step use care when folding the tape over the pin.
10. Fold the tape over the leader pin and hold it with your fingers (see
Figure 6-15 on page 6-18).
Note: Use care to ensure that the tape is centered over the leader pin. Failure
to properly center the tape on the pin will cause the repaired cartridge
to fail. When the tape is properly centered, a 0.25-mm (0.01-in.) gap
6-17
exists on both sides of the pin.

2
4
3
A67E0037
Figure 6-15. Attaching the leader pin to the tape
11. Close the pivot arm 4 of the leader pin attach tool by swinging it over the
leader pin so that the C-clip snaps onto the pin and the tape.
12. Swing the pivot arm open and trim the excess tape 5 so that it is flush with
the reattached leader pin 6.
13. Use your fingers to remove the leader pin from the cavity 3 in the leader
pin attach tool.
14. Use the cartridge manual rewind tool to wind the tape back into the cartridge
(wind the tape clockwise). Ensure that the leader pin is latched by the
pin-retaining spring clips on each end of the leader pin.
15. Remove the rewind tool.
16. Remove the leader pin attach tool by lifting its end up and away from the
cartridge.
Environmental and shipping specifications for tape cartridges

Before you use a tape cartridge, acclimate it to the operating environment for 24
hours or the time necessary to prevent condensation in the drive. The time varies,
depending on the environmental extremes to which the cartridge was exposed.
6-18
The best storage container for the cartridges (until they are opened) is the original
shipping container. The plastic wrapping prevents dirt from accumulating on the
cartridges and partially protects them from humidity changes.
When you ship a cartridge, place it in its jewel case or in a sealed, moisture-proof
bag to protect it from moisture, contaminants, and physical damage. Ship the
cartridge in a shipping container that has enough packing material to cushion the
cartridge and prevent it from moving within the container.
Table 6-8 gives the environment for operating, storing, and shipping LTO Ultrium
Tape Cartridges.
Table 6-8. Environment for operating, storing, and shipping the LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge
Environmental Specifications
Environmental Factor
Temperature
Relative humidity
(non-condensing)
Maximum wet bulb
temperature
Operating
Operational Storage1
Archival Storage2
Shipping
10 - 45C (50 - 113F)
16 - 32C (61 - 90F)
16 - 25C (61 - 77F)
-23 to 49C (-9 to

120F)
10 - 80%
20 - 80%
20 - 50%
5 - 80%
26C (79F)
26C (79F)
26C (79F)
26C (79F)
Note:
1. The short term or operational storage environment is for storage durations of up to six months.
2. The long term or archival storage environment is for durations of six months up to 10 years.
Disposing of tape cartridges

Under the current rules of the US Environmental Protection Agency (EPA),
regulation 40CFR261, the LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge is classified as
non-hazardous waste. As such, it might be disposed of in the same way as normal
office trash. These regulations are amended from time to time, and you must
review them at the time of disposal.
If your local, state, country (non-US), or regional regulations are more restrictive
than EPA 40CFR261, you must review them before you dispose of a cartridge.
Contact your account representative for information about the materials that are in
the cartridge.
If a tape cartridge must be disposed of in a secure manner, you can erase the data
on the cartridge with a high-energy ac degausser (use a minimum of 4000 oersted
peak field over the entire space that the cartridge occupies). The tape must make
two passes through the field at 90 degree orientation change for each pass to
achieve complete erasure. Some commercial degaussers have two magnetic field
regions offset 90 degrees from each other to accomplish complete erasure in one
pass for higher throughput. Degaussing makes the cartridge unusable.
If you burn the cartridge and tape, ensure that the incineration complies with all
applicable regulations.
6-19
Ordering media supplies

Table 6-9 lists the cartridges and media supplies that you can order for the drive.
Table 6-9. Media supplies
Supply Item
20-PACK IBM LTO Ultrium 6 2500 GB Data
Cartridge (with attached labels)
Methods of Ordering
Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales Representative or
any authorized IBM Business Partner by specifying Machine
Type 3589 Model 550. Specify the VOLSER characters that
you want.
You can also order through an IBM-authorized distributor.

Cartridge (without labels)

Type 3589 Model 650.
5-PACK IBM LTO Ultrium 6 2500 GB Data Cartridge Order as part number 35P1902 through an IBM-authorized
(black and white labels unattached)
distributor.
20-PACK IBM Ultrium 6 2500 GB WORM Tape





you want.


5-PACK IBM LTO Ultrium 5 1500 GB Data Cartridge Order as part number 46C2084 through an IBM-authorized
distributor.



6-20
Table 6-9. Media supplies (continued)

Supply Item
Methods of Ordering
20-PACK IBM LTO Ultrium 4 800 GB Data Cartridge Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales Representative or
(with attached labels)
you want.
20-PACK IBM LTO Ultrium 4 800 GB Data Cartridge Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales Representative or
(without labels)
5-PACK IBM LTO Ultrium 4 800 GB Data Cartridge
Order as part number 95P4278 through an IBM-authorized

distributor.




IBM LTO Ultrium 3 400 GB Data Cartridge

Order VOLSER labels separately (see Ordering bar
code labels on page 6-22).
IBM LTO Ultrium 3 400 GB WORM Tape Cartridge
IBM LTO Ultrium Cleaning Cartridge (universal
cleaning cartridge for use with Ultrium drives)
Order as part number 24R1922 through an IBM-authorized

distributor.
Order as part number 96P1203 through an IBM-authorized

distributor.
Order as part number 08L9870 through an IBM-authorized

distributor.

distributor.

distributor.
VOLSER labels are included.

Leader Pin Reattachment Kit

distributor.
Manual Rewind Tool

distributor.
To find the closest IBM-authorized distributor, visit the web at

http://www.ibm.com/storage/media) or call 1-888-IBM-MEDIA.
6-21
Ordering bar code labels

The LTO Ultrium 3 and 4 Tape Drives do not require cartridge bar code labels.
However, if you use your data cartridges or cleaning cartridges in an IBM tape
library product, you might need cartridge bar code labels if your tape library
product requires them (see Table 6-5 on page 6-5). You can order these labels
separately from the IBM data cartridges and cleaning cartridges.
You can order bar code labels directly from the authorized label suppliers in
Table 6-10.
Table 6-10. Authorized suppliers of custom bar code labels
In America
In Europe and Asia
EDP/Colorflex
Broomfield, CO
U. S. A.
Telephone: 800-438-8362
http://www.tri-optic.com
EDP Europe, Ltd.

U. K.
Telephone: 44 (0) 1245-322380
http://www.edpeurope.com/media-label
Dataware
Houston, TX 77274
U. S. A.
Telephone: 800-426-4844
http://www.datawarelabels.com/
Dataware Labels Europe

Australia
Telephone: (029) 496-1111
http://www.datawarelabels.com/
NetC
Trumbell, CT
U. S. A.
Telephone: 203-372-6382
http://www.netcllc.com/
NetC Europe Ltd

U. K.
Telephone: 44 (0) 1823 49 1439
http://www.netclabels.co.uk
NetC Asia Pacific Pty Ltd
Australia
Telephone: 61 (0) 7 5442 6263
http://www.netclabels.com.au
6-22
v The library consists of the following CRUs (Customer Replaceable Units):
Control Card (electronics, processor, memory)
Power Supply
Drive Sled (drive plus drive-to-library connectivity)
Library Enclosure (accessor, Operator Control Panel display)
Cartridge Magazines
v Other possible Replacement Parts are
Data cartridges
Cables/Terminator
Important: Before any CRU is replaced, after the problem is found, and after any
listed actions are completed in the Troubleshooting table, be sure to
review the Procedures for isolating CRU problems on page 7-8 to
help confirm the failing CRU.
The table outlines the starting points for all service issues. Find the reason that
closest resembles the problem you are experiencing and complete the listed action.
If you are unable to correct the problem, create a prioritized list of replacement
parts required. Select only one CRU at a time, starting with the most likely, based
on the Procedures for isolating CRU problems on page 7-8 or the error code
listing. After all troubleshooting efforts are exhausted, see Contacting IBM
technical support on page 9-4.
After the problem is corrected, run Library Verify (Operator Control Panel: Service
> Library Verify) to ensure that all library components are functioning properly
before normal library operations are resumed.
Table 7-1. Troubleshooting table
Problem
Solution
INSTALLATION/CONFIGURATION
Unable to configure 3 logical

libraries with 3 drives (2 half
high drives and 1 full high
drive) installed.
The 2 half high drives must be in drive positions 1 and 2 (the lowest drive
positions in the library) and the full high drive must be in the remaining drive
position. For more information, seeAppendix B, SCSI element types, SCSI
addresses, and physical configurations, on page B-1.
Installation and Configuration
1. See Installation problems on page 7-7.

POWER
Library does not power ON
1. Complete Isolating a power supply problem on page 7-8.
The Operator Control Panel is

blank or frozen
1. Power cycle the library.

2.
If possible, log on to the Web User Interface and check the error log (Service
Library > View Logs). Look up the error code and try to resolve (see
Chapter 8, Error codes, on page 8-1).
3. Upgrade or reinstall the latest library firmware. To download the latest library
firmware, visit http://www.ibm.com/support.
v If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify before normal library
operations are resumed. See Service: Library Verify on page 5-29.
v If the problem persists, refer to Contacting IBM technical support on page
9-4.
7-1
Table 7-1. Troubleshooting table (continued)

Problem
Solution
ENCRYPTION
Encryption Error: Displayed

when the drive detects an error
that is associated with an
encryption operation - if the
problem occurred while the
tape drive was writing data to,
or reading data from, tape
1. Check the host application to ensure the Encryption Key Manager (EKM)
application is providing the correct encryption key.
v Refer to the IBM Tape Device Drivers Installation and Users Guide and the
Drive sense data on page D-7 returned for an encryption operation.
v Retry the encryption operation after the EKM application problems are
resolved.
2. Check the operation of the tape drive by resetting the drive (Operator Control
Panel: Service > Service > Drive Power) and running POST.
v Refer to the error code displayed on the Operator Control Panel if the drive
resets and POST fails.
v Retry the encryption operation if the drive reset and POST complete without
errors.
3. Check the media.
v Ensure that the correct media is being used. Data encryption is supported
by LTO Ultrium 4, 5, and 6 Data and WORM Cartridges only.
v Retry the encryption operation with the tape cartridge in another encryption
enabled drive. Replace the media if the problem repeats with the same tape
cartridge in multiple drives. If the problem occurred while the tape drive
was running POST or diagnostic tests, replace the drive. The error code
clears with the first attempted write/read after the encryption key is
changed, or when the drive is placed in maintenance mode.
Encryption-related error is
posted
Check the EKM application 's error logs, device driver logs, tape library error logs,
and tape drive error logs for entries that are related to encryption. See Service
Library: View Logs on page 5-70, Service Library: View Drive Logs on page
5-71, Chapter 8, Error codes, on page 8-1, and Drive sense data on page D-7.
Connection problem with the

If you are using library-managed encryption, complete the Key Path Diagnostic
Encryption Key Manager (EKM) (see Service Library: Key Path Diagnostics on page 5-73) . If the test fails, a
problem might exist with the IP address, the Ethernet cable, or the EKM server.
1. Check the Ethernet connection between the library and the EKM server.
2. Check the TCP/IP configuration of the library and the server.
3. Check that the EKM is correctly installed and configured, and that the EKM
application is properly started (refer to your EKM documentation).
4. Ensure that the tape drive is registered in the EKM (refer to your EKM
documentation).
5. Ensure that a default key label is defined in the EKM (refer to your EKM
documentation).
If you are using application-managed encryption or system-managed encryption,
check your key proxy server 's documentation for a similar test.
Lost Encryption Feature
Activation Key
Changed drive type or position
in library
LME capable drive does not
exercise Key Path Diagnostics
See Contacting IBM technical support on page 9-4.
Use the Web User Interface to resubmit encryption settings under Configure
Library > Encryption even if the settings do not change.
ERROR CODES
7-2

Problem
Solution
There is an error code in the

error log.
Most library or drive errors result in an error code or error message on the
Operator Control Panel display. An error code history is maintained in the library
or drive error log. See Service Library: View Drive Logs on page 5-71 for how to
get the error log over the Operator Control Panel and Service Library: View
Logs on page 5-70 to view logs with the Web User Interface.
Look up the error code and try to resolve (see Chapter 8, Error codes, on page
8-1 or Appendix D, Sense data, on page D-1).
FRONT PANEL LEDs
Attention LED
To determine why the Attention LED is turned ON, log in to the Web User
Interface and select Service Library > View Logs > Warning Trace.Drive Sled
Issues:
v See Isolating drive sled problems on page 7-10.
v Whenever there is a hardware configuration change such as drives swapped
with different form factors (i.e. HH to FH or FH to HH), a library configuration
change is needed. Reconfiguring the library by reassigning the number of
logical libraries clears this issue. Go to the Web User Interface Configure
Library > Logical Libraries or to the Operator Control Panel 's Configure >
Logical Libraries section and reassign the logical libraries. If you do not want
to change your logical library configuration, resubmit your current settings.
v Restore factory defaults (Operator Control Panel: Configure > Save/Restore and
select Restore All, or Web User Interface: Configure Library > Save/Restore
and select Restore).
Media Issues:
v Avoid contamination by ensuring that the library is installed in a clean,
contamination-free environment. Continue cleaning the tape drive as needed.
Refer to Choosing a location on page 4-2.
v A cartridge must be acclimated for at least 24 hours before it is used,
particularly if it was stored at a substantially different temperature or level of
humidity than the library. Refer to Proper acclimation and environmental
conditions on page 6-10.
v Any cartridge that is suspected of being defective or contaminated must NOT
be reused, in any drive.
Power Supply or Fan Issues:
Check the power supply (or redundant power supply) for failure, and also check
any power supply fans. Replace any defective units. Refer to System status on
page 2-6 for a redundant power supply failure on a 4U library andIsolating a
power supply problem on page 7-8.
Clean Drive LED
v Ensure that you are using an Ultrium universal cleaning cartridge (see
Cleaning cartridge on page 6-4).
v Ensure that the cleaning cartridge is not expired. A drive automatically ejects an
expired cleaning cartridge. A cleaning cartridge is good for 50 cleans. If your
cleaning cartridge expired, refer to Ordering media supplies on page 6-20 for
information about ordering a new cleaning cartridge.
v If the problem still exists, refer to Contacting IBM technical support on page
9-4.
7-3

Problem
Solution
Error LED
If the Error LED remains ON after user action is completed listed for the error
code in Chapter 8, Error codes, on page 8-1, run Library verify (Operator
Control Panel: Service > Library Verify).
v If the test passes, the Error LED turns OFF.
v If the test fails, cycle library power to turn the Error LED OFF.
To check the library error log, log on to the Web User Interface and click Service
Library, then View Logs.If the Operator Control Panel displays WARNING: Unit
Busy, click OK to turn the error LED OFF.
FIRMWARE
Determining current firmware

levels
Many problems are resolved by a firmware upgrade. Ensure that both the library
and drive firmware are at the latest levels available. Compare the firmware levels
on the Operator Control Panel with the latest levels on the website
http://www.ibm.com/storage/.
v Library firmware: Monitor > Library > Identity > Version
v Drive firmware: Monitor > Drives > Identity (select a drive) > Firmware Rev
Update library firmware
See Service Library: Upgrade Firmware on page 5-74.
Update drive firmware
See Service: Service (Drives) on page 5-30 or Service Library: Upgrade

Firmware on page 5-74.
CARTRIDGE MOVEMENT PROBLEMS
Cartridge placement problems
Magazine slot prism fiducials that are NOT seated properly can result in gripper
or slider error codes because of the fiducial interfering with the back edge of the
cartridge. Release and pull magazines out of the library for inspection. To release
the magazines with the Operator Control Panel, go to Control > Magazine and
select Left or Right. To release the magazines with the Web User Interface, go to
Manage Library > Release Magazines.
Inspect the light pipe fiducials on each slot of the magazine for proper seating.
See Replacing magazine fiducials on page 10-13.
Cartridge does not eject from

drive
1. Power cycle the library, allow it to complete initialization, which can take up
to 1 hour, depending on the type of cartridge (LTO 4, LTO 3, and so on) and
how much of the tape was spooled out of the cartridge. Retry unloading the
cartridge with the library Operator Control Panel. Refer to Control: Move
Cartridges on page 5-17.
2. Allow the drive to complete all operations. This action might take as long as 1
hour if you reset or cycle power on the library while the cartridge is
positioned at the physical end of the media.
3. Ensure that the backup software is not reserving the slot or preventing the
drive from ejecting the cartridge. The backup software must cancel the
reservation and any hold it has on the drive. Temporarily disconnecting the
library from the host server and power cycling eliminates the host and its
software as a problem source.
4. If the problem still exists, refer to Contacting IBM technical support on page
9-4.
Cartridge cannot be removed

from storage slot
7-4
See Removing cartridges from magazine slots on page 9-1.

Problem
Solution
Extended library recovery time
1. Release both left and right magazines (Operator Control Panel: Control >
Magazine and select Left or Right; Web User Interface: Manage Library >
Release Magazine and select Left or Right) and inspect for both the presence
and conditions of the cell prism fiducials. Each cell must contain a correctly
installed prism with no visible damage. Replace any missing or damaged
prism fiducials. Refer to Replacing magazine fiducials on page 10-13.
2. An error code that often surfaces after completing an inventory request or a
diagnostic request such as the system Test is 9B 37....Sled position sensor not
found. The OCP Error LED is lit and the Library Status on the web interface
shows a Robotic Failure. During the extended recovery process, by viewing the
Standard Trace under the web interface Service Library > View Logs, the
same Robotic Failure entries into this log can be viewed as the library enters
recovery mode for failure to sense a particular fiducial. Proceed to the next
step for failure isolation suggestions.
3. If there are no prism integrity issues and the library continues to post
extended recovery time, refer to Library recovery problem determination on
page 7-7 and Isolating a library controller card versus accessor enclosure
problem on page 7-11.
Slot Blocker blocking a storage

slot
See Removing the slot blocker - 2U library on page 10-9

MEDIA
Cleaning or data cartridge

incompatible with drive.
Ensure that you are using data and cleaning cartridges that are compatible with
the drive and model of your library. The library automatically unloads
incompatible cartridges and the Media Attention LED flashes. Export the media to
clear the state. See Cartridge compatibility on page 6-3.
Cannot write to or read from

tape.
1. Ensure that the cartridge write-protect switch is in the write enabled position
(see Write-Protect switch on page 6-7).
2. Ensure that you have the appropriate data cartridge for your library model
(see Cartridge compatibility on page 6-3).
3. Ensure that you are using an Ultrium cartridge that is not degaussed. Do not
degauss Ultrium cartridges.
4. Ensure that the cartridge was not exposed to harsh environmental or electrical
conditions and is not physically damaged in any way. Refer to Proper
acclimation and environmental conditions on page 6-10 and Completing a
thorough inspection on page 6-10.
5. Many backup applications do not read or write to cartridges that were created
with a different backup application. In this case, you might complete an erase,
reformat, or label replacement operation on the cartridge.
6. Ensure that you understand any data protection or overwrite protection
schemes that your backup application might be using, which can prevent you
from writing to a cartridge.
7. Retry the operation with a different, known good cartridge.
8. Clean the drive. See Service Library: Clean Drive on page 5-69.
Cartridge VOLSER is reported

as "unknown"
Probable cause: cartridge with no label or damaged label.

Ensure that cartridge is properly labeled. If cartridge is properly labeled, unload
the cartridge from drive and complete an inventory (OCP: Control >
Re-Inventory; Web: Manage Library > Perform Inventory). If VOLSER is again
reported as "Unknown", run Library Verify (Service > Library Verify).
DRIVE ID (SCSI, SAS, OR FIBRE CHANNEL LOOP
7-5

Problem
Solution
Changed drive ID, but the host

server does not recognize the
new ID
1. Ensure that all devices on the same bus/network have unique ID numbers.
2. Ensure that you cycle power on the library after the ID is changed.
3. Reboot the host server.
Tape library performance: The

1. Check the network bandwidth from the host computer. If you are backing up
library is not efficiently backing
data over a network, consider comparing to a local-only backup.
up data
2. Ensure that the library and tape drive are on their own SCSI bus and not
daisy-chained to another tape drive or to the hard disk that is backed up.
3. Ensure that the library is connected to an LVDS SCSI bus and there are no
single-ended (SE) devices on the same bus, because this connection causes the
entire bus to negotiate down to SE speed.
4. Use an Ultra160 SCSI bus and high-quality cabling with the library.
CUSTOMER REPLACEABLE UNITS (CRU)
Drive Sled
See Isolating drive sled problems on page 7-10.
Power Supply
See System status on page 2-6 andIsolating a power supply problem on page
7-8.
Library Controller Card
See Isolating a library controller card versus accessor enclosure problem on page
7-11.
Library Enclosure
See Isolating a library controller card versus accessor enclosure problem on page
7-11.
ITDT
Performance Test duration

varies
Items affecting the duration of the test are

v The level of adapter device driver
v Your adapter model and type
OTHER PROBLEMS
Web User Interface problems
See Isolating Web User Interface problems on page 7-12.
Bar code scanner problems
See Isolating accessor scanner problems on page 7-13.
Host Attachment Interface

problems
See Isolating host attachment interface problems on page 7-13
Need help with a library

password
Refer to Contacting IBM technical support on page 9-4.
Key path diagnostic not

working
This diagnostic test is available with library firmware level greater than 6.xx. Refer
to Verifying/updating firmware on page 4-21 to determine the level of firmware
on your library. If necessary, visit http://www.ibm.com to download the latest
levels of firmware for your library.
Auto Clean status that is

displayed as "Chk Media/Rsvd
Slot?" on the Web User Interface
System Status screen.
If Auto Clean is enabled and a cleaning cartridge is not present, or if a cleaning

cartridge is present but not in the reserved slot, Auto Clean status shows "Chk
Media/Rsvd Slot?" and Status shows a green check mark and the words "Media
Attention."
7-6
Installation problems
Problems that are encountered during the installation of the library are caused by
incorrect SCSI bus configuration, application software configuration errors, or an
incorrectly configured operating system. If the application software that you are
using is not communicating with the library after installation, check the following
components:
v Picker Ship Lock Key:
Ensure that the Picker Ship Lock Key on the top cover is removed before the
library is powered on.
v Drive/Library SCSI or Loop ID:
Ensure that the SCSI ID of the Drive/Library (or SAS or Fibre Channel Loop ID)
is correct and not the same as other devices that might be on the same bus.
v Host Bus Adapter (HBA) Compatibility:
Ensure that the library is compatible with the HBA. For best performance, the
HBA used for this library must be SCSI-3 LVDS. Pay particular attention to any
steps that describe settings of various jumpers or switches.
v HBA LUN 0/1 Support:
A single ID addresses both drive and library since the drive is LUN 0 and the
library is LUN 1. These models require an HBA that supports LUN scanning
that must be enabled at the HBA.
v Cable Connections:
Ensure that there are no bent pins on cables and that all connections are securely
fastened.
v Fibre Channel Tape Support:
Make sure that Fibre Channel Tape Support is enabled on the HBA if you are
installing a library with a Fibre Channel drive.
v SCSI Cable Length:
Ensure that the maximum cable length is not over 25 meters (82 ft.) for a single
device on the bus or 12 meters (40 ft.) for multiple devices. Internal SCSI length
within the library accounts for 2 ft.
v SCSI Termination:
Verify correct termination on both ends of the SCSI bus.
v Backup Application Installation:
See the documentation included with your backup application software
instructions on how to verify correct installation.
v Device Driver Installation:
Make sure that the correct device driver, if applicable, is installed for the library.
Note: Many backup applications use their own drivers for the library and drive.
Before a driver is installed, make sure that it is not in conflict with the
software. Contact your Backup Application vendor for this information.
Library recovery problem determination

The 2U and 4U library firmware generally retries failed operations up to three
times before a failure is posted to complete the operation, or, in some situations,
proceeding with an operation that can be completed in an alternative manner. If
the operation is successful within the allotted retry count, the appropriate retry
counter is updated and recorded in the retry log and the next library operation
commences.
7-7
For example, failure to pick or place a cartridge from or to a designated cell or

drive location after the retry count is exhausted results in a failed operation with
the appropriate error code. However, failure to detect a particular cell location by
sensing the prism fiducial that is on the cell shelf because it is missing or damaged
eventually results in the cell location that is located by the gripper, bar code reader,
and positional emitter pulse count after the prism detection retry count is
exhausted. If several prisms are missing or damaged or if the accessor prism
sensor/emitter is inoperable, initialization or inventory functions can take a
prolonged amount of time to complete because of the lengthy retry recovery
procedure.
If the library is taking an extended amount of time to initialize, to complete an
inventory, or even move a cartridge within the library, the magazine 's prism
integrity must be verified before a library component is exchanged. This situation
is noted by the ACTIVITY line on the Operator Panel posting Recovery. Prism
integrity verification is done by releasing the magazines and inspecting the cell
prisms. Normal initialization or inventory time for a 2U library when the picker
mechanism starts its operation is approximately 1 - 2 minutes. For a 4U library, 2 3 minutes. A single missing or damaged prism can add 1 - 2 minutes. If the
accessor tray sensor/emitter is inoperable, or several prisms are missing or
damaged, initialization, or inventory might exceed 30 minutes or longer. Refer to
Troubleshooting table Cartridge Movement Problems.
Procedures for isolating CRU problems

Isolating a power supply problem
Note: Not all power supplies have LEDs. The original power supply for the 2U
library did not have LEDs, though any replaced power supplies likely have
LEDs. The 4U library has power supplies with LEDs.
6
1
2
4
5
Figure 7-1. A 250w power supply with LEDs
7-8
a77ug136
4
5
a77ug198
Figure 7-2. A 80w power supply without LEDs

Table 7-2. Power supply LED meanings
1
If the blue LED is lit, AC voltage is available.
2
If the amber LED is lit, there is a possible fan problem or other power supply
issue. The power supply needs replacement.
3
If the green LED is lit, DC power is OK and active.
4
Cooling Fan Grill
5
Thumb Screws
6
Power Receptacle
If the Library does not power on:

1. With library power OFF and the power cord unplugged, loosen the three
thumb screws (5), grasp two of the thumb screws, pull the power supply out
half way, reseat the power supply, and tighten the three thumb screws.
2. Ensure that the power cord is plugged in at the power supply (6) and at the
electrical outlet, then turn library power ON.
a. For power supplies with LEDs, the "Blue" LED is lit if AC power is good.
b. If your power supply does not have LEDs, feel for air that is flowing out of
the cooling fan grill on the rear of the library (4). AC is good if air is
flowing from the cooling fan grill.
3. If power appears to be missing
a. Plug the power cord into another electrical outlet.
b. If power is still missing, plug another device into the outlet to test.
c. If the outlet tests OK, try another power cord with the library.
4. For power supplies with LEDs, if the "Amber" LED is lit, replace the power
supply (refer to Replacing a power supply on page 10-10).
5. If your power supply has no LEDs, and you verified that the electrical outlet
works properly, but the power supply is still failing, replace it (see Replacing a
power supply on page 10-10).
7-9
6. If the power supply seems to be delivering power to the library (Operator

Control Panel and front panel LEDs might be functioning); however, air does
not flow from the power supply cooling fan grill on the rear of the library,
replace the power supply (see Replacing a power supply on page 10-10).
7. If the power supply seems to be delivering power to the library (Operator
Control Panel and front panel LEDs might be functioning), and air is flowing
from the power supply cooling fan grill on the rear of the library, observe the
"Green" LED (lowest of the three). If it is lit, the power supply is OK.
Note: If your library has -04 level redundant power supplies (see label on top
of power supply), it is normal for the one in "Standby" mode to turn its
"Green" LED off. You can test this power supply by pulling the power
connector from the other "Active" power supply. The power supply that
was in "Standby" mode is now "Active", and its "Green" LED lights. If it
does not, replace it (see Replacing a power supply on page 10-10).
If your library has -05 level redundant power supplies, the "Green" LED
is ON on both power supplies. If both "Green" LEDs are not ON, replace
the failed power supply (see Replacing a power supply on page 10-10).
8. If the "Green" LED is not lit, and it is the only one in the Library, replace it
(refer to Replacing a power supply on page 10-10).
Isolating drive sled problems

Before a drive sled CRU is replaced, verify that the following activities are
completed:
1. BEFORE POWERING OFF THE LIBRARY, write the drive memory dump to
flash. It is important to preserve the drive memory dump on the drive for
analysis by IBM technical support. For instructions, seeBefore you begin on
page A-2.
Note: If you are instructed by IBM technical support to copy the drive
memory dump to your host computer, use one of the following
methods:
v Web User Interface: See Service Library: Save Drive Dump on page
5-72.
v ITDT: See IBM TotalStorage Tape Diagnostic tool (ITDT) on page
9-3.
2. Ensure that the drive firmware is at the latest level (visit http://
www.ibm.com/storage/). To determine current library and drive firmware
version with the Operator Control Panel:
v Library firmware: Monitor > Library > Identity
v Drive firmware: Monitor > Drives > Identity (select a drive) Drive
firmware is identified in the FW Rev field.
3. Try reseating the drive sled.
Note: The drive sled is hot-pluggable so it is not necessary to power off the
library. See Removing/installing/adding a tape drive sled on page
10-3.
4. Cycle power to the library.
5. If air does not flow from the drive sled cooling fan grill on the rear of the
library, replace the drive sled CRU. Several library error codes also point to
cooling problems. See Removing/installing/adding a tape drive sled on
page 10-3.
7-10
6. If the drive is experiencing permanent or temporary errors or if the amber

Clean LED is lit on the front panel of the library, select Clean Drive from the
Operator Control Panel Service menu (Service > Service > Clean Drive) and
clean the drive. Use only an approved cleaning cartridge (see Cleaning
cartridge on page 6-4).
7. Run the Library Verify Diagnostic, which includes a drive performance
read/write test. Be sure to use a known good scratch or blank data cartridge.
v If the drive test fails, replace the drive sled CRU (refer to
Removing/installing/adding a tape drive sled on page 10-3).
v If the drive diagnostic tests pass, run the drive wrap test from the
OCP.Service > Service and select a drive. Press the Enter key to highlight
the test options field, and press Up/Down keys to scroll through test
options. Select Wrap Test and press the Enter key. Then, use Up/Down keys
to highlight <Run> and press the Enter key. When prompted, connect the
Wrap Test adapter and select <OK>.. If the wrap test fails, verify that you
are using a wrap tool and not a terminator. If you are using the correct
wrap tool, replace the drive sled CRU (see Removing/installing/adding a
tape drive sled on page 10-3).
Note: On a Half high SAS drive, run SAS wrap test. On a Full high SAS
drive, run SAS Wrap A and then run SAS Wrap B.
Note: If a SCSI drive wrap test fails, run the test again, with a different
SCSI terminator before exchanging the drive sled.
8. With the host interface test tool, ITDT, run the Scan function(s) to verify that
the host application interface (SCSI, SAS, or Fibre Channel) can detect the
drive (LUN 0) and the library (LUN 1). To further test the interface
communication path, run the Test Device function (t), if available, after the
drive is selected. This function writes/reads data across the interface and also
sends a command to the drive to run the internal performance read/write
test.
9. If the host tool, ITDT, cannot detect the drive or library, look for problems
with the host interface cabling, the HBA, the device driver, or the backup
application software.
10. If the drive passes all the tests, inspect the media to ensure that the media is
compatible with the drive and not causing drive errors. See Chapter 6,
Isolating a library controller card versus accessor enclosure

problem
1. If possible, ensure that the library firmware is at the latest level, check the
current library firmware level with the Operator Control Panel (Monitor >
Library > Identity > Version) or the Web User Interface (Monitor Library >
Library Identity), then (see http://www.ibm.com/storage/).
2. Observe the LED on the Library Controller Card.
v LED On solid - LCC failed or in a hang condition.
v LED Off - LCC not fully inserted, or LCC failed, or library that is not
connected to power source, or Power Supply defect.
v LED flashing (one flash per second) - normal operation
v LED flashing (slower than once per second) - normal operation
v LED flashing (faster than once per second) - LCC failed
7-11
3. With library power OFF, loosen the two thumb screws that secure the controller
card to the library enclosure and slide it out.
v Inspect the card for any broken components or other anomalies.
v If the card appears to have no abnormalities, reseat the card in the library,
tighten the thumb screws, and turn library power ON.
4. If both the Operator Control Panel and Web User interfaces are inoperable or
frozen and the latest firmware is installed, the controller card CRU electronics
is the most likely failure. If only the Web User Interface failed, see Isolating
Web User Interface problems before any CRUs are replaced.
5. If a control card error code was obtained and reseating, power cycling, and
updating the library firmware did not fix the problem, the controller card CRU
is the most likely culprit (see Replacing a library controller card on page
10-11).
6. If the error code indicates an accessor type error (slider, elevator, sled), release
and remove both magazines (see Control: Magazine on page 5-17, Manage
Library: Release Magazine on page 5-43, or Releasing the magazines
manually on page 9-1) and observe the accessor path for any obvious
obstruction or problems. Resolve any observed problem if possible. Run a
Library System Test. See Service Library: Perform Diagnostics on page 5-72
for the web or Service: Run Tests on page 5-30 for the OCP If the problem is
persistent, replace the library enclosure CRU (refer to Replacing the library
enclosure on page 10-14).
7. If the problem is intermittent or if a particular electronic or mechanical function
of the library is not working properly as evidenced through observation or by
error code, the library enclosure CRU is the most likely failing component. Run
a Library System Test. See Service Library: Perform Diagnostics on page 5-72
for the web or Service: Run Tests on page 5-30 for the OCP If the problem is
persistent, replace the library enclosure CRU (refer to Replacing the library
enclosure on page 10-14).
8. If the library is taking an extended amount of time in recovery to complete
initialization, complete an inventory, or running a cartridge movement within
the library, and, after finding the magazine cell fiducials is present with no
visible damage and correctly installed, suspect the sensor/emitter on the
accessor mechanism to be inoperable. Run a Library System Test. See Service
Library: Perform Diagnostics on page 5-72 for the web or Service: Run Tests
on page 5-30 for the OCP If the problem is persistent, replace the library
enclosure CRU (refer to Replacing the library enclosure on page 10-14).
Isolating Web User Interface problems

If the Web User Interface is not functioning at all or if it is intermittently
functioning, review the following steps to ensure that it is properly configured, or,
to help determine which CRU or part needs to be replaced. The complete Web
User Interface electronics reside on the library controller card CRU.
1. Ensure that the ethernet cable is securely plugged in the rear of the library at
the ethernet port. See 7 on the Rear panel on page 1-3.
2. Ensure that the correct IP, Netmask, and Gateway addresses are keyed into the
network parameters. From the Operator Control Panel, go to Configure >
Network.
3. Ensure that the correct IP address is used on the web browser. If you get a
security certificate alert when logging in to the Web User Interface, you can
install the certificate or allow an exception (depending on the internet browser
you are using). Even though with some browsers you still receive a security
certificate warning or error each time you log in to the Web User Interface,
7-12
your transmission is secure. SSL is enabled when the URL to your library
begins with https:// and some browsers show a lock.
4. If the ethernet connection is a direct connection between the PC and the library,
a special "crossover" ethernet cable must be used.
Note: On newer PCs, either straight through or crossover ethernet cables might
be used since the crossover requirement is provided internally.
5. Check the ethernet cable carefully (or try another cable) and, if the cable is
connected to a network hub or switch, try a different port.
6. If the Web User Interface is still malfunctioning, replace the Library Controller
Card CRU (refer to Replacing a library controller card on page 10-11).
Isolating accessor scanner problems

If the server reported inventory problems relating to inability to read bar code
labels, or, if some or all of the cartridge labels are not displayed on the Web User
Interface, use the following procedure to determine if the scanner (library
enclosure CRU) must be replaced.
1. Ensure that a supported bar code label (or labels) are being used. Also, check
for damaged labels (see Bar code label on page 6-5).
2. With library power OFF, reseat the library controller card CRU (see Replacing
a library controller card on page 10-11), and then switch library power ON.
3. Perform a re-inventory via the Operator Control Panel (Control >
Re-Inventory) and view the inventory via the Web User Interface (Monitor
Library > Inventory) to determine if the labels are now read.
4. If the labels are still not read properly, replace the library enclosure CRU (see
Replacing the library enclosure on page 10-14).
Isolating host attachment interface problems

After successfully exercising "Isolating Drive Sled Problems", and more specifically
the "Library Verify" diagnostic test on the Operator Control Panel (Service >
Library Verify) which includes a drive (or drives) read/write diagnostic test, the
procedures are suggested to help isolate the failure to properly establish
connectivity to the Host Bus adapter (HBA).
1. If not already completed, exercise the drive interface wrap test on the Operator
Control Panel (Service > Service > Drive Tests). The test requires that a proper
Wrap Tool is installed at some point during the test procedure. If the wrap test
fails, replace the drive sled (see Removing/installing/adding a tape drive
sled on page 10-3), and skip steps 2 and 3. Proceed to step 2 if the wrap test
passes.
Note: If a SCSI wrap test fails, run the test again with a different SCSI
terminator before you replace the drive sled.
2. Use the ITDT utility to evaluate connectivity from the HBA through the cabling
to the drive (or drives). ITDT does not require separate device drivers, thus the
Operating System can scan, and find the LTO devices that are attached. If ITDT
cannot successfully locate the LTO drive, suspect cabling or HBA problems, and
skip step 3. If ITDT successfully located the LTO drive, proceed to step 3. See
IBM TotalStorage Tape Diagnostic tool (ITDT) on page 9-3 for a brief
description of ITDT and instructions on how to download the tool from the
web.
3. If ITDT successfully locates the LTO devices, verify that the correct application
device drivers and backup application software are properly installed.
7-13
4. Ensure that the latest available Operating System files or updates (dlls, PTFs,
and others) are installed and applied.
Identifying a suspect cartridge

The amber Attention LED is lit on the front panel of the library when there is a
failure that indicates a piece of media is bad, marginal, or invalid. It is cleared
when all invalid cartridges are exported from the library.
Note: The amber LED might also be lit because a power supply, or a power
supply fan is failing. See Isolating a power supply problem on page 7-8.
1. Identify the media with the Web User Interface (Monitor Library > Inventory).
Expand the cartridge details for each magazine and look for media status in the
Attn column of the inventory table.
2. Make note of the cartridge location (Slot #) and VOLSER (Label) in the
inventory table.
3. To remove the cartridge from the library:
a. With the Web User Interface, select Manage Library > Move Media. If the
cartridge is not in an I/O station slot, move the cartridge to an I/O station
slot.
b. With the OCP, select Control > Open I/O Station.
4. Remove cartridge. If cartridge was reported as Bad, properly dispose the
cartridge.
5. Close the I/O station. If the amber LED was lit because of bad media, the
Attention LED turns OFF. If the amber LED is still on, check the power supply
or the power supply fans. See Isolating a power supply problem on page 7-8.
7-14

If an error occurs during operation of the library, the library stops the current
operation and displays an error code on the LCD screen. Unless otherwise noted in
Error codes on page 8-2, try to resolve the error by cycling power to the library
and retrying the last operation. If the error persists, contact technical support.
Example error code

EVENT -6
8D 07
Where:
v -6 indicates the position in sequence list, 0 being the most recent.
v 8D 07 indicates the error. (code 8D = sled blocked,).
The event log with the library also includes a date stamp for each event. Press
SELECT to display the associated time stamp in the following format:
yy.mm.dd hh:mm:ss:HH
Where:
v yy is the year
v mm is the month
v dd is the current day
v hh is hours
v mm is minutes
v ss is seconds
v HH is 1/100 second
The time stamp is set to zero at system start.
A description of each error code and possible solution is provided in Error codes
on page 8-2.
Preparing to resolve an error code

1. Record the error information that is displayed on the Operator Control Panel
display or Web User Interface screen.
2. If possible, cycle library power and retry the operation.
v If the error recurs, refer to Error codes on page 8-2 for information about
resolving the error.
v If the error does not recur, run Library Verify before normal library operation
is continued.
Complete the steps in Preparing to resolve an error code before you complete
the User Action listed in Error codes on page 8-2.
8-1
Error codes
Errors that are described are hard errors. If such an error occurs the library stops
all operations and the Error LED starts flashing. An appropriate message is posted
on the Operator Control Panel and the Web User Interface. These errors are also
reported by way of email notification, if enabled. To enable email notifications,
refer to Configure Library: Event Notification on page 5-66.
Table 8-1. Main Error Codes
Error Code Description
User Action
80
Bar code reader error, cannot initialize BCR
81
87
Error Code 80 01 might be posted if

the library has a BCR (bar code
EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only
reader) that requires a minimum
Memory) error, no response from EEPROM (located on accessor level of library firmware. Update the
controller)
library firmware to 9.00 or higher. If
the problem still exists, follow the
Accessor controller generic problem
procedure. SeeIsolating a library
Setting of gripper motor parameters failed
controller card versus accessor
enclosure problem on page 7-11.
Setting of slider motor parameters failed
Possible replacement CRUs:
Setting of elevator motor parameters failed
v Primary: Library Enclosure
Setting of rotation motor parameters failed
v Secondary: Library Controller Card
88
Setting of sled motor parameters failed
89
Gripper blocked
8A
Slider blocked
8B
Elevator blocked
8C
Rotation blocked
8D
Sled blocked
82
83
84
85
86
Bar code reader error, no response from BCR
1. If this is the first time that the

library was powered ON or if it
was moved to a new location,
ensure that the shipping lock was
removed. The lock is on the top
of the library (see Removing and
storing the shipping lock on
page 4-4).
2. Refer to Isolating a library
Possible Replacement CRUs:
v Secondary: Library Controller
Card
8-2
Table 8-1. Main Error Codes (continued)

8E
Cannot find gripper block within the expected range
8F
Cannot find slider block within the expected range
90
Cannot find elevator block within the expected range
91
Cannot find rotation block within the expected range
92
Cannot find sled block within the expected range
93
Gripper outside range,
User Action
Gripper reached a position beyond the expected range

94
Slider outside range,

Slider reached a position beyond the expected range
95
Elevator outside range,

Elevator reached a position beyond the expected range
96
Rotation outside range,

Rotation reached a position beyond the expected range
97
Sled outside range,

Sled reached a position beyond the expected range
Refer to Isolating a library controller

card versus accessor enclosure
problem on page 7-11. Possible
Replacement CRUs:
98
Cartridge present sensor not found
99
Slider home sensor not found
v Secondary: Library Controller Card
9A
Rotation home sensor not found
9B
Sled position sensor (fiducial sensor) not found
9C
Gripper ranges out of specification
9D
Slider range out of specification
9E
Elevator range out of specification
9F
Rotation range out of specification
A0
Sled range out of specification
A1
Open I/O Station (Import/Export Element) failed
A2
Error during elevator locking
A6
No elevator home sensor found
B0
Robotic controller response timeout. A command did not

complete in the required amount of time.
B1
NACK (not acknowledged) received from robotic controller
B2
Accessor controller communication failed
B3
Accessor controller urgent stop because of a released magazine
B4
Cartridge did not transport completely
B5
Accessor controller does not respond on command
1. Verify that the left and right

magazines are inserted, then retry
operation.
2. Refer to Isolating a library
Possible Replacement CRUs:
v Secondary: Library Controller
Card
8-3

User Action
C0
Network initialization failed
C1
Telnet Interface initialization failed
1. Refer to Isolating Web User

Interface problems on page 7-12.
C2
Webserver initialization failed
C6
Ping command did not reach target
2. If the error recurs, refer to

Contacting IBM technical
support on page 9-4.
C7
Cannot Upgrade from USB
Not supported
C8
Cannot Upgrade from FTP
1. Retry the Firmware upgrade.
C9
Cannot Upgrade Robotic from Flash

D0
ROM error. ROM checksum incorrect
D1
RAM error. Power on Self Test (POST) failed
D2
NVRAM (Non-Volatile Random Access Memory) error.

Read/Write operation to NVRAM failed
Refer to Isolating a library controller

card versus accessor enclosure
problem on page 7-11. Possible
replacement CRUs:
D3
CTC (Channel to Channel) Error. Timer unit failed during

POST.
D4
UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) Error.

Frame overrun or Parity Error on serial Interface.
D5
Display Error
Communication to display failed
D6
Memory Error, Stack and heap overflow.
D7
Fatal system error*
D8
Database error**
D9
No SCSI IC detected
DA
While the Library Verify Test is running, the bar code reader
reads different bar code data for the same customer-supplied
scratch cartridge label.
v Primary: Library Controller Card

v Secondary: Library Enclosure
*D7 - Fatal System error can occur
because of an over-temperature
condition. Ensure that the
environment meets the
Environmental Specifications (refer to
Environmental specifications on
page 1-13).
**If you receive a D8 error while your
library configuration is restored from
the OCP or Web UI, verify that your
file extension is .dbb. If the extension
is correct, your file was corrupted
during the save. Reconfigure, then
save your library configuration.
Note: Configuration files that are
saved with one version of library
firmware might not be compatible
with other versions of firmware. It is
recommended to save a configuration
file each time the library firmware is
upgraded. Restore the library using a
configuration file that was saved
with the same version of firmware
that is currently installed in the
library.
1. Check the barcode label on the
scratch cartridge and run the
Library Verify test again.
DB
8-4
Warning Event! See Table 8-3 on page 8-11

User Action
DC
1. Retry the operation.
IC Bus Failure
2. After several occurrences, refer to

DD
DE
DF
E0
Incompatible magazine that is detected
1. Remove magazine from library.

2. Insert magazine in library. If error
recurs, refer to Contacting IBM
technical support on page 9-4.
E2
New hardware found. Library firmware upgrades required.
Upgrade library firmware to the

latest version.
EB
Power supply health check failed because of a power supply

failure.
Refer to Isolating a power supply

problem on page 7-8
F0
Drive Over temperature Condition
1. Check the ambient temperature

conditions, and check all fans.
The subcode indicates which drive is affected.

Example:
2. Refer to Isolating drive sled

problems on page 7-10.
Subcode 02: drive #2
8-5

F1
User Action
Drive Communication Error

Library controller lost communication to drive
Example:
F2
Drive Sled not present

The subcode indicates which drive sled is affected.
Example:
Subcode 02: drive sled #2
F3
Drive Hardware Error

Example:
F3 xy
Where x refers to the hardware drive error code (single
character display) and Y refers to the drive position in the
library. x values:
v 4: firmware or hardware error
v 5: hardware error
v 6: hardware or media error
v A: recoverable hardware error
F4
Drive Load Timeout

Drive run in a timeout while a tape is loading.
Example:
F5
Drive Unload Timeout

Drive run in a timeout while a tape is unloading
Example:
subcode 02: drive #2
8-6
Refer to Isolating drive sled


User Action
F6
No drive installed. A drive was never installed
F7
Support ticket download from drive not possible
F8
Invalid drive command
F9
Invalid drive parameter
FA
SDCI microcode error
FB
Drive logged out
FC
Internal SCSI command failed with check condition
FD
Internal SCSI command timeout
Refer to Isolating drive sled

Sub Error Codes

Table 8-2. Sub error codes
Error Code
Description
ROBOTICS
00
No sub error code
01
Mechanical initialization failure
02
Connection to slave robotic failed
03
Error motor initialization
04
Error during gripper close
05
Error slider home positioning
06
Error elevator home movement
07
Error during sled movement to rotation position
08
Error during rotation initialization, get range failed
09
Error elevator init
0A
Error during rotation to far position
0B
Error first sled init, move to sensor failed
0C
Error during sled movement to rotation position
0D
Error during rotation to drive position
0E
Error slider init, get range failed
0F
Error during slider forward movement
10
Error gripper init, get range failed
8-7
Table 8-2. Sub error codes (continued)

11
Error during slider home movement
12
Error during rotation to FAR position
13
Error sled init, move to sensor failed
14
Error during sled movement; check shipping lock
15
Error move to a certain position failed
16
Error positioning of the rotation motor failed
20
Error Inventory scan
21
Error during gripper close
22
Error slider home movement
23
Error during move gripper to scan pos
24
Error reading barcode label
25
Error during move sled to scan position
26
Error during move elevator to scan position
27
Error during sled preposition movement
28
Error Extra inventory scan
29
Error during closing gripper
2A
Error slider preposition movement
2B
Error during opening gripper
2C
Error during sled movement up to sensor
2D
Error slider preposition backwards movement
30
Error slot preposition
31
Error during sled movement in FLMoveRotation function
32
Command sending to robotic failed
33
Error during elevator movement in FLMoveRotation function
34
Error during rotation in FLMoveRotation function
35
Error during elevator movement in FLMoveSled function
36
Error during sled movement in FLMoveSled function
37
Error during sled positioning to sensor in FLMoveSled function
8-8

38
Error during sled positioning to mail slot in FLMoveSled function
39
Error during sled positioning without sensor
3A
Error during elevator movement without sensor
3B
Error slot position sensor not found
40
Movement to/from slot failed
41
Error during first slider movement
42
Error during first gripper movement
43
Error during second slider movement
44
Error during second gripper movement, get range failed
45
Error during third slider movement, move home failed
46
Error during set hold current to avoid torsion
47
Negative direction blocked
48
Positive direction blocked
49
Possible motor defect, because both directions blocked
4A
Cartridge present sensor defect
4B
Inventory lost, because destination possibly full
4C
Inventory lost, because source might be empty
4D
Could not pull tape out of slot from magazine
4E
Unexpected tape on elevator, possible inventory lost
50
Preposition to drive failed
51
Elevator movement to home sensor failed.
52
Sled movement to home sensor failed.
53
Error during sled movement to drive position.
54
Error during rotation to drive position.
55
Error during elevator movement in drive position.
56
Error during sled movement to rotation position.
57
Error during rotation to end position.
60
Move from/to drive failed.
61
Error during first slider movement.
62
Error during first gripper movement.
63
Error during second slider movement.
64
Error during second gripper movement, get range failed.
65
Error during third slider movement, move home failed.
70
Release magazine failed.
71
72
Error during rotation to unlock position.
8-9
73
Error during move sled to block.
80
Opening I/O slot failed.
81
Error during movement to I/O slot open position.
82
Error during moving back - sensor was found.
90
Movement to home position failed.
91
Elevator movement to home position failed.
92
93
Error during rotation to home or far position.
94
Sled movement to home sensor position failed.
95
Sled movement to transport position failed.
99
Error during rotation movement to rotation min position
A0
Movement of I/O slot failed.
A1
Sled movement to sensor failed.
A2
Sled movement to rotation position failed.
A3
Elevator movement to home position failed.
A4
Error during rotation to far position.
A5
Sled movement to I/O slot position failed.
A6
Error during elevator movement to position
A7
Error during mailslot detection
B0
EEPROM on robotics controller not accessible or error during Read/Write operation
B1
Save/restore configuration settings: not enough internal memory available for creating the file and
restoring the file respectively
B2
Save/restore configuration settings: restore buffer corrupted, checksum calculation failed
B3
Save/restore configuration settings: data base field corrupted
B4
Save/restore configuration settings: invalid personality
B5
Save/restore configuration settings: invalid file

LIBRARY
81
Drive wake up failed
88
Error accessing slot status
90
Accessor load not reached Cartridge Present sensor
91
No activity after Load command
92
Timeout while loading tape
93
No activity after load command
94
Timeout drive Unload
95
Drive terminated unsuccessfully
96
Tape not ejected at robot unload
8-10

97
Slot not free at robot unload
98
Cartridge not seated in load phase
Warning events
Warning events that are described are reported by way of email notification. The
Attention LED flashes when warning events for the following occur:
v Media
v Fan
v Redundant power supply
An appropriate message is posted on the Operator Control Panel and the Web
User Interface.
Table 8-3. Warning events
30
SCSI: transport element full
31
SCSI: all slots empty
32
SCSI: invalid opcode
33
SCSI: invalid element address
34
SCSI: invalid field in CDB
35
SCSI: Invalid drive specified
36
SCSI: SEND DIAGNOSTIC command:

invalid test number
37
SCSI: invalid LUN
38
SCSI: parameter list length error
39
SCSI: parameter list error: invalid field
3A
SCSI: parameter list error: parameter not

supported
3B
SCSI: parameter value invalid
3C
SCSI: saving parameters not supported
3D
SCSI: invalid ID message
3E
SCSI: destination element full
3F
SCSI: source slot or drive empty
40
SCSI: wrong checksum
41
SCSI: command sequence error
42
SCSI: drive disabled
43
SCSI: I/O Station disabled
44
SCSI: flash image does not fit bootcode
45
SCSI: media removal prevented by drive
46
SCSI: media removal prevented by

library
47
SCSI: flash image does not fit personality Check the version of firmware that is used for the upgrade.
Refer to your host application documentation for problem

determination information.
Check your configuration settings.

8-11
Table 8-3. Warning events (continued)

48
SCSI: drive type not supported in this

library
Check whether a version of firmware is available that

supports this drive type. For a list of supported drives, refer
to Ultrium tape drives on page 1-8.
49
SCSI: incompatible magazine, magazine

not accessible
4A
SCSI: source not ready
4B
SCSI: destination source not ready
4C
SCSI: library controller busy
4D
SCSI: Cannot make reservation
4E
SCSI: invalid slave robotic controller

request
4F
SCSI: robotic axes/motors aren't

initialized
Check robotics status. Refer to Isolating a library controller

card versus accessor enclosure problem on page 7-11.
50
SCSI: cartridge belongs to another

partition
Check application software.
51
Incompatible medium
Check the compatibility of media and drive generation.
52
All slots full, no movement possible
Remove a cartridge to make a move possible.
53
All slots empty required for wellness test Fill up required slots before the wellness test is started.
54
SCSI: failure in LME interface
Check your configuration settings.

Complete move process and retry operation.
Complete process and retry operation.
1. Check your Encryption configuration.

2. Run Key Path Diagnostics.
3. Refer to your EKM server documentation.
55
SCSI: invalid license key entered
Reenter license key. If problem persists, refer to Contacting

IBM technical support on page 9-4.
58
Recovered Error: SCSI parity error
59
Recovered Error: Error log overflow
5A
Illegal request, downgrade prohibited
Disable encryption for firmware downgrade.
5B
Incompatible medium generation
Replace incorrect cartridges.
5C
Illegal request, downgrade that is

prohibited because of incompatible
network stack
Change network settings to IPv4 only before downgrading

firmware.
5D
Illegal request, wrong drive FW for drive Obtain correct drive firmware image.
5E
Full high drive in illegal position
Check correct Drive position.
60
Cleaning cartridge installed
Complete the cleaning process and retry the operation.
61
Cleaning failure. Cleaning process could

not be performed
1. Verify that autoclean is enabled.
No user action is required.
2. Check for an expired cleaning cartridge and replace if

necessary.
3. Refer to Configuring I/O stations and reserving slots
on page 5-79.
62
Cleaning cartridge expired
63
Invalid cartridge. Drive rejected the data

cartridge as invalid
64
Invalid cleaning cartridge. Drive rejected

the cleaning cartridge as invalid
65
Invalid upgrade cartridge. Drive rejected

Not supported
the upgrade cartridge as invalid
8-12
Replace cleaning cartridge.

1. Verify that the correct cartridge is being used. Refer to
Cartridge compatibility on page 6-3.
2. Refer to Identifying a suspect cartridge on page 7-14.

66
Medium error; diagnostic tape write

protected
Ensure that diagnostic tape is not write protected.
67
Medium error, incompatible medium for

write operation
Replace incorrect cartridges.
6A
Medium error, no OBDR tape
Insert OBDR tape.
70
Currently not used
71
Currently not used
72
Currently not used
73
SCSI: overlapped command attempt
74
SCSI: echo buffer overwritten

75
Download prevented due to

incompatible bar code reader hardware
Older firmware image doesnt support current bar code

reader hardware. No downgrade possible.
77

incompatible LCM
Older firmware image doesnt support current library

controller hardware. No downgrade possible.
78

incompatible Rob Code
Older firmware image doesnt support current robotics

controller hardware. No downgrade possible.
79

incompatible drive version
Use correct drive firmware image.
80
Movement Retry.
81
Fan Alert.
82
Clean request from drive.
83
Media Attention.
84
Drive reported warning or critical tape

alert flag.
85
Network problem.
Check network connections, configuration, and settings.
86
Not enough cleaning cartridges present

to autoclean.
Insert more cleaning cartridges to the empty reserved slots.
87
Drive disabled because it is not

supported for use in this library.
Check drive type and install only supported drives.
88
Drive firmware unchanged after

upgrade.
This is normal if the old and new drive firmware is the

same version.
89
Power Supply Fan operation warning.
Check the power supply status.
8A
Power Supply failed.
Check the power supply status and replace the failed power
supply.
8B
Power supply failed.
Check the power supply status and replace the failed power
supply.
8C
Invalid Robotic Code.
Install the latest version of library firmware.
8E
Cleaning tape nearly expired.
Continue with cleaning cartridge until it is expired, then

replace the expired cleaning cartridge with a new cleaning
cartridge.
8F
I2C bus recovery.
Run library System Test.
92
VPD data have been restored from

EEPROM.
This is normal when the VPD is restored EEPROM.
8-13

DB
External cooling fan error (fan motion

stopped).
The subcode indicates which drive sled
fan is affected
Refer to Isolating drive sled problems on page 7-10.
Subcode 01: drive sled #1(bottom)

Subcode 02: drive sled #2
DC
I2C Bus Failure
DD
Power Supply x fan failed,

Redundancy might be at risk
The subcode indicates which power
supply fan is affected
Refer to Isolating a power supply problem on page 7-8.
Subcode 01: 1st PS fan from bottom

Subcode 02: 2nd PS fan from bottom
DF
Power Good signal that is changed from

2 to 1 Power Supplies
F6
No drive installed. A drive was never

installed.
8-14
Install at least one drive.
Chapter 9. Service procedures

Removing cartridges from magazine slots
If a severe mechanical problem with the library occurs, or if circumstances require
you to remove tape cartridges, follow this procedure. If the Operator Control Panel
or the Web User Interface is still operational
1. Move the tapes from the drive to the magazines with the Move Media
command. See Manage Library: Move media on page 5-42.
Note: See Contacting IBM technical support on page 9-4 if a cartridge does
not eject from the drive.
2. Use the magazine removal process to release the magazine and remove it from
the library. To use the Operator Control Panel, see Control: Magazine on page
5-17. To use the Web User Interface, see Manage Library: Release Magazine
on page 5-43. If neither of these processes works, see Releasing the magazines
manually.
Releasing the magazines manually
a77ug025
If the directions in Steps 1 and 2 above do not allow you to remove the tapes:
1. Unplug the power cord from the library.
2. Find the access holes for the right and left magazines.
Figure 9-1. Access holes for the left magazine
9-1
a77ug024
Figure 9-2. Access holes for the right magazine
3.
9-2
To manually release the magazines, push the end of a straightened paper clip
into the access hole for each magazine at the back of the library. While you are
holding the paper clip, have a second person pull the magazine out of the front
of the unit. DO NOT push the paper clip in more than 1/2 inch.
a77ug023
a77ug102
Figure 9-3. Left magazine pulled out of the 2U library
Figure 9-4. Left Magazines pulled out of the 4U Library
4. If there are tapes still in the library, or if you were unable to manually remove
the magazines and drive, contact technical support for further instructions.
IBM TotalStorage Tape Diagnostic tool (ITDT)

The IBM TotalStorage Tape Diagnostic tool (ITDT):
v Runs quick or extended diagnostic tests on tape drives. If the library is online to
the server/host where the tool resides, ITDT communicates with the drive
through the library to load and unload a test cartridge, exercising some library
functions.
v Retrieves firmware memory dumps from tape drives and libraries.
9-3
v Completes a firmware update on tape drives or libraries. See note about library
firmware update.
v Tests the performance of the environment by completely writing a cartridge and
measuring performance.
v Retrieves and displays cartridge information.
v Verifies the encryption environment.
v Does not require special device drivers.
v Is available for most major platforms.
v Scans the host interface and finds and displays for selection all IBM LTO
devices. The tool does not display non-IBM devices.
The IBM TotalStorage Tape Diagnostic tool (ITDT) is available as a command-line
utility and a graphical user interface (GUI) version.
v The IBM TotalStorage Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) tool is a command-line
utility. Start it by entering the executable from the directory where the tool is
located. The Help feature gives a brief explanation of each function and shows
the required syntax.
v The IBM TotalStorage Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) tool is a GUI version for
Microsoft Windows. Microsoft Windows XP and Microsoft Windows Server 2003
(IX86, 32-bit) are only supported.
Note: Be sure that you have the most current version of ITDT if you are updating
firmware on a recent drive type. Before ITDT is used, verify that your
library host operating system is at the latest released level. This action
ensures optimum read/write operations for diagnostic tests.
Note: The earlier tape products (3580 GEN1 and GEN2, 3581, 3582, and 3583
products) are not supported by this version of ITDT but are supported by
the older version of ITDT v1.2.
Note: If the library has a BCR (Barcode reader) that requires 9.00 or greater
firmware, the Update function terminates with an error code of "Unexpected
Data" if you attempt to downlevel the library firmware.
To download the ITDT tool and instructions for using the tool, visit
http://www-03.ibm.com/servers/storage/support/.
Contacting IBM technical support

Important: The IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 tape library
is a customer installed unit. The customer is responsible for the setup
and maintenance of the tape library. The customer is charged for
service if a service contract is not in place.
Note: Where instructions refer you to the web, visit http://www-03.ibm.com/
servers/storage/support/lto/.
1. Verify that you exhausted all of the troubleshooting options:
a. Complete all recommended diagnostic procedures.
b. Verify that the librarys and drives firmware is at the most recent level. To
determine the latest release of firmware, visit the web.
c. Verify that your device drivers are at the most recent level (see your server
(host) manual for instructions).
9-4
v For the latest release of IBM device drivers, visit the web.
v For the latest release of device drivers by independent software vendors
(ISVs), visit the appropriate third-party website.
d. Verify whether your hardware and software configuration is supported. To
determine the latest supported attachments, visit the web.
e. Ensure that cables and connectors are not damaged.
f. Review all documentation carefully. (Experience demonstrated that most
questions are answered in your documentation.)
2. Follow these steps to take full advantage of your call:
a. Be prepared to explain whether the software or hardware worked properly
at any time in the past. Have you changed anything recently?
b. Pinpoint the exact location of your problem, if possible. Note the steps that
led to the problem. Can you duplicate the problem or is it a one-time
occurrence?
c. Note any error messages that are displayed on your PC monitor or file
server. Write down the exact error message.
d. If at all possible, call while at your computer, with the library installed and
turned on.
e. If your library is on a network, have all relevant information available (that
is, type, version number, network hardware).
f. Having this information available when you call for customer assistance
enables support personnel to resolve your problem in the most efficient
manner possible.
v Library machine type and model name
v Serial number of the library (front of the library on the label underneath
the power button)
v Library and drive firmware levels currently installed
v Device driver information
v Host application name and version
v Type of host, operating system version, clock speed, RAM, network type,
network version, and any special boards installed
3. The IBM Support Center assists with problem determination and initiates
shipment of a replacement part, if needed, to your location. To contact IBM
technical support:
v In the US: 1-800-IBM_SERV (1-800-426-7378).
v All other Countries/Regions: http://www.ibm.com/planetwide/.
v To open a Service Request online: Under Support & downloads, click Open
a Service Request.
9-5
9-6
Chapter 10. Check, adjust, remove, and replace

Tools required
To service a library, you might need one or more of these tools:
v #2 Phillips screwdriver
v Ground strap (recommended, if available)
Electrostatic discharge
Important: A discharge of static electricity can damage static-sensitive devices or
microcircuitry. Proper packaging and grounding techniques are
necessary precautions to prevent damage.
Figure 10-1. ESD label
To prevent electrostatic damage, observe these precautions:

v Transport products in static-safe containers such as conductive tubes, bags, or
boxes.
v Keep electrostatic-sensitive parts in their containers until they arrive at static-free
stations.
v Cover the unit with approved static-dissipating material. If available, provide a
ground strap that is connected to the work surface and properly grounded tools
and equipment. If a ground strap is not available, touch a metal surface to
discharge any static electricity in your body.
v Keep the work area free of no conducting materials, such as ordinary plastic
assembly aids and foam packing.
v Make sure that you are always properly grounded when you touch a
static-sensitive component or assembly.
v Avoid touching pins, leads, or circuitry.
v Use conductive field service tools.
Relocating your library

When you move or ship your library, it is important that the shipping lock is in
place to prevent the accessor from moving. This action also protects the library
from possible damage. Before you relocate your library, complete this procedure.
1. Remove all cartridges from inside the library.
2. Power OFF the library. This action aligns the robot with the shipping lock slot.
3. Remove any cables and terminators that are connected to the library.
4. Remove the library from the rack, if necessary.
5. Remove the shipping label (2) and lock (1) from the rear panel of the
library.
10-1
a77ug019
Figure 10-2. Shipping lock and label storage location
6. Insert the shipping lock (1) into the slot that is on the center of the top of the
library and secure with the shipping label (2).
a77ug018
Figure 10-3. Shipping lock and label
7. Pack the library in its original packaging materials (or equivalent packaging)
for moving or shipping.
Table 10-1. Shipping lock/Shipping label
1
Shipping Lock
2
Shipping Label
10-2
Removing/installing/adding a tape drive sled

There are two types of drive sleds in a TS3100 library (2U library) and a TS3200
library (4U library). The contents of the ship groups are specific to the type of
drive sled.
v Drive sled without ElectroStatic Discharge (ESD) springs (see Figure 10-4) ship
group:
Drive sled without ESD springs
a77ug008
Packet of conductive tape to be applied to the drive sled for ESD protection
v Drive sled with ESD springs (see Figure 10-5) ship group:
Drive sled with ESD springs
Figure 10-4. Library drive sled without ElectroStatic Discharge (ESD) springs (SCSI sled shown)
a77ug202
Figure 10-5. Library drive sled with ESD springs [1] (SAS sled shown)
10-3
Removing a tape drive sled

1. IT IS IMPORTANT TO PRESERVE A DRIVE DUMP FOR IBM ANALYSIS IF
ALL OF THESE CONDITIONS EXIST:
v Library Error LED is ON.
v Operator Control Panel is displaying a drive error message.
v Web User Interface System Status screen is indicating that a drive failed.
For instructions on preserving the drive memory dump, refer to Before you
begin on page A-2.
IF NONE OF THE CONDITIONS LISTED ABOVE EXIST, PROCEED TO THE
NEXT STEP.
2. Power OFF the library before a SCSI drive sled is removed or installed. Fibre
Channel and SAS drive sleds are hot pluggable and might be removed and
installed while the library is powered ON.
3. If necessary, unload the tape cartridge from the drive to be removed.
v Operator Control Panel: Control > Move Cartridges
v Web User Interface: Manage Library > Move Media
4. Remove the host interface cable (1, 2, or 4 in Figure 10-6) and terminator
(3 for SCSI drive sled only).
9
10
a77ug204
Figure 10-6. Drive sled components (full high fibre drive in top position, half high SCSI drive in middle position, half
high SAS drive in bottom position) on back panel of a 4U library
1
SCSI cable
2
SAS cable
3
SCSI terminator
4
Fibre Channel cable
5
Ethernet cable
6
Power cords
7
Drive sled blue captive thumbscrews
8
Black pull-out tab
9
Drive sled
10-4
10
Drive sled handle
5. If present, remove the conductive tape from the drive sled (refer to Figure 10-9
on page 10-7).
6. Loosen the blue captive thumbscrews (7 in Figure 10-6 on page 10-4) on the
drive sled.
7. Pull straight back on the drive sled handle (10) to remove it from the library
(see Figure 10-7).
a77ug027
8. If you are replacing the tape drive sled, proceed to Installing a Tape Drive Sled
for instructions. If you are not replacing the tape drive sled immediately, you
must complete these procedures:
a. Install a drive cover plate to protect your library from dust and debris.
b. To remove the "Missing drive" indicators on the Operator Control Panel
(Attention LED) and the Web User Interface (System Status screen), modify
or resubmit logical library setting (Operator Control Panel: Configure >
Logical Libraries or Web User Interface: Configure Library > Logical
Libraries).
Figure 10-7. Pulling the drive sled out of the library (drive sled without ESD springs shown)
Installing a tape drive sled

Note: Power OFF the library before a SCSI drive sled is installed. Fibre Channel
and SAS drive sleds are hot pluggable and might be removed and installed
while the library is powered ON.
Important: In a 4U library a full high drive sled might be installed in drive slot 1
10-5
1. Before you install the new drive sled, inspect all connectors on the drive sled.
Ensure that the connectors are intact, free of any objects, and have no cracks,
or deformed or bent contacts.
2. Extend the black pull-out tab (8 in Figure 10-6 on page 10-4) located
underneath the library near the lower right corner of the drive sled.
3. Slowly insert the new drive sled into the drive slot while the bottom of the
drive sled is supported (see Figure 10-8). Ensure that the black tab remains
extended (8 in Figure 10-6 on page 10-4).
a77ug028
Important: Push in on the drive sled handle (10 in Figure 10-6 on page
10-4) while the bottom of the drive sled is supported until it is
properly seated. Damage to the connector pins might occur if this
procedure is not followed.
4. Push the drive sled slowly into the drive slot until the sled seats itself against
the back of the library.
Figure 10-8. Pushing the drive sled into the library (drive sled without ESD springs shown)
5. Tighten the captive thumbscrews (7 in Figure 10-6 on page 10-4) until the
drive sled is secure.
6. If you are installing a drive sled without ESD springs (see Figure 10-4 on page
10-3), apply conductive tape to the sled as shown in Figure 10-9 on page 10-7.
10-6
4U Library
a77ug203
2U Library
Figure 10-9. Diagrams for applying conductive tape for ESD protection to the back of a drive sled installed in a 2U or
4U library
Note: The small gray markers show where conductive tape is placed to
provide ESD protection.
7. Push the black tab (8 in Figure 10-6 on page 10-4) back underneath the
library. When inserted properly, only the handle of the tab is visible.
8. Upgrade library firmware and drive firmware to the latest version.
Refer to Configure Library: Drives on page 5-50 to configure the drive if it
is a SCSI or FC drive. Connect the drive host interface cable to the host or FC
switch.
Note: Go to http://www.ibm.com/storage/support/ to download the latest
firmware for your library and tape drive.
9. Run the Library Verify test. (Operator Control Panel: Service > Library
Verify). This test requires the use of a scratch (blank) cartridge.
v If the test passes:
When prompted by the Operator Control Panel display and the I/O
station opens, remove the cartridge that is used in the test.
Press Cancel to exit the Library Verify screen.
Resume normal library operations.
v If the test fails, an error code is displayed. Make note of the error, then see
the Troubleshooting chapter in this document for more instructions.
10. Package the failed drive sled in the same packaging in which the new sled
was shipped to you and return to IBM. Complete the Warranty Redemption
form and return it in the package with the drive sled.
Important: If the failed drive was configured for encryption, to ensure that
the replacement drive receives the appropriate encryption
parameters, resubmit the encryption choices that are listed on
10-7
Configure Library > Encryption for that particular drive or logical

library even if the encryption settings did not change.
Adding a tape drive sled

Use these instructions to add a tape drive to your 2U or 4U tape library. See
Appendix B, SCSI element types, SCSI addresses, and physical configurations, on
page B-1.
Note: Power OFF the library before a SCSI drive sled is installed. Fibre Channel
and SAS drive sleds are hot pluggable and might be removed and installed
while the library is powered ON.
Important: In a 4U library, a full high drive sled can be installed in drive slot 1
Complete this procedure to add a tape drive to your library.
1. Before the new drive sled is installed, inspect all connectors on the drive sled.
Ensure that the connectors are intact, free of any objects, and have no cracks, or
deformed or bent contacts.
2. Slowly insert the new drive sled into the drive slot while the bottom of the
drive sled is supported (see Figure 10-8 on page 10-6). If necessary, ensure that
the black tab remains extended (8 in Figure 10-6 on page 10-4). Push in on
the drive sled handle (10 in Figure 10-6 on page 10-4) while the bottom of the
drive sled is supported until it is properly seated.
Important: Damage to the connector pins can occur if this procedure is not
followed.
3. Tighten the captive thumbscrews (7 in Figure 10-6 on page 10-4) until the
drive sled is secure.
4. If you are installing a drive sled without ESD springs (see Figure 10-4 on page
10-3), apply conductive tape to the sled as shown in Figure 10-9 on page 10-7.
Note: The small gray markers show where conductive tape is placed to
provide ESD protection.
5. Install cover plates on any open drive slots in the library.
6. Power ON the library.
7. Run the Library Verify test. (Operator Control Panel: Service > Library Verify).
This test requires the use of a scratch (blank) cartridge.
v If the test passes:
When prompted by the Operator Control Panel display and the I/O
station opens, remove the cartridge that is used in the test.
Press Cancel to exit the Library Verify screen.
Proceed to Configuring the tape drive.
v If the test fails, an error code is displayed. Make note of the error, then see
the Troubleshooting chapter in the IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library
and TS3200 Tape Library Setup, Operator and Service Guide (GA32-0545).
Configuring the tape drive

1. Log on to the Web User Interface.
10-8
2. Verify that you are running the latest versions of Library and Drive firmware.
Upgrade the firmware at Service Library > Upgrade Firmware.
3. Use the Web UI to update the Logical Library (Configure Library > Logical
Libraries) and Drive (Configure Library > Drives) configurations. Refer to
Chapter 5, Operations, on page 5-1. Select Submit on the Configure Library
> Logical Libraries web page even if there are no changes. This action refreshes
the Data Transfer Element (DTE) for the drives. See Appendix B, SCSI element
types, SCSI addresses, and physical configurations, on page B-1 for
information about DTE addressing. If Configure Library > Logical Libraries
does not correctly refresh or update the DTE addresses, run step 3 and step 4.
Otherwise, proceed to Step 5.
4. Reconfigure your library with the OCP to configure your network settings, then
with the Web UI to complete your library configuration.
5. Save your library configuration to your host computer or to a USB device.
6. Update your Library Configuration Form with the new drive and configuration
information.
7. Resume normal library operations.
Removing the slot blocker - 2U library

Earlier versions of the 2U library might have a "slot blocker" in the upper right cell
of the left magazine. A slot blocker is used to close off or restrict a data cell so that
a data cartridge cannot be placed there. For 2U libraries with library firmware of
1.90 or higher, this blocker is removed by following this procedure:
a77ug167
Figure 10-10. 2U magazine with slot blocker
Completely remove the magazine from the library. The power does not need to be
turned off.
1. In the upper right cell, locate the slot blocker (1).
2. Remove the slot blocker.
a. From behind the magazine, push a screwdriver or a pen through the hole.
b. Pop the slot blocker out of the cell.
10-9
a77ug168
Figure 10-11. Popping the slot blocker out of the cell
3. Slide the magazine back into the rack.

4. After the accessor runs through the inspection, a REMOVE SLOT
RESTRICTION? message displays on the main menu screen.
5. Choose the YES option. You can replace the empty cell with a data cartridge.
Replacing a power supply

1. Power OFF the library by pressing and holding down the power button for 4
seconds.
2. Disconnect the power cord from the electrical source, then from the library.
3. Loosen the three blue captive thumbscrews on the power supply on the back
panel of the library.
4. Pull on two of the thumbscrews to pull the unit away from the rear panel of
the library. Then grasp the top and bottom edge of the power supply and pull
it out of the library.
10-10
a66mi096
Figure 10-12. A power supply removed from a 2U library
5. Remove the packaging from the replacement power supply.

6. Grasp the top and bottom edge of the power supply and push it into the
library.
7. Tighten the three blue captive thumbscrews on the power supply on the back
panel of the library.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Connect the power cord to the library, then to the electrical source.
Power ON the library with the power button on the front panel.
Run the Library Verify test (refer to Service: Library Verify on page 5-29).
Package the failed power supply in the same packaging in which the new
power supply was shipped to you and return to IBM. Complete the Warranty
Redemption form and return it in the package with the power supply.
Replacing a library controller card

Read Me before Continuing
The library controller card contains a copy of the vital product data (VPD) for your
library. The VPD contains your current library configuration. A backup copy of this
VPD is contained within the electronics of the Library Enclosure. When the library
controller card is replaced, the new replacement card contains zeros (0s) in key
VPD locations. Upon detection of these zeros, the library automatically attempts to
write VPD data to the new library controller card from the backup copy of the
VPD contained in the library enclosure. In rare occurrences, the new library
controller card might contain valid (non-zero) VPD data left over from being
installed in another library. If this action occurs, the library, which is expecting to
see zeros in the VPD area, instead detects valid VPD data, and does not know
which copy of the VPD is the correct one. It detects a VPD Mismatch and
displays on the Operator Control Panel a screen entitled VPD Selection, where
you must determine which copy of VPD is written to the new library controller
card.
10-11
If the message "VPD Selection" is displayed at the Operator Control Panel,

carefully highlight the VPD from Enclosure" option to copy that version of the
VPD to the new library controller card. Then, continue with the procedure.
Removal and Replacement
1. Power OFF the library by pressing and holding the power button at the front
of the library for 4 seconds.
2. Disconnect the power cord from the electrical source, then from the power
supply or supplies at the back of the library.
a66mi097
3. Loosen the two blue captive thumbscrews on the library controller card.
4. Grasp the two thumbscrews and pull the defective library controller card out
of the library.
Figure 10-13. A library controller card that is removed from the library
5. Remove the packaging from the replacement library controller card.

6. Grasp the two thumbscrews and push the replacement library controller card
into the library.
7. Tighten the two blue captive thumbscrews on the library controller card.
8. Connect the power cord to the power supply or supplies at the back of the
library, then to the electrical source.
9. Power ON the library with the power button on the front panel.
10. After power is restored to the library controller card, the library automatically
restores the VPD on the new library controller card from the library enclosure.
If a "VPD Selection" message is displayed in the Operator Control Panel, see
the "Read Me before Continuing" section earlier in this procedure to determine
how to respond to the message.
11. Upgrade library firmware and drive firmware to the latest version. See
Service Library: Upgrade Firmware on page 5-74.
12. Run the Library Verify test (refer to Service: Library Verify on page 5-29).
Note: Use care when you select the appropriate VPD to restore from/to. An
error in selection here might cause a long downtime.
13. Package the failed library controller card in the same packaging in which the
new control board was shipped to you and return to IBM. Complete the
Warranty Redemption form and return it in the package with the library
controller card.
10-12
Replacing cartridge magazines

To replace a cartridge magazine, see one of these procedures:
v Web User Interface: Manage Library: Release Magazine on page 5-43.
v Operator Control Panel: Control: Magazine on page 5-17.
v If your library cannot be powered ON: Releasing the magazines manually on
page 9-1.
Replacing magazine fiducials

Magazine fiducials are location sensors that are used by the library accessor. Extra
magazine fiducials are included in your original library shipment.
3
2
1
a66mi098
Figure 10-14. Magazine fiducial
1. Remove the cartridge magazine that requires a replacement fiducial (refer to

Cartridge magazines on page 4-37.
2. Remove the damaged fiducial by pushing the fiducial tab (3) and pulling the
fiducial (1) out of the slot in the magazine (2).
3. Slide the replacement fiducial (1) into the correct magazine slot (2). Ensure
that the fiducial tab (6) on each side of the fiducial is underneath the
magazine slot at 5 and above the magazine slot at 4. Ensure that the
fiducial is not installed in the magazine slot as indicated by 7.
4. Slide the cartridge magazine into the library and resume normal library
operation.
10-13
Replacing the library enclosure

This procedure is necessary when the library enclosure, accessor, or display fails.
These components are contained within the replacement library enclosure.
Important: Refer to the Installation Instructions that are included with the new
replacement library enclosure. Follow the procedures included in this
document for replacing the Library Enclosure, only if Installation
Instructions are not included with the new replacement library
enclosure.
The replacement library enclosure includes cartridge magazines, a power supply, a
Library Controller Card, and a packet of library foot pads. These items are
included with the replacement library enclosure because of safety agency
requirements. These unused parts are removed from the replacement library
enclosure and returned to IBM in the defective library. The old parts in your
defective library are removed, and installed into the replacement library enclosure.
Note: To reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to equipment:
v Observe local health and safety requirements and guidelines for manual
material handling
v Obtain adequate assistance to lift and stabilize the library during
installation or removal
Minimum Installation Time: 1 hr.
Minimum Number of Persons Required: 2
Recommended Tools: #2 Phillips screwdriver, paper clip, blank (or scratch) data
cartridge
Preparing the defective library for replacement

1. If possible, use the Operator Control Panel to unload any drives that contain a
cartridge (Control > Move Cartridges).
2. Power OFF the defective library.
3. Disconnect all cables from the rear panel of the defective library.
4. If the defective library is rackmounted, remove the two screws (1 in
Figure 10-15 on page 10-15) from the front of the defective library anchoring the
mounting brackets on the library to the rack. With assistance, remove the
defective library from the rack.
10-14
a77ug112
1
Figure 10-15. Removing the two mounting bracket screws anchoring the library to the rack (one screw on each side of
the library)
5. Place the defective library on a clean and sturdy work surface.

6. Proceed to Unpacking and preparing the replacement library enclosure.
Unpacking and preparing the replacement library enclosure

Before the replacement library enclosure is installed, it is important to verify that
the enclosure is functioning properly.
1. Unpack the replacement library enclosure and place it on a sturdy and clean
work surface near the defective library. Save all packaging materials for
returning the failing parts to IBM.
2. Choose one of these options for installing the foot pads.
Important: Operating your library on a flat surface without foot pads might
damage your library or cause it not to function properly.
v Rack mount - temporary placement of the foot pads
v Desktop - permanent placement of the foot pads
a. For a rack mounted library:
1) Lift the replacement library enclosure slightly above the work surface.
Then, have another person place a foot pad under each corner of the
library and on each side of the library halfway between the front and
back.
2) Gently set the replacement library enclosure on top of the feet. Adjust
foot pad placement as necessary to stabilize the library. Do not
permanently attach the foot pads to the library.
b. For a desktop library:
1) Carefully lay the library on its side.
2) Peel the adhesive from the back of each of the 6 foot pads.
3) Install the foot pads on the bottom of the library enclosure by pressing
each foot into one of the six areas (1) as shown in Figure 10-16 on
page 10-16.
10-15
a77ug085
Figure 10-16. Foot pads that are installed on the bottom of the library enclosure
3. Carefully return the library to an upright position.

4. Remove the shipping lock from the top of the replacement library enclosure
(see Figure 10-17 on page 10-17).
10-16
a77ug195
Figure 10-17. Removing the shipping label and lock from the top of the library and storing on the rear panel
5. Store the lock and label on the back panel of the replacement library enclosure
(see Figure 10-18).
a77ug019
Figure 10-18. Library shipping lock and label storage location on the real panel of the library
6. Proceed to Installing your drive in the replacement library enclosure.
Installing your drive in the replacement library enclosure

Important: It is important to install the drives from the defective library into the
same positions in the replacement library enclosure to maintain your
current library configuration.
1. Remove all drives from the defective library (see Figure 10-19 on page 10-18)
and install them in the same positions in the replacement library enclosure.
10-17
a77ug027
Figure 10-19. Removing a drive sled from the library (drive sled without ESD springs shown)
a. Ensure that the power cord is unplugged from the power source for each
power supply in the defective library enclosure.
b. On the rear of the defective library, loosen the blue captive thumbscrews on
the drive sled.
c. If necessary, remove the conductive tape from the drive sled.
d. Pull back on the tape drive handle to remove it from the library.
e. On the rear of the replacement library enclosure, extend the black pull-out
tab that is located underneath the lower right corner of the lowest drive
sled position. Ensure that the black pull-out tab remains extended when a
drive sled is inserted in the lowest drive position in the library.
Important: If this procedure is not followed, damage to the connector pins
can occur.
f. Place each tape drive into the replacement library enclosure in the same
drive slot as it was positioned in the defective library.
v While the drive assembly is supported, align the drive sled with the
groove in the drive slot rails.
v Slowly push the drive sled forward until it is properly seated.
g. Tighten the captive thumbscrews until the drive is secure.
h. If a drive sled without ESD springs is installed (see Figure 10-19), apply
conductive tape as shown in Figure 10-20 on page 10-19.
10-18
4U Library
a77ug203
2U Library
Figure 10-20. Drive sled taping diagrams
Note: The gray markers show where conductive tape is placed.

i. Push the black tab back underneath the drive sled. When inserted properly,
only the handle of the tab is visible.
2. Power ON the replacement library enclosure.
a. If power ON is successful,
|
|
|
|
|
1) After power up, the Ready/Activity LED (1 in Figure 10-23 on page
10-23) turns ON.
a) If this message is displayed after the library powers ON, follow the
instructions.
[New library detected.]
[Please remove power and insert LCC from old library]
[ok]
2) Power OFF the replacement library enclosure.

3) You must power down, and remove the CRU LCC. Then, replace it with
the original LCC to have VPD transferred from the original LCC to the
new chassis.
4) Proceed to Swapping power supplies.
b. If power ON is not successful,
1) The Error LED (4 in Figure 10-23 on page 10-23) turns ON.
3) Contact IBM technical support for instructions.
Swapping power supplies

1. Unplug the power cord from the power source then from the replacement
library enclosure if this action was not done previously. See Installing your
drive in the replacement library enclosure on page 10-17.
2. Swap the power supply in the defective library with the power supply in the
replacement library enclosure.
10-19
a. Remove the power supply from the defective library and from the
replacement library enclosure. To remove a power supply from a library:
1) Loosen the three blue captive thumbscrews on the power supply.
2) Pull on two of the thumbscrews, on opposite sides of the power supply,
and pull the unit away from the rear panel of the library.
3) Grasp the top and bottom edges of the power supply and remove it
from the library.
a66mi096
b. Install the power supply that is removed from the replacement library
enclosure in the defective library to return to IBM. To install a power
supply:
1) While the power supply is supported, align the power supply with the
groove in the enclosure rails.
2) Push the power supply forward until it is properly seated.
3) Tighten the thumbscrews.
Figure 10-21. A power supply that is removed from a library
3. Plug the power cord into the replacement library enclosure, then into a power
source.
a. If power ON is successful:
1) The replacement library enclosure powers up with the Ready/Activity
LED (1 in Figure 10-23 on page 10-23) ON.
3) Unplug the power cord from the power source, then from the library.
4) Proceed to Swapping library controller cards on page 10-21.
b. If power ON is not successful, contact IBM technical support for
instructions.
10-20
Swapping library controller cards

IMPORTANT - READ ME BEFORE CONTINUING
The library enclosure contains a copy of the vital product data (VPD) for your library. The VPD contains your
current library configuration. A primary copy of this VPD is contained within the library controller card. A backup
copy of this VPD is maintained on the accessor in the enclosure (or chassis). When the library enclosure is replaced,
the new enclosure electronics must contain zeros (0 's) in key VPD locations. Upon detection of these zeros, the
library automatically writes VPD data to the replacement library enclosure from the primary copy of the VPD
contained in the library controller card. In rare occurrences, the replacement library enclosure might contain valid
(non-zero) VPD data left over from an installation in another library. Then, the library firmware, which is expecting
to see zeros in the VPD area, instead detects valid VPD data, and does not know which copy of the VPD is the
correct one. It detects this VPD mismatch and displays a message that is entitled VPD Selection on the Operator
Control Panel. The library needs your input to determine which copy of VPD to write to the replacement library
enclosure. If you are replacing both the library enclosure and the library controller card, transfer VPD after you
install one part before you install the other.
If the message VPD Selection is displayed at the Operator Control Panel, carefully highlight the VPD from
Controller option before OK is selected. This action copies VPD from the controller to the replacement library
enclosure.
1. Swap the library controller card in the defective library with the library
controller card in the replacement library enclosure.
a. Remove the library controller card (see Figure 10-22 on page 10-22) in the
defective library and in the replacement library enclosure. To remove a
library controller card:
1) Loosen the two blue captive thumbscrews on the library controller card.
2) Grasp the thumbscrews and pull the card out of the library.
b. Install the library controller card from the defective library in the
replacement library enclosure. Install the library controller card from the
replacement library enclosure in the defective library to return to IBM. To
install a library controller card:
1) Grasp the library controller card faceplate and align the library
controller card with the groove in the enclosure rails.
2) Push the library controller card forward until it is properly seated.
Note: You hear a snap when the library controller card is fully engaged
and installed properly.
3) Tighten the thumbscrews.
10-21
a66mi097
Figure 10-22. Removing a library controller card from the library
Note: If you power on the replacement library without first swapping the
library controller card from the original (defective) library enclosure,
this message displays on the Operator Control Panel shortly after
power is applied: New library detected. Please remove library
power and insert library controller card from old Library. The
library requires the library serial number and other library attributes
from the original library that is in the VPD on the original library
controller card to continue library initialization. See theImportant Read Me Before Continuing message.
If the replacement library does not complete library initialization
successfully after the original library controller card is swapped, be
sure to retain the original library controller card so it can be swapped
into the new replacement library enclosure that must be ordered.
2. Plug one end of the power cord (removed earlier from the defective library)
into the rear panel of the replacement library enclosure and plug the other end
into a power source.
a. If power ON is successful:
1) The Ready/Activity LED (1) turns ON indicating that all components
are functioning properly.
2) After power is restored to the replacement library enclosure, the library
automatically restores the VPD on the replacement library enclosure
from the library controller card. If a VPD Selection message is
displayed in the Operator Control Panel, see the Read Me before
Continuing section earlier in this procedure to determine how to
respond to the message.
4) Proceed to Swapping cartridge magazines on page 10-23.
b. If power ON is not successful:
1) The Error LED (4 in Figure 10-23 on page 10-23) turns ON. This action
indicates that the library controller card from the defective library is not
functioning properly.
3) Refer to IBM Technical Support for further instructions.
10-22
Figure 10-23. Library front panel LEDs

1
Ready/Activity LED (green)
3
Attention LED (amber)
2
Clean Drive LED (amber)
4
Error LED (amber)
Swapping cartridge magazines

1. Manually release and remove all magazines from the defective library and from
the replacement library enclosure. To release and remove a cartridge magazine:
a77ug025
a. Find the access holes for the right and left magazines (see Figure 10-24 and
Figure 10-25 on page 10-24).
Figure 10-24. Access hole for the left magazine (facing rear of library)
10-23
a77ug024
Figure 10-25. Access hole for the right magazine (facing rear of library)
b. Push the end of a straightened paper clip into the access hole for each
magazine at the back of the library. DO NOT push the paper clip in more
than inch. While you hold the paper clip, have a second person pull the
magazine out from the front of the unit.
a77ug102
Note: To prevent the magazine from dropping, support both ends of the
magazine before it clears the front edge of the library.
Figure 10-26. Left magazines pulled out of a 4U library (facing front of library)
10-24
2. Insert the cartridge magazines that are removed from the defective library into
the same positions in the replacement library enclosure.
3. Insert the cartridge magazines removed from the replacement library enclosure
into the same positions in the defective libraryto return to IBM.
4. Wait for inventory of the magazines to complete.
a. If inventory is successful:
1) The replacement library enclosure completes with the Ready/Activity
LED (1 in Figure 10-23 on page 10-23) ON.
3) Proceed to Swapping power supplies on page 10-19.
b. If inventory is not successful:
1) The error LED (4 in Figure 10-23 on page 10-23) turns ON.
2) Power OFF the enclosure.
3) Contact IBM technical support for instructions.
Installing the replacement library enclosure

Refer to the appropriate procedure (rack or desktop) for installing the replacement
library enclosure.
Note: If you are shipping the replacement library enclosure to a remote location,
install the shipping lock and label before shipment.
Rack Installation:
1. Remove the mounting brackets (1 in Figure 10-27) and anchors (2) from
each side of the defective library and install them on the replacement library
enclosure.
a77ug012
Figure 10-27. Mounting brackets and anchors for securing the library in a rack (one bracket and anchor on each side
of the library)
2. With assistance, slide the replacement library enclosure onto the metal rails that
are already in position in the rack (see Figure 10-28 on page 10-26).
10-25
a77ug196
Figure 10-28. Front view of a rack, showing the rails installed
3. Tighten the mounting bracket screws (1 in Figure 10-15 on page 10-15) to
anchor the replacement library enclosure to the rack.
4. Proceed to Completing the installation of the replacement library enclosure.
Desktop Installation:
1. Place the library in its permanent location.
2. Proceed to Completing the installation of the replacement library enclosure.
Completing the installation of the replacement library

enclosure
1. Connect all cables to the replacement library enclosure.
3. Upgrade library firmware and drive firmware to the latest version.
a. Visit http://www.ibm.com/storage/support/ to download the latest levels
of library and drive firmware.
b. Web User Interface: (Service Library > Upgrade Firmware), upgrade library
and drive firmware.
4. Run the Library Verify test (Operator Control Panel: Service > Library Verify).
This diagnostic test requires a blank or scratch data cartridge.
5. Properly complete the Repair Identification (RID) Tag that was included with
the replacement library enclosure.
Note: A RID (Repair Identification) Tag maintains the original serial number
record of the library to ensure your warranty coverage, if applicable, is
not interrupted. The tag is important for customer inventory accuracy.
Follow the instructions on the RID tag precisely.
a. Copy the serial number of the defective library onto the RID tag.
b. Apply the tag to the front of the new replacement library enclosure (as
shown in Figure 10-29 on page 10-27)
10-26
IBM REPAIR IDENTIFICATION TAG

REPAIR ID TAG
MT
SN
PART NUMBER 19P5941

ATTENTION:
1. A Repair ID tag maintains the original serial
a77ug032
number record of the machine and allows IBM

to entitle the machine for future maintenance
or warranty service. Mail in exchange requires
the completion and securing a Repair ID tag
(part number 19P5941) to the replacement
unit. Please be sure to use the following
procedures when replacing your 3580 or 3581
units:
- Verify that the machine serial number on
the failing unit matches the serial number
reported to IBM technical support.
- Transcribe the machine type, model, and
serial number of the failing unit to the
Repair ID tag for the replacement unit.
USE BALLPOINT PEN TO
COMPLETE THE RID TAG.
- Place the Repair ID tag as close as
possible, but not covering, the machine
serial number of the replacement unit.
- The original serial number must be visible.
2. The use of the Repair ID tag is important for

customer inventory accuracy.
Figure 10-29. Proper placement of the Repair Identification (RID) Tag
6. Proceed to Returning the defective library enclosure.
Returning the defective library enclosure

1. Remove the shipping label (2 in Figure 10-18 on page 10-17) and lock (1)
from the rear panel of the defective library, place the lock in the slot in the top
center of the library, and secure with the shipping lock label. This procedure
secures the library accessor for shipping.
2. Complete the Warranty Redemption card that was included with the
replacement library enclosure.
3. With the replacement library enclosure packaging materials, securely package
the defective library (including the left and right magazines, library controller
card, and power supply removed from the replacement library enclosure) and
return it, along with the Warranty Redemption Card, to IBM.
Important: Failure to return all of these components to IBM results in your
being charged for any missing components.
10-27
10-28
Chapter 11. Optional features, replacement parts and power

cords
For information on ordering tape cartridges, see Ordering media supplies on
page 6-20. For information on ordering bar code labels, see Ordering bar code
labels on page 6-22
Optional features
Table 11-1. Optional features
Feature Code
Description
8344
Ultrium 6 Full High Fiber Tape Drive Sled
8347
Ultrium 6 Half High SAS Tape Drive Sled
8348
Ultrium 6 Half High Fibre Tape Drive Sled
8148
Ultrium 4 Half High Fibre Tape Drive Sled - V2
8149
Ultrium 4 Half High SAS Tape Drive Sled - V2
8049
1682
Path Failover (4U) Supported on 2U with library firmware levels above 8.xx
1901
Additional Power Supply (4U)
5096
LC-SC Fibre Cable Interposer
5400
SAS/Mini-SAS 4x Interposer
5402
2 m SAS/Mini-SAS 1x Cable
5406
5.5 m SAS/Mini-SAS 1x Cable
5500
Mini-SAS/Mini-SAS 4x Interposer
5502
2 m Mini-SAS/Mini-SAS 1x Cable
5506
5.5 m Mini-SAS/Mini-SAS 1x Cable
5602
2.5 m VHDCI/HD68 SCSI Cable
5604
5610
10 m VHDCI/HD68 SCSI Cable
5900
Transparent LTO Encryption
6005
5 m LC/LC Fibre Cable
6013
6025
7002
Rack Mount Kit
8002
Cleaning Cartridge L1 UCC
8043
Ultrium 3 LVD SCSI Tape Drive Sled
8044
Ultrium 3 4Gb/s Fibre Channel Tape Drive Sled
8046
Ultrium 3 Half-High SCSI Tape Drive Sled
8047
Ultrium 3 Half-High SAS Tape Drive Sled
8106
Right Side Magazine
8107
Left upper 4U Magazine
8108
Left lower 4U Magazine
11-1
Table 11-1. Optional features (continued)

Feature Code
Description
8109
Left side 2U Magazine
8143
Ultrium 4 SCSI Tape Drive Sled
8144
Ultrium 4 Fibre Tape Drive Sled
8145
Ultrium 4 SAS Tape Drive Sled
8147
Ultrium 4 Half-High SAS Tape Drive Sled
8305
Data Cart (GEN3) 5-Pack
8405
Ultrium 4 Data Cartridges (5 pack)
9001
Driveless Library
9848
Rack Power Distribution Unit (PDU) Line Cord
8245
Ultrium 5 SAS (6Gb) Tape Drive Sled
8244
Ultrium 5 Fibre Drive (8Gb) Tape Drive Sled
8247
Ultrium 5 Half-High SAS (6Gb) Tape Drive Sled
8248
Ultrium 5 Half-High Fibre Drive (8Gb) Tape Drive Sled
8505
Ultrium 5 Data Cartridges (5-pack)
9900
Encryption Configuration
Replacement parts
Note: This library has Tier 1 and Tier 2 CRUs (customer replaceable units). (Tier 1:
No tools needed Tier 2: Tools needed) These CRUs are parts of the library
that must be added, removed, and replaced by the customer. If a customer
chooses to have the CRU added or removed or replaced by an IBM service
representative, there is a charge for the service.
Table 11-2. Replacement parts
Part Number
Description
46X8552
Ultrium 4 Half High Fibre Tape Drive Sled - V2
46X8551
46X8553
35P2615
Ultrium 6 Full High Fiber Tape Drive Sled
35P2616
Ultrium 6 Half High Fibre Tape Drive Sled
35P2865
46X4395
Ultrium 5 Fibre Drive (8Gb) Tape Drive Sled
46X4393
Ultrium 5 SAS Drive (6Gb) Tape Drive Sled
46X4394
Ultrium 5 HH SAS (6Gb) Tape Drive Sled
46X4396
Ultrium 5 HH Fibre Drive (8Gb) Tape Drive Sled
95P5855
Ultrium 4 Full High LVD SCSI Tape Drive Sled
95P5856
Ultrium 4 Full High Fibre Channel Tape Drive Sled
95P5857
Ultrium 4 Full High SAS Tape Drive Sled
45E2695
95P5218
Ultrium 3 Full High LVD SCSI Tape Drive Sled
95P5219
Ultrium 3 Full High Fibre Channel Tape Drive Sled
11-2
Table 11-2. Replacement parts (continued)

Part Number
Description
95P5858
Ultrium 3 Half High LVD SCSI Tape Drive Sled
95P5859
45E0657
95P6037
250 W Power Supply (can be used in both 2U and 4U libraries; is a replacement for an 2U
library 80w power supply)
23R7170
Foot Pads
23R5841
SCSI Terminator
23R5840
SCSI Wrap Tool
12R9314
Fibre Channel Wrap Tool
23R3841
23R3594
23R3593
10 m VHDCI/HD68 SCSI Cable
95P4587
2 m SAS/Mini-SAS 1x Cable
39M5700
5 m LC-LC Fibre Channel Cable
12R9559
39M5701
95P4588
5.5 m SAS/Mini-SAS 1x Cable
95P4488
2 m Mini-SAS/Mini-SAS 1x Cable
95P4494
5.5 m Mini-SAS/Mini-SAS 1x Cable
95P5933
SAS/Mini-SAS 4x Interposer
95P5177
Mini-SAS/Mini-SAS 4x Interposer
95P6566
SAS Wrap Tool
23R9679
Library Enclosure (2U)*
23R9629
Library Enclosure (4U)*
23R6471
Left Cartridge Magazine (2U)
23R6452
Right Cartridge Magazine (2U/4U)
23R7175
Lower Left Cartridge Magazine (4U)
23R7174
Upper Left Cartridge Magazine (4U)
23R7172
Block Out Panel, Power Supply (4U)
23R7173
Block Out Panel, Full High Drive Bay (4U)
95P6720
Half High Drive Filler Plate (2U/4U)
45E2709
Half High Drive Blockout Back Plate
* Tier 2 CRUs
Chapter 11. Optional features, replacement parts and power cords
11-3
Power cords
To avoid electrical shock, a power cord with a grounded attachment plug is provided. Use
only properly grounded outlets.
Table 11-3 lists the power cord part number, feature code, the country or region where the
power cord is used, and the plug's standard reference. The last column in the table contains
an index number that you can match to a specific receptacle type in Figure 11-1 on page
11-8.
All power cords use an appliance coupler that complies with the International
Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Standard 320, Sheet C13.
If the power cord that you receive does not match your receptacle, contact your local dealer.
Power cords used in the United States and Canada are listed by Underwriter's Laboratories
(UL), are certified by the Canadian Standards Association (CSA), and comply with the plug
standards of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). For other
worldwide geographies, plug standards are listed in Table 11-3.
Table 11-3. Power cords
Description, Feature Code
(FC), and Part Number
(PN)
US/Canada
Plug Standard
Reference
Country or Region
Index Number in Figure 11-1

on page 11-8
NEMA 5-15P
Aruba, Bahamas, Barbados,

Bermuda, Bolivia, Brazil,
Canada, Cayman Islands,
Colombia, Costa Rica,
Curacao, Dominican
Republic, Ecuador, El
Salvador, Guatemala, Guyana,
Haiti, Honduras, Jamaica,
Japan, Liberia, Mexico,
Netherlands Antilles,
Nicaragua, Panama, Peru,
Philippines, Saudi Arabia,
South Korea, Suriname,
Taiwan, Trinidad Tobago,
Venezuela, US
NEMA 5-15P
Chicago, U.S.A.
NEMA 6-15P
Aruba, Bahamas, Barbados,

Bermuda, Bolivia, Brazil,
Canada, Cayman Islands,
Costa Rica, Curacao,
Dominican Republic, Ecuador,
El Salvador, Guatemala,
Guyana, Haiti, Honduras,
Jamaica, Japan, Liberia,
Netherlands Antilles,
Nicaragua, Panama, Peru,
Philippines, Suriname,
Taiwan, Thailand, Trinidad
Tobago, Venezuela, US
v 2.8 m, 125V
v FC 9800
v PN 39M5081
Chicago
v 1.8 m, 125 V
v FC 9986
v PN 39M5080
US/Canada
v 2.8 m, 250 V
v FC 9833
v PN 39M5095
11-4
Table 11-3. Power cords (continued)

(PN)
Australia
v 2.8 m, 250V
v FC 9831
Plug Standard
Reference
AS 3112
NZS 198
v PN 39M5102
France, Germany
CEE 7 - VII
v 2.8 m, 250V
v FC 9820
v PN 39M5123
Denmark
DK2-5A
Country or Region

on page 11-8
Australia, China, Colombia,

New Zealand, Papua New
Guinea, Paraguay, Uruguay,
Western Samoa
Afghanistan, Algeria,
Andorra, Angola, Aruba,
Austria, Belgium, Benin,
Brazil, Bulgaria, Burkina
Faso, Burundi, Cameroon,
Central African Republic,
Chad, Congo-Brazzaville,
Curacao, Czech Republic,
Democractic Republic of
Congo, Denmark, Egypt,
Finland, France, French
Guiana, Germany, Greece,
Guinea, Hungary, Iceland,
Indonesia, Iran, Ivory Coast,
Jordan, Kenya, Korea,
Lebanon, Luxembourg,
Macau, Malagasy, Mali,
Martinique, Mauritania,
Mauritius, Monaco, Morocco,
Mozambique, Netherlands,
Netherlands Antilles, New
Caledonia, Niger, Norway,
Poland, Portugal, Romania,
Russia, Saudi Arabia, Senegal,
Spain, Sweden, Sudan, Syria,
Togo, Tunisia, Turkey,
Yugoslavia, Zaire, Zimbabwe,
Vietnam
Denmark
Bangladesh, Burma, Pakistan,

South Africa, Sri Lanka
v 2.8 m, 250V
v FC 9821
v PN 39M5130
South Africa
v 2.8 m, 250V
SABS 164
v FC 9829
v PN 39M5144
11-5

(PN)
United Kingdom
Plug Standard
Reference
Country or Region

on page 11-8
BS 1363
Antigua, Bahrain, Bermuda,

Brunei, Channel Islands,
China (Hong Kong S.A.R.),
Cyprus, Fiji, Ghana, Guyana,
India, Iraq, Ireland, Jordan,
Kenya, Kuwait, Malaysia,
Malawi, Malta, Nepal,
Nigeria, Oman, Polynesia,
Qatar, Sierra Leone,
Singapore, Tanzania, Uganda,
UK, United Arab Emirate
(Dubai), Yemen, Zambia
Liechtenstein, Switzerland
CEI 23- 16
Chile, Ethiopia, Italy, Libya,

Somalia
S11-32-1971
Israel
10
IEC 83-A5
Argentina, Brazil, Colombia,

Paraguay, Trinidad Tobago,
Uruguay
11
People's Republic of China
12
CNS 10917-3
Taiwan
13
CNS 10917-3
Taiwan
14
Japan
15
v 2.8 m, 250V
v FC 9825
v PN 39M5151
Switzerland
SEV SN 416534
v 2.8 m, 250V
v FC 9828
v PN 39M5158
Italy
v 2.8 m, 250V
v FC 9830
v PN 39M5165
Israel
v 2.8 m, 250V
v FC 9827
v PN 39M5172
Argentina
v 2.8 m, 250V
v FC 9834
v PN 39M5068
CCEE
China
v 2.8 m, 250V
v FC 9840
v PN 39M5206
Taiwan LV*
v 2.8 m, 125V
v FC 9835
v PN 39M5247
Taiwan HV**
v 2.8 m, 250V
v FC 9841
v PN 39M5254
Japan LV*
JIS C8303, C8306
v 2.8 m, 125V
v FC 9842
v PN 39M5199
11-6

(PN)
Japan HV**
Plug Standard
Reference
Country or Region

on page 11-8
JIS C8303, C8306
Japan
16
KS C8305, K60884-1
Korea
17
IS 6538
India
18
InMetro NBR 6147
Brazil
19
InMetro NBR 14136
Brazil
20
v 2.8 m, 250V
v FC 9843
v PN 39M5186
Korea HV**
v 2.8 m, 250V
v FC 9844
v PN 39M5219
India HV**
v 2.8 m, 250V
v FC 9845
v PN 39M5226
Brazil LV*
v 2.8 m, 125V
v FC 9846
v PN 39M5233
Brazil HV**
v 2.8 m, 250V
v FC 9847
v PN 39M5240
* Low Voltage
** High Voltage
Types of receptacles
Figure 11-1 on page 11-8 shows the plugs that are used by the power cords in
Table 11-3 on page 11-4. Match the index number that is beside each plug to the
index number in the table.
11-7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
19
20
17
18
Figure 11-1. Types of receptacles
11-8
a77ug005
Appendix A. Information for trained service personnel

Internal view of library
Important: FOR REFERENCE ONLY. The customer is not authorized to remove
the top cover of the library. No customer serviceable components are
inside the library.
3
a77ug026
6
Figure A-1. Internal view of the library
Table A-1. Internal view description
Number
1
Item
Description
Right cartridge magazine v In a 2U library, the right magazine can hold up to 12 cartridges.
v In a 4U library, the right magazines can hold up to 24 cartridges.
2
Left cartridge magazine
v In a 2U library, the left magazine can hold up to 11 cartridges and houses

the elective 1-slot I/O station.
v In a 4U library, the left magazines can hold up to 21 cartridges and houses
the elective 3-slot I/O station.
3
Accessor
This component contains the library robot and bar code reader. The accessor
moves cartridges to/from the
v I/O station
v storage slots
v tape drive
4
This component is a customer replaceable unit (CRU) and stores the user
configuration information or vital product data (VPD).
A-1
Table A-1. Internal view description (continued)

Number
Item
5
Tape drive sled
Description
Both libraries support the Ultrium 3 and Ultrium 4 Tape Drive. Each tape
drive in the library is packaged in a container that is called a drive sled. The
drive sled is a customer replaceable unit (CRU), and is designed for easy
removal and replacement.
v The 2U library houses one full high tape drive sled or up to two half high
tape drive sleds.
v The 4U library houses up to two full high tape drive sleds or up to four
half high tape drive sleds. Combinations of full high and half high drive
sleds are allowed.
6
Power supply
The power supply is a customer replaceable unit (CRU) and the sole source of
power for the library. The 2U has one power supply. The 4U has one or can
have an optional second power supply for redundancy.
Manual cartridge removal procedure

Attention:
v It is recommended that the drive and tape be returned to IBM for removal and
recovery.
v If the cartridge in the drive is an INPUT tape that contains ACTIVE or 'ONLY
COPY' data (there is no backup), eject commands that are issued at the host fail
to unload the tape, and power-cycling the drive fails to eject the cartridge, make
no further attempts to unload this tape. Call Technical Support and open a PMR
if one is not already open, to initiate the process of sending the drive with the
loaded cartridge in for recovery.
v These procedures must be completed only by a trained IBM service provider.
SSRs claim their time against service code 33 ECA 013 when they complete this
procedure.
v Inform the customer that the following procedure has high risk of damaging the
drive and high risk of not being able to recover the data.
Recommended tools
v #1 Phillips screwdriver
v ESD Kit
v Flashlight (optional)
v #1 Flathead screwdriver (optional)
Before you begin

When a tape drive error is reported by the library, the drive produces a memory
dump and saves it in Random Access Memory (RAM). If the library or drive is
powered OFF, this information is lost. To preserve this information for analysis by
IBM Technical Support, the drive memory dump must be copied to the drive's
flash memory. Complete the following steps to write a drive memory dump to
flash memory.
1. Log in to the Web User Interface.
a. User name: Service
b. Password: [contact IBM Technical Support for the Service password]
2. Expand Service Library and click Advance Diagnostic.
A-2
3. Select the failed drive, then click Write Drive Dump to Flash. To determine
which drive is failing, refer to the Web User Interface System Status screen.
4. Click Execute to write the drive memory dump to flash memory.
5. Attempt to remove the cartridge with the device power ON and with library
manager, a host application, or the Unload button. Press and hold the Unload
button for 12 seconds. This action causes the drive to eject the cartridge when it
completes the midtape recovery
6. Ensure that the operator issued the appropriate application commands to
complete a rewind and unload of the cartridge. This procedure is to ensure that
the stuck cartridge is not because of a hang condition in the application
7. Attempt to remove the cartridge by power-cycling the drive. Look for the drive
to attempt a midtape recovery.
Note: It can take 5 minutes to 1 hour (depending on cartridge type (LTO4, LTO
3, and so on) and how much of the tape is spooled out of the cartridge)
for the cartridge to rewind and unload.
8. If the cartridge unloads, inform the operator that the cartridge is unloaded. If
the cartridge does not unload, repeat steps 2 and 3 before this procedure is
continued.
Note: If the cartridge in the drive is an INPUT tape that contains ACTIVE or
'ONLY COPY' data (there is no backup), eject commands that are issued
at the host fail to unload the tape, and power-cycling the drive fails to
eject the cartridge, make no further attempts to unload this tape. Call
Technical Support and open a PMR if one is not already open, to initiate
the process of sending the drive with the loaded cartridge in for
recovery.
Beginning procedure
'ONLY COPY' data (there is no backup), eject commands that are issued at
the host fail to unload the tape, and power-cycling the drive fails to eject the
cartridge, make no further attempts to unload this tape. Call Technical
Support and open a PMR if one is not already open, to initiate the process
of sending the drive with the loaded cartridge in for recovery.
Removing the drive brick from the sled

1. Remove the tape drive sled from the library. See Removing a tape drive sled
on page 10-4.
2. Place the sled on a clean, sturdy work surface.
3. If necessary, complete the steps to remove the sled connection card to provide
access to the two screws that secure the sled to the drive brick:
A-3
Figure A-2. Drive connection card, showing screws and plastic cover
1
Connection card screws
2
Plastic cover
3
Connection card
4
Screws that hold the drive brick to the sled (2 on each side)
5
Signal cable
6
Power cable
7
RS-422 cable
a. Remove the three screws (1) securing the connection card 3) to the sled.
b. Remove the plastic cover (2) from the connection card.
c. Carefully move the connection card to one side. DO NOT UNPLUG ANY
CABLES CONNECTED TO THE CARD.
4. Remove the drive brick from the sled by completing these steps:
a. Remove the four screws (two on each side of the sled 4) that secure the
sled to the drive brick.
A-4
Figure A-3. Half high drive with the connection card moved to the side, showing the screws
b. Carefully pull the drive brick out of the front of the sled far enough to
unplug the signal cable (SCSI, Fibre Channel, or SAS 5).
Figure A-4. The drive brick, showing the cables to be unplugged
c. With the signal cable unplugged, carefully pull the drive brick out so that
the power cable (6) and the RS-422 cable (7) can be accessed and
unplugged.
Note: The SAS signal cable also contains the power cable.
A-5
Note: The RS-422 cable is delicate. Use your fingernails to work the cable
loose before it is unplugged.
d. Remove the drive brick from the sled.
Removing the drive cover

1. Ground yourself to the drive by using an ESD Kit.
2. Remove the cover of the full high drive by completing these steps:
a. With a Phillips screwdriver, remove the three screws and washers (see 1
in Figure A-5) that secure the bezel 2 to the internal drive, then remove
the bezel.
b. Remove the cover of the internal drive by completing these steps:
1) Remove the four cover-mounting screws and washers 3.
2) Remove the cover by lifting it up.
a82ru007
Figure A-5. Removing the bezel and the cover from the 4U internal drive
3. Remove the cover of the half high drive by completing these steps:
a. To remove the drive bezel, pull the right side of the bezel (1) from the
front of the drive, then pull the left side of the bezel out of the frame of the
drive.
b. Remove the cover of the internal drive by completing these steps:
1) Remove the four cover-mounting screws (2). Two screws are on each
side of the drive.
2) Remove the cover by lifting it up.
A-6
a82hd001
1
Figure A-6. Removing the bezel and the cover from the half high internal drive
4. Inspect the drive to decide which of the following conditions most closely
matches the symptom on the drive:
v Tape spooled off the supply reel - All the tape appears to be on the take up
reel and no tape is on the supply reel (inside the cartridge). Test the drive
after the procedure is completed.
v Tape pulled from leader pin (or broken at the front end) - All the tape
appears to be on the supply reel (inside the cartridge) and little or no tape
appears to be on the take up reel. The leader block is positioned in the take
up reel. Return the drive after the procedure is completed.
v Tape broken in mid-tape - Tape appears to be on both the supply reel
(inside the cartridge) and take up reel. Test the drive after the procedure is
completed.
v Tape tangled along tape path - Tape appears to be tangled and damaged but
intact. Return the drive after the procedure is completed.
-- OR -No damage to tape (or no apparent failure) - There appears to be no
damage or slack to the tape. Return the drive after the procedure is
completed.
Full-high drive: Tape spooled off supply reel

A-7
1. With the front of the drive facing you, pull an arm's length of tape out of the
take up reel from the left side of the drive.
2. From the take up reel, thread tape around the rear of the tape path and over
the head and rollers on the left side of the drive.
3. Set the drive on its left side with the head and tape path facing up.
4. Moisten a cotton swab with water and wet approximately 13 mm (0.5 in.) of
the tape end and feed it onto the supply reel (inside the cartridge).
a82ru008
5. From the bottom of the drive, insert a 2.5 mm offset hex wrench through the
bottom cover access hole and into the reel motor axle.
Figure A-7. The hex wrench rewinds tape into cartridge
6. Turn the supply reel clockwise, allowing the moistened tape to adhere to the
hub as it winds around the supply reel (inside the cartridge).
7. Continue spooling into the cartridge until the tape is taut and remains within
the flanges of the tape guiding rollers. Ensure that you do not stretch the tape.
8. Go to Ending procedure on page A-25.
Half-high drive: Tape spooled off supply reel

Attention: DO NOT TOUCH THE OUTER GUIDE RAIL (2). THIS RAIL IS
DELICATE AND EASILY DAMAGED.
A-8
1. From the takeup reel, pull an arm's length of tape around the rear of the tape
path and over the head and rollers on the left side of the drive.
3. Ensure that the tape is not twisted. Untwist the tape if required.
4. Moisten a cotton swab with water and wet approximately 13 mm (0.5 in.) of
the tape end and feed it onto the supply reel (inside the cartridge).
5. Turn the supply reel (4) clockwise, allowing the moistened tape to adhere to
the hub as it winds around the supply reel (inside the cartridge).
2
a82hd002
4
Figure A-8. Rewinding tape into cartridge
1
Loader motor worm gear
3
Takeup reel motor
2
Outer guide rail

4
(WARNING: Do Not Touch)
Supply reel motor
the flanges of the tape guiding rollers. Turn the supply reel (4) 10 more turns.
Ensure that you do not stretch the tape.
Full-high drive: Tape pulled from or broken near leader pin
A-9
3
7
8
6
5
1
a82ru009
Figure A-9. Drive with cover removed to reveal gear train.

1
6
Threader mechanism gear
2
Cartridge loader tray guide

bearing
7
Lever
3
Rotator stub
8
Loader mechanism gear
4
Threader motor worm gear
5
Threader intermediate gear
1. From the left side of the drive, pull out tape from the take up reel.
Note: If there is more than approximately 0.6 m (2 ft.) of tape on the take up
reel, go to Full-high drive: Tape broken in mid-tape on page A-13.
2. If there is less than approximately 0.6 m (2 ft.) of tape on the take up reel, cut
off the excess tape as close to the leader pin, as possible.
3. Locate the threader motor worm gear (4) the rear of the drive. Use your
finger to rotate the threader motor worm gear and slowly rotate the threader
mechanism gear (6) clockwise. This action rotates the threader motor worm
gear (4) clockwise, drawing the tape leader block assembly (LBA) into the
cartridge.
4. As the LBA is secured in the cartridge, you hear the LBA retention spring
clips click into place. If you do not hear the click, continue rolling until the
threader motor worm gear (4) stops. The LBA is in the correct position.
Note: Be sure to keep tension on the tape as the LBA is drawn into the
cartridge by using a hex wrench as shown in Figure A-7 on page A-8.
5. Notice the following mechanisms:
A-10
a. Loader mechanism gear (8) nearest the front of the drive that actuates
the cartridge loader mechanism
b. Position of the rotator stub (3).
c. Front loader motor worm gear (1). Rotating this gear allows the loader
mechanism gear (8) to turn.
6. Rotate the loader motor worm gear (1) to turn the loader mechanism gear
(6) counterclockwise. Continue turning until the rotator stub (3) loses
contact with the lever (7). This action releases the LBA leader pin.
7. Rotate the threader motor worm gear (4) to turn the threader mechanism
gear (6) counterclockwise. This action moves the LBA out of the cartridge
and past the read/write head. Stop this rotation when the LBA is near the
tape guide roller nearest the rear of the drive (1).
a82ru010
Figure A-10. Leader Block Assembly (LBA)
8. Continue rotating the loader motor worm gear (1) until the rotate stub (3)
is positioned as shown. Notice that the rotator stub (3) is nearly aligned
with the cartridge loader tray guide bearing (2).
9. Remove the cartridge from the cartridge loader tray.
Half-high drive: Tape pulled from or broken near leader pin
A-11
a82hd003
2
1
Threader
intermediate gear
2
Threader mechanism 3

gear
Loader motor worm

gear
1. Pull out tape from the takeup reel.

Note: If there is more than approximately 0.6 m (2 ft.) of tape on the takeup
reel, go to Half-high drive: Tape broken in mid-tape on page A-14
2. If there is less than approximately 0.6 m (2 ft.) of tape on the takeup reel, cut
off the excess tape as close to the leader pin, as possible.
3. Reattach the leader pin to the remaining tape.
a82hd004
4. Locate the threader intermediate gear (1) near the rear of the drive. You can
use your finger to rotate the threader intermediate gear (1) and slowly
rotate the threader mechanism gear (2) clockwise. This action draws the
tape leader block assembly (LBA) into the cartridge.
5. As the leader pin is secured in the cartridge, you hear the leader pin retention
spring clips click into place. If you do not hear the click, continue rolling until
the threader intermediate gear (1) stops. The LBA is in the correct position.
6. Rotate the loader motor worm gear (3) clockwise as viewed from the front
of the drive until it stops. This action releases the LBA leader pin.
7. Rotate the threader intermediate gear (1) counterclockwise until the leader
block is in front of the read/write head. This action moves the LBA out of the
cartridge.
1
A-12
1
Loader motor worm gear 2
Leader block assembly (LBA)
8. Rotate the loader motor worm gear (3) counterclockwise as viewed from the
front of the drive until it stops.
Full-high drive: Tape broken in mid-tape

take up reel from the left side of the drive.
Note: If there is less than approximately 5 cm (2 in.) of tape on the take up
reel, go to Full-high drive: Tape pulled from or broken near leader pin
on page A-9.
2. From the supply reel inside the cartridge, pull approximately 0.3 m (1 ft.) of
tape.
3. From the take up reel, thread tape around the rear of the tape path and over
the head rollers on the left side of the drive.
4. Moisten a cotton swab with water, and wet approximately 13 mm (0.5 in.) of
the tape end. Overlap the tape ends, loosely mending them together.
6. From the bottom of the drive, locate the access hole (1 in Figure A-13 on
page A-14) in the bottom cover. Insert a 2.5 mm offset hex wrench through the
bottom cover access hole and into the reel motor axle. Begin spooling tape back
into the cartridge by turning the hex wrench clockwise.
A-13
a82ru008
7. Turn the supply reel clockwise, carefully guiding the mended portion of the
tape to wind around the hub of the supply reel that is located inside the
cartridge. Continue spooling into the cartridge until the tape is taut. The tape
must remain within the flanges of the tape guiding rollers. Ensure that you do
not stretch the tape.
Half-high drive: Tape broken in mid-tape

takeup reel. From the takeup reel, thread tape around the rear of the tape path
and over the head rollers on the left side of the drive.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
A-14
Note: If there is less than approximately 5 cm (2 in.) of tape on the takeup reel,
go to Half-high drive: Tape pulled from or broken near leader pin on
page A-11.
From the supply reel inside the cartridge, pull approximately 0.3 m (1 ft.) of
tape.
Ensure that the tape is not twisted. Untwist the tape if required
Moisten a cotton swab with water, and wet approximately 13 mm (0.5 in.) of
the tape end. Overlap the tape ends, loosely mending them together.
Set the drive on its left side with the head and tape path facing up
Turn the supply reel (4) clockwise, carefully guiding the mended portion of
the tape to wind around the hub of the supply reel that is located inside the
cartridge. Continue spooling into the cartridge until the tape is taut. The tape
must remain within the flanges of the tape guiding rollers. Turn the supply reel
(4) 10 more turns. Ensure that you do not stretch the tape.
2
a82hd002
4
1
3
Takeup reel motor
2
Outer guide rail

4
Supply reel motor
Full-high drive: Tape tangled along tape path

1. Carefully pull out excess tape and untangle.
Note: If you find the tape to be broken, go to one of the following
appropriate procedures:
v Full-high drive: Tape spooled off supply reel on page A-7
v Full-high drive: Tape pulled from or broken near leader pin on
page A-9
--OR-Full-high drive: Tape broken in mid-tape on page A-13
A-15
a82ru008
3. From the bottom of the drive, locate the access hole (1 in Figure A-15).
4. Insert a 2.5 mm offset hex wrench through the bottom cover access hole and
into the reel motor axle. Begin spooling the tape back into the cartridge by
turning the hex wrench clockwise.
6. Locate the threader motor worm gear (4 in Figure A-16 on page A-17) on
the rear of the drive. Use your finger to rotate the treader motor worm gear
and slowly rotate the threader mechanism gear (6 in Figure A-16 on page
A-17) clockwise. This action rotates the threader motor worm gear (4 in
Figure A-16 on page A-17) clockwise, drawing the LBA into the cartridge.
A-16
3
7
8
6
5
1
a82ru009

1
6
2

bearing
7
Lever
3
Rotator stub
8
4
5
7. As the tape leader block assembly (LBA) is secured in the cartridge, you hear
the LBA retention spring clips click into place. If you do not hear the click,
continue rolling until the threader motor worm gear (4 in Figure A-16)
stops. The LBA is in the correct position.
8. Notice these mechanisms:
a. Loader mechanism gear (6 in Figure A-16) nearest the front of the drive
that actuates the cartridge loader mechanism.
b. Position of the rotate stub (3 in Figure A-16).
c. Front loader motor worm gear (1 in Figure A-16). Rotating this gear
allows the loader mechanism gear (8 in Figure A-16) to turn.
9. Rotate the loader motor worm gear (1 in Figure A-16) to turn the threader
mechanism gear (6 in Figure A-16) counterclockwise. Continue turning until
the rotator stub (3 in Figure A-16) loses contact with the lever (7 in
Figure A-16). This action releases the LBA leader pin.
A-17
10. Rotate the threader motor worm gear (4 in Figure A-16 on page A-17) to
turn the threader mechanism gear (6 in Figure A-16 on page A-17)
counterclockwise. This action moves the LBA out of the cartridge and past the
read/write head. Stop this rotation when the LBA is near the tape guide roller
nearest the rear of the drive that is shown as 1 Figure A-17.
a82ru010
11. Continue rotating the loader motor worm gear (1 in Figure A-16 on page
A-17) until the rotator stub (3 in Figure A-16 on page A-17) is positioned as
shown. Notice that the rotator stub (3 in Figure A-16 on page A-17) is nearly
aligned with the cartridge loader tray guide bearing (2 in Figure A-16 on
page A-17).
Half-high drive: Tape tangled along tape path

1. Carefully pull out excess tape and untangle.
Note: If you find the tape to be broken, go to one of the following appropriate
procedures:
v Half-high drive: Tape spooled off supply reel on page A-8
v Half-high drive: Tape pulled from or broken near leader pin on page
A-11
OR
v Half-high drive: Tape broken in mid-tape on page A-14
A-18
a82hd002
4
1
3
Takeup reel motor
2
Outer guide rail

4
Supply reel motor
3. Turn the supply reel (4) clockwise.

the flanges of the tape guiding rollers. Turn the supply reel (4) 10 turns.
Ensure that you do not stretch the tape.
Full-high drive: No apparent failure or damage to tape

A-19
a82ru008
2. From the bottom of the drive, locate the access hole (1 in Figure A-19).
3. Insert a 2.5 mm offset hex wrench through the bottom cover access hole and
into the reel motor axle. Begin spooling the tape back into the cartridge by
turning the hex wrench clockwise.
5. Locate the threader motor worm gear (4 in Figure A-20 on page A-21) on
the rear of the drive. Use your finger to rotate the threader motor worm gear
and slowly rotate the threader mechanism gear (6 in Figure A-20 on page
A-21) clockwise. This action rotates the threader motor worm gear (4 in
Figure A-20 on page A-21) clockwise, drawing the LBA into the cartridge.
A-20
3
7
8
6
5
1
a82ru009

1
6
2

bearing
7
Lever
3
Rotator stub
8
4
5
6. As the tape leader block assembly (LBA) is secured in the cartridge, you hear
the LBA retention spring clips click into place. If you do not hear the click,
continue rolling until the threader motor worm gear (4 in Figure A-20)
stops. The LBA is in the correct position.
7. Notice these mechanisms:
a. Loader mechanism gear (6 in Figure A-20) nearest the front of the drive
that actuates the cartridge loader mechanism.
b. Position of the rotate stub (3 in Figure A-20).
c. Front loader motor worm gear (1 in Figure A-20). Rotating this gear
allows the loader mechanism gear (8 in Figure A-20) to turn.
8. Rotate the loader motor worm gear (1 in Figure A-20) to turn the loader
mechanism gear (6 in Figure A-20) counterclockwise. Continue turning until
the rotator stub (3 in Figure A-20) loses contact with the lever (7 in
Figure A-20). This action releases the LBA leader pin.
A-21
9. Rotate the threader motor worm gear (4 in Figure A-20 on page A-21) to
turn the threader mechanism gear (6 in Figure A-20 on page A-21)
counterclockwise. This action moves the LBA out of the cartridge and past the
read/write head. Stop this rotation when the LBA is near the tape guide roller
nearest the rear of the drive that is shown as 1 Figure A-21.
a82ru010
10. Continue rotating the loader motor worm gear (1 in Figure A-20 on page
A-21) until the rotator stub (3 in Figure A-20 on page A-21) is positioned as
shown. Notice that the rotator stub (3 in Figure A-20 on page A-21) is nearly
aligned with the cartridge loader tray guide bearing (2 in Figure A-20 on
page A-21).
Half-high drive: No apparent failure or damage to tape

A-22
a82hd002
4
1
3
Takeup reel motor
2
Outer guide rail

4
Supply reel motor
2. Begin spooling the tape back into the cartridge by turning the supply reel
motor (4) clockwise.
Continue spooling until all tape is removed from the takeup reel (3).
4. Locate the threader intermediate gear (1) near the rear of the drive. You can
use your finger to rotate the threader intermediate gear (1) and slowly
rotate the threader mechanism gear (2) clockwise. This action draws the
tape leader block assembly (LBA) into the cartridge.
A-23
a82hd003
2
1
Threader
intermediate gear
2
Threader mechanism
gear
3
Loader motor worm

gear
5. As the leader pin is secured in the cartridge, you hear the leader pin retention
spring clips click into place. If you do not hear the click, continue rolling until
the threader intermediate gear (1) stops. The LBA is in the correct position.
a82hd004
cartridge.
6. Rotate the loader intermediate gear (1) clockwise as viewed from the front
of the drive until it stops. This action releases the LBA leader pin.
7. Rotate the threader motor worm gear (3) counterclockwise until the leader
block is in front of the read/write head. This action moves the LBA out of the
cartridge.
1
1
Loader motor worm gear 2
Leader block assembly (LBA)
8. Rotate the loader motor worm gear (3) counterclockwise as viewed from the
front of the drive until it stops.
A-24
Ending procedure
1. Reassemble the drive brick by reversing the steps in Removing the drive
cover on page A-6.
2. Reassemble the drive sled by completing these steps:
a. Reinstall the drive brick into the sled by completing these steps:
v Plug in the RS-422 cable, the power cable (if applicable), and the signal
cable.
v Push the drive brick fully into the sled.
v Align the two screws holes on each side of the sled with the screw holes
on each side of the drive brick. DO NOT TIGHTEN THE SCREWS
COMPLETELY.
v After verifying that the drive and sled are properly aligned, fully tighten
the screws.
b. If necessary, complete these steps to reinstall the connection card and
protective plastic cover on the sled.
v Place the card and the protective plastic cover on top of spacers that align
the three screw holes. DO NOT TIGHTEN THE SCREWS COMPLETELY.
v After verifying that the connection card and protective plastic cover are
properly aligned, fully tighten the three screws.
3. Install the tape drive sled in the library. Refer to Installing a tape drive sled
on page 10-5.
4. Power ON the library and wait for the library to finish POST (power on self
test), inventory, and mid-tape recovery (this step can take up to 1 hour).
5. If the cartridge does not eject from the drive, move the cartridge from the drive
to the I/O Station (Operator Control Panel: Control > Move Cartridges; Web
User Interface: Manage Library > Move Media), then discard the cartridge.
6. Run Library Verify before normal library operations resume. Refer to Service:
Library Verify on page 5-29.
7. If necessary, return the failed drive sled to IBM.
Accessing the library with Telnet

To access a customer's library with telnet, complete the following procedure:
1. Ask the library administrator to enable the serial port (Operator Control
Panel: Service > Telnet Service Port).
2. Open a Windows Command Prompt screen.
3. Enter telnet [library IP address] then press the Enter key.
4. FLMON> displays.
5. Enter lgi, then press the Enter key.
6. Enter service as your user name, then press the Enter key.
7. Enter the service Password, then press the Enter key. Contact your next level
of support for the password.
8. Enter help, then press the Enter key for the expanded command menu.
9. To end the telnet session, enter lgo, then press the Enter key to log out of the
library.
10. Enter exit, then press the Enter key to disconnect from the library.
11. Inform the library administrator that your telnet session ended and instruct
the administrator to reboot the library to disable telnet capabilities to the
library.
A-25
A-26
Appendix B. SCSI element types, SCSI addresses, and

physical configurations
For an overview of library partitioning and element addressing, see Library
partitioning and element addressing on page B-3.
The following tables contain element addresses for the 2U library and the 4U
library.
Table B-1. 2U library SCSI element types and element addresses
Element Type
Element Address Range
Media Transport (Accessor) Element (MTE)
1 (0x01)
I/O Station Element (IEE)
16 (0x10)
Data Transfer (Drive) Element (DTE)
256 (0x100), 257 (0x101)
Storage Elements (STE)
4096 (0x1000) - 4118 (0x1016)
Table B-2. 4U library SCSI element types and element addresses

Element Type
Element Address Range
Media Transport (Accessor) Element (MTE)
1 (0x01)
I/O Station Elements (IEE)
16 (0x10), 17 (0x11), 18 (0x12)
Data Transfer (Drives) Elements (DTE)
256 (0x100), 257 (0x101), 258 (0x102, 259

(0x103)
Storage Elements (STE)
4096 (0x1000) - 4140 (0x102C)
2U library I/O slot, storage slots, drive slot element addresses, and
physical locations
The table contains the physical location and SCSI element address (decimal and
hexadecimal) of the I/O slot, storage slots, and drive slot in the 2U library that is
configured with one drive and one logical partition. If a second drive were
installed, it would be at address 257 (0x101).
With two drives that are installed, the library is configured as one partition (with
two drives) or as two partitions (with one drive per partition).
When configured with two drives and one logical partition, the Element Address
assignments are as follows: DTE assignments
v Drive 1: 256 (0x100)
v Drive 2: 257 (0x101)
The STE assignments are as shown in Table B-3 on page B-2.
When configured with two drives and one logical partition, the Element Address
assignments are as follows:
B-1
DTE assignments
v Logical Library 1: Drive 1: 256 (0x100)
v Logical Library 2: Drive 2: 256 (0x100)
STE assignments
v Logical Library 1: Slot 1 through slot 11 4096 (x1000) through 4106 (0x100A)
Table B-3. 2U library SCSI element addresses for storage slots and drive slot (one logical partition with one drive)
Left Magazine
Front of 2U library
Right Magazine
Front of 2U library
Library
Rear Panel
Slot 8
4103
(0x1007)
Slot 9
4104
(0x1008)
Slot 10
4105
(0x1009)
Slot 11
4106
(0x100A)
Slot 4
4099
(0x1003)
Slot 5
4100
(0x1004)
Slot 6
4101
(0x1005)
Slot 7
4102
(0x1006)
I/O slot
16
(0x10)
Slot 1
4096
(0x1000)
Slot 2
4097
(0x1001)
Slot 3
4098
(0x1002)
Drive 1
256
(0x100)
Slot 23
4118
(0x1016)
Slot 22
4117
(0x1015)
Slot 21
4116
(0x1014)
Slot 20
4115
(0x1013)
Slot 19
4114
(0x1012)
Slot 18
4113
(0x1011)
Slot 17
4112
(0x1010)
Slot 16
4111
(0x100F)
Slot 15
4110
(0x100E)
Slot 14
4109
(0x100D)
Slot 13
4108
(0x100C)
Slot 12
4107
(0x100B)
4U library I/O slots, storage slots, drive slots element addresses, and
physical locations
The following table contains the physical location (Slot x) and SCSI element
address in decimal (4xxx) and in hexadecimal (0x10xx) of the I/O slots, storage
slots, and drive slots in the 4U library containing two drive sleds.
In older 4U libraries where the Dedicated Cleaning Slot (DCS) is in a fixed location
(slot 9) and elected to be retained as a DCS (option to delete DCS is available in
library firmware greater than 1.95), the above slot numbering and element address
changes starting with slot 10. In 4U libraries with a DCS, the information shown in
slot 9 below moves to slot 10 and so forth through the remaining magazine slots.
The final slot is slot 44 instead of slot 45 for libraries without a DCS. See
Configuring I/O stations and reserving slots on page 5-79 for information on
how to delete the dedicated cleaning slot. Once the DCS is deleted, you cannot get
it back. You must create a reserved slot if you want to clean the drives.
B-2
Table B-4. 4U library SCSI element addresses for storage slots and drive slot (one logical partition with drives in slot
1 and slot 2)
Upper Left Magazine
Front of 4U library
Library
Rear Panel
Slot 18
4113
(0x1011)
Slot 19
4114
(0x1012)
Slot 20
4115
(0x1013)
Slot 21
4116
(0x1014)
Slot 14
4109
(0x100D)
Slot 15
4110
(0x100E)
Slot 16
4111
(0x100F)
Slot 17
4112
(0x1010)
Slot 10
4105
(0x1009)
Slot 11
4106
(0x100A)
Slot 12
4107
(0x100B)
Slot 13
4108
(0x100C)
Drive 2
257
(0x101)
Upper Right Magazine

Front of 4U library
Slot 45
4140
(0x102C)
Slot 44
4139
(0x102B)
Slot 43
4138
(0x102A)
Slot 42
4137
(0x1029)
Slot 41
4136
(0x1028)
Slot 40
4135
(0x1027)
Slot 39
4134
(0x1026)
Slot 38
4133
(0x1025)
Slot 37
4132
(0x1024)
Slot 36
4131
(0x1023)
Slot 35
4130
(0x1022)
Slot 34
4129
(0x1021)
Lower Right Magazine
Lower Left Magazine

I/O Slot 3
18
(0x12)
Slot 7
4102
(0x1006)
Slot 8
4103
(0x1007)
Slot 9
4104
(0x1008)
I/O Slot 2
17
(0x11)
Slot 4
4099
(0x1003)
Slot 5
4100
(0x1004)
Slot 6
4101
(0x1005)
I/O Slot 1
16
(0x10)
Slot 1
4096
(0x1000)
Slot 2
4097
(0x1001)
Slot 3
4098
(0x1002)
Drive 1
256
(0x100)
Slot 33
4128
(0x1020)
Slot 32
4127
(0x101F)
Slot 31
4126
(0x101E)
Slot 30
4125
(0x101D)
Slot 29
4124
(0x101C
Slot 28
4123
(0x101B)
Slot 27
4122
(0x101A)
Slot 26
4121
(0x1019)
Slot 25
4120
(0x1018)
Slot 24
4119
(0x1017)
Slot 23
4118
(0x1016)
Slot 22
4117
(0x1015)
Library partitioning and element addressing

Library 4U systems with firmware versions of 1.70 and higher, and containing at
least 2 drives, have the ability to configure two logical libraries (create two
partitions). This partitioning is expanded with the new library firmware and
half-high drive integration. Now it is possible to configure 1, 2, 3 or 4 partitions in
the 4U library. Additionally the 2U library is configured into one or two partitions.
Each library must contain at least one drive per logical library (partition).
When two half high drives are installed in a 2U library, the library firmware
supports partitioning in the same way that the 4U supports partitioning with two
full high drives today. The first partition contains the first magazine and the first
drive. The second partition contains the second magazine and the second drive.
The I/O station (if configured as I/O) is shared, as is done with the partitioned 4U
library.
One full high drive is "Drive 1". With half high drives, the first half high drive
position is called "Drive 1", The second half high drive position is called "Drive 2."
When one or more half high drives are added to a 4U library, the drive naming
changes. Currently, the first full high drive is "Drive 1" and the second full high
drive is "Drive 2". When you consider that each full high drive slot might contain
one or two half high drives, there are four potential drives in the space that used
to occupy two. As a result, the first half high drive position, or the first full-high
drive position, is called "Drive 1". The second half high drive position is called
Appendix B. SCSI element types, SCSI addresses, and physical configurations
B-3
"Drive 2". The third half high drive position, or the second full high drive position,
is called "Drive 3". The fourth half high drive position is called "Drive 4".
Important: In a 4U library a full high drive sled might be installed in drive slot 1
and slot 4). A full high drive sled must not be installed in drive slot 2
(drive occupies slot 2 and slot 3).
Mixing of drives
The library supports a mix of full high and half high drives in the same physical
library and the same logical library. They support a mix of drives in the same
physical library and the same logical library. They also support a mix of SCSI, SAS,
and Fibre Channel in the same physical library and the same logical library;
however, mixing drive interface types in the same logical library is not
recommended.
Important: Drives that do not share a common media type cannot be mixed in the
same logical library. For instance, Gen 3 and Gen 6 drives cannot use
the same media and so they cannot be mixed. LTO 3 media cannot be
read on LTO 6 drives.

A one partition system that is configured for a 4U library contains any drives
present in any drive positions, and it contains all four magazines. When configured
with one logical partition, the Element Address assignments are as follows: DTE
assignments are as shown in Figure B-1
Drive 2
Element Address
257
Drive 1
Element Address
256
Drive 4
Element Address
259
Drive 3
Element Address
258
Drive 3
Element Address
258
Drive 1
Element Address
256
Drive 2
Element Address
257
Drive 1
Element Address
256
Drive 4
Element Address
259
Drive 3
Element Address
258
Drive 2
Element Address
257
Drive 1
Element Address
256
Magazine
2
Magazine
4
Magazine
1
Magazine
3
Front side
a77ug161
STE assignments
v Logical Library 1: Slot1 through 23 4096 (0x1000) through 4118 (0x1016) as
shown in Figure B-4 on page B-6
Figure B-1. Configuration of a one - partition system

A two partition system must have a minimum of two drives, but might have three
or four drives. Partition 1 contains any drives in drive position 1 and drive
position 2. Partition 1 also contains magazine 1 and magazine 2. Partition 2
contains any drives in drive position 3 and drive position 4. Partition 2 also
contains magazine 3 and magazine 4.
When configured with two logical partitions, the Element Address assignments are
as follows: DTE assignments are as shown in Figure B-2 on page B-5.
STE assignments
B-4
Drive 2
Element Address
256
Drive 1
Element Address
256
Drive 4
Element Address
257
Drive 3
Element Address
256
Drive 3
Element Address
256
Drive 1
Element Address
256
Drive 2
Element Address
257
Drive 1
Element Address
256
Drive 4
Element Address
257
Drive 3
Element Address
256
Drive 2
Element Address
257
Drive 1
Element Address
256
Magazine
2
Magazine
4
Magazine
1
Magazine
3
Front side
a77ug162
Figure B-2. Configuration of a two - partition system

A three partition system must have at least three drives installed. A drive must be
installed in drive position 1, another drive must be installed in drive position 2,
and another drive must be installed in either drive position 3 or drive position 4.
Partition 1 contains the first drive and the first magazine. Partition 2 contains the
second drive and the second magazine. Partition 3 contains any drives in drive
position 3 and drive position 4. Partition 3 also contains magazine 3 and magazine
4.
STE assignments
Drive 3
Element Address
256
Drive 4
Element Address
257
Drive 3
Element Address
256
Drive 2
Element Address
256
Drive 2
Element Address
256
Drive 1
Element Address
256
Drive 1
Element Address
256
Magazine
2
Magazine
4
Magazine
1
Magazine
3
Front side
a77ug163
Figure B-3. Configuration of a three - partition system

A four partition system must have four drives. Each partition contains one drive
and one magazine.
When configured with four logical partitions, the Element Address assignments are
as follows: DTE assignments are as shown in Figure B-4 on page B-6.
STE assignments
v Logical Library
v Logical Library
v Logical Library
v Logical Library
1:
2:
3:
4:
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
1 through slot 9 4096 (x1000) through 4104 (0x1008)

10 through slot 21 4096 (x1000) through 4107 (0x100B)
B-5
Magazine
2
Magazine
4
Magazine
1
Magazine
3
Front side
a77ug164
Drive 4
Element Address
256
Drive 3
Element Address
256
Drive 2
Element Address
256
Drive 1
Element Address
256
Figure B-4. Configuration of a four - partition system
SCSI element addressing

Every logical library starts at the first drive slot with the current assigned element
start address (default value 256). It is incremented from the bottom to the top slots
for every drive slot. There is one exception to this addressing scheme to
accommodate libraries currently in the field. A 4U library that contains only full
high drives continues to have the addresses assignments 256 and 257, thus causing
no interruptions to their operation. Drive slots are incremented by 1 for each drive
slot position.
Note: Exchanging drives with different form factors results in the library that
needs to be reconfigured.
4U Unit with only FH drives
(1 logical library)
SCSI Element
257
256
Slot
4
3
2
1
4U Unit with FH and HH drives

(1 logical library)
258
Slot
4
3
257
256
a77ug165
SCSI Element
Figure B-5. Examples of SCSI element addressing
The SCSI specification does not allow gaps in the SCSI element addressing. Special
handling is needed for empty drive slots to fulfill the specification. Also
temporarily removed drives must have their addresses that are preserved to not
confuse the attached host and host application. Generally only drives that are
physically available or temporarily removed are reported. Empty (unused) slots
that are located at the bottom or the top must not be reported, with an exception
in a removed condition. A drive slot that does not contain a drive, and has a
position between used slots, must be reported as a SCSI element. To signal the host
application that this slot is not usable, its ACCESS bit is disabled.
B-6
Library configuration. This removes the Attention LED on the front panel
and the exclamation mark on the Home screen that indicates that a drive is
missing.
drives might require you to run Restore Factory Defaults to correctly update the
drive element addressing and drive numbering. See Configure Library:
B-7
B-8
Appendix C. TapeAlert flags

This appendix is intended to provide more information to the reader about the
tape drive. All error code and diagnostic information that is contained in this
chapter can be accessed from the Operator Control Panel of the Library. The drive
portion of the Operator Control Panel Display contains any drive error codes.
Therefore there is no need to open the Library to access the buttons on the drive.
See the Setup, Operator, and Service Guide for a complete description of the Operator
Control Panel functions and Displays.
TapeAlert is a standard that defines status conditions and problems that are
experienced by devices such as tape drives, autoloaders, and libraries. The
standard enables a server to read TapeAlert messages (called flags) from a tape
drive via the SCSI bus. The server reads the flags from Log Sense Page 0x2E.
Refer to the IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library SCSI
Reference document for more library TapeAlert Flag information. Refer to the IBM
TotalStorage LTO Ultrium Tape Drive SCSI Reference document for more tape drive
TapeAlert Flag information.
This library is compatible with TapeAlert technology, which provides error and
diagnostic information about the drives and the library to the server. Because
library and drive firmware might change periodically, the SNMP interface in the
library does not require code changes if devices add more TapeAlerts that are not
supported today. However, if this issue occurs the Management Information Block
(MIB) is written to minimize impact to the SNMP monitoring station. At the time
of this writing, the TapeAlert flags in this appendix correctly represent TapeAlerts
that is sent. The MIB file must not be taken to mean that all traps that are defined
in the MIB (refer to Appendix F, SNMP status MIB variables and traps, on page
F-1) are sent by the library or that they will be sent in the future.
This appendix lists TapeAlert flags that are supported by the Ultrium 3, 4, 5, and 6
Tape Drives.
TapeAlert flags supported by the library

Parameter
Code
01d
Flag name
Type
Description
Library
Hardware A
The media changer mechanism is having difficulty communicating with

the drive:
v Turn the library OFF then ON
v Restart the operation
If problem persists, contact Technical Support.
02d
Library
Hardware B
There is a problem with the media changer mechanism. If the problem

persists, contact Technical Support.
03d
Library
Hardware C
The media changer has a hardware fault:

v Make sure the media changer and drives are not being used by any
host, then reset the library from the front panel.
v If the problem persists, contact Technical Support.
C-1
Parameter
Code
04d
Flag name
Type
Description
Library
Hardware D
v Make sure the media changer and drives are not being used by any
host, then reset the library from the front panel.
13d
Library Pick
Retry
There is a potential problem with the cartridge loader picking a cartridge

from a drive or slot.
v No action needs to be taken at this time.
v If the problem persists, contact Technical Support
This flag is cleared when the next move command is received.
14d
Library Place
Retry
There is a potential problem with the cartridge loader placing a cartridge

into a slot.
15d
Drive Load
Retry
There is a potential problem with the cartridge loader or drive when

placing a cartridge into a drive.
16d
Library Door
The operation has failed because the library door is open.

v Clear any obstructions from the library door.
v Close the library door.
This flag is cleared when the door is closed.
17d
Library I/O
Station
There is a mechanical problem with the library media I/O Station.
19d
Library
Security
Library security has been compromised. The door was opened then
closed during operation.
24d
Library
Inventory
The library has detected an inconsistency in its inventory.

v Redo the library inventory to correct inconsistency.
v Restart the operation.
Check the applications users manual or the hardware users manual for
specific instructions on redoing the library inventory.
27d
Cooling FAN
Failure
One or more fans inside the library have failed. This flag is cleared when
all fans are working again.
32d
Unreadable
Bar Code
Labels
The library was unable to read the barcode on a cartridge.
v I = Informational suggestion to user

v W = Warning. Remedial action is advised. Performance of data may be at risk.
v C = Critical immediate remedial action is required.
C-2
TapeAlert flags supported by the drive

Table C-1. TapeAlert flags supported by the Ultrium tape drive
Flag
Number
Flag
Description
Action Required
Hard error
Set for any unrecoverable read, write, See the Action Required column for
or positioning error. (This flag is set in Flag Number 4, 5, or 6 in this table.
conjunction with flags 4, 5, or 6.)
Media
Set for any unrecoverable read, write,

or positioning error that is due to a
faulty tape cartridge.
Replace the tape cartridge.
Read failure
Set for any unrecoverable read error

where isolation is uncertain and
failure could be due to a faulty tape
cartridge or to faulty drive hardware.
If Flag 4 is also set, the cartridge is

defective. Replace the tape
cartridge.
Write failure
Set for any unrecoverable write or

positioning error where isolation is
uncertain and failure could be due to
a faulty tape cartridge or to faulty
drive hardware.
If Flag Number 9 is also set, make

sure that the write-protect switch is
set so that data can be written to
the tape (see Write-Protect switch
on page 6-7). If Flag Number 4 is
also set, the cartridge is defective.
Media life
Set when the tape cartridge reaches its 1. Copy the data to another tape
end of life (EOL).
cartridge.
2. Discard the old (EOL) tape.
Not data grade
Set when the cartridge is not

data-grade. Any data that you write
to the tape is at risk.
Replace the tape with a data-grade

tape.
Write protect
Set when the tape drive detects that

the tape cartridge is write-protected.
Ensure that the cartridge's

write-protect switch is set so that
the tape drive can write data to the
tape (see Write-Protect switch on
page 6-7).
10
No removal
Set when the tape drive receives an

UNLOAD command after the server
prevented the tape cartridge from
being removed.
Refer to the documentation for your

server's operating system.
11
Cleaning media
Set when you load a cleaning

cartridge into the drive.
No action required.
12
Unsupported format
Set when you load an unsupported

cartridge type into the drive or when
the cartridge format has been
corrupted.
Use a supported tape cartridge.
15
Cartridge memory chip

failure
Set when a cartridge memory (CM)

failure is detected on the loaded tape
cartridge.
16
Forced eject
Set when you manually unload the

tape cartridge while the drive was
reading or writing.
No action required.
17
Media loaded is
Read-only format
Set when a cartridge marked as read

only is loaded into the drive. The flag
is cleared when the cartridge is
ejected.
No action required.
Appendix C. TapeAlert Flags
C-3
Table C-1. TapeAlert flags supported by the Ultrium tape drive (continued)
Flag
Number
C-4
Flag
Description
Action Required
18
Tape directory corrupted Set when the drive detects that the
in the cartridge memory tape directory in the cartridge
memory has been corrupted.
19
Nearing media life
Set when the tape cartridge is nearing 1. Copy the data to another tape
its specified end of life. The flag is
cartridge.
cleared when the cartridge is removed
2. Replace the tape cartridge.
from the drive.
20
Clean now
Set when the tape drive detects that it Clean the tape drive.
needs cleaning.
21
Clean periodic
Set when the drive detects that it

needs routine cleaning.
Clean the tape drive as soon as

possible. The drive can continue to
operate, but you should clean the
drive soon.
22
Expired clean
Set when the tape drive detects a

cleaning cartridge that has expired.
Replace the cleaning cartridge.
23
Invalid cleaning tape
Set when the drive expects a cleaning

cartridge and the loaded cartridge is
not a cleaning cartridge.
Use a valid cleaning cartridge.
30
Hardware A
Set when a hardware failure occurs

that requires that you reset the tape
drive to recover.
Go toContacting IBM technical

31
Hardware B
Set when the tape drive fails its

internal Power-On Self Tests.
Note the error code on the

single-character display, then go
toContacting IBM technical
32
Interface
Set when the tape drive detects a

problem with the host interface.

33
Eject media
Set when a failure occurs that requires Unload the tape cartridge, then
reinsert it and restart the operation.
you to unload the cartridge from the
drive.
34
Download fail
Set when an FMR image is

unsuccessfully downloaded to the
tape drive through the host interface.
37
Drive voltage
Set when the drive detects that the

externally supplied voltages are either support on page 9-4.
approaching the specified voltage
limits or are outside the voltage
limits.
38
Predictive failure of
drive hardware
Set when a hardware failure of the

tape drive is predicted.

39
Diagnostics required
Set when the drive detects a failure

that requires diagnostics for isolation.

51
Tape directory invalid at Set when the tape directory on the

unload
tape cartridge that was previously
unloaded is corrupted. The file-search
performance is degraded.
Use your backup software to

rebuild the tape directory by
reading all the data.
52
Tape system area write

failure
Copy the data to another tape

cartridge, then discard the old
cartridge.
Set when the tape cartridge that was

previously unloaded could not write
its system area successfully.
Re-read all data from the tape to

rebuild the tape directory.
Ensure that it is the correct FMR

image. Download the FMR image
again.
Flag
Number
Flag
Description
Action Required
53
Tape system area read

failure
Set when the tape system area could

not be read successfully at load time.
Copy the data to another tape

cartridge, then discard the old
cartridge.
55
Loading Failure
When loading a tape into a drive, a

Take this action if the tape cartridge
hardware malfunction can prevent the will not load in the drive:
tape from being loaded into the drive, 1. Remove the tape cartridge from
or the tape may actually get stuck in
the library and inspect it for
the drive.
damage. If damaged, discard it.
2. Try another cartridge in that
tape drive. If it still fails, replace
the drive sled. See
Removing/installing/adding a
tape drive sled on page 10-3.
Take this action if the tape is stuck
in the drive:
1. Attempt to unload the tape from
the drive using the host backup
application that is currently
using the drive, or using the
remote or local UI.
2. If the cartridge will not unload,
go to Contacting IBM technical
56
Unload Failure
When attempting to unload a tape

1. Unload the cartridge from the
cartridge, a drive hardware
drive using the Operator Control
malfunction can prevent the tape from
Panel (Control > Move
being ejected. The tape may actually
Cartridge) or the Web User
be stuck in the drive.
Interface (Manage Library >
Move Media).
2. Cycle drive power using the
Operator Control Panel (Service
> Service > Drive Power) or the
Web User Interface (Configure
Library > Drives).
3. Try unloading the cartridge from
the drive again using the
Operator Control Panel (Control
> Move Cartridge) or the Web
User Interface (Manage Library
> Move Media).
4. If the cartridge will not unload
from the drive, go to
59
WORM Medium
integrity check failed
Set when the drive determines that

the data on tape is suspect from a
WORM point of view.
1. Copy the data to another

WORM tape cartridge.
2. Discard the old WORM tape.
Appendix C. TapeAlert Flags
C-5
Flag
Number
60
C-6
Flag
Description
WORM Medium
Overwrite attempted
Set when the drive rejects a write

Append the information on a
operation because the rules for
WORM tape cartridge or write the
allowing WORM writes have not been data to a non-WORM cartridge.
met. Data can only be appended to
WORM media. Overwrites to WORM
media are not allowed.
Action Required
Appendix D. Sense data

When a drive encounters an error, it makes sense data available. You can use IBM
device drivers to examine the sense data and determine errors. Instructions for
downloading, installing, and properly configuring the IBM device drivers are
available in the IBM Ultrium Device Drivers Installation and User's Guide. The IBM
device drivers might conflict with some commercial software applications unless
properly configured. To avoid conflicts on Windows operating systems, refer to
your device driver's procedures for setting the driver to manual startup mode.For
applications that use Open Systems device drivers that are provided by IBM (for
example, AIX, Sun Solaris, HP-UX, Windows 2000, Linux, and Windows 2003), the
Ultrium Device Drivers Installation and User's Guide contains information about how
to obtain sense data after an error occurs.
If your application uses other device drivers, see the appropriate documentation
for those drivers to obtain the sense data.
Refer to the IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library SCSI
Reference document for more library sense data information. Refer to the IBM
TotalStorage LTO Ultrium Tape Drive SCSI Reference document for more tape drive
sense data information.
Raw sense data (as returned from the drive) is documented in the IBM LTO
Ultrium Tape Drive SCSI Reference.
In addition to device drivers, other methods exist for obtaining sense data and
error information. The sections that follow describe alternatives for gathering such
information from the IBM System i, and System p servers.
Library sense data

The following table lists the Additional Sense Codes (ASC) and Additional Sense
Code Qualifiers (ASCQ) associated with the reported Sense Keys.
A sense key of 00h (no sense) has no ASC/ASCQ associated with it. A few
ASC/ASCQs are associated with more than one sense key. The sense keys that
gives particular ASC/ASCQs are indicated within the Sense Key column.
ASC/ASCQs can indicate an abnormal element state as part of element descriptor.
Table D-1. Library Sense Keys, ASC and ASCQ
Sense Key
ASC
ASCQ
Description
Recovered Error (01)
0Ah
00h
Error log overflow
47h
00h
SCSI parity error
D-1
Table D-1. Library Sense Keys, ASC and ASCQ (continued)

Sense Key
ASC
ASCQ
Description
Not Ready (02)
00h
17h
Drive cleaning requested
04h
00h
Cause not reportable
04h
01h
In progress becoming ready, scanning magazines, etc.
04h
02h
Initializing command required
04h
03h
Manual intervention required
04h
07h
Operation in progress
04h
12h
Offline
04h
83h
Door open
04h
85h
Firmware upgrade in progress
04h
87h
The drive is not enabled
04h
88h
The drive is busy
04h
89h
The drive is not empty
04h
9Ah
Drive fibre down
04h
8Eh
The media changer is in sequential mode
30h
03h
Cleaning in progress
3Bh
12h
Magazine removed
04h
8Fh
No free storage slots
30h
00h
Incompatible media installed
30h
03h
Cleaning tape installed
30h
07h
Cleaning failure
Medium Error (03)
D-2

Sense Key
ASC
ASCQ
Description
Hardware Error (04)
81h
80h
Cannot initialize bar code reader
81h
81h
No response from bar code reader
81h
82h
No response from EEPROM
81h
83h
Slave robotic generic problem
81h
84h
Setting of gripper pic value failed
81h
85h
Setting of slider pic value failed
81h
86h
Setting of elevator pic value failed
81h
87h
Setting of rotation pic value failed
81h
88h
Setting of sled pic value failed
81h
89h
Gripper blocked
81h
8Ah
Slider blocked
81h
8Bh
Elevator blocked
81h
8Ch
Rotation blocked
81h
8Dh
Sled blocked
81h
8Eh
Cannot find gripper block
81h
8Fh
Cannot find slider block
81h
90h
Cannot find elevator block
81h
91h
Cannot find rotation block
81h
92h
Cannot find sled block
81h
93h
Gripper outside range
81h
94h
Slider outside range
81h
95h
Elevator outside range
81h
96h
Rotation outside range
81h
97h
Sled outside range
81h
98h
No cartridge present sensor found
81h
99h
No slider home sensor found
81h
9Ah
No rotation home sensor found
81h
9Bh
No sled position sensor found
81h
9Ch
The range of gripper is wrong
81h
9Dh
The range of slider is wrong
81h
9Eh
The range of elevator is wrong
81h
9Fh
The range of rotation is wrong
81h
A0h
The range of sled is wrong
81h
A1h
Open import/export element failed
81h
A2h
Locking failed
81h
A3h
SE2 Block
81h
A4h
SE2 No Block
81h
A5h
No Sled2 Home Sensor
81h
A6h
No Elev Home Sensor
D-3

Sense Key
ASC
ASCQ
Description
Hardware Error (04)

(continued)
81h
B0h
Slave robotic controller response timeout
81h
B1h
NACK received from slave robotic controller
81h
B2h
Slave robotic controller communication failed
81h
B3h
Slave robotic controller urgent stop
81h
B4h
Cartridge did not transport completely
81h
B5h
Slave robotic controller does not respond on command
80h
C0h
Network init
80h
C1h
Telnet interface
80h
C2h
Webserver
80h
C3h
EEPROM parameter
80h
C4h
Cannot init LAN card
80h
C5h
Write to EEPROM failed
80h
C6h
Ping command did not reach target
80h
C7h
Cannot upgrade from USB
80h
C9h
Cannot Upgrade Robotic from Flash
80h
D0h
ROM error
80h
D1h
RAM error
80h
D2h
NVRAM error
80h
D3h
CTC error
80h
D4h
UART error
80h
D5h
Display error
80h
D6h
Memory error
80h
D7h
Fatal system error
80h
D8h
dBase error
80h
D9h
No SCSI IC detected
80h
DAh
Different bar code labels
80h
DBh
External cooling fan failure
80h
DCh
Internal I2C bus error
80h
DFh
Power good signal changed from 2 to 1 PS
80h
E0h
Incompatible magazine detected
80h
E2h
Unsupported accessory detected
80h
EBh
Power supply health check failed due to a power supply failure.

Please contact service.
82h
F0h
Over temperature problem
82h
F1h
Drive communication error
82h
F2h
Drive sled not present
82h
F3h
Drive broken: needs repair
D-4

Sense Key
ASC
ASCQ
Description
Hardware Error (04)

(continued)
82h
F4h
Drive load timeout
82h
F5h
Drive unload timeout
82h
F6h
Drive never present
82h
F7h
Drive support ticket error
82h
F8h
Drive invalid command
82h
F9h
Drive invalid parameter
82h
FAh
SDCI microcode error
82h
FBh
Drive logged out
82h
FCh
Internal drive command failed with Check Condition
82h
FDh
Internal drive command timeout
D-5

Sense Key
ASC
ASCQ
Description
Illegal Request (05h)
1Ah
00h
Parameter length error
20h
00h
Invalid command operation code
|
|
21h
01h
v Invalid element address - associated with Error Code 33
|
|
24h
v Invalid drive specified - associated with Error Code 35

00h
v Invalid field in the CDB - associated with Error Code 34

v SEND DIAG Invalid test number - associated with Error Code 36
D-6
3Dh
00h
SCSI invalid ID message
25h
00h
Invalid LUN
2Ch
00h
Command sequence error
26h
00h
Invalid field in parameter list
26h
01h
Parameter list error: parameter not supported
26h
02h
Parameter value invalid
26h
90h
Wrong firmware image, does not fit boot code
26h
91h
Wrong personality firmware image
26h
93h
Wrong firmware image, checksum error
30h
12h
Incompatible medium
39h
00h
Saving parameters not supported
3Bh
0Dh
Medium destination element full
3Bh
0Eh
Medium source element empty
3Bh
11h
Medium magazine not accessible
3Bh
81h
Medium belongs to another partition
3Bh
A0h
Medium transfer element full
53h
02h
Library media removal prevented state set
53h
03h
Drive media removal prevented state set
44h
80h
Bad status library controller
44h
81h
Source not ready
44h
82h
Destination not ready
44h
83h
Cannot make reservation
44h
84h
Wrong drive type
44h
85h
Invalid slave robotic controller request
44h
86h
Accessor not initialized
80h
5Bh
Incompatible medium generation (sense key medium error)
80h
5Dh
Wrong drive fw for drive
80h
5Eh
Full height drive at illegal position
80h
75h
Download prevented due to incompatible bar code reader hardware
80h
77h
Download prevented due to incompatible LCM
80h
78h
Download prevented due to incompatible Robot Code
80h
79h
Download prevented due to incompatible drive version
83h
00h
Failure in LME interface

Sense Key
ASC
ASCQ
Description
Unit Attention (06h)
28h
00h
Not ready to ready transition
28h
01h
Import/export element accessed
29h
01h
Power on occurred
29h
02h
SCSI Bus reset occurred
29h
05h
Bus type changed to Single Ended (SE)
29h
06h
Bus type changed to Low Voltage Differential (LVD)
2Ah
01h
Mode parameters changed
2Ah
10h
Time stamp changed
3Bh
13h
Medium magazine inserted
3Fh
01h
Microcode has changed
53h
02h
Media removal prevented
Command Aborted (0Bh) 3Fh
0Fh
ECHO buffer overwritten
43h
00h
SCSI message error
47h
00h
SCSI parity error
49h
00h
SCSI invalid message
4Eh
00h
Overlapped command attempt
Drive sense data

LTO Ultrium drives contain hardware which completes user data write encryption
and read decryption, protecting all user data written to the medium from
unauthorized use, provided it is integrated into a secure system design.
Table D-2. LTO Tape Drive Sense Data
Bit Address or Name
Byte
Address
valid
When set to
1, the info
byte field
Error Code
contains a
valid
logical
block
address.
Segment Number (0)
D-7
Table D-2. LTO Tape Drive Sense Data (continued)

Bit Address or Name
Byte
Filemark
Information byte (most significant byte)
Information byte
Information byte
Information byte (least significant byte)
Additional Sense Length
8-11
D-8
EOM (end ILI

of medium) (Incorrect
length
indicator)
4
Reserved
Sense Key Description

0 - No sense
1 - Recovered error
2 - Not ready
3 - Media error
4 - Hardware error
5 - Illegal request
6 - Unit attention
7 - Data protect
8 - Blank Check
9 - Reserved
A - Reserved
B - Aborted command
C - Reserved
D - Volume overflow
E - Reserved
F - Reserved
Command specific information

Bit Address or Name
Byte
12-13
Additional Sense Code (ASC)

Additional Sense Code Qualifier (ASCQ)
Byte 12 Byte 13
ASC ASCQ
00
00 - No additional sense - The flags in the sense data indicate the reason for
the command failure
00
01 - Filemark detected - A Read or Space command terminated early due to an FM
The FM flag is set.
00
02 - EOM - A Write or Write File Marks command failed because the physical
end of tape was encountered, or a Read or Space command encountered EOM
The EOM flag is set
00
04 - BOM - A space command ended at Beginning of Tape
The EOM bit is also set
00
05 - EOD - Read or Space command terminated early
because End of Data was encountered
00
16 - Operation in Progress
04
00 - Cause not reportable - A cartridge is present in the drive, but it is in the
process of being unloaded
04
01 - Becoming Ready - A media access command was received during a
front panel initiated load or an immediate reported load command
04
02 - Initializing Command Required - A cartridge is present in the drive, but is not
logically loaded. A Load command is required
04
03 - Manual Intervention Required - A cartridge is present in the drive but could
not be loaded or unloaded without manual intervention
04
10 - Logical unit not ready, auxiliary memory not accessible
04
12 - Logical unit not ready, offline
08
01 - Logical unit communication failure
09
00 - Track following error (servo)
0C
00 - Write Error - A Write operation has failed. This is probably due to bad
media, but may be hardware related
11
00 - Unrecovered Read Error - A Read operation failed. This is probably due
to bad media, but may be hardware related
11
12 - Auxiliary memory read error. The drive reported that it is unable to read the
Auxiliary Memory in a WORM cartridge.
14
00 - Recorded Entity Not Found - A space or Locate command failed because
a format violation prevented the target from being found.
14
03 - End Of Data not found - A Read type operation failed because a format
violation related to a missing EOD data set
14
10 - Not Ready - Auxiliary memory not accessible. The drive is not able to become
ready because it is unable to access the Auxiliary Memory in a WORM cartridge.
17
01 - Recovered data with retries
1A
00 - Parameter list length error - The amount of parameter data sent is incorrect
20
00 - Invalid Command Operation Code - The Operation Code in the command
was not a valid Operation Code
24
00 - Invalid field in CDB - An invalid field has been detected in a
Command Descriptor Block
25
00 - LUN not supported - The command was addressed to a non-existent
logical unit number
26
00 - Invalid Field in Parameter List - An invalid field has been detected in the
data sent during the data phase
D-9

Bit Address or Name
Byte
12-13
D-10
Additional Sense Code (ASC) Additional Sense Code Qualifier (ASCQ) (Continued)
Byte 12 Byte 13
ASC ASCQ
27
00 - Write Protect - A Write type operation has been requested on a cartridge which
has been write protected
28
00 - Not Ready to Ready Transition - A cartridge has been loaded successfully into
the drive and is now ready to be accessed
28
01 - Import or export element accessed
29
00 - Reset - The drive has powered on, received a reset signal or a bus device
reset signal since the initiator last accessed it
29
04 - Device internal reset
2A
01 - Mode Parameters Changed - The Mode parameters for the drive have
been changed by an initiator other than the one issuing the command
2C
00 - Command sequence error
2C
0B - Not reserved - The OIR bit of the sequential access device page
is set and the I-T nexus attempting to communicate with the drive does not hold
a reservation.
2F
00 - Commands cleared by another initiator
30
00 - Incompatible Media Installed - A write type operation could not be
executed because it is not supported on the cartridge type that is loaded.
30
01 - Unknown Format - An operation could not be carried out because the cartridge
in the drive is of a format not supported by the drive
30
02 - Incompatible Format - An operation could not be completed because the
Logical Format is not correct
30
03 - Cleaning Cartridge Installed - An operation could not be carried out
because the cartridge in the drive is a cleaning cartridge
30
05 - Cannot write medium, incompatible format
30
07 - Cleaning Failure - A cleaning operation was attempted, but could not
be completed for some reason
30
0C - Data Protect - WORM overwrite attempted. The drive rejected a write operation
because it would have resulted in an overwrite. Overwrite is not allowed on
WORM media.
30
0D - Medium Error - WORM integrity check. The drive rejected a Read or Write
operation because the cartridge is a suspicious WORM cartridge.
31
00 - Media format corrupted - Data could not be read because the format on tape is
not valid, but is a known format. A failure occurred attempting to write the FID
37
00 - Rounded parameter - A Mode Select command parameter has been
rounded because the drive can not store it with the accuracy of the command.
3A
00 - Media Not Present - A media access command has been received
when there is no cartridge loaded
3B
00 - Sequential Positioning Error - A command has failed and left the logical
position at an unexpected location
3B
0C - Position past beginning of medium
3D
00 - Invalid bits in identify Message - An illegal Identify Message has been
received at the drive at the start of a command
3E
00 - Logical Unit has not Self-Configured - The drive has just powered on and
has not completed its self test sequence and can not process commands
3F
01 - Code Download - The firmware in the drive has just been changed
by a Write Buffer command
3F
03 - Inquiry data has changed
3F
0E - Reported LUNs data has changed
3F
0F - Echo buffer overwritten
40
xx - Diagnostic failure - A diagnostic test has failed. The xx (ASCQ) is a
vendor specific code indicating the failing component.

Bit Address or Name
Byte
12-13
Byte 12 Byte 13
ASC ASCQ
41
00 - Data path failure
43
00 - Message Error - A message could not be sent or received due to excessive
transmission errors
44
00 - Internal target failure - A hardware failure has been detected in the drive
that has caused the command to fail
45
00 - Select/Reset Failure - An attempt to reselect an initiator in order to
complete the command has failed
48
00 - Initiator detected error message received
49
00 - Invalid message error
4A
00 - Command phase error
4B
00 - Data Phase Error - A command could not be completed because too many
parity errors occurred during the Data phase
4E
00 - Overlapped Commands - An initiator selected the drive even though it
already had a command outstanding in the drive
50
00 - Write Append Error - A write type command failed because the point at
which to append data was unreadable
51
00 - Erase failure - An Erase command failed to erase the required area on the
media
52
00 - Cartridge fault - A command could not be completed due to a fault in the
tape cartridge
53
00 - Media Load/Eject Failed - (Sense Key 03) An attempt to load or eject
the cartridge failed due to a problem with the cartridge.
53
00 - Media Load/Eject Failed - (Sense Key 04) An attempt to load or eject
the cartridge failed due to a problem with the drive
53
02 - Media Removal Prevented - An Unload command has failed to eject the
cartridge because media removal has been prevented
5A
01 - Operator medium removal request
5D
00 - Failure Prediction Threshold - Failure Prediction thresholds have been
exceeded indicating that a failure may occur soon
5D
FF - Failure Prediction False - A Mode Select command has been used to test
for Failure Prediction system.
82
82 - Drive requires cleaning - The drive has detected that a cleaning operation
is required to maintain good operation
82
83 - Bad Code Detected - The data transferred to the drive during a
firmware upgrade is corrupt or incompatible with drive hardware
D-11

Bit Address or Name
Byte
12-13
Byte 12
Byte 13
ASC
ASCQ
Sense Key 0 (No Sense)
EE
13 - Encryption - Key Translate
EF
13 - Encryption - Key Translate EKM
Sense Key 3 (Medium Error)
30
02 - Encryption - Encryption feature is not enabled so format/processing is not supported
EE
60 - Encryption - Proxy Command Error
EE
D0 - Encryption - Data Read Decryption Failure
EE
D1 - Encryption - Data Read after Write Decryption Failure
EE
E0 - Encryption - Key Translation Failure
EE
E1 - Encryption - Key Translation Ambiguous
EE
F0 - Encryption - Decryption Fenced (Read)
EE
F1 - Encryption - Encryption Fenced (Write)
Sense Key 4 (Hardware Error)
EE
0E - Encryption - Key Service Timeout
EE
0F - Encryption - Key Service Failure
40
00 - Encryption - Failure Hardware, POST or Module Failure
Sense Key 5 (Illegal Request)
EE
00 - Encryption - Key Service Not Enabled
EE
01 - Encryption - Key Service Not Configured
EE
02 - Encryption - Key Service Not Available
EE
10 - Encryption - Key Required
EE
20 - Encryption - Key Count Exceeded
EE
21 - Encryption - Key Alias Exceeded
EE
22 - Encryption - Key Reserved
EE
23 - Encryption - Key Conflict
EE
24 - Encryption - Key Method Change
EE
25 - Encryption - Key Format Not Supported
EE
26 - Encryption - Unauthorized Request - dAK
EE
27 - Encryption - Unauthorized Request - dSK
EE
28 - Encryption - Unauthorized Request - eAK
EE
29 - Encryption - Authentication Failure
EE
2A - Encryption - Invalid RDKi
EE
2B - Encryption - Key Incorrect
EE
2C - Encryption - Key Wrapping Failure
EE
2D - Encryption - Sequencing Failure
EE
2E - Encryption - Unsupported Type
EE
2F - Encryption - New Key Encrypted Write Pending
EE
30 - Encryption - Prohibited Request
EE
31 - Encryption - Key Unknown
EE
32 - Encryption - Keystore Related Problem
EE
42 - Encryption - EKM Challenge Pending
EE
E2 - Encryption - Key Translation Disallowed
EE
FF - Encryption - Security Prohibited Function
EF
01 - Encryption - Key Service Not Configured
26
11 - Encryption - Incomplete Key - Associate Data Set
26
12 - Encryption (T10) - Vendor Specific Reference Key Not Found
55
08 - Encryption (T10) - Maximum Number of Supplemental Keys Exceeded
D-12

Bit Address or Name
Byte
12-13
Sense Key 6 (Unit Attention)

EE
12 - Encryption - Key Change Detected
EE
18 - Encryption - Changed (Read)
EE
19 - Encryption - Changed (Write)
EE
40 - Encryption - EKM Identifier Changed
EE
41 - Encryption - EKM Challenge Changed
EE
50 - Encryption - Initiator Identifier Changed
EE
51 - Encryption - Initiator Response Changed
2A
11 - Encryption - Data Encryption Parameters Changed by Another I_T Nexus
2A
12 - Encryption - Data Encryption Parameters Changed by Vendor Specific Event
Sense Key 7 (Data Protect)
EF
10 - Encryption - Key Required
EF
11 - Encryption - Key Generation
EF
13 - Encryption - Key Translate
EF
1A - Encryption - Key Optional
EF
C0 - Encryption - No Operation
26
10 - Encryption - Data Decryption Key Fail Limit
2A
13 - Encryption - Data Encryption Key Instance Counter Has Changed
74
00 - Security Error
74
01 - Encryption - Unable to Decrypt Data
74
02 - Encryption - Unencrypted Data Encountered While Decrypting
74
03 - Encryption - Incorrect Data Encryption Key
74
04 - Encryption - Cryptographic Integrity Validation Failed
74
05 - Encryption - Error Decrypting Data
14
FRU code
15
SKSV
C/D
Reserved
BPV
Bit pointer
When set to
1, the bit
pointer is
valid.
16 -17
SKSV = 0: First Error Fault Symptom Code (FSC).

SKSV = 1: Field Pointer
18-19
First Error Flag Data
20
Reserved (0)
21
CLN
22-28
Volume Label
29
Current Wrap
30-33
Relative LPOS
34
SCSI Address
35
Frame number
Reserved
Reserved
VolValid
Drive number
D-13

Bit Address or Name
Byte
36-39
Port Identifier (Relative Target Port Address) Reporting Sense (This is the port address of the drive port
through which sense is being reported.
On Fibre Channel drives, it is the Fibre Channel Fabric Port Address [for example, 011E13 or 000026] with
byte 36 being reserved.
On SAS drives, it is the Hashed SAS Address of the drive port [for example, F32A94] with byte 36 being
reserved.
On SCSI, bytes 36 through 38 are reserved, and byte 39 is set to the ports SCSI address [i.e., byte 39 =
byte 34].)
40
Tape
Directory
Valid
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Relative Tgt Port Reporting Sense

0: Reserved
1: Relative Tgt Port 1 (Port 0)
2: Relative Tgt Port 2 (Port 1)
3: Relative Tgt Port 3 (Library Port)
41
42
Host Command (SCSI Opcode)

Density Type
0: No media present
Media Type (Vendor Reserved)
1: Gen1 (384 track)

2: Gen2 (512 track)
3: Gen3 (704 track)
43
44
45-48
Volume Label Cartridge Type

Logical Block Number
(Current LBA that would be reported in Read Position command)
49-52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
D-14
Data set Number

1st Error FSC
1st Error Flag Data
2nd Error FSC
2nd Error Flag Data
Next-to-Last Error FSC
Next-to-Last Error Flag Data

Bit Address or Name
Byte
65
Last Error FSC
66
67
Last Error Flag Data
68
69
LPOS Region
70-85
ERP Summary Information
86-89
Product Revision Level: YMDV

(as defined in Standard Inquiry; this is also known as the Code Level)
90-95
Reserved (0)
The descriptions below serve only as an overview of sense reporting in the tape
drive. This tape drive conforms to all sense field reporting as specified in the SCSI
standards.
Note:
1. The Error Code field (Byte 0) is set to 70h to indicate a current error,
that is one associated with the most recently received command. It is
set to 71h to indicate a deferred error which is not associated with the
current command.
2. The segment number (Byte 1) is zero since the Copy, Compare, and
Copy and Verify commands are not supported.
3. The File Mark flag (Byte 2, bit 7) is set if a Space, Read, or Verify
command did not complete because a file mark was read.
4. The End of Media (EOM) flag (Byte 2, bit 6) is set if a Write or Write
File Marks command completed in the early warning area. Spacing into
BOM also causes this flag to be set. It is also set on an attempt to read
or space past EOD, or if an attempt is made to space into Beginning of
Media.
5. The Illegal Length Indicator (ILI) flag (Byte 2, bit 5) is set if a Read or
Verify ended because a block was read from tape that did not have the
block length requested in the command.
6. The Information Bytes (Bytes 3-5) are only valid if the Valid flag is set.
This occurs only for current errors and not for deferred errors.
7. The Field Replaceable Unit field (Byte 14) is set to either zero or to a
non-zero, vendor-specific code indicating which part of the drive is
suspected of causing the failure.
8. The Clean (CLN) flag (Byte 21, bit 3) is set if the drive needs cleaning
and clear otherwise.
9. The Volume Label Fields Valid (VolValid) bit (Byte 21, bit 0) is set if the
Volume Label being reported is valid.
10. The Volume Label field (Bytes 22-28) reports the volume label if a
cartridge is loaded in the drive and Volume Label Fields Valid is set.
11. The Current Wrap field (Byte 29) reports the physical wrap of the tape.
The least significant bit reflects the current physical direction. A 0
D-15
means that the current direction is away from the physical beginning of
the tape. A 1 means that the current direction is towards the physical
beginning of the tape.
12. Relative LPOS fields (Bytes 30-33) reports the current physical position
on the tape.
13. SCSI Address field (Byte 34) reports the SCSI Bus Address for the drive.
Values returned range from 00h to 0Fh.
14. This field (Byte 35) contains the frame and drive number, passed across
the RS-422 serial interface.
D-16
Appendix E. Message retrieval at the host

Retrieving messages from different hosts are discussed in this appendix.
Obtaining error information from the host

How error information is obtained from the host depends on the type of device
driver being utilized. Refer to the table for instructions specific to your type of
device driver.
If you are...
Then
Using an IBM device driver
Refer to the IBM Tape Device Drivers

Installation and User's Guide (GC27-2130) for
problem determination information specific
to your host operation system. Visit
ftp://ftp.software.ibm.com/storage/
devdrvr/Doc/ to download the latest
version of the manual.
Using a non-IBM device driver
Refer to IBM TotalStorage Tape Diagnostic

tool (ITDT) on page 9-3. Visit
http://www-1.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=ssg1S4000662 to download
the diagnostic tool.
Retrieving from an IBM System p or IBM Power system with AIX

IBM device drivers for the System p system logs error information when an error
occurs on a tape drive or library.
The error information includes:
1. Device VPD
2. SCSI command parameters
3. SCSI sense data (if available)
The AIX Tape and Media Changer Device Driver for the System p provides
logging to the system error log for various errors. You can view the error log by
following this procedure.
1. At the AIX command line, type errpt |pg to display a summary report, or type
errpt -a |pg to display a detailed report. Press [Enter].
Note: In most cases, use the summary report to find the date and time of any
errors that are related to library devices, then use the detail report to
obtain the sense data that is needed to identify the cause of the error.
2. Press [Enter] to scroll through the error log.
3. Type q and press [Enter] to quit the error log at any time.
To correct a problem you noticed in the errpt report, determine the type of error by
using the examples that follow:
E-1
v For library errors [Resource Name = smcn (for example, smc0) and Resource
Type = 3573-TL]), refer to SCSI sense data definition and Sense Data in
Appendix C.
v For drive errors [Resource Name = rmtn (for example, rmt0) and Resource Type
= LTO], refer to SCSI sense data definition and Sense Data in Appendix C.
v For Fibre Channel errors (not Fibre Channel adapter errors), determine which
host adapter and device are affected, and go to that host documentation to
resolve any Fibre Channel problems. If unsuccessful, call for IBM support.
v For Fibre Channel adapter errors (not Fibre Channel bus errors), use the
maintenance package for the host.
Note: See Appendix D, Sense data, on page D-1 for further details on sense data.
SCSI sense data definition

Following is an example of a tape drive communication failure while attached to
an Open Systems host through a fibre channel link, using SCSI protocol. When the
host detected the failure, it built the following SCSI Sense Data record. An
explanation of the SCSI Sense Data breakout in this example follows.
SENSE DATA
aabb
0600
0000
0000
0000
0000
xxxx
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
ccdd eeee eeee eeee

1200
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
eeee
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
eeee
0200
0000
0000
0000
0000
ffgg hhxx
0300
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
ssss
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
ssss
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
ssss
0000
0000
0000
0000
ssss
ssss ....
0000
0000
0000
0000
Note: The bold area above represents the SCSI Sense Data presented by the host. The regular font data (in this case
many bytes of zero), designated by ssss would normally contain device sense data, but with the kind of
failure in this example (COMMAND TIMEOUT), the host could not collect valid device sense data, so zeros
are the result and should be ignored. If the host had been able to collect valid sense data from the drive, the
first byte ss would be 70, 71, F0 or F1, and valid device sense data would be listed.
DETAIL DATA
aabb
aa
bb
xx
cc
xxxx
ccdd eeee eeee eeee
eeee
eeee
ffgg hhxx
ssss
ssss
ssss
ssss
ssss ....
Length of the Command Descriptor Block (CDB) sent by the host. In this case, '06' bytes.
SCSI target address. In this example, SCSI address '00'.
Unused or reserved
Start of CDB, cc is the operation code (byte 0). In this case, '12' which was an "Inquiry".
SCSI sense data - library error

The following example of SCSI Sense Data was received from an RS/6000 Open
System host and shows a Tape Drive Failure and what the sense data would look
like. Unlike the previous situation with "SCSI sense data definition", this data
contains valid sense data as defined by the hex 70 in the first sense byte position.
Therefore, instead of all zeros as in the previous example, we have valid data to
rely on. While the data shows that this is a TAPE_ERR2, it could also be caused by
a library failure. As described, the resource name is smc0 indicating a library error.
The ASC/ASCQ points to a Mechanical Positioning Error while attempting a
"Move Medium" command (A5). For more information about sense data, consult
your IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library SCSI Reference
E-2
document.
LABEL:
TAPE_ERR2
IDENTIFIER:
476B351D
Date/Time:
Fri May 04 42:26 DFT
Sequence Number: 1665
Machine ID:
0046083B4C00
Node ID:
risc4
Error Class:
H
Error Type:
PERM
Resource Name: smc0
Resource Class: tape
Resource Type: 3573
Location:
P1.1-I3/Q1-W5003013D38321011-L1000000000000
VPD:
Manufacturer................IBM
Machine Type and Model......3573-TL
Serial Number...............X2U78B0384
Device Specific . (FW) .....4.09 (Firmware Level)
Description
TAPE DRIVE FAILURE
Probable Causes
TAPE DRIVE
Failure Causes
TAPE
TAPE DRIVE
Recommended Actions
PERFORM PROBLEM DETERMINATION PROCEDURES
Detail Data
aabb xxxx ccdd eeee eeee eeee eeee eeee ffgg
aa
bb
xx
cc
hhxx ssss
ssss
ssss ssss
ssss ...
Length of the Command Descriptor Block (CDB) sent by the host. In this case, '0C' bytes.
SCSI target address. In this example, SCSI address '00'.
Unused or reserved
Start of CDB, cc is the operation code (byte 0). In this case, 'A5' which was a "Move Medium".
SENSE DATA
0C00 0000 A500
818F 0000 BE00
0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
100F
0000
0000
0000
0000
1010
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0102
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
7000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0400
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
000A
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
Figure E-1. AIX ERRPT Library Error Log Example

Table E-1. AIX ERRPT library sense data
Hex
A5
70
04
818F
Description
SCSI Command (in this case Move Medium)
Byte 0 of Library Sense Data (Valid Data)
Sense Key (in this case Hardware Error)
ASC/ASCQ (additional sense code/additional sense code qualifier), in this case a Cannot Find
Slider Block error.
SCSI sense data - drive error

The following example of SCSI sense data was received from a RS/6000 Open
System host and shows a Tape Drive Failure and what the sense data would look
like. Like the SCSI sense data in Example 1, this sense data example contains valid
sense data as defined by the hex 71 in the first sense byte position. Therefore, we
E-3
have valid data to rely on. While the data shows that this example is a
TAPE_ERR2, it could also be caused by a library failure. Further review of the
ASC/ASCQ, (Media load or eject failed), points more to a problem with the media
or the drive. Also note that the FSC listed was F402 which is a timeout while
attempting to load drive 2. For more information about the Sense Key and
ASC/ASCQ fields, refer to the IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200
Tape Library SCSI Reference document.
LABEL:
TAPE_ERR2
IDENTIFIER:
476B351D
Date/Time:
Wed May 09 07:51:42 DFT
Sequence Number: 1669
Machine ID:
0046083B4C00
Node ID:
risc4
Error Class:
H
Error Type:
PERM
Resource Name:
rmt0
Resource Class: tape
Resource Type:
LTO
Location:
P1.1-I3/Q1-W5003013D38321011-L0
VPD:
Manufacturer................IBM
Machine Type and Model......ULT3573-TD4
Serial Number...............1300000680
Device Specific . (FW) .....74H4 (Firmware Level)
Loadable Microcode Level....A1700D5C
Description
TAPE DRIVE FAILURE
Probable Causes
TAPE DRIVE
Failure Causes
TAPE
TAPE DRIVE
Recommended Actions
PERFORM PROBLEM DETERMINATION PROCEDURES
Detail Data
SENSE DATA
0600 0000 0000
5300 0702 F402
0000 0000 0000
2020 2000 0000
0000 0000 0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0001
0000
0000
0000
0000
0110
0000
0000
0000
0000
0001
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
8000
0000
0102
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
2800
0000
0000
7100
0200
01E0
0000
0000
0400
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0058
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
4133
0000
0000
00000
3820
0000
Figure E-2. AIX ERRPT Library Error Log Example

Table E-2. AIX ERRPT drive sense data
Hex
71
04
5300
F401
Description
Valid Sense Data Follows
Sense Key (Hardware Problem)
ASC/ASCQ (additional sense code/additional sense code qualifier)
FSC (fault symptom code) in this case, Drive Load Timeout. Likely a drive problem.
Retrieving from a Sun system

The Sun system provides information when an error occurs on a tape drive or
library in system-errolog /var/adm/messages. When you have located the error
information, go to Chapter 7, Troubleshooting, on page 7-1.
E-4
Retrieving from an HP-UX system

The HP-UX system provides information when an error occurs on a tape drive or
library in syslog /var/adm/syslog.log. When you have located the error
information, go to Chapter 7, Troubleshooting, on page 7-1.
Retrieving from an IBM System i or IBM Power system with IBM i OS

IBM device drivers for the System i system logs error information when an error
occurs on a tape drive or library.
The error information includes:
1. Device VPD
2. SCSI command parameters
3. SCSI sense data (if available)
To gain access to the System i problem logs and error logs, sign on at any available
workstation with the QSRV logon and its security password (QSRV). After you
sign on, the access authorizations will be granted and the System i MAIN menu
displays.
1. Type STRSST (Start System Service Tools) command on the command entry
line on the System i Main menu, and press [Enter].
2. On the "System Service Tool (SST)" screen, select Start a service tool, and press
[Enter].
3. On the "Start a Service Tool" screen, select Product activity log, and press
[Enter].
4. On the "Product activity log" screen, select Analyze log, and press [Enter].
5. On the "Select Subsystem Data" screen, select Magnetic media, enter the From
and To time period for searching the error log, and press [Enter].
6. On the "Select Analysis Report Options" screen, select the following, and press
[Enter].
a. Report type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
b. Optional entries to include
1) Informational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YES
2) Statistic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NO
c. Reference code selection
1) Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2) Reference codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . *ALL
d. Device selection
1) Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2) Device type or resource names . . *ALL
7. On the "Log Analysis Report" screen, enter a 5 on an error line that has a
resource type of 3583 (library) or 3580 (drive), and press [Enter].
8. On the "Display Detail Report for Resource" screen, press:
v F4=Additional Information.
Pressing F4 displays the machine type and serial number of the device. It
also displays SCSI sense data, if available.
v F6=Hexadecimal report.
Pressing F6 displays the device hexadecimal data (for support use).
E-5
v F9=Address Information.
Pressing F9 displays the SCSI address information.
System i Product Activity Log

Product Activity Log Page . . . : 1
ROMLPAR1 08/26/05 10:28:40
Invocation . . . . . . : Product Activity Log
Title . . . . . . . . . : Log ID Report
System type . . . . . . : 9406
System model . . . . . : 825
System release . . . . : V5R3M0
System name . . . . . . : ROMLPAR1
System serial
number . . . . . . . : 10-F321B
Log ID . . . . . . . . : 09020145
Include hexadecimal
data . . . . . . . . : Y Y=YES
N=NO
ROMLPAR1 08/26/05 10:28:40
Detail Report for Resource
Serial Resource
Name Type Model Number Name
TAPMLB19 3580 001 00-1004538
Log ID . . . . . . . . . : 09020145 Sequence . . . . . . : 211510
Date . . . . . . . . . . : 04/21/05 Time . . . . . . . . : 10:40:11
Reference code . . . . . : 9350 Secondary code . . . : 00000000
Table ID . . . . . . . . : 63A00001 IPL source/state . . : B / 3
Class . . . . . . . . . . : Permanent
System ref code . . . . . : 63A09350
Tape unit detected a read or write error on tape medium
Physical location:
Frame ID . . . . . . . :
Card position . . . . . :
Device position . . . . :
Logical address:
PCI bus: Library:
System bus . . . . . . : 36 I/O adapter . . . . . . : 2
System board . . . . . : 0 I/O bus . . . . . . . . : 1
System card . . . . . . : 32 Library: 20
Controller . . . . . . : 4
Device . . . . . . . . : 0
SENSE DATA FOLLOWS. . . . :
DATA OFFSET 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
00000000 71000300 0000001C 00000000 53000600
00000010 31190601 00020000 00000000 00000000
00000020 00000301
00000000 0000 C5D3F0F5 00000188 00E00180 8983EBC2 4B9D8001 00033A36 20E00902
00000000 0040 F3F8F2F8 F4F4F6F3 C1F00002 00240000 00200000 00050001 00140004
00000000 0060 00000000 00000000 00000000 40404040 40404040 40400000 00000000
00000000 0080 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
00000000 00A0 D7D4D3C2 F1F94040 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 40404040
00000000 00C0 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040
00000000 00E0 F6F3C1F0 F0F0F0F1 0000E2D3 C9C3C9D6 4040E5F5 D9F3D4F0 40400000
00000000 0100 01030000 00000000 00000141 00000000 00000000 01950000 00000000
00000000 0120 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
00000000 0140 E3C1D7F2 F7404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040
00000000 0160 00000000 10200003 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 0009001E
00000000 0180 F8807800 28440001 00002600 21410400 63A00001 93500100 45381202
00000000 01A0 00000000 00004624 00000000 00000000 00040000 00003580 0001A170
ROMLPAR1 08/26/05 10:28:40
00000000 01C0 36310040 00007100 03000000 001C0000 00005300 06003119 06010002
00000000 01E0 00000000 00000000 03010000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
00000000 0200 00000000 0000D9C5 D8400000 D9E2000C 02000000 0000E2C3 E2C91202
00000000 0220 00000000 0000C5D9 D940C3C8 C3D20444 8502D9E2 0000E2C3 E2C91202
00000000 0240 00008000 0000E2D5 E2C47100 03000000 001C0000 0000C5D9 D7C11202
00000000 0260 00171202 05D8D9C5 E2D70000 00171202 05D8D9E2 00000000 D4C5C4C9
00000000 0280 D7D7F1F2 F5C500D4 E3C1D7C3 D3D500C3 D7D7F6F4 F0F000E4 C6C9F0F0
00000000 02A0 D7D7F1F8 F5C600D5 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
00000000 02C0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 C3D7D7F6
00000000 02E0 F6F3C1F0 F9F3F5F0 F0F0F0F0 F0F0F0F0 F0F0F0F0 F0F1F9F7 F8F0F0F7
00000000 0300 00000000 00000000 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040
* * * * * E N D O F C O M P U T E R P R I N T O U T * * * * *
E-6
01450000 *EL05...h....ic.B................*
00000002
00000000
0000E3C1
40404040
40404040
00000000
00000197
00000000
00070001
00000188
05D80000
02903435
*38284463A0......................*
*............ ..........*
*..............................TA*
*PMLB19 ................ *
* *
*63A00001..SLICIO V5R3M0 ......*
*.....................n.........p*
*................................*
*TAP27 ....*
*...............................h*
*8...................l&.......Q..*
*................................*
00000000
00000000
00180000
00180300
05D80000
C10000C3
F8F7F1C3
00000000
F3F0C3D5
0000E8D5
40404040
*... ............................*
*................................*
*......REQ ..RS........SCSI......*
*......ERR CHCK..e.RS..SCSI......*
*......SNSD............ERPA...Q..*
*.....QRESP.......QRS....MEDIA..C*
*PP125E.MTAPCLN.CPP6400.UFI00871C*
*PP185F.N........................*
*........................CPP630CN*
*63A0935000000000000001978007..YN*
*........ *
Appendix F. SNMP status MIB variables and traps

Note: For more information, refer to SNMP messaging on page 1-6.
Table F-1. SNMP status events
Event
Trap ID
Definition
Cold Start
Library has rebooted.
Status Change
Library status has changed.
Door Open
Library door has been opened.
Mail Slot Accessed
Library I/O Station has been

accessed.
Fault Posted
Library has posted a hard fault/error.
Request Drive Clean
Drive has requested a clean.
Drive Error
Drive has reported an error.
Loader Retries Excessive
Library has reported excessive load

retries.
Loader OK
Library has resumed normal

operations.
Account Password Change
Account password in the library has

changed.
Note: Trap ID 9 requires library firmware level 8.0 or greater, and the latest SNMP MIB file.
Configuration Change
10
Library or drive configuration has

changed.
Library Login
11
Someone has logged into the library

via the Web User Interface.
Library Logout
12
Someone has logged out of the

library via the Web User Interface.
Note: Trap IDs 10, 11, and 12 require library firmware level 9.00 or greater and the latest SNMP MIB file.
F-1
F-2
Appendix G. Library Configuration Form

Use this form when planning your library configuration. Keep this document in a
secure location and update it when changes are made to the library configuration.
General Information
TS3100
TS3200
I/O Station
Enabled
Disabled
AutoClean
Enabled
Disabled
Library type
Library Serial
Number
Library name
Library Network Settings

Enabled
DHCP
Disabled
IP Address
Netmask
Address
Gateway
Address
DNS Servers IP
Addresses
EKM Servers IP
Addresses
Encryption
Settings
Logical Libraries
1
Number in
library
Mode
Random: ON/OFF
Sequential: ON/OFF
Autoload: ON/OFF
Loop: ON/OFF
Magazine
Assignment
h
h
h
h
Upper
Lower
Upper
Lower
Left
Left
Right
Right
2
Random: ON/OFF
Sequential: ON/OFF
Autoload: ON/OFF
Loop: ON/OFF
h
h
h
h
Upper
Lower
Upper
Lower
Left
Left
Right
Right
3
Random: ON/OFF
Sequential: ON/OFF
Autoload: ON/OFF
Loop: ON/OFF
h
h
h
h
Upper
Lower
Upper
Lower
Left
Left
Right
Right
4
Random: ON/OFF
Sequential: ON/OFF
Autoload: ON/OFF
Loop: ON/OFF
h
h
h
h
Upper
Lower
Upper
Lower
Left
Left
Right
Right
Number of
Active Slots
Drive Serial
Numbers
4U Position 4:
4U Position 3:
2U/4U Position 2:
2U/4U Position 1:
4U Position 4:
4U Position 3:
2U/4U Position 2:
2U/4U Position 1:
4U Position 4:
4U Position 3:
2U/4U Position 2:
2U/4U Position 1:
4U Position 4:
4U Position 3:
2U/4U Position 2:
2U/4U Position 1:
G-1
Drive types
4U Position 4:
4U Position 3:
2U/4U Position 2:
2U/4U Position 1:
4U Position 4:
4U Position 3:
2U/4U Position 2:
2U/4U Position 1:
4U Position 4:
4U Position 4:
4U Position 3:
2U/4U Position
2U/4U Position
Position 3:
2U/4U Position
2U/4U Position
2:
1:4U
4U Position 4:4U
Position 3:2U/4U
Position 2:2U/4U
Position 1:
2:
1:
Fibre Channel
Drive settings
Logical Library:
Position:
Speed:
Port type:
Loop ID:
Logical Library:
Position:
Speed:
Port type:
Loop ID:
Logical Library:
Position:
Speed:
Port type:
Loop ID:
Logical Library:
Position:
Speed:
Port type:
Loop ID:
SAS Drive
settings
Logical Library:
Position:
ID:
Logical Library:
Position:
ID:
Logical Library:
Position:
ID:
Logical Library:
Position:
ID:
SCSI Drive
settings
Logical Library:
Position:
ID:
Logical Library:
Position:
ID:
Logical Library:
Position:
ID:
Logical Library:
Position:
ID:
User Accounts
Role:
Password:
Role:
Password:
Role:
Password:
Role:
Password:
Activation Key Labels
Encryption Key
Path Failover
Key
G-2
[Adhere one of the activation key labels here for future reference.]
[Adhere one of the activation key labels here for future reference.]
Appendix H. Accessibility
Accessibility features help a user who has a physical disability, such as restricted
mobility or limited vision, to use the HTML version of the customer
documentation successfully.
Features
The major accessibility features for the HTML version of this document are:
v You can use screen-reader software and a digital speech synthesizer to hear what
is displayed on the screen. The following screen readers are tested: WebKing and
Window-Eyes.
v You can operate all features with the keyboard instead of the mouse.
Navigating by keyboard
You can use keys or key combinations to complete operations and initiate many
menu actions that are also done through mouse actions. You can navigate the
HTML version of the IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape
Library Setup, Operator, and Service Guide help system from the keyboard with the
following key combinations:
v To traverse to the next link, button, or topic, press Tab inside a frame (page).
v To move to the previous topic, press ^ or Shift+Tab.
v To scroll all the way up or down, press Home or End.
v To print the current page or active frame, press Ctrl+P.
v To select, press Enter.
Accessing the publications

You can view the publications for this library in Adobe Portable Document Format
(PDF) with the Adobe Acrobat Reader. The PDFs are provided at the following
website:
http://www.ibm.com/storage/support/.
H-1
H-2
Notices
This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A.
IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in
other countries. Consult your local IBM representative for information on the
products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an IBM
product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM
product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product,
program, or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may
be used instead. However, it is the user's responsibility to evaluate and verify the
operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service.
IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter
described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not grant you
any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:
IBM Director of Licensing
IBM Corporation
North Castle Drive
Armonk, NY 10504-1785
U.S.A.
For license inquiries regarding double-byte character set (DBCS) information,
contact the IBM Intellectual Property Department in your country or send
inquiries, in writing, to:
Intellectual Property Licensing
Legal and Intellectual Property Law
IBM Japan Ltd.
19-21, Nihonbashi-Hakozakicho, Chuo-ku
Tokyo 103-8510, Japan
The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other
country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS
PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or
implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply
to you.
This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.
Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be
incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements
and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this
publication at any time without notice.
Any references in this information to non-IBM Web sites are provided for
convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web
sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this IBM
product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk.
I-1
IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it
believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.
Licensees of this program who wish to have information about it for the purpose
of enabling: (i) the exchange of information between independently created
programs and other programs (including this one) and (ii) the mutual use of the
information which has been exchanged, should contact:
IBM Corporation
Almaden Research
650 Harry Road
Bldg 80, D3-304, Department 277
San Jose, CA 95120-6099
U.S.A.
Such information may be available, subject to appropriate terms and conditions,
including in some cases, payment of a fee.
The licensed program described in this document and all licensed material
available for it are provided by IBM under terms of the IBM Customer Agreement,
IBM International Program License Agreement or any equivalent agreement
between us.
Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled
environment. Therefore, the results obtained in other operating environments may
vary significantly. Some measurements may have been made on development-level
systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the same on
generally available systems. Furthermore, some measurements may have been
estimated through extrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of this document
should verify the applicable data for their specific environment.
Information concerning non-IBM products was obtained from the suppliers of
those products, their published announcements or other publicly available sources.
IBM has not tested those products and cannot confirm the accuracy of
performance, compatibility or any other claims related to non-IBM products.
Questions on the capabilities of non-IBM products should be addressed to the
suppliers of those products.
All statements regarding IBM's future direction or intent are subject to change or
withdrawal without notice, and represent goals and objectives only.
All IBM prices shown are IBM's suggested retail prices, are current and are subject
to change without notice. Dealer prices may vary.
This information is for planning purposes only. The information herein is subject to
change before the products described become available.
This information contains examples of data and reports used in daily business
operations. To illustrate them as completely as possible, the examples include the
names of individuals, companies, brands, and products. All of these names are
fictitious and any similarity to the names and addresses used by an actual business
enterprise is entirely coincidental.
COPYRIGHT LICENSE:
I-2
This information contains sample application programs in source language, which

illustrate programming techniques on various operating platforms. You may copy,
modify, and distribute these sample programs in any form without payment to
IBM, for the purposes of developing, using, marketing or distributing application
programs conforming to the application programming interface for the operating
platform for which the sample programs are written. These examples have not
been thoroughly tested under all conditions. IBM, therefore, cannot guarantee or
imply reliability, serviceability, or function of these programs. The sample
programs are provided "AS IS", without warranty of any kind. IBM shall not be
liable for any damages arising out of your use of the sample programs.
Each copy or any portion of these sample programs or any derivative work, must
include a copyright notice as follows:
(your company name) (year). Portions of this code are derived from IBM Corp.
Sample Programs.
Copyright IBM Corp. _enter the year or years_.
If you are viewing this information softcopy, the photographs and color
illustrations may not appear.
Trademarks
IBM, the IBM logo, and ibm.com are trademarks or registered trademarks of
International Business Machines Corp., registered in many jurisdictions worldwide.
Other product and service names might be trademarks of IBM or other companies.
A current list of IBM trademarks is available on the web at Copyright and
trademark information at www.ibm.com/legal/copytrade.shtml.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, PostScript, and the PostScript logo are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States,
and/or other countries.
IT Infrastructure Library is a registered trademark of the Central Computer and
Telecommunications Agency which is now part of the Office of Government
Commerce.
Intel, Intel logo, Intel Inside, Intel Inside logo, Intel Centrino, Intel Centrino logo,
Celeron, Intel Xeon, Intel SpeedStep, Itanium, and Pentium are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States
and other countries.
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other
countries, or both.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and the Windows logo are trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both.
ITIL is a registered trademark, and a registered community trademark of The
Minister for the Cabinet Office, and is registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark
Office.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other
countries.
Notices
I-3
Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
Cell Broadband Engine is a trademark of Sony Computer Entertainment, Inc. in the
United States, other countries, or both and is used under license therefrom.
Linear Tape-Open, LTO, the LTO Logo, Ultrium, and the Ultrium logo are
trademarks of HP, IBM Corp. and Quantum in the U.S. and other countries.
Electronic Emission Notices

This section contains the electronic emission notices or statements for the United
States and other countries.
Federal Communications Commission statement

This explains the Federal Communications Commission's (FCC) statement.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with
the instruction manual, might cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at
his own expense.
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to
meet FCC emission limits. IBM is not responsible for any radio or television
interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors, or by
unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes
or modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device might not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that
might cause undesired operation.
Industry Canada compliance statement

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numrique de la classe A est conform la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.
European Union Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of European Union
(EU) Council Directive 2004/108/EC on the approximation of the laws of the
Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility. IBM cannot accept
responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a
non-recommended modification of the product, including the fitting of non-IBM
option cards.
I-4
Attention: This is an EN 55022 Class A product. In a domestic environment this

product might cause radio interference in which case the user might be required to
take adequate measures.
Responsible Manufacturer:
International Business Machines Corp.
New Orchard Road
Armonk, New York 10504
914-499-1900
European community contact:
IBM Deutschland GmbH
Technical Regulations, Department M372
IBM-Allee 1, 71139 Ehningen, Germany
Tele: +49 7032 15 2941
e-mail: lugi@de.ibm.com
Australia and New Zealand Class A Statement

Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product
might cause radio interference in which case the user might be required to take
adequate measures.
Germany Electromagnetic compatibility directive

Deutschsprachiger EU Hinweis: Hinweis fr Gerte der Klasse A EU-Richtlinie
zur Elektromagnetischen Vertrglichkeit
Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU-Richtlinie
2004/108/EG zur Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften ber die elektromagnetische
Vertrglichkeit in den EU-Mitgliedsstaaten und hlt die Grenzwerte der EN 55022
Klasse A ein.
Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Gerte wie in den Handbchern beschrieben zu
installieren und zu betreiben. Des Weiteren drfen auch nur von der IBM
empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden. IBM bernimmt keine Verantwortung fr
die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt ohne Zustimmung der
IBM verndert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern ohne
Empfehlung der IBM gesteckt/eingebaut werden.
EN 55022 Klasse A Gerte mssen mit folgendem Warnhinweis versehen werden:
"Warnung: Dieses ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese Einrichtung kann im
Wohnbereich Funk-Strungen verursachen; in diesem Fall kann vom Betreiber
verlangt werden, angemessene Mabnahmen zu ergreifen und dafr
aufzukommen."
Deutschland: Einhaltung des Gesetzes ber die elektromagnetische
Vertrglichkeit von Gerten
Dieses Produkt entspricht dem "Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit
von Gerten (EMVG)." Dies ist die Umsetzung der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG in
der Bundesrepublik Deutschland.
Notices
I-5
Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz ber die

elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Gerten (EMVG) (bzw. der EMC EG
Richtlinie 2004/108/EG) fr Gerte der Klasse A
Dieses Gert ist berechtigt, in bereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das
EG-Konformittszeichen - CE - zu fhren.
Verantwortlich fr die Einhaltung der EMV Vorschriften ist der Hersteller:
International Business Machines Corp.
New Orchard Road
Armonk,New York 10504
Tel: 914-499-1900
Der verantwortliche Ansprechpartner des Herstellers in der EU ist:

IBM Deutschland GmbH
Technical Regulations, Abteilung M372
IBM-Allee 1, 71139 Ehningen, Germany
Tele: +49 7032 15 2941
e-mail: lugi@de.ibm.com
Generelle Informationen:
Das Gert erfllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022 Klasse
A.
People's Republic of China Class A Electronic Emission

statement
Taiwan Class A compliance statement
Taiwan contact information

This topic contains the product service contact information for Taiwan.
I-6
f2c00790
IBM Taiwan Product Service Contact Information:

IBM Taiwan Corporation
3F, No 7, Song Ren Rd., Taipei Taiwan
Tel: 0800-016-888
Japan VCCI Council Class A statement
jjieta1
Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries

Association (JEITA) Statement (less than or equal to 20 A per
phase)
jjieta2
Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries

Association (JEITA) Statement (greater than 20 A per phase)
Korean Communications Commission (KCC) Class A

Statement
Notices
I-7
rusemi
Russia Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Class A Statement
I-8
Glossary
This glossary defines the special terms, abbreviations, and acronyms that are used
in this publication. If you do not find the term that you are looking for, refer to the
index or to the Dictionary of Computing, 1994.
Numbers
2:1 compression
The relationship between the quantity of data that can be stored with
compression as compared to the quantity of data that can be stored
without compression. In 2:1 compression, twice as much data can be stored
with compression as can be stored without compression.
A
A
Ampere.
ac
Alternating current.
access method
A technique for moving data between main storage and input or output
devices.
accessor
This component contains the library robot and bar code reader. The
accessor moves cartridges to and from the I/O Station, storage slots, and
tape drives.
adapter card
A circuit board that adds function to a computer.
adj
Adjustment.
AH
Authentication Header. An Internet Protocol intended to guarantee

connectionless integrity and data origin authentication of IP datagrams.
Further, it can optionally protect against replay attacks by using the sliding
window technique and discarding old packets.
AIX
Advanced Interactive Executive. IBM's implementation of the UNIX

operating system. The System p system, among others, uses AIX as it's
operating system.
alphanumeric
Pertaining to a character set that contains letters, numerals, and other
characters, such as punctuation marks.
alter
To change.
ambient temperature
The temperature of air or other media in a designated area, particularly the
area that is surrounding equipment.
AME
Application Managed Encryption.
ampere (A)
A unit of measure for electric current that is equivalent to a flow of 1
coulomb per second, or to the current produced by 1 volt applied across a
resistance of 1 ohm.
J-1
ANSI American National Standards Institute.

application-managed encryption
Tape encryption that is controlled by an application.
archive
To collect and store files in a designated place.
ASCII American National Standard Code for Information Interchange. A 7 bit
coded character set (8 bits including parity check) that consists of control
characters and graphic characters.
assigning a device
The establishing of the relationship of a device to a running task, process,
job, or program.
assignment
The naming of a specific device to perform a function.
asynchronous
Pertaining to two or more processes that do not depend upon the
occurrence of specific events such as common timing signals.
attention (notice)
A word for calling attention to the possibility of danger to a program,
device, or system, or to data. Contrast with caution and danger.
ATTN Attention.
Authentication Header (AH)
A member of the IPsec protocol suite. AH guarantees connectionless
integrity and data origin authentication of IP packets.
B
backup
To make extra copies of documents or software for safekeeping.
bar code
A code that represents characters by sets of parallel bars of varying
thickness and separation, which are read optically by transverse scanning.
bar code label
Paper bearing a bar code and having an adhesive backing. The bar code
label must be affixed to a tape cartridge to enable the library to identify
the cartridge and its volume serial number.
bar code reader
A laser device that is specialized for scanning and reading bar codes and
converting them into either the ASCII or EBCDIC digital character code.
bezel
Decorative and safety cover.
bicolored
Having two colors.
bit
Either of the digits 0 or 1 when used in the binary numbering system.
BOM or bill of materials

A list of specific types and amounts of direct materials that are expected to
be used to produce a specific job or quantity of output.
J-2
Border Gateway Protocol (BGP)

BGP is the core routing protocol of the Internet. It works by maintaining a
table of IP networks or 'prefixes' that designate network reachability
among autonomous systems (AS).
BRMS Backup Recovery and Media Services.
browser
A client program that initiates requests to a web server and displays the
information that the server returns.
buffer
A routine or storage that is used to compensate for a difference in rate of
flow of data or time of occurrence of events, when data is transferred from
one device to another.
bus
A facility for transferring data between several devices that are located
between two end points, only one device able to transmit at a specified
moment.
byte
A string that consists of some bits (usually 8) that are treated as a unit and
represent a character. A fundamental data unit.
C
CA certification
In cryptography, a certificate from a certificate authority (CA).
capacity
The amount of data that can be contained on storage media and expressed
in bytes of data.
cartridge manual rewind tool
A device that can be fitted into the reel of a cartridge and used to rewind
tape into or out of the cartridge.
cartridge memory (CM)
Within each data cartridge, an embedded electronics and interface module
that can store and retrieve a cartridge's historical usage and other
information.
cartridge storage slot
Individual slot that is located within a magazine that is used to house tape
cartridges.
caution (notice)
A word to call attention to possible personal harm to people. Contrast with
attention and danger.
CE
Customer engineer; field engineer; service representative.
centimeter (cm)
One one-hundredth of a meter (0.01 m). Approximately 0.39 inch.
channel command
An instruction that directs a data channel, control unit, or device to
perform an operation or set of operations.
char
Character.
CHK
Check.
Glossary
J-3
cleaning cartridge
A tape cartridge that is used to clean the heads of a tape drive. Contrast
with data cartridge.
COD
Capacity On Demand.
command
A control signal that initiates an action or the start of a sequence of actions.
compact disc (CD)
A disc, usually 4.75 inches in diameter, from which data is read optically
by using a laser.
compression
The process of eliminating gaps, empty fields, redundancies, and
unnecessary data to shorten the length of records or blocks.
concurrent
Refers to diagnostic procedures that can be run on one control unit while
the rest of the subsystem remains available for customer applications.
contingent connection
A connection between a channel path and a drive that is caused when a
unit check occurs during an I/O operation.
controller
A device that provides the interface between a system and one or more
tape drives.
control path drive
controllerA device that provides the interface between a system and one or
more tape drives.control path drive A drive that communicates messages
from the host computer to the library in which the drive is installed.
cookie A packet of data that is exchanged between the library and a web browser
to track configuration.
CP
Circuit protector.
CPF
Control Path Failover.
CRU
Customer Replaceable Unit.
CSA
Canadian Standards Association.
ctrl
Control.
CU
Control unit.
D
danger (notice)
A word to call attention to possible lethal harm to people. Contrast with
attention and caution.
data
Any representations such as characters or analog quantities to which

meaning is or might be assigned.
data buffer
The storage buffer in the control unit. This buffer is used to increase the
data transfer rate between the control unit and the channel.
data cartridge
A tape cartridge that is dedicated to storing data. Contrast with cleaning
cartridge.
J-4
data check
A synchronous or asynchronous indication of a condition that is caused by
invalid data or incorrect positioning of data.
dc
Direct current.
DCS
Designated Cleaning Slot.
degauss
To make a magnetic tape nonmagnetic by using electrical coils that carry
currents that neutralize the magnetism of the tape.
degausser
A device that makes magnetic tape nonmagnetic.
degradation
A decrease in quality of output or throughput or an increase in machine
error rate.
degraded
Decreased in quality of output or throughput or increased machine error
rate.
deserialize
To change from serial-by-bit to parallel-by-byte.
detented
A part that is held in position with a catch or lever.
device Any hardware component or peripheral device, such as a tape drive or
tape library, that can receive and send data.
device driver
A file that contains the code that is needed to use an attached device.
DHCPv6
The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6. Although IPv6's
stateless address autoconfiguration removes the primary motivation for
DHCP in IPv4, DHCPv6 can still be used to statefully assign addresses if
the network administrator wants more control over addressing.
DH group
Diffie-Hellman group.
DIAG
Diagnostic section of maintenance information manual.
differential
See High Voltage Differential (HVD).
direct access storage
A storage device in which the access time is independent of the location of
the data.
display contrast
The brightness of the display on the Operator Panel.
DLL
Dynamic Link Library. The Microsoft implementation of the shared library

concept. These libraries usually have the file extension dll, ocs (for libraries
that contain activeX controls, or drv (for legacy system drivers).
DNS
Directory Name System. This allows the library to recognize text-based

addresses instead of numeric IP addresses.
Glossary
J-5
download
To transfer programs or data from a computer to a connected device,
typically a personal computer.
To transfer data from a computer to a connected device, such as a
workstation or personal computer.
DPF
Data Path Failover.
DRAM
Dynamic random-access memory.
drive, magnetic tape
A mechanism for moving magnetic tape and controlling its movement.
Drive Not Configured
This message occurs during the first boot after a factory settings restore is
run. This message is not a real issue since it takes time for the library to
configure.
DRV
Drive.
DSA key
Encryption key type.
DSE
Data security erase.
DSP
Digital signal processor.
E
EBCDIC
Extended binary-coded decimal interchange code.
EC
Edge connector. Engineering change.
ECC
Error correction code.
EEB
Ethernet Expansion Blade
EEPROM
Electrically erasable programmable read-only memory.
EIA
Electronics Industries Association.
EIA unit
A unit of measure, which is established by the Electronic Industries
Association, equal to 44.45 millimeters (1.75 inches).
eject
To remove or force out from within.
EKM
Encryption Key Manager.
electronic mail
Correspondence in the form of messages that are transmitted between user
terminals over a computer network.
email
See electronic mail.
encryption
A method of storing data in a format that helps protect data from
inadvertent or deliberate compromise. An encryption-enabled drive
contains the necessary hardware and firmware to encrypt and decrypt host
tape application data. Encryption policy and encryption keys are provided
by the host application or host server.
J-6
encryption key manager (EKM)

A Java software program that assists IBM-encrypting tape drives in
generating, protecting, storing, and maintaining encryption keys that
encrypt information that is written to and decrypt information that is read
from tape media.
entitlement
IBM entitlement is the official right to receive service and support for your
tape library.
EPO
Emergency power off.
EPROM
Erasable programmable read only memory.
EQC
Equipment check.
equipment check
An asynchronous indication of a malfunction.
Error log
A data set or file in a product or system where error information is stored
for later access.
ESD
Electrostatic discharge.
ESP
Encapsulating Security Payload. An Internet Protocol that provides origin

authenticity, integrity, and confidentiality protection of a packet. ESP also
supports encryption-only and authentication-only configurations, but
encryption without authentication is discouraged because it is insecure.
F
fault symptom code (FSC)
A hexadecimal code that is generated by the drive or the control unit
microcode in response to a detected subsystem error.
FC
Feature code.
FCC
Federal communications commission.
FE
Field engineer, customer engineer, or service representative.
fiducial
A target that is used for teaching a physical location to a robot.
field replaceable unit (FRU)
An assembly that is replaced in its entirety when any one of its
components fails.
file
A named set of records that are stored or processed as a unit. Also referred
to as a data set.
file protection
The processes and procedures that are established in an information
system that are designed to inhibit unauthorized access to, contamination
of, or deletion of a file.
file transfer protocol (FTP)
In the Internet suite of protocols, an application layer protocol that uses
TCP and Telnet services to transfer bulk-data files between machines or
hosts.
firmware
Proprietary code that is delivered as microcode as part of an operating
Glossary
J-7
system. Firmware is more efficient than software loaded from an alterable

medium and more adaptable to change than pure hardware circuitry. An
example of firmware is the Basic input/output system (BIOS) in read-only
memory (ROM) on a PC system board.
FLASH EEPROM
An electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM) that
can be updated.
FMR
Field microcode replacement.
format
The arrangement or layout of data on a data medium.
formatter
Part of a magnetic tape subsystem that performs data conversion, speed
matching, encoding, first level error recovery, and interfaces to one or more
tape drives.
FP
File protect.
frayed Damaged as if by an abrasive substance.

FRU
Field replaceable unit.
FSC
Fault symptom code.
FSI
Fault symptom index.
FTSS
Field Technical Sales Support.
functional microcode
Microcode that is resident in the machine during normal customer
operation.
G
g
Gram.
GB
gigabyte.
GBIC Gigabit Interface Converter.

Gbs
gigabits/second
Gbi
gigabit
gigabit (Gbit)
1 000 000 000 bits.
gigabyte (GB)
1 000 000 000 bytes.
Gigabit Interface Converter (GBIC)
Converts copper interface to optic interface.
gnd
Ground.
H
HBA
Host Bus Adapter.
HD Slot Technology
High-density (HD) slot technology. Allows multiple cartridges to be stored
in a tiered architecture.
J-8
hertz (Hz)
Unit of frequency. 1 hertz equals one cycle per second.
hex
Hexadecimal.
High Voltage Differential (HVD)

A logic signaling system that enables data communication between a
supported host and the library. HVD signaling uses a paired plus and
minus signal level to reduce the effects of noise on the SCSI bus. Any noise
that is injected into the signal is present in both a plus and minus state,
and is canceled. Synonymous with differential.
HVD
SCSI Bus High Voltage Differential
Hz
Hertz (cycles per second).
I
IBM Ultrium Tape Drive
Located within the library, a data-storage device that controls the
movement of the magnetic tape in an IBM LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge.
The drive houses the mechanism (drive head) that reads and writes data to
the tape.
ID
Identifier.
identifier (ID)
(1) In programming languages, a lexical unit that names a language object;
for example, the names of variables, arrays, records, labels, or procedures.
An identifier usually consists of a letter optionally followed by letters,
digits, or other characters. (2) One or more characters that are used to
identify or name data element and possibly to indicate certain properties of
that data element. (3) A sequence of bits or characters that identifies a
program, device, or system to another program, device, or system.
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission.
IKE
Internet Key Exchange that is used in the IPsec protocol.
IML
Initial microprogram load.
incompatible magazine
This message might display on the Operator Panel during library
initialization. It occurs during factory restore or VPD. This message is not a
real issue since it takes time for the library to configure.
initial microprogram load (IML)
The action of loading a microprogram from an external storage to writable
control storage.
initiator
The component that runs a command. The initiator can be the host system
or the tape control unit.
INST
Installation.
interface
A shared boundary. An interface might be a hardware component to link
two devices or it might be a portion of storage or registers accessed by two
or more computer programs.
Internet Key Exchange (IKE)
The protocol used to set up a security association (SA) in the IPsec protocol
suite. See also Security Association (SA).
Glossary
J-9
Internet Protocol Version 4 (IPv4)

See IPv4.
Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6)
See IPv6.
interposer
The part that is used to convert a 68-pin connector to a 50-pin D-shell
connector.
intervention required
Manual action is needed.
INTRO
Introduction.
I/O
Input/output.
I/O Station
Cartridge location that is dedicated for the insertion of cartridges into and
the removal of cartridges from the library.
IOP
Input/output processor.
IP
Internet Protocol.
IP address
An identifier for a computer or device on an Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
network. Networks that use the TCP/IP protocol route messages that are
based on the IP address of the destination. See IPv4 and IPv6.
IPL
Initial program load.
IPSec (IP Security)

A set of protocols for securing IPv6 network communications by
authentication and encryption.
IP Stack
A TCP/IP protocol stack that manages static IP addresses.
IPv4
A network layer protocol for packet-switched networks. IPv4 supports 232

(about 4.3 billion) addresses.
IPv6
A network layer protocol for packet-switched networks. It is the designated

successor of IPv4 for general use on the Internet. The main improvement
that is brought by IPv6 is the increase in the number of addresses available
for networked devices, allowing, for example, each mobile phone and
mobile electronic device to have its own unique address.
ISV
Independent software vendor.
ITDT
IBM TotalStorage Diagnostic tool.
ITST
Idle-time self-test.
K
Kerberos
Kerberos Authentication is a standard (RFC 1510) third-party
authentication protocol that provides end-to-end security for distributed
computing environments.
kilogram (kg)
1000 grams (approximately 2.2 pounds).
km
J-10
kilometer. 1000 Meters, Approximately 5/8 mile.
L
LAN
Local area network. A computer network within a limited area.
LCB
Library Control Blade
LCD
See liquid crystal display.
LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol. This allows the library to use login
and password information that is stored on a server to grant access to the
library functionality.
LDAPS
Secure LDAP over SSL.
LDI
Library Drive Interface.
LED
Light-emitting diode.
library certification
In cryptography, a certificate that is provided by the library.
library-managed encryption
Tape encryption that is controlled by the tape library.
Linear Tape-Open (LTO)
A type of tape storage technology that is developed by the IBM
Corporation, Hewlett-Packard, and Quantum. LTO technology is an open
format technology, which means that its users have multiple sources of
product and media. The open nature of LTO technology enables
compatibility between different vendors' offerings by ensuring that vendors
comply with verification standards. The LTO technology is implemented in
two formats: the Accelis format focuses on fast access; the Ultrium format
focuses on high capacity. The Ultrium format is the preferred format when
capacity (rather than fast access) is the key storage consideration. An
Ultrium cartridge has a compressed data capacity of up to 6250 GB (2.5:1
compression) and a native data capacity of up to 2500 GB.
liquid crystal display (LCD)
A low-power display technology that is used in computers and other I/O
devices.
loadable
The ability to be loaded.
LME
Library Managed Encryption.
LTO cartridge memory (LTO-CM)

Within each LTO Ultrium data cartridge, an embedded electronics and
interface module that can store and retrieve a cartridge's historical usage
and other information.
LUN
Logical Unit Number.
LVD
SCSI Bus Low Voltage Differential
M
MAC address
The Media Access Control address of a computer networking device.
magnetic tape
A tape with a magnetic surface layer on which data can be stored by
magnetic recording.
Glossary
J-11
MAP
Maintenance analysis procedure.
mask
A pattern of characters that controls the retention or elimination of portions

of another pattern of characters. To use a pattern of characters to control
the retention or elimination of portions of another pattern of characters.
master file
A file that is used as an authority in a job and that is relatively permanent,
even though its contents might change. Synonymous with main file.
Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU)
The size of the largest packet that a network protocol can transmit.
MB
Megabyte (expressed as data rate in MB/s or MB/second).
media capacity
The amount of data that can be contained on a storage medium, expressed
in bytes of data.
media-type identifier
Pertaining to the bar code on the bar code label of the IBM Ultrium Tape
Cartridge, a 2-character code, L1, that represents information about the
cartridge. L identifies the cartridge as one that can be read by devices that
incorporate LTO technology; 1 indicates that it is the first generation of its
type.
mega
One million of.
meter In the Metric System, the basic unit of length; equal to approximately 39.37
inches.
MIB
Management Information Base. Information repository that is used by

SNMP.
micro One millionth of.

microcode
(1) One or more micro instructions. (2) A code, representing the
instructions of an instruction set, which is implemented in a part of storage
that is not program-addressable. (3) To design, write, and test one or more
micro instructions. (4) See also microprogram.
microdiagnostic routine
A program that runs under the control of a supervisor, usually to identify
field replaceable units.
microdiagnostic utility
A program that is run by the customer engineer to test the machine.
microinstruction
A basic or elementary machine instruction.
microprogram
A group of microinstructions that when run performs a planned function.
The term microprogram represents a dynamic arrangement or selection of
one or more groups of microinstructions for execution to perform a
particular function. The term microcode represents microinstructions that
are used in a product as an alternative to hard-wired circuitry to
implement certain functions of a processor or other system component.
J-12
MIM
Media information message.
mm
Millimeter.
modifier
That which changes the meaning.
mount a device
To assign an I/O device with a request to the operator.
MP
Microprocessor.
ms
Millisecond.
MSG
Message.
multipath
Pertaining to using more than one path.
N
N/A
Not applicable.
Network Address Translation (NAT)

NAT involves rewriting the source or destination addresses of IP packets
as they pass through a router or firewall. Most systems that use NAT do so
to enable multiple hosts on a private network to access the Internet over a
single public IP address.
NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
node
In a network, a point at which one or more functional units connect

channels or data circuits.
NTP
Network Time Protocol. This protocol allows the library to set its internal
date and time that is based on the date and time of a server.
NVS
Nonvolatile storage. A storage device whose contents are not lost when
power is cut off.
O
oersted
The unit of magnetic field strength in the unrationalized
centimeter-gram-second (cgs) electromagnetic system. The oersted is the
magnetic field strength in the interior of an elongated, uniformly wound
solenoid that is excited with a linear current density in its winding of`1
abampere per 4 centimeters of axial length.
offline
Pertaining to the operation of a functional unit without the continual
control of a computer. Contrast with online.
online Pertaining to the operation of a functional unit that is under the continual
control of a computer. Contrast with offline.
OPER Operation.
ov
Over voltage.
overrun
Loss of data because a receiving device is unable to accept data at the rate
it is transmitted.
overtightening
To tighten too much.
Glossary
J-13
P
parameter
A variable that is given a constant value for a specified application and
that might denote the application.
p bit
Parity bit.
PC
Parity check.
PCC
Power control compartment.
PDF
Portable Document Format.
PE
Parity error. Product engineer.
PFS
Perfect forward secrecy.
pick
Pertaining to the library, to remove, by using a robotic device, a tape

cartridge from a storage slot or drive.
picker A robotic mechanism that is located inside the library that moves
cartridges between the cartridge storage slots and the drive.
PM
Preventive maintenance.
POR
Power-on reset.
port
A physical connection for communication between the 3590 and the host
processor. The 3590 has 2 SCSI ports.
Portable Document Format (PDF)

A standard that is specified by Adobe Systems, Incorporated, for the
electronic distribution of documents. PDF files are compact, can be
distributed globally (by way of email, the web, intranets, or CD-ROM), and
can be viewed with the Acrobat Reader, which is software from Adobe
Systems that can be downloaded at no cost from the Adobe Systems home
page.
Private key
A cryptographic key that is used to decrypt a message.
PROM
Programmable read only memory.
PS
Power supply.
PTF
Program temporary fix. A single bugfix or group of bugfixes that are

distributed in a form ready to install for customers.
PWR
Power.
R
rack
A unit that houses the components of a storage subsystem, such as the

library.
rackmount kit
A packaged collection of articles that are used to install the rack mounted
version of the library.
RAM
Random access memory.
Random access memory

A storage device into which data is entered and from which data is
retrieved in a nonsequential manner.
J-14
RAS
Reliability, availability, and serviceability.
record A collection of related data or words, which are treated as a unit.

recording density
The number of bits in a single linear track measured per unit of length of
the recording medium.
recoverable error
An error condition that allows continued execution of a program.
ref
Reference.
reg
Register.
reinventory
To inventory again.
retension
The process or function of tightening the tape onto the cartridge, if it is
sensed that the tape has a loose wrap on the cartridge.
RFC (Request for Comments)
Request for Comments (RFC) documents are a series of memoranda, which
encompasses new research, innovations, and methodologies applicable to
Internet technologies.
RH
Relative humidity.
RID tag
Repair identification tag.
RML
Rack Mount Line.
robot
Picker.
robotics
Picker assembly.
root CA certification
In cryptography, a root certificate from a certificate authority (CA).
RPQ
Request for price quotation.
RSA key
Encryption key type.
R/W
read/write.
S
s
Seconds of time.
SAC
Service Action Code. Code that is developed to indicate possible FRU or

FRUs to replace to repair the hardware.
SAN
Storage area network.
SAS
Serial Attached SCSI. A computer bus technology and serial

communication protocol for direct attached storage devices. SAS is a
replacement for parallel SCSI with higher speeds, but still utilizing SCSI
commands.
scratch cartridge
A data cartridge that contains no useful data, but can be written to with
new data.
Glossary
J-15
SCD
Single Character Display.
SCSI
Small computer system interface.
SE
Single-ended.
segment
A part.
sel
Select.
Serial Attached SCSI (SAS)

A drive with a SAS interface can be linked directly to controllers. SAS is a
performance improvement over traditional SCSI because SAS enables
multiple devices (up to 128) of different sizes and types to be connected
simultaneously with thinner and longer cables. It supports full-duplex
signal transmission up to 3 Gb/s. In addition, SAS drives can be
hot-plugged.
serialize
To change from parallel-by-byte to serial-by-bit.
serializer
A device that converts a space distribution of simultaneous states, which
represents data into a corresponding time sequence of states.
servo, servos
An adjective for use in qualifying some part or aspect of a
servomechanism.
servomechanism
A feedback control system in which at least one of the system signals
represents mechanical motion.
signature
A digital signature that is used in cryptography to identify one party to
ensure authenticity.
slot blocker
A slot blocker is used to restrict/close off a data cell so a data cartridge
cannot be inserted.
Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI)
A standard that is used by computer manufacturers for attaching
peripheral devices (such as tape drives, hard disks, CD-ROM players,
printers, and scanners) to computers (servers). Pronounced scuzzy.
Variations of the SCSI interface provide for faster data transmission rates
than standard serial and parallel ports (up to 320 megabytes per second).
The variations include:
v Fast/Wide SCSI: Uses a 16-bit bus, and supports data rates of up to 20
MBps.
v SCSI-1: Uses an 8-bit bus, and supports data rates of 4 MBps.
v SCSI-2: Same as SCSI-1, but uses a 50-pin connector instead of a 25-pin
connector, and supports multiple devices.
v Ultra SCSI: Uses an 8- or 16-bit bus, and supports data rates of 20 or 40
MBps.
v Ultra2 SCSI: Uses an 8- or 16-bit bus and supports data rates of 40 or 80
MBps.
v Ultra3 SCSI: Uses a 16-bit bus and supports data rates of 80 or 160
MBps.
J-16
v Ultra160 SCSI: Uses a 16-bit bus and supports data rates of 80 or 160
MBps.
v Ultra320 SCSI: Uses a 16-bit bus and supports data rates of 320 MBps.
SME
SMI-S See Storage Management Initiative Specification (SMI-S).

SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. SMTP is a standard for email transmissions
across the internet.
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol. SNMP is used by network
management systems to monitor network-attached devices for conditions
that warrant administrative attention.
SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol. Used to synchronize the clocks of
network-attached devices.
SMW Servo Manufacturer's Word.
SNS
Sense.
special feature
A feature that can be ordered to enhance the capability, storage capacity, or
performance of a product, but is not essential for its basic work.
SPI
Security Parameters Index.
SR
Service representative, see also CE.
SRAM
Static random access memory.
SS
Status store.
SSL (Secure Sockets Layer)

A set of cryptographic protocols for secure communications on the Internet
for such things as web browsing, email, Internet faxing, instant messaging,
and other data transfer. SSL allows applications to communicate across a
network in a way that is designed to prevent eavesdropping, tampering,
and message forgery.
SSP
Serial SCSI Protocol.
ST
Store.
standard feature
The significant design elements of a product that are included as part of
the fundamental product.
START
Start maintenance.
StartTLS
Secure LDAP communication that uses TLS.
Storage Management Initiative Specification (SMI-S)
A storage standard that is developed and maintained by the Storage
Networking Industry Association (SNIA). It is also ratified as an ISO
standard. The main objective of SMI-S is to enable broad interoperable
management of heterogeneous storage vendor systems.
subsystem
A secondary or subordinate system, capable of operating independently of,
or asynchronously with, a controlling system.
Glossary
J-17
SUPP Support.
sync
Synchronous, synchronize. Occurring with a regular or predictable time

relationship.
System-managed encryption
Tape encryption is set up implicitly through the IBM device driver.
T
tachometer, tach
A device that emits pulses that are used to measure/check speed or
distance.
tape cartridge
A container that holds magnetic tape, that can be processed without
separating it from the container.
tape void
An area in the tape in which no signal can be detected.
TCP/IP
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol.
TCU
Tape control unit.
TH
Thermal.
thread/load operation
A procedure that places tape along the tape path.
TM
Tapemark.
transport mode
End-to-end communications security in which the end-point computers do
the security processing.
trusted certification
In cryptography, a trustworthy certificate that is not registered with a
certificate authority.
tunnel mode
Port-to-port communications security in which security is provided to
several machines by a single node.
U
UART Universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter.
UL
Underwriter's Laboratories.
unload
Prepare the tape cartridge for removal from the drive.
utilities
Utility programs.
utility programs
A computer program in general support of the processes of a computer; for
instance, a diagnostic program.
uv
J-18
Under voltage.
V
VOLSER
Volume serial number.
volume
A certain portion of data, together with its data carrier, that can be handled
conveniently as a unit.
VPD
Vital product data. The information that is contained within the tape drive
that requires nonvolatile storage that is used by functional areas of the
drive, and information that is required for manufacturing, RAS, and
engineering.
W
word
A character string that is convenient for some purpose to consider as an

entity.
World Wide Node Name (WWNN)

A unique character string which identifies Fibre Channel Host Bus
adapters (HBA).
WORM
Write Once Read Many.
Write
Write command.
WT
World trade.
WWCID
Worldwide Cartridge Identifier.
WWN Worldwide Name.
WWNN
Worldwide Node Name.
WWPN
Worldwide port name.
X
XR
External register.
XRA
External register address register.
Glossary
J-19
J-20
Index
A
Access PIN, Operator Control
Panel 5-25
accessibility
keyboard H-1
repeat rate of up and down
buttons H-1
shortcut keys H-1
accessor 1-5
Accessor A-1
accessory package 4-2
active slots 5-20, 5-44
Active Slots 4-22
air quality 4-2
air vents, front panel 1-1
AME 5-47
Application Managed Encryption
(AME) 4-25
ASC D-1
ASCQ D-1
Authentication Header (AH) 5-53
auto clean 5-20, 5-44
Auto Clean 4-22
B
Bar code labels 6-5
guidelines for using 6-7
ordering 6-22
bar code reader 1-5
bootcode firmware, current level 5-33
BOP 5-38
Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) 1-6
C
cable, host interface 4-14
Cartridge 1-10, 6-1
capacity scaling 6-1, 6-3
cleaning 6-4
compatibility 6-3
data 6-1
disposal of 6-19
leader pin 6-12
memory chip 6-5
ordering 6-20
proper handling 6-8
specifications 6-18
write-protect switch 6-7
cartridge magazines 1-1, 4-37, A-1
Cartridge, environment 6-10
cartridge, suspect 2-2
cartridges
inserting in library 4-41
populating library 4-41
Cartridges, insert and remove 5-78
Cartridges, repairing A-2
channel calibration 1-9
choosing a location 4-2
clean drive 5-69
cleaning slot 5-79

clearance 4-2
Configure menu
network settings 4-19
configuring library using Web User
Interface 4-18
configuring the library 4-17
control keys 5-7
control path drive 5-34, 5-50
control path failover 3-2, 5-46
control paths 5-23
multiple 3-2
multiple paths for iSeries and
as/400 3-2
using multiple for control path
failover 3-2
Encryption 1-5, 4-25

environment 1-13
operating 1-13
particulates 1-13
environmental specifications 1-11
Error codes 8-1
Error LEDs 7-8
Error log 8-1
errors
obtaining from library and
drives E-1
System p E-1
errpt command, using E-1
Ethernet Port 1-3
Export media 5-17, 5-42
Export Media 4-41, 5-78
daisy-chaining 3-10
Data Cartridge 5-78
data transfer rate 1-6
DCS 5-79
dedicated cleaning slot B-2
default settings 5-26
description 1-1
desktop installation 4-1
Device drivers supported 1-14
DHCP 4-19, 4-29, 5-24, 5-52
Diagnostics 5-72
display contrast 5-31
dll 7-13
Drive
power management 1-10
speed matching 1-9
drive configuration 5-50
Drive Density 5-38
Drive Diagnostics 5-30, 5-72
drive dump, saving to host 5-72
drive firmware, current version 5-34
drive interface 5-23
Drive Log 5-71
drive serial number 5-34
drive sled
description 1-8
drive status 5-38
drive, clean 5-69
factory default settings 5-26

fan vents 1-3
feature activation key 5-46
features
optional
drives 1-8
Feedback
Comments
sending iv
sending iv
Fibre Channel 3-7
Fibre Channel interface
cables and speeds 3-11
connectors and adapters 3-12
persistent binding 3-7
sharing on a SAN 3-12
zoning 3-11
fibre channel interposer 4-16
Fibre Channel ports 3-10
Firmware
updating
using ITDT Tool 9-3
firmware, upgrade 5-74
foot pads, installing 4-3
front panel components 1-1
E
EC 5-14
ED 5-14
EKM 4-25
EKM Server Setting 4-25
element addresses 3-3, B-2, B-3
element addressing B-1
element types B-1
Encapsulation Security Payload
(ESP) 5-53
G
Gateway address 4-19
Gateway Address 4-29, 5-24, 5-52
glossary J-1
H
hazards, possible xx
Host Attachment 7-13
host bus adapter 3-7
host connection, verifying 4-36
host interface cable 4-14
host interface connectors 1-3
host interfaces 3-7
X-1
host preparation 4-36

hp-ux system error information E-5
humidity 4-2
I
I/O station 1-1, 4-37, 5-78
I/O station, configuring 5-79
I/O station, open and close 5-79
identifying a suspect cartridge 1-1, 2-2
Import media 5-17, 5-42
Import Media 4-41, 5-78
installation 4-1
rack
safety xxii
Interface 7-13
interfaces 3-7
interfaces, supported 1-8
internal view of library A-1
Internet Key Exchange (IKE) 5-53
Internet Protocol (IP) 5-53
Internet Protocol Security (IPSec) 5-53
Internet Protocol version 4 1-6
Internet Protocol version 6 1-6
interposer, fibre channel 4-16
Inventory 5-14, 5-43
IP address 4-19, 5-33, 5-53
IP Address 4-29, 5-24, 5-52
IP Stack 5-24
IPv4 1-6
IPv6 1-6
ITDT Tool 9-3
K
Key Path 5-38
keyboard H-1
5-73
L
Labels
bar code 6-5
guidelines for using 6-7
ordering 6-22
laser
compliance xxi
safety xxi
LED, amber 7-14
LEDs 2-2, 7-8
LEDs, front panel 1-1
library configuration form G-1
Library Controller Board A-1
library firmware, current level 5-33
library logs 5-70
library mode 4-22, 5-20, 5-33, 5-44
library name 5-44
library network configuration 4-29, 5-52
library recovery 7-7
library SNMP configuration 4-34, 5-67
library status 5-37
Library Verify 5-29
library weight 1-11
license activation key 4-25, 5-28
Link-local IPv6 address 5-10
LME 5-47
X-2
locating the library 4-2

logical libraries 4-24, 5-18, 5-45
determining number 3-1
basic guidelines 3-1
using multiple for sharing 3-2
logical libraries, assigning 4-24
logs 5-70
low voltage differential (LVD) SCSI
interface 1-8
low-power mode 1-10
LUN 3-7
LUN scanning 3-7
LVD SCSI interface 1-8
packaging materials 4-2

partitioning 3-3, 4-24, B-3
partitioning your 4U library 5-45
path failover 4-25, 5-28
physical specifications 1-11
power button 1-1, 2-4
power connector 1-3
power ON display 2-2
power source 4-2
power specifications 1-11
power supply A-1
Power Supply Problem 7-8
product ID 5-33
PTF 7-13
M
MAC Address 1-6
magazines 1-1, 4-37, A-1
Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU)
media 1-10
Media 6-1
media capacity 1-1
menu shortcuts 5-1
menu tree
Operator Control Panel 5-9
Menus
Configure
MIB 1-6, C-1
Monitor menu
Drive 5-12
Library 5-10
Move media 5-17, 5-42
Move Media 4-41
Multiple control paths 3-2
1-6
Quiesce
5-73
R
rack installation 4-1, 4-5
safety xxii
rack mounting the library 4-5
rack requirements 4-2
RAID controllers 3-7
Read/Write capability 6-3
rear panel of library 1-3
Remove/replace procedures 10-1
reserve slot, active slot 5-79
Reserved Slots 4-22
RFC (Request for Comments) 1-6
Router assigned IPv6 address 5-10
N
Navigation 5-7
Netmask 4-19
Network Address Translation (NAT)
network configuration 5-24
Network Mask 4-29, 5-24, 5-52
S
1-6
O
OCP 4-35
ON/OFF power button 2-4
operating systems supported 1-13
operation specifications 1-11
Access PIN 5-25
Configure: Save/Restore 5-26
control keys on front panel 1-1
display 1-1
menu tree 5-9
Monitor menu
Drive 5-12
Library 5-10
power ON display 2-2
Operator Control Panel menus
Configure: Drive 5-23
Configure: Library 5-20
Ordering Media
Ordering WORM cartridges 6-3
safety information
laser compliance xxi
laser safety xxi
possible hazards xx
SAS interface 3-10
screens displayed at power ON 2-2
SCSI interface 3-8
bus termination 3-10
connectors and adapters 3-10
description 1-8
multiple buses 3-9
physical characteristics 3-8
SCSI LVD 3-7, 3-10
SCSI Trade Association Web site 3-10
Security Association (SA) 5-53
sending your comments iii, iv
Sense data
using D-1
sense data, library D-1
sequential mode, starting 5-20
sequential mode, stopping 5-20
serial number 5-33
serial number, drive 5-34
Serial Port 1-3
server attachment
SCSI interface 3-8
servers supported 1-13
Sharing the library 3-1

shipment verification 4-3
shipping container 4-2
shipping label, removing and
storing 4-4
shipping lock and label storage
location 1-3
shipping lock. removing and storing 4-4
shortcut keys H-1
Simple Network Management
Protocol 1-6
sled, description of tape drive 1-8
Slot Blocker 10-9
slot physical locations B-2
SME 5-47
SNMP 1-6, 4-34, 5-52, 5-67, C-1, F-1
software supported 1-13
specifications 1-11
environmental 1-11
operation 1-11
physical 1-11
power 1-11
Specifications
cartridges 6-18
speed matching 1-9
SSL 4-29, 5-52
storage capacity 1-6
support notification iii
System p
error information E-1
T
tape cartridge 1-10
tape drive sled 1-3, A-1
Tape drives
quantity in library 1-8
speed matching 1-9
TapeAlert Flags
for drives C-3
TapeAlert Flags, library C-1
technical support iii, 9-4
Technical Support
accessing online iv
Telnet A-25
Telnet Service Port 5-32
trademarks I-3
Traps F-1
troubleshooting 7-1
V
verifying the shipment 4-3
View Drive Logs 5-71
W
Web User Interface
Configure Library: Event
Notification 5-66
Configure Library: Save/Restore 5-68
configuring library 4-18
drive information 4-28
event notification 4-33
general library information 4-22
logging on 4-21
logs and traces 4-32
user access information 4-31
Web User Interface menus
Configure Library: User Access 5-63
Web User InterfaceConfigure Library
date and time 4-32
World Wide Node Name (WWNN) 3-7
World Wide Port Name (WWPN) 3-7
worldwide node name 5-33
WORM 6-3
WORM (Write Once, Read Many) 6-3
Write Once, Read Many (see
WORM) 6-3
write-protect switch
Write Protect Switch Setting C-3
Write-Protect switch
setting 6-7
WWNN 5-33
U
Ultra160 1-6
Ultra320 1-6
Ultrium Tape Drives 1-8
unpacking the library 4-2
Updating firmware
using ITDT Tool 9-3
upgrade firmware 5-74
USB port 1-3
Index
X-3
X-4

Part Number: 12X5052
GA32-0545-13
(1P) P/N: 12X5052
Printed in USA

Spine information:
IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape

Library and TS3200 Tape Library
TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200 Tape Library Setup,

Operator, and Service Guide
Machine Type 3573

IBM TS3100 TS3200 3573 L2U Manual User Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

IBM TS3100 TS3200 3573 L2U Manual User Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

IBM TS3100 TS3200 3573 L2U Manual User Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the minimum firmware levels required for common library features?

What are the minimum firmware levels required for common library features?

What are some of the common troubleshooting steps mentioned in the document?

What are some of the common troubleshooting steps mentioned in the document?

IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200

Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library and TS3200

Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Read this first

Minimum firmware levels for common library features

Minimum Firmware Level(s) Required

Internet Protocol Security (IPsec)

Library firmware must be greater than A.40

Feature Codes 8049, 8148, and 8149 (LTO

Library firmware level must be at A.40, or

LTO 6 Tape Drive

Library firmware must be at B.50 or greater

LTO 5 Tape Drive

Library firmware must be at 9.00, or greater,

Library BCR (Bar Code Reader)

Libraries manufactured after May 2010 may

Dedicated Cleaning Slot removal

Library firmware level must be greater than

Library firmware level must be 4.0 or

Key Path Diagnostics

Copyright IBM Corp. 2007, 2013

Library firmware level must be greater than

Table 1. Minimum firmware levels for common library features (continued)

Minimum Firmware Level(s) Required

Path Failover (for one activation key for

LTO 4 Tape Drives: No minimum level of

Secure Socket Layer (SSL) over Encryption

Library firmware must be 6.3 or higher

Accessing online technical support

Registering for My Notification

Sending us your comments

Contacting IBM technical support

Read this first

Copyright IBM Corp. 2007, 2013

Table 6. Information added to the GA32-0545-09 edition

Summary of changes . . . . . . . . vii

Chapter 2. User interfaces . . . . . . 2-1

Web User Interface. . . . . . . .

Chapter 3. Installation planning . . . . 3-1

Chapter 4. Installation and

Chapter 5. Operations . . . . . . . . 5-1

Chapter 6. Ultrium media

Chapter 8. Error codes

Chapter 9. Service procedures . . . . 9-1

Chapter 10. Check, adjust, remove,

Chapter 11. Optional features,

Full-high drive: No apparent failure or damage to

Appendix F. SNMP status MIB

Appendix G. Library Configuration

Appendix B. SCSI element types, SCSI

Appendix C. TapeAlert flags . . . . . C-1

Appendix D. Sense data . . . . . . . D-1

Appendix E. Message retrieval at the

Appendix H. Accessibility . . . . . . H-1

Front panel of a 2U library . . . . . . 1-1